Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Permit M19-0049 - SHASTA BEVERAGES - RELOCATE CAN LINE ONE
SHASTA BEVERAGE, INC 1227 ANDOVER PARK E M19-0049 C Parcel No: Address: ~^ «x lF ^°"^0 v~U~ u Tukwila Department Development 63OUSouthcenterBoulevard, Suite #lOD Tukwila, Washington gB18B Phone; 206'431'3670 Inspection Request Line: 2D6-438'g35O Web site: http:/Iwww.TukwilaWA.gov MECHANICAL PERMIT 3523049072 Permit Number: K419'0049 Project Name: SHASTA BEVERAGE, INC Issue Date: 4/29/2019 Permit Expires On: 10/26/2019 Owner: Name: NATIONAL BEVERAGE CORP 81005VV10THST5TE4008' PLANTATION, WA, 33324 Contact Person: Name: DAV|DKEMLE Address; l9l60}NA|KDKSW, 5EATTLE WA, 98116 Contractor: Name: OWNER AFFIDAVIT ON FILE Address: License No: Lender: Name: "I ''' Phone: Expiration Date: DESCRIPTION OpWORK: RELOCATE AN EXISTING CAN LINE ONE WITH DE PALLETIZER, PALLETIZER, PALLET LOADERS, CONVEYORS ETC AND CONNECT BACK TO EXISTING FILLERS AND BOTTLING LINE. EXISTING CAN LINE ONE WAS PREVIOUSLY PERMITTED.Valuation of Work: $125,000,00 Type ofWork: REPLACEMENT Fuel type: GAS Fees Collected: $1,736.20 Electrical Service Provided by: PUGETSOUND ENERGY Water District: TUKVV|LA Sewer District: TUKWILA Current Codes adopted by the City of Tukwila: International Building Code Edition: International Residential Code Edition: International Mechanical Code Edition: Uniform Plumbing Code Edition: international Fuel Gas Code: ized Signature; National Electrical Code: WA Cities Electrical Code: vYACZg6-46B: VVxState Energy Code: Dau6r: 2017 2017 2017 2015 I hearby certify that I have read and examined this permit and know the same to be true and correct, All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of any other state orlocal laws regulating construction orthe performance nfwork, |amauthorized tusign and obtain this development permit and agree tnthe conditions attached tothis permit, Signature:����~^�__ Print Name: wJ^�r'0 Dat :-Z��^ `e*J This permit shall become null and void if the work is not commenced within 180 days for the date of issuance, or if the work is suspended orabandoned for aperiod ofl8Odays from the last inspection. PERMIT CONDITIONS: 1: Ail permits, inspection record card and approved construction documents shall bekept atthe site ofwork and shall be open to inspection by the Building Inspector until final inspection approval is granted. 2: Manufacturers installation instructions shall be available on the job site at the time of inspection. PERMIT INSPECTIONS REQUIRED Permit Inspection Line. (ZO6)438-935V 1400 FIRE FINAL lDOO MECHANICAL FINAL 0701 ROUGH'|NN1E[MAm|[Ai CITY OF TUKWILA Community Development Department Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 http://wwwTukwilaWA.gov Mechanical Permit No. Project No. Date Application Accepted: 3 ‘,1 7 - / Date Application Expires: 9 2- 7 / ef (For office use only) 00 - MECHANICAL PERMIT APPLICATION Applications and plans must be complete in order to be accepted for plan review. Applications will not be accepted through the mail or by fax. **please print** SITE LOCATION 352304-9072 King Co Assessor's Tax No.: 1227 Andover Park East 1 Site Address: Suite Number: Floor: Tenant Name; Shasta Beverage Inc PROPERTY OWNER Name: Shasta Beverage Inc Address: 1227 Andover Park East City: Tukwila State: WA Zip: 98188 CONTACT PERSON — person receiving all project communication Name: David Kehle, Architect Address: 1916 Bonair Dr SW City: Seattle State: WA Zip: 981'16 Phone: 206-433-8997 Fax: 206-246-8369 Email: dkehle@dkehlearch.com New Tenant El Yes ..No MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR INFORMATION Company Name: Property Owner Address: 1227 Andover Park East City: Tukwila State: WA Zip: 98118 Phone: 206-575-0525 : Contr Reg No.: Exp Date: Tukwila Business License No.: Valuation of project (contractor's bid price): $ 125,000 Describe the scope of work in detail: Relocate an existing can line one with de palletizer, palletizer, pallet loaders, conveyors etc and connect back to existing fillers, and bottling line. Existing can line one was previously perrnitted. Use: Residential: New Replacement 0 Commercial: New ..... Replacement VI Fuel Type: Electric Gas Other: H: Applications \ Fomts-Applications On Linc\2016 ApplicalionsIMechanical Permit Application Revised 1-4-16.doex Revised: January 2016 bh Page 1 of 2 Mailing Address: 1916 Bonair Dr SW Indicate type of mechanical work being installed and the quantity below: Unit Type Qty Furnace <100k btu Furnace >IOOk btu Floor furnace Suspended/wall/floor mounted heater Appliance vent Repair or addition to heat/refrig/cooling system Air handling unit <10,000 cfm Unit Type Qty Air handling unit >10,000 cfm Evaporator cooler Ventilation fan connected to single duct Ventilation system Hood and duct Incinerator — domestic Incinerator — comm/industrial Unit Type Qty Fire damper Diffuser Thermostat Wood/gas stove Emergency generator Other mechanical equipment Boiler/Compressor Qty 0-3 hp/100,000 btu 3-15 hp/500,000 btu 15-30 hp/1,000,000 btu 30-50 hp/1,750,000 btu 50+ hp/1,750,000 btu Noise: Mechanical units need to be in compliance with the Tukwila Noise Code. Maximum permissible sound levels are based on from where the sound is created and where the sound is heard. Additionally, if sound can be heard from within a house at night in a residential zone it may not be allowed. For more details, see TMC 8.22 District of Sound Producing Source District of Receiving Property Residential, Daytime* Residential, Nighttime Commercial Industrial Residential 55 dB(A) 45 dB(A) 57 dB(A) 60 dB(A) Commercial 57 dB(A) 47 dB(A) 60 dB(A) 65 dB(A) Industrial 60 dB(A) 50 dB(A) 65 dB(A) 70 dB(A) *Daytime means 7AM-10PM, Monday through Friday and 8AM-10PM, Saturday, Sunday and S A few sounds are exempt from the noise code, including: • Warning devices; • Construction and property maintenance during the daytime hours (lam-1 Opm); • Testing of backup generators during the day. zed holidays. PERMIT APPLICATION NOTES - Value of construction — in all cases, a value of construction amount should be entered by the applicant. This figure will be reviewed and is subject to possible revision by the permit center to comply with current fee schedules. Expiration of plan review — applications for which no permit is issued within 180 days following the date of application shall expire by limitation. The building official may grant one extension of time for additional periods not to exceed 90 days each. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. Section 105.3.2 International Building Code (current edition). I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO BE TRUE UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON, AND I AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT. BUILDING OWNER QfR AUTiOIExi AGENT: Signature: Date: 03-27-19 Print Name: David Kehle Day Telephone: 206-433-8997 Seattle City WA State 98116 Zip H:Wpplicationslfo*ms-Applications On Lint \20I6 Applications\Mechanical P Revised: January 2016 bh Application Revised I-4-16.docx Page 2 of 2 DESCRIPTIONS ACCOUNT QUANTITY ; PAID PermitTRAK $1,265.31 E119-0260 Address: 1227 ANDOVER PARK E Apn: 3523049072 $765.48 Credit Card Fee $22.30 Credit Card Fee R000.369.908.00.00 0,00 $22.30 ELECTRICAL $743.18 PLAN CHECK FEE R000.345.832.00.00 0.00 $743.18 IVI19-0048 Address: 1.227 ANDOVER PARK E Apn: 3523049072 $157.90 Credit Card Fee $4.60 Credit Card Fee R000.369.908.00.00 0.00 $4.60 MECHANICAL $153.30 PLAN CHECK FEE R000.322.102.00.00 0.00 $153.30 M19-0049 Address: 1227 ANDOVER PARK E Apn: 23049072 $341.93 Credit Card Fee $9.96 Credit Card Fee R000.369.908.00.00 0.00 , $9.96 MECHANICAL $331.97 PLAN CHECK FEE R000.322.102.00.00 0.00 $331.97 TOTAL FEES PAID BY RECEIPT: R17259 -: $1,265,31 Date Paid: Wednesday, March 27, 2019 Paid By: NICHOLAS HEATON Pay Method: CREDIT CARD 027862 Printed: Wednesday, March 27, 2019 11:11 AM 1 of 1 SYSTEMS Cash Register Receipt City of Tukwila DESCRIPTIONS PermitTRAK ACCOUNT QUANTITY PAID $19,038.05 D19-0094 Address: 1227 ANDOVER PARK E Apn: 3523049072 $346.97 DEVELOPMENT $334.37 PERMIT FEE R000.322.100,00,00 0.00 $252.03 WASHINGTON STATE SURCHARGE B640.237.114 0.00 $25.00 STRUCTURAL CONSULTANT R000.345.830.01.00 0.00 $57.34 TECHNOLOGY FEE $12.60 TECHNOLOGY FEE R000.322.900.04.00 0.00 $12,60 D19-0099 Address: 1227 ANDOVER PARK E Apn: 3523049072 $2,645.01 DEVELOPMENT $2,519.37 PERMIT FEE R000.322.100.00.00 0.00 $2,512.87 WASHINGTON STATE SURCHARGE B640.237.114 0.00 $6.50 TECHNOLOGY FEE $125.64 TECHNOLOGY FEE R000.322.900.04.00 0.00 $125.64 D19-0100 Address: 1227 ANDOVER PARK IE Apn: 3523049072 $3,701.31 DEVELOPMENT $3,526.25 PERMIT FEE R000.322.100.00.00 0.00 $3,501.25 WASHINGTON STATE SURCHARGE B640.237.114 0.00 $25.00 TECHNOLOGY FEE $175.06 TECHNOLOGY FEE R000.322.900.04.00 0.00 $175.06 D19-0106 Address: 1227 ANDOVER PARK E Apn: 3523049072 $1,596.24 DEVELOPMENT $1,534.74 STRUCTURAL CONSULTANT R000.345.830.01.00 0.00 $279.81 PERMIT FEE R000.322.100.00.00 0.00 $1,229.93 WASHINGTON STATE SURCHARGE B640.237.114 0.00 $25.00 TECHNOLOGY FEE $61.50 TECHNOLOGY FEE R000.322.900.04.00 0.00 $61.50 D19-0112 Address: 1227 ANDOVER PARK E Apn: 3523049072 ' $289.63 DEVELOPMENT $277.03 PERMIT FEE R000.322.100.00,00 0.00 $252.03 WASHINGTON STATE SURCHARGE B640.237.114 0,00 $25.00 TECHNOLOGY FEE $12.60 TECHNOLOGY FEE 1 R000.322,900.04.00 1 0.00 $12.60 Date Paid: Wednesday, April 17, 2019 Paid By: SHASTA BEVERAGES Pay Method: CHECK 596962 Printed: Wednesday, April 17, 2019 10:33 AM 1 of 3 CR SYSTEMS Cash Register Receipt City of Tukwila DESCRIPTIONS PermitTRAK ACCOUNT QUANTITY PAID $19,038.05 EL19-0260 Address: 1227 ANDOVER PARK E Apn: 3523049072 $3,121.37 ELECTRICAL $2,972.73 PERMIT FEE MULTI-FAM/COMM R000,322.101.00.00 0.00 $2,972.73 TECHNOLOGY FEE ^,, $148.64 TECHNOLOGY FEE R000.322.900.04.00 0.00 .,,� $$1148.64 EL19-0270 Address: 1227 ANDOVER PARK E Apn 3523049072 1,808.66 ELECTRICAL $1,722.53 PERMIT FEE MULTI-FAM/COMM R000.322.101.00.00 0.00 $1,722,53 TECHNOLOGY FEE $86.13 TECHNOLOGY FEE R000.322.900.04.00 0.00 $86.13 EL19-0287 Address: 1227 ANDOVER PARK E Apn: 3523049072 $1,131.57 ELECTRICAL $1,077.69 PERMIT FEE MULTI-FAM/COMM R000.322.101.00.00 0.00 - - $1,077.69 TECHNOLOGY FEE $53.88 TECHNOLOGY FEE R000.322.900.04.00 0.00 $53.88 EL19-0310 Address: 1227 ANDOVER PARK E Apn: 3523049072 $291.08 ELECTRICAL $277.22 PERMIT FEE MULTI-FAM/COMM R000.322.101.00.00 0.00 $277.22 TECHNOLOGY FEE $13.86 TECHNOLOGY FEE R000.322.900.04.00 0.00 $13.86 M19-0048 Address: 1227 ANDOVER PARK E Apn: 3523049072 $643.84 MECHANICAL $613.18 PERMIT ISSUANCE BASE FEE R000.322.100.00.00 0.00 $33.15 PERMIT FEE R000.322.100.00.00 0 00 $580.03 TECHNOLOGY FEE $30.66 TECHNOLOGY FEE R000.322.900.04.00 0.00' $30.66 M19-0049 Address: 1227 ANDOVER PARK E Apn: 3523049072 $1,394.27 MECHANICAL $1,327.88 PERMIT ISSUANCE BASE FEE R000.322.100.00.00 0.00 $33.15 PERMIT FEE R000.322.100.00.00 0.00 $1,294.73 TECHNOLOGY FEE $66.39 TECHNOLOGY FEE R000.322.900.04.00 0.00 $66.39 Date Paid: Wednesday, April 17, 2019 Paid By: SHASTA BEVERAGES Pay Method: CHECK 596962 Printed: Wednesday, April 17, 2019 10:33 AM 2 of 3 SYSTEMS Receipt Number DESCRIPTIONS PermitTRAK ACCOUNT I QUANTITY PAID $19,038.05 M19-0052 Address: 1227 ANDOVER PARK E Apn: 3523049072 $791.37 MECHANICAL $753.69 PERMIT ISSUANCE BASE FEE R000.322.100.00.00 0.00 $33.15 PERMIT FEE R000.322.100.00.00 0.00 $720.54 TECHNOLOGY FEE $37.68 TECHNOLOGY FEE R000.322.900.04.00 0.00 $37.68 M19-0057 Address: 1227 ANDOVER PARK E Apn: 3523049072 $590.03 MECHANICAL $561.93 PERMIT ISSUANCE BASE FEE R000.322,100.00.00 0.00 $33.15 PERMIT FEE R000.322.100.00.00 0.00 $528.78 TECHNOLOGY FEE $28.10 TECHNOLOGY FEE R000.322,900.04,00 0.00 $28.10 PG19-0049 Address: 1227 ANDOVER PARK E Apn: 3523049072 $344.40 PLUMBING $328.00 PERMIT FEE R000.322.100.00.00 0.00 $293.00 PERMIT ISSUANCE BASE FEE R000.322.100.00.00 0.00 $35.00 TECHNOLOGY FEE $16.40 TECHNOLOGY FEE R000.322.900.04.00 0.00 $16.40 PG19-0052 Address 1227 ANDOVER PARK E Apn 3523049072 $342.30 GAS $103.00 PERMIT ISSUANCE BASE FEE R000.322.100.00.00 0.00 $35.00 PERMIT FEE R000.322.100.00.00 0.00 $68.00 PLUMBING $223.00 PERMIT FEE R000.322.100.00.00 0.00 $188.00 PERMIT ISSUANCE BASE FEE R000.322.100.00.00 0.00 $35.00 TECHNOLOGY FEE $16.30 TECHNOLOGY FEE TOTAL FEES PAID BY RECEIPT: R17421 R000.322.900.04.00 0,00 $16.30 $19,038.05 Date Paid: Wednesday, April 17, 2019 Paid By: SHASTA BEVERAGES Pay Method: CHECK 596962 Printed: Wednesday, April 17, 2019 10:33 AM 3 of 3 YSTE COTUKWILA ETRAKIT 5200 5OUTH[ENTER 8LVD TUKWILA' NA 98188 286-433-I870 CITY OF TUKWILA Date: 03/27/2019 II:10:17 AM CREDIT CARD SALE VISA CARD NUMBER: **********9037 K TRAN AMOUNT: *I'265.3I APPROVAL CD: 027862 RECORD #: 008 CLERK ID: kandace Thank you! Customer Copy INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Pro e Type of nspection: .gerAiebet".9 ef,/) - Address: if P l'• Date Called: Special uc n : 63 Date Wanted: a.m. p.m. Requester: Ph ne No: Approved per applicable codes. ElCorrections required prior to appcoval. COMMENT - iiN, t it:Z- Ve i:4E) / DING- / ri REINSPECT ON FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection. fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspectiort. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Project: Type of Inspection: Rix)64+ .--IN VA 4fl-AJICAL 4k5T Address: Date Called: 0 Special Instructions: 4R4E2/DC,1"-TrZ CliA) Dr pi , JET! ZER Date Wanted: p.m. , Requester: Z.XA PAZT- 4.2Z1/1-04 .1, ce.Adv< - Phone No: 15q Approved per applicable codesCOMMENTS: Corrections required prior to approval. Inspector: REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection. fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. Geotechnical Engineering, Construction Inspection & Materials Testing PROPRIETARY ANCHOR MECHANICAL INSPECTION REPORT Job Number: 19-0191h Report Number: 394644 Project: Shasta - Filling Room Client: Shasta Beverages Inc. Address: 1227 Andover Park East, Tukwila Inspector: Gary Byrne Permit Number: Pending = Address: 1227 Andover Park East, Tukwila Date: 5/2/2019 Description/Location: Anchoring of tanks 1-9, catwalks and stairs Intended Use: Anchorage of tanks, stairs and catwalks ‘..., . Building Code & Year: IBC 2015 Anchor Style: Ei Expansion 0 Screw 0 Sleeve 0 Drop In Anchor Size & Quantity: 1/2" (113) ESR Number: 3187 Anchor Manufacturer: Hilti Anchor Type: KB-TZ Hole Diameter: %" Hole Depth: 4 1/4" Required Embedment: 3 %" Anchor Length: 5" Concrete Thickness: 5" Concrete Strength: Existing Base Material: 0 Normal Weight Concrete 0 Light Weight Concrete 0 CMU 0 Brick 0 Composite Deck Hole Cleaning: 0 Compressed AIr (21 Hand Pump 0 Other: Drill Bit (ANSI B212.15): lEi Yes 0 No ORA Torque Wrench ID: 6107 Torque: 40 ft-Ibs Weather: Indoors Ambient Temperature: 65° Reference Standard(s) Used: Copies to: x Client x Engineer x Owner Contractor x Architect X Building Dept. Others Comments Conforms X Does Not Conform RECEIVEU CITY OF TUKWILA MAY 2 3 2019 PERMIT CENTER Technical Responsibility: Isaac Ruoff, Project Manager This report applies only to the Items tested or reported and is the exclusive property of Otto Rosenau & Associates, Inc. Reproduction of this report, except In full, without written permission from our firm is strictly prohibited. Page 1 of 1 6747 M.L. King Way S., Seattle, Washington 98118 - Phone (206) 725-4600 or 1-888-OTTO-4-US - Fax (206) 723-2221 Form No.: ADMIN-87-02(Rev 05/13) OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. Geotechnical Engineering, Construction Inspection & Materials Testing Report Number: 394643 Project: Address: Client CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION REPORT Shasta - Filling Room 1227 Andover Park East, Tukwila Shasta Beverages Inc. Permit Number: Job Number: 19-0191h Client Address: (0,11-00Liq 1227 Andover Park East, Tukwila e -- Inapect ns Performed - _ , - Steel Decking Other (specify): Structural Steel Fabrication Structural Steel Erection Inspector - - and Date Gary Byrne 5/2/2019 Remarks ORA inspector was on site to visually inspect the welding of the added stainless -steel angles and anchor plates to the tank legs. The added leg supports on tanks 1-5 & 9 have been completed. Welder, Justin B. Staton, WABO# W12462 Expires 11/1/19, welded the plates to the equipment feet using SMAW process with 308/308L electrode. All weldments completed this day were inspected visually and found to be acceptable as per AWS D1.1 table 6.1. Conforms Copies to: X Client X Engineer X Owner Contractor X Architect X Building Dept. Others Technical Responsibility: RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWIL MAY 1 7 2019 PERMIT CENTER c Ruoff, Project Manager This report applies only to the Items tested or reported and Is the exclusive property of Otto Rosenau & Associates, Inc. Reproduction of this report, except in full, without written permission from our firm Is strictly prohibited. Page 1 of 1 6747 M.L. King Way S„ Seattle, Washington 98118 - Phone (206) 725-4600 or 1-888-OTTO-4-US - Fax (206) 723-2221 Form No.: ADMIN-63-05 (Rev 10/10) OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. Geotechnical Engineering, Construction Inspection & Materials Testing Report Number: 394483 Project: Address: Client: CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION REPORT Shasta — Filling Room 1227 Andover Park East, Tukwila Shasta Beverages Inc. Permit Number: Job Number: Client Address: 19-0191h 1227 Andover Park East, Tukwila Inspections Pe ormed Steel Decking Other (specify): Structural Steel Fabrication Structural Steel Erection Inspector and Date Remarks Gary Byrne On site to visually inspect the welding of the added stainless -steel angles and anchor plates to the 4/30/2019 tank legs. The added leg supports on tanks #6 and #8 have been completed and the remaining legs for tanks 1-5 and 9 are still in progress. Welder, Justin B. Staton, WABO# W12462 Expires 11/1/19, welded the plates to the equipment feet using SMAW process with 308L electrode. All weldments completed this day were inspected visually and found to be acceptable as per AWS D1.1 table 6.1. Conforms Copies to: X Client X Engineer X Owner Contractor X Architect X Building Dept, Others Technical Responsibility: RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILt MAY 1 6 2 PERMIT CF. NTER Isaac Ruoff, Project Manager This report applies only to the items tested or reported and is the exclusive property of Otto Rosenau & Associates, Inc. Reproduction of this report, except in full, without written permission from our firm is strictly prohibited. Page 1 of 1 6747 M.L. King Way S., Seattle, Washington 98118 — Phone (206) 725-4600 or 1-888-OTTO-4-US — Fax (206) 723-2221 Form No.: ADMIN-63-05 (Rev 10/10) OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. Geotechnical Engineering, Construction Inspection & Materials Testing Report Number: 394483 Project: Address: Client: CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION REPORT Shasta — Filling Room 1227 Andover Park East, Tukwila Shasta Beverages Inc. Permit Number: Job Number: 19-0191h Client Address: 1227 Andover Park East, P.:kwila Inspections Performed Steel Decking Other (specify): Structural Steel Fabrication Struc;ural Steel Erection X Inspector and Date Remarks Gary Byrne 4/30/2019 On site to visually inspect the welding of the added stainless -steel angles and anchor plates to the tank legs. The added leg supports on tanks #6 and #8 have been completed and the ret laining legs for tanks 1-5 and 9 are still in progress. Welder, Justin B. Staton, WABO# W12462 Expires 11/1/19, welded the plates to the eqi,!ipment feet using SMAW process with 308L electrode. All weldments completed this day were inspected visually and found to be acceptable a-7 per AWS D1.1 table 6.1. Conforms RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAY 1 4 2019 PERMIT CENTER Copiez to: X Client X Engineer Others X Owner Contractor Technical Responsibility: X Architect X Building Dept. lsiac Ruoff, Project Manager This report applies only to the items tested or reported and is the exclusive property of Otto Rosenau & Associates, Inc. Reproduction of this report, except in full, without written permission from our firm is strictly prohibited, Page 1 of 1 6747 M.L. King Way S., Seattle, Washington 98118 — Phone (206) 725-4600 or 1-888-OTTO-4-US — Fax (206) 723-2221 Form No.: ADMIN-63-05 (Rev 10/10) March 12, 2019 Shasta Beverages, Inc 1227 Andover Park East Tukwila, Washington 98188-3906 VC. it ... • ' CODE CC: • ." ANCE APPI1GVZO APR 25 2'319 City of Tukwila UILDING DIVISION Attn: Mr. Nickolas D. Heaton Plant Manager P: 206-575-0525 Email: nheaton(@shastabeverabes.com Re: Limited Machine Guarding Survey Shasta Beverages, Inc. 1227 Andover Park East Tukwila, Washington 98188-3906 Terracon Project No. 81197132 Dear Mr. Heaton: 1 L_ lrerracon m ootiq RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAR 2 7 2019 r ----A3ERMIT CENTER Terracon Consultants, Inc. (Terracon) conducted a limited machine safeguarding assessment at the Shasta Beverages, Inc. bottling facility located at 1227 Andover Park East in Tukwila, Washington. The survey was requested by Mr. Nicholas Heaton, Plant Manager, and was conducted by Ms. Kathie A. Lavaty, Senior Industrial Hygienist with Terracon, on March 8, 2019. A. PROJECT INFORMATION Shasta Beverages, Inc. (Client), requested that Terracon conduct a machine safeguarding survey of recently installed or recently relocated product packaging equipment at the soft drink bottling facility located at 1227 Andover Park East in Tukwila, Washington. The objective of this survey was to evaluate compliance with applicable Washington State Labor and Industries, Division of Occupational Safety and Health requirements for machine safety for specific pieces of equipment. Terracon understands that the Tukwila Shasta Beverage facility is currently conducting a plant -wide facility upgrade, including redesign of product packaging lines, and installation of new and relocation of existing packaging equipment. Mr. Jason Bruce, Maintenance Manager, provided information about and access to equipment included in this survey and operated this equipment, as needed, to verify correct operation of safeguards. B. REGULATORY OVERVIEW Washington State Labor and Industries (L841), Division of Occupational Safety and Health (DOSH) rule Washington Administrative Code (WAC) 296-806, Safety Standards for Machine 1 Machine Guarding Survey Shasta Beverages, Inc. r Tukwila, Washington March 12, 2019 Terracon Project No. 81197132 lrerracon Safety, establishes employer requirements for installation and use of machine safeguards to reduce or control machine hazards. C. SURVEY METHODS Terracon, under the escort and assistance of Mr. Jason Bruce, Maintenance Manager, visually surveyed specific pieces of canned soft drink packaging equipment included in the scope of this survey. A Machine Guarding checklist, provided in an attachment to this report, was used to organize and document survey findings. The general facility was not operating at the time of this survey; however, Mr. Bruce operated specific pieces of equipment, as necessary, to establish proper functioning of safeguards included in the survey. D. SURVEY FINDINGS The following equipment was included in the scope of this survey: • Empty Can Depalletize and Overhead Can Conveyor • Full -Case Conveyor Upstream of Kister Kayat machine, Case Conveyor to Spiral, Spiral • Kister Kayat Shrink-wrap Packager • Overhead Case Conveyor, Palletizer, Wulftech Wrapper Survey checklists and photos are provided at the end of this letter report. Terracon organized the survey based on function and proximity of equipment. In each case, the client provided information about the equipment purpose and operation methods. The client operated the equipment to allow Terracon to observe correct functioning of equipment safeguards, such as proximity sensors, light curtains and emergency stops, as the equipment is currently installed. The machine guarding checklist for each equipment location is provided as an attachment to this report and discussed below. 1. Empty Can Depalletizer and Overhead Can Conveyor Pallets of empty 12-ounce aluminum beverage cans are placed onto the Depalletizer, where the cans are separated and transferred via an overhead cable -driven conveyor to the bottling room (not included in this survey). Prior to entering the Depalletizer mechanism, the cans are raised from the floor on a hydraulically powered platform to the point of operation, where rollers carry the cans into the Depalletizer. The rollers are operated by a chain drive that is covered on three side from the operator's position by a permanent sheet metal guard; however, it is feasible to access the rear drive sprocket of the drive by reaching around and under the guard (see Checklist and Photo 1, attached). 2. Full -Case Conveyor Upstream of Kister Kayat machine, Case Conveyor to Spiral, Spiral The full -case conveyor upstream of the Kister Kayat machine transfers filled 24-can cases to the Palletizer by diverting full cases from the Kister Kayat machine conveyor directly to the Palletizer. No items or issues were identified with this equipment; the checklist is attached. Responsive c Resourceful c Reliable 2 Machine Guarding Survey Shasta Beverages, Inc. n Tukwila, Washington March 12, 2019 CI Terracon Project No. 81197132 3. Kister Kayat Shrink-wrap Packager, Adjacent Conveyor lierracon This equipment was recently relocated to its current location. Filled 6- or 12-can packs are conveyed to the Kister Kayat shrink-wrap packager, where they are shrink-wrapped inside an enclosed "oven" at approximately 450°F. Permanent guarding with proximity sensors is installed at the in -running side of the packager and the oven. Product is conveyed at the discharge side of the Kister Kayat shrink-wrap packager oven onto another conveyor for final packaging and it is at this intersection that a narrow portion of the Kister Kayat product conveyor is exposed, creating a potential entanglement hazard (see checklist and Photo 2 attached). 4. Overhead Case Conveyor, Palletizer, Wulftech Wrapper The overhead case conveyor transfers filled 24-can cases to the Palletizers, where they move onto a hydraulic lift table that collects cases into a pallet -size grouping before lowering the collected product onto a conveyor for transfer to a robotic Wulftech wrapper, which wraps pallets of product for shipping. The discharge end of the palletizer is equipped with a floating window that allows the safety light curtain to sense the movement of product toward the light curtain to allow momentary operation as the product passes through the light curtain to the Wrapper. No items or issues were identified with this equipment; the checklist is attached. E. CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS Terracon identified potential entanglement hazards at the input to the Empty Can Depalletizer and Overhead Can Conveyor and at the discharge from the Shrink-wrap oven discharge/transfer point. In addition to the machine guarding issues, Terracon identified a gap above the walkway at the elevated Depalletizer and Overhead Can Conveyor Operators' platform, where objects could potentially fall from the walkway to work areas below. The following recommendations are offered: Empty Can Depalletizer and Overhead Can Conveyor • Install a guard or barrier at the rear drive sprocket on the North (Operator's) side, upstream of the Depalletizer. • Install kick plate along full length of north and south sides of elevated Operator's platform. Kister Kayat Shrink-wrap Packager, Adiacent Conveyor • Install a guard or barrier at the intersection of the Kister Kayat wrapper discharge and downstream conveyor. If additional equipment is installed or relocated as part of this plant -wide facility upgrade, Shasta should perform machine safeguarding surveys for that equipment prior to starting normal operation. Responsive :: Resourceful r Reliable 3 Machine Guarding Survey Shasta Beverages, Inc. Tukwila, Washington March 12, 2019 :: Terracon Project No. 81197132 F. COMMENTS lrerracon Terracon performed this targeted machine guarding/machine safety survey in accordance with generally accepted occupational safety standards of care exercised by reputable occupational safety and health consulting firms in Seattle at the time of the assessment. This report does not represent all conditions at the subject site as it only reflects the information gathered from specific areas at the time of our assessment. Observation and/or evaluation of other areas was not within the scope of Terracon's work and was not performed. This report was prepared pursuant to the contract Terracon has with the client. Unauthorized reliance on or use of this report, including any of its information or conclusions, will be at third party's risk. For the same reasons, no warranties or representations, express or implied in this report, are made to any such third party. Terracon appreciates the opportunity to provide services to you. If we can provide any additional environmental, occupational health, or safety -related services, please contact Kathie Lavaty at 425-697-1124. Sincerely, Terracon Consultants, Inc. ._..11‹.41""11.1:41W11111.7 Kathie A Lavaty, CIH, CSP Senior Industrial Hygienist Attachment: Machine Guarding Checklists sh Bo , CIH, CSP enior Industrial Hygienist Responsive ri Resourceful n Reliable 4 Shasta Bottling, Tukwila Washington Machine Guarding Assessment Checklist 3/8/2019 Overhead Case Convevor, Palletizer, Wulftech Wrapper Requirements for All Locations Is there a point -of operation guard? Are all belts or chain drives fully enclosed by guard? Are all gears, sprockets, pullies or fly -wheels fully enclosed by guards? Are all rotating set screws, key ways or collars fully enclosed by guard? Are all rotating parts, reciprocating or traverse motions fully enclosed by guards? Are all in -running nip point hazards fully guarded for the entire length of the nip? X Are all parts that can entangle, draw -in or trap an operators clothing or hair fully x guarded? _ Are all hazards created by high pressure gas or fluid properly guarded or isolated from the work area? X lierracon Y N NA -r- X X X X X Do all openings providing access to danger -areas of 1/4 inch or greater size properly _guarded? Are there warning labels, color-codingor markings to show hazardous areas? Hazard and Machine Controls Are the on/off or start/stop switches separate, not a "toggle -style" switch, are push- button and/or mushroom head style? Are they color coded green for start, red for stop? Are starting and stopping controls within easy reach of the operator? If there is more than one operator, are separate controls provided? Are emeNency stop buttons, wires or bars provided? Are the emergency stops clearly identified?__ Requirements for All Existing Safeguards Do the safeguards prevent workershands, arms and other body parts from making contact with dangerous moving parts? X X Are the safeguards firmly secured to the machine? Are the safeguards tamper -resistant and difficult to remove or bypass? Do the safeguards permit safe, comfortable and relatively easy operation of the machine? Are the guards free of hazardous projections, unfinished surfaces, weld splatter, or any other shaft) edge? Do the safeguards ensure that no objects will fall into the moving parts? Can the machine be lubricated without removing the safeguard? _ Is there a procedure for shutting down and locking/tagging out the machine before safeguards are removed? Are the lockout/tagout points labeled and identified? Are existing safeguards adequate to keep safe all personnel from hazards associated with normal machine operations and possible malfunction? Is there a more practical or effective safeguard? Will this machine "fail safe" if one or more utilities are impeded or removed? Will this machine "fail safe" if sensors, interlocks or operational components fail? X X X X X Shasta Bottling, Tukwila Washington lrerracon Machine Guarding Assessment Checklist 3/8/2019 Discussion: Are the lockout/tagout points labeled and identified? Energy isolation (lockout/tagout) points are not currently labeled, however, the client reported to Terracon that they are in the process of developing lockout/tagout procedures with photos of isolation points, as well as labels at those points on the equipment Shasta Bottling, Tukwila Washington Machine Guarding Assessment Checklist Full -Case Conveyor Upstream of Kister-Kavat Requirements for All Locations Is there a point -of operation guard? Are all belts or chain drives fully enclosed by guard? Are all gears, sprockets, pullies or fly -wheels fully enclosed by guards? Are all rotating set screws, key wa_y_s or collars fullyenclosed by guard? Are all rotating_parts, reciprocating or traverse motions fully enclosed byguards? _ Are all in -running nip point hazards fully guarded for the entire length of the nip? lierracon Y T X X X X X X 3/ 8/2019 N NA Are all parts that can entangle, draw -in or trap an operator's clothing or hair fully x guarded? Are all hazards created by high pressure gas or fluid properly guarded or isolated from the work area? Do all openings providing access to danger -areas of 1/4 inch or greater size properly guarded? Are there warning labels, color -coding or markings to show hazardous areas? Hazard and Machine Controls Are the on/off or start/stop switches separate, not a "toggle -style" switch, are push- 1x button and/or mushroom head style? Are they color codedgreen for start, red for stop? X Are starting and stopping controls within easy reach of the operator? X If there is more than one operator, are separate controls provided? X Are emergency stop buttons, wires or bars provided? X Are the emergency stops clearly identified? X _ Requirements for All Existing Safeguards Do the safeguards prevent workers' hands, arms and other body parts from making contact with dangerous moving parts? X Are the safeguards firmly secured to the machine? Are the safeguards tamper -resistant and difficult to remove or bypass? Do the safeguards permit safe, comfortable and relatively easy operation of the machine? x x_ X Are the guards free of hazardous projections, unfinished surfaces, weld splatter, or any x other sharp edge? Do the safeguards ensure that no objects will fall into the movingparts? X Can the machine be lubricated without removing the safeguard? X Is there a procedure for shutting down and locking/tagging out the machine before x safeguards are removed? Are the lockout/tagout points labeled and identified? Are existing safeguards adequate to keep safe all personnel from hazards associated X with normal machine operations and possible malfunction? Is there a more practical or effective safeguard? X _ Will this machine "fail safe" if one or more utilities are impeded or removed? X X Will this machine "fail safe" if sensors, interlocks or operational components fail? X Shasta Bottling, Tukwila Washington Machine Guarding Assessment Checklist lierracon 3/ 8/2019 Discussion: Are the lockout/tagout points labeled and identified? • Energy isolation (lockout/tagout) points are not currently labeled, however, the client reported to Terracon that they are in the process of developing lockout/tagout procedures with photos of isolation points, as well as labels at those points on the equipment /\ Shasta Bottling, Tukwila Washington Machine Guarding Assessment Checklist Kis% rKavat Shrinkmrap Packaner. Case Convevorto Spiral, Spiral Requirements for All Locations_____ |othere apoint-of operation guard? Are all belts or chain drives fully enclosed by guard? X / Are all gears, sprockets, puUienorfly+mhmols fully enclosed byguards? i X . Are all rotating set screws, key ways orcollars fuUvenclosed bvguard? _. _ _X . Are all rotating parts, reciprocating or traverse motions fully enclosed by guards? X . -Are {all in -running nip point hazardsfully guarded for the entire mfthe niP? Are all parts that can anton0|m, draw -in or trap on operator's clothing orhair fully '�uan1ed? Are all hazards created byhigh pressure gas or fluid properly guarded or isolated from ' /X. the work area? | Do all openings providing access to danger -areas of % inch or greater size properly Quardedy_ ControlsAre there warning labels, color -coding or markings to show hazardous areas? X Hazard and Machine 310RN2019 X X , ^ Are the on/off mrstart/stop switches oopan»be, not a _��--�—owitch. are push- X button and/or mushroom hood ahve? ! ' Are they color coded green for start, red for stop? _ X_�__� Are starting and stopping controls within easy reach ofthe operator? i X . If there is more than one operator, are separate controls provided? X Are emergency stop buttons, wires orbors X Are the emergency stops clearly identified? l X Requirements for All Existing Safeguards Duthe safeguards prevent workers' handm arms . ��contact with dangerous moving parts? � Are the safeguards machine? X ���ecured to the machine? _------- _ _X Are the safeguards tamper -resistant and difficult to remove orbpmsn7 X Do the safeguards permit oafe, comfortable and relatively easy operation of the Are the guards free of hazardous projections, unfinished surfaces, weld splatter, or any X other sharp edge? + � , Dnthe safeguards ensure that noobjects will fall into the moving pads? X Can the machine bmlubricated without removing the safeguard? Is there m procedure for shutting down and locking/tagging out the machine before X safeguards are removed? Are the |ookout/ta0outpoints labeled and identified? , X . Are existing safeguards adequate to keep safe all personnel from hazards associated X � with normal machine operations and possible malfunction? . . |nthere amore practical oreffective safeguard? Will this machine "fail safe" ifone ormore utilities are impeded orremoved? Will this machine "fail safe" ifsensorsinterlocks , cvoperational components fail? _ X � 7 \ 7 's\ Shasta Bottling, Tukwila Washington Machine Guarding Assessment Checklist 3/08/2019 Discussion: Are all parts that can entangle, draw -in or trap an operator's clothing or hair fully guarded? Do all openings providing access to danger -areas of 'A inch or greater size properly guarded? L Case conveyor downstream of Kister-Kayat discharge is not as wide as the previous conveyor, exposing approximately 3 inches on either side of rotating equipment at intersecting point- Install side guard to prevent possible entanglement. Are the lockout/tagout points labeled and identified? r_-] Energy isolation (lockout/tagout) points are not currently labeled, however, the client reported to Terracon that they are in the process of developing lockout/tagout procedures with photos of isolation points, as well as labels at those points on the equipment. Photo 2 Possible entariglementpoint, either side of conveyor at intersection with shrink wrap machine �\ Shasta Bottling, Tukwila Washington Machine Guarding Assessment Checklist Overhead Case Convevor. Palletizer, Wulftech Wrapper Irerracon emwnts&or All Locations 3/8/2019 N NA -- ----- - --' ----'- ----------'--'-- -' -T--' ksthere opoi nt-ofoperation guend? -- � | - Are all belts orchain drives fully enclosed hvguard? X Are all gears, nononkets.puUie fly -wheels fully_en� ,ds? Are all rotating set screws, key v��morcoUasfu|�yandosedbvounrd? Are all rotating parts, reciprocating ortraverse motions fully enclosed byguards? X Are m|_hn'runningT' point hazards fully �uaodedYor�h�endr��ng�ofthe ni ? X ^ _ Are all parts that can mntang{e, draw -in or trap an operators clothing or hair fully guarded? Are all hazards created by high pressure gas or fluid properly guarded or isolated from the work area? Do all openings providing access to danger -areas of 1/4inch or greater size properly guarded? X Are there warning labels, color -coding or markirIgs to show hazardous areas? X �o����Mm�h��m�� � � Are the onloffmstart/stop switches separate, not a^toggle-style" switch, are push- button and/or mushroom head style? Are they color coded green for start, red for stop? Are starting and stopping controls within easy reach ofthe operator? |fthere immore than one operator, are separate controls provided? Are emergency stop buttons, wires orbars provided? Are the emergency stops clearly identified? Requirements for All Existing Safeguards X -- `- .Are the points labeled and identified? Are existing oa/oQuordo adequate to keep safe all personnel from hazards ��^�~_�^ �����'��� ����� ��~���_ � � �_,_�, � _�����w*,v�ou/nw,nm/w�xnm�op�r�vonwanopoos�mmnxuncuonr Is there m more proodom| or effective smfoquavd? Will this machine 'fail safe" ifone ormore utilities are impeded orremoved? X Will this machine "fail safe" if sensors, interlocks or operational components fail? % Shasta Bottling, Tukwila Washington Machine Guarding Assessment Checklist 3/8/2019 lierracon Discussion: Are the lockout/tagout points labeled and identified? — Energy isolation (lockout/tagout) points are not currently labeled, however, the client reported to Terracon that they are in the process of developing lockout/tagout procedures with photos of isolation points, as well as labels at those points on the equipment I 1 L OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. PROPRIETARY ANCHOR MECHANICAL INSPECTION REPORT Job Number: . _ Permit Number: kdoptgegivogiomppiiiiljimainiggisollyingrag00' Wi'elatialgiq' ' fr-,211;ki: Stilii4Mtgiateggiaif '*'4 ' :, % Project Cele-1 Client Address: /07.,„) ?4Q/,eritk iiet <7, Ai :pertractor: Inspector. I / Date: ,„, A ,f,,I., .• "., "1 .i.,!, 'i.. f , <--e -le, Ve rc'lly -1 A 7 zl P e. r hal 75. ,, e r fel '11...,-,-sc f.ne: •-/ 4-) c --.4 /21-* 7/5 r',..--tie . i/i'& ..11OC har4 4 ' ie P7/,va ••••? I 5 - i ,fr./fie. /1.) e, 4,2,-1,-- 7 ,.. Intended Use: to .. „,:).- . , ` i. s4r11., BulidingCode Y r: i • '.7 ,tt71 l'f,1 .1 mr4i,;:-• ,v ol. Jr g. „;irsAto,d;‘,.' ; i i EV. ':711 IFSEZIEEN! Anchor Style: Expansion 0 Screw.Sleeve 0 Drop In Mchor Sizeu n : ....) ESR Number: 9 Anchor Manufacturer ,./// 77 __... Anchor Type: /.<- clr; _7z Hole Diameter: . t Hole Depth: 6 44 lle, 0,/, Required Embedment: Anchor Length: „),- ,,e Concrete Thickness: / A Concrete Strength: N / A Base Material: Narmat Welght Concrete 0 Light Weight Concrete 0 CMU El Brick 0 Composite Deck Hole Cleaning: 0 CompressedAir El Hand Pump 0 0ther. it /1J/(1. k. Drill Bit (ANSI B212.15): 0 Yes 0 No ORA Torque Wrench ID: K1, Weatherher . Ambient Temperature: -14 for ?•fx r ...> . lia7 IR' q''' ii;! IL ,, . , a :.• a r'"1.3' : :4 't ,.. , A,- , .. - ,:,-.,‘ ,,, . 71 1 P • , , ,i;41.. . • fEA 4;1 " 1 ' • ' 7.7.77i i 1 4:: .i,ziVh J VA IA Is this a re -Inspection? Inspected by: Start Time: c.. F CI Yes - Original In vectionAPPROVED APR 2 5 2019 City of Tukwila BUILDINGvial3VIZION Ish Time: • This report applies only to the Items tested or reported and Is the exclusive property of Otto Roseneu & Associates, Inc. Reproduction of this report, except In full, without written permission from our firm is strictly prohibited. RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAR 2 7 2019 c-3ERMIT CENTER Page of 6747 M.L. King Way S., Seattle, Washington 98118 - Phone (206)725-4600 or 1-888-OTTO-4-US - Fax (206) 723-2221 Form No.: INSP-87-02 (Rev 05/13) ,r15 r SHUTLER CONSULTING ENGINEERS, INC. \- 12503 Bel -Red Road, Suite 100, Bellevue, WA 98005 * (425) 450-4075 * FAX (425) 450-4076 March 20, 2019 Art Hanrehan Shasta Beverage Inc. 1227 Andover Park East Tukwila, WA *- CODE CC:• ILANCE APPROVED APR 2 5 2019 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION Re: Structural Review of Building and Equipment Shasta Beverage Inc. Dear Art, RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAR 2 7 2019 r fL ! LA PERMIT CENTER LiLJ1iTi We have been asked to review the state of the building and the equipment in the building to deteimine its conformance with the 2015 International Existing Building Code adopted by the City of Tukwila. The intent of this review is to identify items do not meet code and to determine a plan for bringing the deficient items into conformance. The Existing Building The existing building was constructed in two phases. The original building was constructed about 1967 and an addition was made on the north side in 2010. We have copies of the structural plans for the buildings. Both sections consist of a panelized roof system using plywood/osb sheathing, 2x stiffeners at 24" o.c., wood purlins and glulam beams or steel joists and steel girders. All of the perimeter walls are tilt -up concrete. The columns are steel pipes in the older section and tube steel in the newer section. The foundation for the building is conventional spread and strip footings for both section. From our review of the original drawings the building is adequate to support the gravity, wind, and seismic loads. Equipment in the Building This building is used to produce canned soda. There are a series of existing production lines that were in use when the building was shut down. There was also construction work taking place for the creation of a new production line as well as additional structures inside the building. The existing lines consist of 'Can Line 1', 'Bottling Line', and 'Variety Pack Line". These consist of a series of equipment types that are supported by the slab -on -grade. The concrete slab and underlying soil are adequate to support the weight of the equipment. Some of the equipment items are attached to the concrete slab using anchors, but some are not. In reviewing the anchors it appears that the installed anchors (Wej-It brand) are not approved for use in cracked concrete, so are not appropriate for high seismic areas. The existing anchors shall be torqued to the load recommended in the general notes for the anchor size. This will give us some confidence in their capacity for a short time horizon, but these anchors will need to be replaced with approved anchors and special inspection will be required for their installation with a period of four months. 2. There are existing work platforms and catwalks that are elevated above the concrete slab. Some of them are attached to the equipment and some are independent of the equipment. We have checked fthe design of the e7K .ng catwalks for a live load of 40 psf a ound them to be acceptable. Existing anchors to the slab shall be checked and replaced in accordance with item 1 above. There are storage tanks installed in this building. Most of the tanks are attached to the concrete slab, but some are not. The existing anchors will need to be checked and replaced in accordance with item 1 above. The tanks that are not anchored will need to be checked for seismic loads and connections designed to tie them to the existing slab or walls. 4. There are equipment and conduit lines that are hung from the roof The attachment and bracing of these items will need to be designed to support their loads and the structural support members they are attached to will need to be verified for the additional loads. We have reviewed the current configuration of the existing systems and found that the roof structure is adequate to support these lines (when not including snow loads for a limited time period). Additional structure will need to be added to some of these existing systems to support the full roof loads with four months. 5. There are storage racks in the building. Some have been permitted and others have not. The non - permitted racks have been removed. The racks are attached to the concrete slab using expansion anchors that are not approved for use in high seismic areas and these anchors appeared to be installed only finger -tight. These anchors will need to be checked and replaced in accordance with item 1 above. 6. New openings in the existing concrete walls have been added over time. Some of this was part of the drawings for the north addition, but others appear to have been added at other times. All the openings that were not part of the original building designs will need to be verified to determine if the addition of structural steel is needed to support the loads. 7. A new production line known as Tan Line 2' was in the process of being installed. This consists of new equipment, conveyor lines, and tanks. This line and all of its associated equipment will need to be peimitted and approved before construction can continue. There are also some additional structures that were added during the Tan Line 2' work. These have been engineered by others and will need to be permitted, inspected, and approved independently of this review. We are preparing a set of structural plans for the complete building that will show the original foundations, roof framing, and wall elevations. We will include the existing and new openings in the building walls. We will also show the equipment and productions lines to make it clearer as to what has been done in the building. We will also reference the additional structures that have been designed by others. If you have any questions or need additional information, please give me a call. Sincerely, Jih Headland, PE SE Principal Job #10-23.04 19, March 2019 To Whom It May Concern: My name is Antonio Cruz with Auburn Mechanical; I am a licensed, journeyman plumber (CRUZ*AJ926M1) who has been working at the Shasta Beverage Plant at 1227 E Andover Parkway since mid January. I was recently asked, by Shasta plant management, to inspect plant plumbing and look for anything in violation of the uniform plumbing code(UPC). Before I list my findings I want to communicate that although I am a licensed journeyman plumber in the state of Washington, with over 15 years of experience in the trade, I am not a plumbing inspector. The items listed are areas of concerns, which were in plain site, I observed while walking through the factory. I did not open any walls or expose any underground piping as part of my investigation. -RD.h....A • ;:CR CODE CC::.;" LANCE APPROVED APR 2 5 2019 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION 4" PVC pumped waste lines does not have adequate hanger spacing on the horizontal piping traveling from sump PEX piping supporting the domestic water supply for the lab, lacks proper hangers and hanger spacing Waste vent termination above the lab is not properly terminated. It must either be ran outside the building or with a mechanical air admittance valve. Water heater location for the lab looks like it is to be placed on the roof area on the lab structure. There is no indication as to how the tank is to be seismically restrained. If water heater is to be placed on he roof area, since it will be above the fixtures served it must have a properly size vacuum breaker installed. Y2" copper line ran vertically on south wall is improperly supported with zip -ties Natural gas pressure regulators, on equipment, must have vent lines terminated outside the building or have vent limiters installed Domestic water connections to process equipment must have an approved backflow assembly to meet the degree of hazard if any. Vent terminations for sump must be properly terminated outside of the building. Please let me know if there are any questions or concerns regarding these findings. MA Doulci RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAR 2 7 2019 PERMIT CENTER Respectfully, Antonio Cruz di= SHUTLER 411111 • CONSULTING lum mg ENGINEERS, Inc. 12503 Bel -Red Road, Suite 100 Bellevue, Washington 98005 (425) 450-4075 FAX (425) 450-4076 JOB SHASTA TI SHEET NO. COVER OF CALCULATED BY AH DATE 3/25/2019 CHECKED BY JH DATE SCALE JOB NUMBER 10-23.04 STRUCTURAL CALCULATIONS FOR: CAN LINE ONE SHASTA TI 1227 ANDOVER PARKWAY EAST TUKWILA, WASHINGTON DESIGN CRITERIA: CODE INTERNATIONAL EXISTING BUILDING CODE 2015 ROOF LIVE LOAD 25 PSF SNOW LOAD WIND LOAD..... ............... 110 MPH ZONE, EXPOSURE `B' SEISMIC DESIGN INFORMATION: Ss = 143.2% Sds = 0.955 Si = 53.4% Sd1 = 0.534 SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY 'ID' EQUPIMENT VALUES: p - 37IF am= 275 -A • L., 4-(dvc CODE CC::.;". LANCE . APPROVED APR 2 5 2019 City of Tukwila UILDING DIVISION CI0 = 2.5 Ie 1.0 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA t41 AR 2 7 2019 PERMIT CENTER 1227 Andover Park E, Tukwila, WA 98188, USA Latitude, Longitude: 47.44307149999999, -122.25218389999998 00 Date Design Code Reference Document Risk Category Site Class 3/4/2019, 8:56:09 AM ASCE7-10 II D - Stiff Soil OSHPD ':'I aco;•l I.rne N\ ap data 02019 Google, Type Value Description SS 1.432 MCER ground motion. (for 0.2 second period) St 0.534 MCER ground motion. (for 1.0s period) SMS 1.432 Site -modified spectral acceleration value SM1 0.8 Site -modified spectral acceleration value SOS 0.955 Numeric seismic design value at 0.2 second SA Spy 0.534 Numeric seismic design value at 1.0 second SA Type Value Description SDC D Seismic design category Fa 1 Site amplification factor at 0.2 second Fv 1.5 Site amplification factor at 1.0 second PGA 0.588 MCE0 peak ground acceleration FpGA 1 Site amplification factor at PGA PGAM 0.588 Site modified peak ground acceleration TL 6 Long -period transition period in seconds SsRT 1.432 Probabilistic risk -targeted ground motion. (0.2 second) SsUH 1.509 Factored uniform -hazard (2% probability of exceedance in 50 years) spectral acceleration SsD 3.116 Factored deterministic acceleration value. (0.2 second) S1RT 0.534 Probabilistic risk -targeted ground motion. (1.0 second) Si UH 0.572 Factored uniform -hazard (2% probability of exceedance in 50 years) spectral acceleration. S1 D 0.996 Factored deterministic acceleration value. (1.0 second) PGAd 1.119 Factored deterministic acceleration value. (Peak Ground Acceleration) 0.949 Mapped value of the risk coefficient at short periods _SHUTLER _111- CONSULTING ENGINEERS, INC 12503 Bel -Red Rd., Suite 100 Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 450-4075 FAX (425) 450-4076 UIPM 3j 1 .4$CfJ R CD(2 1 •04k ut a? = a, 5 0..9 0. cis JOB `ttE}57ii SHEET NO. $ - �1 CALCULATED BY Pl iT DATE ICI 19C )i SCALE t '` C#t -Dt SE) 3 �6 9.5 5a' AnrJl&ER P ©t of TS 3 @:1 S -F (AcM pc') j 5 - I T 111It HOSZ.-S ARUi-5 go, cL OF 5 IDS SPME CIS(' Htbrt) • laoo < 0.4 55 T..P= 1,0 F 5YSTEA. PAS CSSE) 7 c..04rCG wheATY SCF 1^� g=== SHUTLER NM= CONSULTING ENGINEERS, INC 12503 Bel -Red Rd., Suite 100 Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 450-4075 JOB SHEET DATE 3/ 5/ pi) Ick OF FAX 4 4 0 0 6 % 6 T i MEMMEMMI 11111111111111 ° III / 11 IIIIIIIIIIIII 111111111111111111111111111111 111111NOWEI1111111111111 • Wommiensm‘mmismimm miimmem mu III rf MI II 1111111111111 nerapirmar ......... Ilk•10"pluorii • III qce ENE El uprimilird .....1.1..... 111 11 11111 1 1 1 II 1 II 11 III II III 11111 1 1 II 3 www.hllti.us Profis Anchor 2.8.0 Company: Specifier: Address: Phone I Fax: E-Mail; Page: Project Sub -Project I Pos. No.: Date: 3/8/2019 Specifiers comments: 1 Input data Anchor type and diameter: Kwik Bolt TZ - CS 1/2 (3 1/4) Effective embedment depth: he = 3.250 in., h, = 3.625 in. Material: Carbon Steel Evaluation Service Report: ESR-1917 Issued I Valid: 4/1/2018 5/1/2019 Proof: Design method ACI 318 / AC193 Stand-off installation: et, = 0,000 in. (no stand-off); t = 0.500 in. Anchor plate: I x l x t = 4.000 in. x 8.000 in. x 0.500 in.; (Recommended plate thickness: not calculated Profile; S shape (AISC); (L x W x T x FT) = 3.000 in. x 2.330 in. x 0.170 in. x 0.260 in. Base material: cracked concrete, 2500, fc' = 2,500 psi; h = 420,000 in. Reinforcement tension: condition B, shear: condition B; no supplemental splitting reinforcement present edge reinforcement none or < No. 4 bar Seismic loads (cat. C, D, E, or F) no R - The anchor calculation is based on a rigid baseplate assumption. Geometry [in.] & Loading [lb, in.lb] • 4, co Input data and results must be checked for agreement With the existing conditions and for plausIbiiityl PROFIS Anchor ( c ) 2(103-2009 HMI AG, FL-9494 Schaan Hiki is a registered Trademark of HiItIAQ. Schaan www.hiltl.us Company: Specifier. Address: Phone 1 Fax E-Mail: Page: Project Sub -Project I Pos. No.: Date: Pro is Anchor 18.0 2 3/8/2019 2 Load case/Resulting anchor forces Load case: Design loads Anchor reactions [lb] Tension force: (+Tension, -Compression) Anchor Tension force Shear force Shear force x Shear forcey 1 0 1,600 1,600 0 2 0 1,600 1,600 0 max. concrete compressive strain: - [%o] max. concrete compressive stress: - [Psil resulting tension force in (x/y)=(0.000/0.000): 0 [Ib] resulting compression force in (x/y)=(0.000/0.000): 0 (lb) Anchor forces are calculated based on the assumption of a rigid baseplate. 3 Tension load Load Nua [lb] Capacity 4iNn [lb] Utilization 13N = KA) Nn Status Steel Strength* N/A N/A N/A N/A Pullout Strength* N/A N/A N/A N/A Concrete Breakout Strength** N/A N/A N/A N/A * anchor having the highest loading **anchor group (anchors in tension) Input data and results must be checked for agreement with the existing conditions and for plausibilityl PROFIS Anchor ( c )2003-2009 Hilti AG, FL-9494 Schoen Hild Is a registered Trademark of Hill AG, Schaan www.hiltius ProAnchor 2.8.0 Company: Specifier. Address: Phone I Fax E-Mail: Page: Project Sub -Project 1 Pos. No.: Date: 3/8/2019 4 Shear load Load V. [lb] Capacity 0 Ve [lb] Utilization I3v = V./0 Ve Status Steel Strength1,600 3,572 45 OK Steel failure (with lever arm)* N/A N/A N/A N/A Pryout Strength*" 3,200 11,263 29 OK Concrete edge failure in direction `" N/A N/A N/A N/A " anchor having the highest loading "anchor group (relevant anchors) 4.1 Steel Strength V. = ESR value refer to ICC-ES ESR-1917 0 Vet., Vue ACI 318-08 Eq. (D-2) Variables foe [psi] 0.10 Calculations Vee [lb] 5,495 Results Vsa [lb] 5,495 4.2 Pryout Strength = kee RAN VcpgVua /kw see ACI 318-08, Part D.5.2.1, Fig. RD.5.2.1(b) AN0 = 9 h?,t 1 106,000 4) steel 0.650 Vee [lb] 3,572 ,NW ed,N XV c.N 14' ep ( Wec,N 2 eN 1.0 + 3 het ed,N = 0.7 + 0,3 n ) 1,0 1.5he C Ni = MAX ( 1.5h f CaC CaC Nb kc X 4: hleis Variables 2 het [in.] eetti [in.] 3.250 0.000 c,N ce, [In.] Icc 1.000 6.000 17 Vet, [lb] 1,600 ACI 318-08 Eq. (D-31) ACI 318-08 Eq. (D-2) ACI 318-08 Eq. (D-6) ACI 318-08 Eq. (D-9) ACI 318-08 Eq. (D-11) ACI 318-08 Eq. (D-13) ACI 318-08 Eq. (D-7) eezN [in.) 0.000 Calculations Ar." [in.2] Aryo [in.2] XV ecl,N eaN 153.56 95.06 1.000 1.000 Results Vcbg [Ib] 4) concrete Vee,t, [lb] V. [Ib] 16,090 0.700 11,263 3,200 CO fe [psi] 2,500 ed,N 1.000 11/ en,N Nb [Ib] 1.000 4,980 Input data and results must be checked for agreement with the existing conditions and for plausibility' PROFIS Anchor (c )2003-2009 Hilti AG, FL-9494 Schoen Had Is a registered Trademark ot Hilti AG, Schaan (12 _ (I, innovation ICC EVALUATION SERVICE RESELF-:CH LABS Most Widely Accepted and Trusted ICC-ES Evaluation Report ESR-1917 ICC-ES I (800) 423-6587 I (562) 699-0543 I www.icc-es.org Reissued 05/2017 This report is subject to renewal 05/2019. DIVISION: 03 00 00—CONCRETE SECTION: 03 16 00—CONCRETE ANCHORS DIVISION: 05 00 00—METALS SECTION: 05 05 19—POST-INSTALLED CONCRETE ANCHORS REPORT HOLDER: HILTI, INC. 7250 DALLAS PARKWAY, SUITE 1000' PLANO, TEXAS 75024 EVALUATION SUBJECT: HILTI KWIK BOLT TZ CARBON AND STAINLESS STEEL ANCHORS IN CRACKED AND UNCRACKED CONCRETE iccEs PMG LISTED , "2014 Recipient of Prestigious Western'Stdtes Seismic Policy Council . . (WSSPC) Award in Excellence" Wit A Subsidiary of cooEUUERNCouNct ICC-ES Evaluation Reports are not to be _construed as representing aesthetics or any other attributes not specifically addresseg nor are they to be construed as an endorsement of the subject of the report or a recommendation for its use. There is no warranty by ICC Evaluation Service, LLC, express or implied as to any finding or other matter in this report, or as to any product covered by the report. Copyright © 2018 ICC Evaluation Service, LLC. All rights reserved. Accn EDITED isoita Product Cort.tgafizin Body ESR-1917 I Most Widely Accepted and Trusted Page 6 of 17 TABLE 1A—SETTING INFORMATION (CARBON STEEL ANCHORS) SETTING INFORMATION Symbol Units Nominal anchordiameter(In.) 3/8 '/2 `/6 '4 Anchor O.D. d4 Kr, In. {mm) 0.375 (9.5) 0.5 (12.7) 0,625 (15.9) 0.75 (19.1) Nominal bit diameter du In. 3/8 1/2 5/6 1/4 Effective min. embedment he In. (mm) 11/2 (35) 2 (51) 23/4 (70) 2 (51) 31/4 (83) 31/6 (79) 4 (102) 31/4 (83) 33/4 (95) 43/4 (121) Nominal embedment h"°" in. (mm) 13 146 (46) 5 2 /16 (59) 1 3 /16 (79) 7 2 /8 (60) 5 3 /8 (91) 6A7,13 3 /18 (91) 18 (113) 3 /1e (97) 5 4 /1'6 (110) 5 5 /1e (136) Min. hole depth h5 In. (mm) 2 (51) 25/8 (87) 33/8 (86) 25/8 (67) 4 (102) 33/4 (95) 43/4 (121) 4 (102) 41/2 (114) 53/4 (146) Min. thickness of fastened par( t"r" In. (mm) 0 (0) 0 (0) 0 (0) 3/4 (19) 1/4 (6) 3/6 (9) 3/4 (19) 0 (0) 0 (0) 7/e (23) Required Installation torque T4,A ft-Ib (Nm) 25 (34) 40 (54) 60 (81) 110 (149) Min. dia. of hole in fastened part do In. (mm) 7/16 (11.1) 8/16 (14.3) 11/16 (17.5) 13/16 (20.6) Standard anchor lengthstench(mm) In. 3 (76) 33/4 (95) 5 (127) 33/4 (95) 41/2 (114) 51/2 (140) 7 (178) 43/4 (121) 6 (152) 81/2 (216) 10 (254) 51/2 (140) 7 (178) 8 (203) 10 (254) Threaded length (incl. dog point) leveed In. (mm) 11/2 (38) 2'/4 (57) 31/2 (93) 15/6 (41) 2'/e (60) 33/e (86) 47/e (124) 11/2 (38) 23/4 (70) 51/4 (133) 63/4 (171) 21/2 (63) 4 (103) 5 (128) 7 (179) Unthreaded length l'nrthr In. (mm) 11/2 (39) 21/8 (54) 3 /4 (83) 3 (77) 1The minimum thickness of the fastened part is based on use of the anchor at minimum embedment and is controlled by the length of thread. If a thinner fastening thickness Is required, increase the anchor embedment to suit. 2The notation in parenthesis is for the 2008 IBC. 3See section 4.3 for alternate installation with Hilti Safe-SetTM System consisting of the Hilti SIW-6AT-A22 Impact Wrench used together with the Hilti SI-AT-A22 Adaptive Torque Module. TABLE 1B—SETTING INFORMATION (STAINLESS STEEL ANCHORS) SETTING INFORMATION Symbol Units Nominal anchor diameter (In.) 3/6 1/2 5/e 3I4 Anchor O.D. d. Iddz In. (mm) 0.375 (9.5) 0.5 (12.7) 0.625 (15.9) 0.75 (19.1) Nominal bit diameter db4 In. 3/8 /2 5/6 3/4 Effective min. embedment har In. (mm) 2 (51) 2 (51) 31/4 (83) 31/8 (79) 4 (102) 33/4 (95) 43/4 (121) Nominal - embedment h"°m In. (mm) 25/18 (59) 23/8 (60) 35/8 (91) 35/18 (91) 47/18 (113) 45/16 (110) 55/18 (136) Min. hole depth h, In. (mm) 25/8 (67) 25/8 (67) 4 (102) 33/4 (95) 43/4 (121) 41/2 (114) 53/4 (146) Min. thickness of fastened part' fm5 In. (mm) 1/4 (6) 3/4 (19) 1/4 (6) 3/8 (9) 3/4 (19) 1/e (3) 15/8 (41) Required Installation torque Tined ft-lb (Nm) 25 (34) 40 (54) 60 (81) 110 (149) Min. dia. of hole in fastened part do In. (mm) 7/16 (11.1) 6/16 (14.3) 17/16 (17.5) 73/16 (20.6) Standard anchor lengths tench In. (mm) 3 (76) 33/4 (95) 5 (127) 33/4 (95) 41/2 (114) 51/2 (140) 7 (178) 43/4 (121) 6 (152) 81/2 (216) 10 (254) 51/2 (140) 6 (203) 10 (254) Threaded length (incl. dog point) tthread In. (mm) 7/a (22) 15/8 (41) 27/8 (73) 15/8 (41) 23/e (60) 33/8 (86) 47/8 (124) 11/2 (38) 23/4 (70) 51/4 (133) 63/4 (171) 11/2 (38) 4 (102) 6 (152) Unthreaded length 9 to e'r In. (mm) 2'/8 (54) 21/8 (54) 314 (83) 4 (102) 1The minimum thickness of the fas ened part Is based on use of the anchor at minimum embedment and is controlled by the length of thread. If a thinner fastening thickness is required, increase the anchor embedment to suit. 2The notation in parenthesis is for the 2006 IBC. 3See section 4.3 for alternate installation with Hilti Safe-SetTM System consisting of the Hilti SIW-6AT-A22 Impact Wrench used together with the Hilti SI-AT-A22 Adaptive Torque Module. ESR-1917 I Most Widely Accepted and Trusted 47-5. Page 8 of 17 TABLE 3-DESIGN INFORMATION, CARBON STEEL KB-TZ DESIGN INFORMATION Symbol Unite Nominal anchor diameter 318 1/2 8I8 314 Anchor O.D. VG (mm) (mm) 0.375 (9.5) 0.5 (12.7) 0.625 (15.9) 0.75 (19.1) Effective min. embedment' hein. (mm) 1'/2 (38) 2 (5 ) 23/4 (70) 2 (51) 31/4 (83) 31/5 (79) 4 (102) 31/4 (83) 33/4 (95) 43/4 (121) Min. member thlcknessz h in. (mm) 31/4 (83) 4 (102) 5 (127) 5 (127) 4 (102) 6 (152) 6 (152) 8 (203) 5 (127) 6 (152) 8 (203) 51!2 (140) 6 (152) 8 (203) 8 (203) Critical edge distance ck in. (mm) 6 (152) 43/8 (111) 4 (102) 41/8 (105) 51/2 (140) 41/2 (114) 71/2 (191) 6 (152) 61/2 (165) 81/4 (222) 63/4 (171) 12 (305) 10 (254) 8 (203) 9 (229) Min. edge distance In. (mm) 8 (203) 21/2 (64) 21/2 (64) 23/4 (70) 23/8 (60) 35/8 (92) 3 (83) /4 912 (241) 43/4 (121) 414 (105) for s z In. (mm) 8 (203) 5 (127) 5 (127) 53/4 (146) 53/4 (146) 61/8 (156) 57/5 (149) 5 (127) 101/2 (267) 83/8 (225) Min. anchor s pacing P 9 s in. (mm) 8 (203) 21/2 (64) 21/2 (64) 23/4 (70) 23/8 (60) 31/2 (89) 3 (76) 5 (127) 5 (127) 4 (102) force In. (mm) 8 (203) 35/8 (92) 35/8 (92) 4'/° (105) 31/2 (89) 43/4 (121) 41/4 (108) 912 (241) 91/2 (241) 73/4 (197) Mln. hole depth in concrete h, in. (mm) 2 (51) 2'/8 (67) 33/5 (86) 23/44 (67) (102) 33/4 (98) 43/4 (121) 4 (102) 41/2 (117) 53/4 (146) Min. specified yield strength fy Ib/in2 (N/mm2) 100,000 (690) 84,800 (585) 84,800 (585) 84,800 (585) Min, specified ult. strength /u,. lb/In2 (N/mm2) 125,000 (862) 106,000 (731) 106,000 (731) 106,000 (731) Effective tensile stress area A..,N In2 (mm2) 0.052 (33.6) 0.101 (65.0) 0.162 (104.6) 0.237 (152.8) Steel strength in tension N.. lb (kN) 6,500 (28.9) 10,705 (47.6) 17,170 (76.4) 25,120 (111.8) Steel strength In shear V.. lb (kN) 2,180 (9,7) 3,595 (16.0) 5,495 (24.4) 8,090 (36.0) 13,675 (60.8) Steel strength in shear, seismic' �`°'°� lb (kN) 2,180 (9.7) 2,255 (10.0) 5,495 (24.4) 7,600 (33.8) 11,745 (52.2) Pullout strength uncracked concrete' Npunm lb (kN) 2,160 (9.6) 2,515 (11.2) 4,110 (18.3) NA 5,515 (24.5) NA 9,145 (40.7) NA 8,280 (36.8) 10,680 (47.5) Pullout strength cracked concrete NP„ (kN) NA (10 1) (14 1) NA 4,915 8 NA NA Anchor category' 2 1 Effectiveness factor ku a uncracked concrete 24 Effectiveness factor k cracked concrete' 17 Y' r kunckv r 1.0 Coefficient for pryout strength, k.p 1.0 2.0 1.0 2.0 Strength reduction factor 0 for tension, steel failure modes' 0.75 Strength reduction factor 0 for shear, steel failure modes° 0.65 Strength reduction 0 factor for tension, concrete failure modes or pullout, Condition B3 0.55 0.65 Strength reduction of factor for shear, concrete failure modes, Condition B° 0.70 Axial stiffness in service Toad range70 pond lb/in. 600,000 / lb/in. 135,000. For SI: 1 inch = 25.4 mm, 1 Ibf = 4.45 N, 1 psi = 0.006895 MPa. For pound -inch units: 1 mm = 0.03937 inches. 'See Fig. 2. 2For sand -lightweight or normal -weight concrete over metal deck, see Figures 5A, 5B, 5C and 5D and Tables 5 and 6. 3See Section 4.1.8 of this report. "For ail design cases Y' , =1.0. NA (not applicable) denotes that this value does not control for design. See Section 4.1.4 of this report. 5See ACI 318-14 17.3.3 or ACI 318-11 D.4.3, as applicable. 'See ACI 318-14 17.4.2.2 or ACI 318-11 D.5.2.2, as applicable. 7For all design cases 4r°,N =1.0. The appropriate effectiveness factor for cracked concrete (k°,) or uncracked concrete (ku„,) must be used. 'The KB-TZ Is a ductile steel element as defined by ACI 318-14 2.3 or ACI 318-11 D.1, as applicable. 'For use with the load combinations of ACI 318-14 Section 5.3 or ACI 318-11 Section 9.2, as applicable. Condition B applies where supplementary reinforcement in conformance with ACI 318-14 17.3.3(c) or ACI 318-11 D.4.3(c), as applicable, is not provided, or where pullout or pryout strength governs. For cases where the presence of supplementary reinforcement can be verified, the strength reduction factors associated with Condition A may be used. t"Mean values shown, actual stiffness may vary considerably depending on concrete strength, loading and geometry of application. ___ SHUTLER 111- CONSULTING -�� ENGINEERS, INC 12503 Bel -Red Rd., Suite 100 Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 450-4075 FAX (425) 450-4076 JOB j 4- I t51-er SHEET NO. 'v �l CALCULATED BY p-i 3/5/POIl DATE SCALE OF G s 5 ___ SHUTLER M- CONSULTING WINNI ENGINEERS, INC 12503 Bel -Red Rd., Suite 100 Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 450-4075 FAX (425) 450-4076 JOB 9+ I c51—er SHEET NO. CALCULATED BY i)--4 3 / 5/p2r311 DATE OF SCALE - 1 pC. � 111111 emmillimmillo orimairrimmo III FPI II.. ttleR 111111111111111111.6 RNA• mpannow MMEMMOURIMMO mmommomum ammuommummummum immommimm immomm mimmommommo NUN 1111111111111111 MMEMMEMMIS 5- o PirThe Original Wej-It® Wedge Anchors Description The Original Wej-it Wedge Anchor has been an industry standard for over 62 years. The Original Wej-lt anchors provide "positive wedge connections" to minimize wedge loosening due to vibratory loads. Their unique design directs forces away from seams and corners. Key Features & Benefits Time -tested, proven reliability - An industry standard for over 60 years 0 Fully assembled and ready to use I Unparalleled job -site convenience - No fixture -moving required I Bolt Size is Hole Size® eases installation - Allows precision placement of equipment through pre -drilled holes Exclusive "positive wedge connections" - Minimizes wedge loosening due to vibratory loads Acceptable materials: - Normal Weight Concrete - Lightweight Concrete - Solid Masonry Applications Industrial Equipment Garage Lifts Vibratory Load Applications I Pallet Racking I Sill Plates I Machinery and Conveyors USA ENGINEERED ej-it HIGH-PERFORMANCE ANCHORS ,wedge arrow component •• -ecifications, Listin •,, rov Diameters: 1/4" - 1" Materials: Bolt: C1035 Nut, Washer, and Arrows: C1018 Finish: Zinc plating ASTM B633, Type III, SC1 Federal Specifications: - QQZ-325C, Type II, Class 3 (clear chromate added) - GSA FFS-325, Group II, Type 4, Class 1 Code Compliance: - Formerly ICC-ES Legacy Report #1821 -2000 International Building Code (IBC) - 2000 International Residential Code (IRC) - Data Test in accordance with the ICC-ES criteria for Expansion Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements (ACOI) dated April 2002. Available upon request. L1-203-857-2200. www.wejit.com Page 1 of 5 VThe Original Wej-It® Wedge Anchors Installation Information Instructions 1. Drill the hole perpendicular to the work surface. The drill bit diameter will be the same as the anchor diameter that you are installing. To assure full holding power, do not ream the hole or allow the drill to wobble. Drill the hole one anchor diameter deeper than the intended embedment of the anchor, but not closer than two anchor diameters to the bottom (opposite) surface of the concrete. 2. Clean the hole using compressed air and a nylon brush. A clean hole is necessary for proper performance. 3. Insert anchor into hole until washer rests solidly against fixture. 4. Tighten 1-1/2 to 3 turns past hand tight position but to a maximum torque as listed in the table below. NOTE: Always wear safety glasses. Follow drill manufacturer's instructions. Use only solid carbide -tipped drill bits meeting ANSI B212.15 diameter standards. Installation Data AntfigtOr tIt,,,7 <7hA Drill flitD0.4, , ea ', Length :n Mir' Embed,7,71301,0cJiir (in) ,',''''.',t1+,;rAT,L, up:',, (ft 1/4 1/4 1/2 1 8 5/16 5/16 5/8 1-1/4 15 3/8 3/8 3/4 1-1/2 25 1/2 1/2 1 2 55 5/8 5/8 1-1/4 3 95 3/4 3/4 1-1/2 3 170 7/8 7/8 1-3/4 4-1/2 250 1 1 2 5-1/2 300 Length Identification Codes 40:45.1A-ifiiiK0744;---4,.;a A 1-1/2 < 2 13 2 < 2-1/2 C 2-1/2 < 3 D 3 < 3-1/2 E 3-1/2 < 4 F 4 < 4-1/2 G 4-1/2 < 5 H 5 < 5-1/2 5-1/2 < 6 J 6 < 6-1/2 K 6-1/2 < 7 L 7 < 7-1/2 M 7-1/2 < 8 N 8 < 8-1/2 0 8-1/2 < 9 P 9 < 9-1/2 Q 9-1/2 < 10 R 10 <11 5 11 < 12 T 12 <13 3 Length Selection 4 wej-it hv: Minimum Embedment Depth t: Attached Material Thickness C: Nut Height* h: Total Anchor Length *Nut height equals anchor diameter. Page 2 of 5 44 wej-it Performance Data 5-13 The Original Wej-It® Wedge Anchors' Ultimate and Allowable Loads (lbs.) - Normal -Weight Concrete AWitlSin. PliAtil Shea ,,, ' t,0iOARSIA ,Milk l'i Ai* 2,034s3T.A, VitiiginsIGTI .„ , ire+lft0.0., asaateTAiAi 1/4 1 273 44 363 580 508 623 1090 175 1450 2320 2030 2490 1-1/8 330 44 440 580 818 623 1320 175 1760 2320 3270 2490 1-1/4 438 44 560 580 868 623 1750 175 2240 2320 3470 2490 1-1/2 465 44 620 580 868 623 1860 175 2480 2320 3470 2490 5/16 1-1/4 515 460 688 633 985 860 2060 1840 2750 2530 3940 3440 1-3/4 598 460 798 633 1115 860 2390 1840 3190 2530 4460 3440 3/8 1-1/2 720 1073 960 1303 1343 1415 2880 4290 3840 5210 5370 5660 2 755 1073 1008 1303 1410 1415 3020 4290 4030 5210 5640 5660 3-1/2 825 1073 1100 1303 1540 1415 3300 4290 4400 5210 6160 5660 4 873 1073 1163 1303 1628 1415 3490 4290 4650 5210 6510 5660 1/2 2 858 1785 1430 2688 2003 2888 3430 7140 5720 10750 8010 11550 2-1/4 870 1785 1448 2688 2028 2888 3480 7140 5790 10750 8110 11550 3-1/2 963 1785 1605 2688 2245 2888 3850 7140 6420' 10750 8980 11550 4 1083 1785 1805 2688 2525 2888 4330 7140 7220 10750 10100 11550 5 1203 1785 2005 2688 2808 2888 4810 7140 8020 10750 11230 11550 5/8 3 1680 2680 2798 3895 3915 4175 6720 10720 11190 15580 15660 16700 3-1/2 1898 2680 C76-0"..........38 4423 4175 7590 10720 12640 15580 17690 16700 3-3/4 - 2085 2680 3475 3895 4863 4175 8340 10720 13900 15580 19450 16700 4 2158 2680 3595 3895 5033 4175 8630 10720 14380 15580 20130 16700 4-3/4 2295 2680 3825 3895 5355 4175 9180 10720 15300 15580 21420 16700 3/4 3 2895 3885 4825 5250 6755 5775 11580 15540 19300 21000 27020 23100 3-1/2 3063 3885 5105 5250 7148 5775 12250 15540 20420 21000 28590 23100 4 3230 3885 5383 5250 7538 5775 12920 15540 21530 21000 30150 23100 5 3388 3885 5648 5250 7905 5775 13550 15540 22590 21000 31620 23100 7 3863 3885 6435 5250 9010 5775 15450 15540 25740 21000 36040 23100 7/8 4-1n 3818 6363 6275 8908 7180 15270 — 25450 25100 35630 28720 5-1/2 4068 — 6780 6275 9493 7180 16270 27120 25100 37970 28720 7 4250 — 7080 6275 9913 7180 17000 — 28320 25100 39650 28720 5-1/2 4090 6815 8270 9540 8925 16360 — 27260 33080 38160 35700 6 4275 7123 8270 9973 8925 17100 28490 33080 39890 35700 7 4460 — 7433 8270 10405 8925 17840 — 29730 33080 41620 35700 *Allowable load capacities are calculated using an applied safety factor of 4:1 cffi rtik r l-RF k . 5 citipAUT y wl 1_11\Es ,1-203-857-2200 • www.wejit.com Page 3 of 5 PrThe Original Wej-It® Wedge Anchors Ultimate and Allowable Loads (Ibs.) - Limestone Aggregate �xAnc or Dia , a Embed Depth ��# � `? .41. ' ble tkAIlowa J _ Ultimte, a 'renston `" Tension 'ears r. x Shear 1/4 1-1/8 283 303 1130 1210 1/4 1-314 315 303 1260 1210 5/16 1-1/4 328 303 1310 1210 5/16 2 295 303 1180 1210 3/8 1-1/4 250 305 1000 1220 3/8 4 433 305 1730 1220 1/2 1-3/4 385 753 1540 3010 1/2 6 675 753 2700 3010 *Allowable load capacities are calculated using an applied safety factor of 4:1 Ultimate and Allowable Loads ( bs.) - Unreinforced Lightweight (Idealite) TiZY ly CIvY'.` ' s. C A Anchor a �s iG-. ,ynsa ti .q i. A i +.5{ +t'IlP k tr'4b iii'? L t rw Yty• 1 Embed Depth s� i , , Allowable y € y Ulttmate . Tensions ,th ' � Shear.� � „-.. ._,��:- Tenslan #.> ,-nsion �,K t ,���,5hear 1/4 1-1/2 465 488 1860 1950 5/16 1-1/2 625 765 2500 3060 3/8 1-3/4 783 1073 3130 4290 1/2 2-1/4 1195 2458 4780 9830 5/8 2-1/2 1615. 3125 6460 12500 3/4 3-1/2 4323 4763 17290 19050 1 4-1/2 5405 7918 21620 31670 *Allowable load capacities are calculated using an applied safety factor of 4:1 Edge Distance & Spacing Anchor�pia Embed Deptfi (m) X.i�! . �, � '' Edge Dist r Regmrements (tn } I ,hFrt" Fn. !. t Spacing r Regiitrements.(m 1/4 1-1/8 1-31/32 3-15/16 1-1/2 2-5/8 5-1/4 5/16 1-1/4 2-3/16 4-3/8 1-3/4 3-1/16 6-1/8 3/8 1-1/2 2-5/8 5-1/4 4 3 6 1/2 2-1/4 3-15/16 7-7/8 5 3-3/4 7-1/2 5/8 3-1/2 6-1/8 12-1/4 4-3/4 8-5/16 16-5/8 3/4 3 5-1/4 10-1/2 7 5-1/4 10-1/2 7/8 4-1/2 7-7/8 15-3/4 7 7 14 1 5-1/2 9-5/8 19-1/4 7 7 14 Page 4 of 5 wej-it Order Information The Original Wej-It® Wedge Anchors' Original ej-lt Wedge Anchors: Zinc -Plated Carbon Steel - - - 1.4: kr.... ,f--fs4-,-- ' ziAnthdr-S'ze ' -,:..:--.5 ---:,`K-- -4...,-,...4 '','• 1413 1/4 x 1-3/4 1 1/2 100 600 1423 1/4 x 2-3/4 1 1/2 100 600 1430 1/4 x 3 1 1/2 100 600 5620 5/16 x 2 1-1/4 5/8 100 600 5630 5/16x 3 1-1/4 5/8 100 600 3820 3/8 x 2 1-1/2 3/4 100 600 3823 3/8 x 2-3/4 1-1/2 3/4 100 600 3832 3/8 x 3-1/2 1-1/2 3/4 50 300 3850 3/8 x 5 1-1/2 3/4 50 300 3860 3/8 x 6 1-1/2 3/4 50 300 1223 1/2 x 2-3/4 21 50 300 1232 1/2 x 3-1/2 2 1 50 300 1250 1/2 x 5 2 1 25 150 1260 1/2 x 6 2 1 25 150 1270 1/2 x 7 2 1 25 150 5832 5/8 x 3-1/2 3 1-1/4 25 150 5842 5/8 x 4-1/2 3 1-1/4 25 150 5850 5/8 x 5 3 1-1/4 20 120 5860 5/8 x 6 3 1-1/4 15 90 5870 5/8 x 7 3 1-1/4 15 90 3440 3/4 x 4 3 1-1/2 18 108 3450 3/4 x 5 3 1-1/2 12 72 3460 3/4 x 6 3 1-1/2 12 72 3470 3/4 x 7 3 1-1/2 10 60 3482 3/4 x 8-1/2 3 1-1/2 10 30 3410 3/4 x 10 3 1-1/2 10 30 7880 7/8 x 8 4-1/2 1-3/4 10 30 7810 7/8 x 10 4-1/2 1-3/4 10 30 7812 7/8 x 12 4-1/2 1-3/4 5 15 1080 1 x 8 5-1/2 2 10 30 1010 1 x 10 5-1/2 2 5 15 1012 1 x 12 5-1/2 2 5 15 For more information, please contact: TOGGLER® wejmit HIGH-PERFORMANCE ANCHORS' HIGH-PERFORMANCE ANCHORS Divisions of Mechanical Plastics Corp. 110 Richards Avenue • Norwalk, CT 06854 Phone: 203-857-2200 Fax: 203-857-2201 • E-mail: sales@wejit.com www.toggler.com • www.wejit.com TOGGLER logo and typeface, Wej-It• and High -Performance Anchors' are trademarks of Mechanical Plastics Corp. ©2015 Mechanical Plastics Corp. Rev, 6/15 Page 5 of 5 _M SHUTLER _II MIME 'CONSULTING -_11111.1 ENGINEERS, INC 12503 Bel -Red Rd., Suite 100 Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 450-4075 FAX (425) 450-4076 JOB 511-Kfk T ( SHEET NO. P— b CALCULATED BY A W DATE 3I►S119 OF SCALE AMIE i IIMMOMMNIMMOMEMMMO 1111 11111111111111 imms MIUMMEMINIMMM mommammom mu mm..m.m. SHUTLER 111M-11.11111.'CONSULTING ENGINEERS, INC 12503 Bel -Red Rd., Suite 100 Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 450-4075 FAX (425) 450-4076 JOB 51145111)- -1" I SHEET NO. OF CALCULATED BY Er DATE I ti SCALE • it. 11J Description : Depalletizer Catwalk Column Shutter Consulting Engineers, Inc. 12503 Bel -Red Road Suite 100 Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 450-4075 * Fax (425) 450-4076 ',10.5**MESSAP Calculations per Load Combinations Used : ASCE 7-16 NeWiljir.MaISMOMMERZSME Steel Section Name : Pipe2STD Analysis Method : Steel Stress Grade Fy : Steel Yield E: Elastic Bending Modulus Load Resistance Factor 36.0 ksi 29,000.0 ksi Project Title: Engineer: Project ID: Project Descr: Rinted: 19 MAR 2019, 7:37AM OGV:20ERCK4fEliiERC411-0t6IS tENEKAMOr83-3iiiliar Licensee SHUTLER CONSULTING ENGINEERS Overall Column Height 10.0 ft Top & Bottom Fixity Top & Bottom Pinned Brace condition for deflection (buckling) along columns : X-X (width) axis : Unbraced Length for X-X Axis buckling = 9 ft, K = 1.0 Y-Y (depth) axis : Unbraced Length for Y-Y Axis buckling = 9 ft, K = 1.0 Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Column self weight included 36.60 Ibs * Dead Load Factor AXIAL LOADS ... Axia! Load at 10.0 ft, D = 0.20, L = 2.0 k BENDING LOADS Lat. Point Load at 10.0 ft creating Mx-x, E = 0.330 k Lat. Point Load at 9.0 ft creating Mx-x, E = -0.330 k ,..:70107:graffaiWZMIN7SIZMIEggal Bending & Shear Check Results PASS Max. Axial+Bending Stress Ratio = Load Combination Location of max.above base At maximum location values are ... Pu 0.9 *Pn Mu-x 0.9 *Mn-x : 0.1887 +1.20D+L+0.20S+E+1.90H 8.993 2.284 33.048 -0.2968 1.925 Mu-y 0.0 0.9 *Mn-y 1.925 PASS Maximum Shear Stress Ratio = Load Combination Location of max.above base At maximum location values are... Vu: Applied Vn * Phi : Allowable NiSteetSePtIORPIPPeteeMOMI Pipe2STD Depth 2.380 in Diameter Wall Thick Area Weight Ycg 2.380 in 0.154 in 1.020 InA2 3.660 plf 0.000 in 0.03595 +1.20D+L+0.20S+E+1.90H 9.060 Ixx s xx a )0( Zx I yy S yy R yy 0.2970 8.262 :1 ft k k k-ft k-ft k-ft k-ft :1 ft k k Maximum Load Reactions .. Top along X-X Bottom along X-X Top along Y-Y Bottom along Y-Y Maximum Load Deflections ... Along Y-Y -0.1999 in at for load combination :E Only Along X-X 0.0 in at for load combination : 0.63 104 0.53 inA3 0.791 in 0.713 inA3 0,627 In"4 0.528 in"3 0.791 In 0.0 k 0.0 k 0.0330 k 0.0330 k 5.772ft above base 0.0ft above base 1.250 in^4 ANE Shutter Consulting Engineers, Inc. 12503 Bel -Red Road Suite 100 Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 450-4075 * Fax (425) 450.4076 Description : Catwalk Frameleplienegi- Project Title: Engineer: Project ID: Project Descr: Printed: 19 MAR 2019, 8:40AM oftWaredopyriat NERCA'10:101942bifigrifici:.19;t0;121. Licensee : SHUTLER CONSULTING ENGINEERS DotohdUon� atwalk Frame GhutlmConsulting Engineers, Inc. 125O3Bel-Red Road SuiW10U Bellevue, WA 98005 Project Title: Project ID: Project Descr: LJW Ucensee:8HUTLER CONSULTING ENGINEERS Joints... JointJoint Label Coordinates X Y ft ft XTranslational Restraint Y Translational Restraint I Z Rotational Restraint Joint Temp deg F 1 2 3 4 S 6 7 8 0 10 ii 12 13 0> 0.0 (0 1.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 9.0 11.0 20.0 20.0 20,0 19.0 (0 9.0 10.9 10 0.0 &O 10.0 10.0 10,0 0.0 &O 10,0 100 Members... Member Endpoint ^ Member Ro�a�o Co�e�v��Momb�E�o�J�n� Lubw �u"v Pmpod�Lmbe |Ju�t JJn�� LmnQ� n |End x y a (rotation) JEnd n y z (rotation) 1'2 Columns 1 2 9,000 Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixod- 1O'11 Columns 10 11 0.00 Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed 11'12 Columns 11 12 1.000 Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed 1143 Braces 11 13 1.414 Fixed Fixed Pinned Fixed Fixed Pinned 12-13 Beams 13 12 1.000 Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Pinned 2'8 Columns 2 3 1.000 Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed 24 Braces 2 4 1.414 Fixed Fixed Pinned Fixed Fixed Pinned 34 Beams 3 4 1.000 Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed 48 Beams 4 8 8800 Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed 5+6 Columns 5 G 9.000 Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixecf 6-7 Columns O 7 1.000 Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed 6-8 Braces 8 8 1.414 Fixed Fixed Pinned Fixed Fixed Pinned 8'8 8ra000 8 9 1.414 Fixed Fixed Pinned Fixed Fixed Pinned 78 Beams 8 7 1.000 Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Pinned 7Q Beams 7 Q 1.000 Fixed Fixed Pinned Fixed Fixed Fixed 943 Beams B 13 8.000 Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Member Stress Check Duta- Member UobrmmdLwnQths Slenderness Factors A]SCBending & Stability Factors. Label Lu:a ft Lu:y K:z K:y Cm Ch 1-2 0.000 0800 1.00 1.00 1800 1800 1041 8800 9,00 110 110 1,000 1.000 1142 1.000 1.000 1.00 1I0 1,000 1.000 1143 1/14 1414 1.00 1.00 1,00D 1.000 1243 1]000 1.000 1.00 1{0 1,000 1.000 23 1.00 1.000 1.00 110 1.000 1.000 24 1.414 1/14 ilW 1,00 1.000 1.000 34 1]000 1,000 1I0 1.00 1100 1.000 4-8 8,000 8,000 1,00 1.00 1880 1.000 M 0.000 9.000 1.00 1.00 1.000 1.000 6-7 1i00 1,080 1.00 1{0 1800 1.000 6-8 1/14 1/14 1.00 1l0 1800 1{00 6-8 1/14 1/14 1.00 110 1.000 1,000 7-8 1.000 1.000 180 1I0 1,00 1l00 7-9 1800 1D00 1.00 1.00 1D00 1.000 Materials... Member Label Density kcf Default Steel 1.00 29,000.00 0.000 0.000000 0.000007 Shutler Consulting Engineers, Inc. 12503 Bel -Red Road Suite 100 Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 450-4075 * Fax (425) 450-4076 Project Title: Engineer: Project ID: Project Descr: Printed: 19 MAR 2019, 8:43AM Description Catwalk Fram File „ Ktii isl diiC1OM ENERCA IStiasta ,C6', uI .16 ffi y Licensee : SHUTLER CONSULTING ENGINEERS Materials... Member Label Youngs ksi Density kcf Thermal inldegr Yield ksi Wood 1.800.00 0.035 0.000000 0.00 Wood Material Data... Wood, Not Defined, Density= 35.0pcf, FbT=1000psi, FbC=1000psi, Fv=1000psi, Ft= 1000, Fc= 400psi, E Bend XX=1800ksi, E BendMin XX= 1800ksi, E Beny YY=1800ksi, E BendMin YY=1800ksi, E Axial=1800ksi, Species= , Grade= Any, Class= Member Sections... Prop Label Group Tag Material Area Depth Width Ixx lyy C6x8.2 L2x2x3/16 Pioe4STD Beams Braces Columns Steel Steel Steel 2.390 In^2 0.7220 in^2 2.960 in^2 6.0 in 2.0 in 4.50 in 1.920 in 2.0 in 4.50 in 13.10104 0.2710 iO4 6.820 in^4 0.6870 in^4 0.2710 in^4 6.820 In^4 Joint Loads.... Note: Loads labeled "Global Y° act downward (in "-Y" direction) Joint Label Load Direction Dead Roof Live Load Magnitude Live Snow Seismic Wind Earth 3 3 7 7 12 Global X Global Y Global X Global Y Global Y 0.10 0.20 0.10 1.0 2.0 1.0 0.0550 0.0550 k k k k k StresslStrength Load Combinations ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Description Lambda 0.2*Sds* Dead Seismic Load Combination Factors Roof Live Live Snow Wind Seismic Rho Earth +1,40D+1.60H +1.20 D+0.50 Lr+1.60 L+1.60 H +1,20D+1.60L+0.50S+1.60H +1,20 D+1.60Lr+L+1.60H +1,20D+1.60Lr+0.50W+1.60H +1.20 D+L+1.60 S+1.60 H +1.20D+1,60S+0.50W+1,60H +1.20 D+0.50 Lr+L+W+1.60 H +1.20D+L+0.50S+W+1.60H +0.90D+W+1.60H +1,391 D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1.90H +0.7090D+3,0E+0.90H 0,6 0.8 0,8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 1 1 1 0.8 0.6 1.40 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 0.90 1.20 0.90 0.1910 -0.1910 0.50 1.60 1.60 1,60 1,60 0.50 1.0 1.0 0,50 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.60 1.60 0,50 0.20 0.50 0,50 1.0 1,0 1,0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 1.60 1.60 1,60 1.60 1.60 1.60 1.60 1.60 1.60 1.60 1.90 0.90 Reaction Load Combinations ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Description Dead Load Combination Factors Roof Live Live Snow Wind Seismic Earth +D+H +D+L+H +D+Lr+H +D+S+H +D+0.750Lr+0.750L+H +D+0.750L+0.750S+H +D+0.60W+H +D+0.750Lr+0,450W+H +D+0.750S+0.450W+H +0.60D+0.60W+0.60H +D+0.70E+0.60H +D+0.750L+0.750S+0.5250E++1 +0.60D+0.70E+H D Only Lr Only L Only S Only 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1,0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.60 1.0 1,0 0.60 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 0,750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 1.0 0.60 0.450 0.750 0.450 0.60 0.750 0.750 1.0 1.0 0.70 0.5250 0.70 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1,0 1,0 0,60 0.60 1.0 1.0 Lic. # : KW-06000346 Description : Shutter Consulting Engineers, Inc. 12503 Bei-Red Road Suite 100 Bellevue, WA 98005 11111.11 (425) 450-4075 * Fax (425) 450-4076 Catwalk Frame Project Title: Engineer: Project ID: Project Descr: Printed: 19 MAR 2019, 8:43AM ile%.',CADie"Aknd::ADODUMEME4C, iSfigfayan ,Software _gritENEROAtallar 201kBuil 931.8::1231ei Licensee : SHUTLER CONSULTING ENGINEERS Deflection Load Combinations ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Description Dead Load Combination Factors Roof Live Live Snow Wind Seismic Earth +D+H +D+L+H +D+Lr+H +D+S+H +D+0.750Lr40.750L+H +D+0.750L+0.750S+H +D+0.60W+H +D+0.750Lr+0.450W+H +D+0.750S+0.450W+H +0.60D+0.60W+0.60H +D+0.70E+0.60H +D+0.750L+0.750S+0.5250E+H +0.60D+0.70E+H D Only Lr Only L Onlv S Only W Only E Onlv H Only 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.60 1.0 1.0 0.60 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 1.0 1.0 0.60 0.450 0.750 0.450 0.60 0.750 0.750 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.70 0.5250 0,70 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1,0 0.60 0.60 1.0 1.0 1.0 Extreme Joint Displacements Only Load Combinations giving maximum values are listed Joint Label 1 Max 1 Min 2 Max 2 Min 3 Max 3 Min 4 Max 4 Min 5 Max 5 Min 6 Max 6 Min 7 7 8 8 Max Min Max Min X in 0.0 E Only 0.0 +D+L+H 0.1061 E Only -0.000446 +D+L+H 0.1092 E Only -0.000306 +D+L+H 0.1091 E Only -0.00030 +D+L+H 0.0 E Only 0.0 +D+0.750Lr+0.750L+H 0.1085 E Only -0.000239 +D+L+H 0.1091 E Only -0.000301 +D+L+H 0.1091 E Only -0.000302 40+1.+H Joint Displacements Y in 0.0 E Only 0.0 +D+L+H .0000690 E Only -0.001385 .000030 E Only -0.001534 +D+L+H -.0000860 +0.60D+0.60W+0.60H -0.002496 +040.750L+0.7503+0.5250E 0.0 +0.60D+0.60W+0.60H 0.0 +D+L+H 0.0 E Only -0.002766 +D+L+H 0.0 E Only -0.003073 +D+L+H 0.000224 E Only -0.002833 +D+L+H Radians .0000130 +D+1.41 -0.001308 E Only 0.0 +0.60D+0.60W+0.60H -0.000330 E Only 0.0 +0.600+0.60W+0.60H -0.000222 E Only 0.0 +0.60D+0.60W+0.60H -0.000169 E Only 0.0 +D+L+H -0.001434 E Only .0000050 +D+L+H -0.000146 E Only .0000050 +D+L+H -.0000030 E Only .0000020 E Only -.000020 2 Era Lic. # : KW-06000346 escription : Catwalk Frame Shutter Consulting Engineers, Inc. 12503 Bel -Red Road Suite 100 Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 450-4075 * Fax (425) 450-4076 Project Title: Engineer: Project ID: Project Descr: 4-33 Printed: 19 MAR 2019, 8:43AM WLAJZOAlisiliAn' d-itiOOD 5;1" RE zer. LEINER% CANDO -2018, Sul 0 ,12i13,L42 Licensee : SHUTLER CONSULTING ENGINEERS Extreme Joint Displacements On y Load Combinations giving maximum values are listed Joint Label X in Joint Displacements Y in Radians 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min -0.000301 40+1.+H 0.0 E Only 0.0 +D+0.7501:40.750L+H 0.1060 E Only -0.000101 0.1091 E Only -0.000301 +D+L+H 0.1090 E Only -0.000302 +D+L+H -0.002705 +D+L+H 0.0 +D+0,750Lr+0.750L+H 0.0 E Only 0.0 +0.60D+0.60W+0.60H -.0000690 E Only 0.0 +D+L+H -.000030 E Only 0.002426 E Only -0.000214 +D+L+H .0000020 +0.60D+0.60W+0.60H 0.0 +0.60D+0.60W+0.60H -0.001307 E Only .0000150 +D+L+H -0.000329 E Only .0000170 +D+L+H -0.000221 E Only .0000190 +0+L+H -0.000170 E Only ExtremeJointReactions On y Load Comb n 2 4 6 7 8 9 Joint Label Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min X k 0.000860 +D+L+H -0.03318 E Only -.0000080 D+0.60W+0.60H -0.04366 E Only Joint Reactions Y k 1.101 +041.+H -0.05504 E Only 2.199 +D+L+H .0000880 E Only k-ft ns giving XI um values are is ed Max Lic. # KW-06000346 Description : Catwalk Frame Shutter Consulting Engineers, Inc. 12503 Bel -Red Road Suite 100 Bellevue, WA 98005 425) 450-4075 * Fax (425) 450-4076 Project Title: Engineer: Project ID: Project Descr: yrightE E Printed: 19 MAR 2019, 8:43AM WENERcAt IS anWETCM 11,`4 81141.:Lo- Licensee : SHUTLER CONSULTING ENGINEERS Extreme Joint Reactions Only Load Combinations giving maximum values are listed Joint Label X k Y Joint Reactions k k-ft 10 11 12 13 Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min -.0000390 +0.60D+0.60W+0.6011 -0.03316 E Only 0.05496 E Only .0000360 +0.60D+0.60W+0.60H Extreme Member End Forces Only Load Combinations giving maximum values are listed Member Label Axial k Member " I " End Shear k Forces Moment k-ft Axial Member " J " End Fo Shear k rces Moment k-ft 1-2 1.721 Max 1.20D+0.50Lr+1.60L+1.60 1-2 -0.09419 Min +0.70900+3.0E+0.90H 10-11 0.1655 Max 1.391 D+L+0,20S+3.0E+1.9 10-11 .0000540 Min +0.90D+W+1.60H 11-12 -0.000536 Max +0.90D+W+1.60H 11-12 -0.8368 Min .391 D+L+0.20 S+3.0E+1.9 11-13 1.418 Max .391 D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1.9 11-13 0.000835 Min +0.90D+W+1.60H 12-13 -0.000531 Max +0.90D+W+1.60H 12-13 -0.9021 Min .391 D+1.+0.20S+3.0E+1.9 2-3 1.939 Max .391 D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1.9 2-3 0.08736 Min +0.90D+W+1.60H 2-4 0.07277 Max 1.20D+0.50Lr+1.60L+1.60 2-4 -1.409 Min +0.7090D+3.0E+0.90H 3-4 1.062 Max *0.7090D+3.0E+0,90H 3-4 -0.05011 Mtn 1.20D+0.50Lr+1.60L+1.60 4-8 0.06636 Max .391 D+L+0.20S+3.06+1.9 +1 0.09948 +0.70900+3.0E+0.90H -0.001344 +1,20D+0.50Lr+1.60L+1.60 0.1002 +1.391 D+1+0,20S+3,0E+1.9 .0000590 +0.90D+W+1.60H -0.000531 +0.900+W+1.60H -0.9021 +1.391 D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1.9 0.0 +1.40D+1.60H 0.0 +1.40D+1.60H 0.8368 +1.391 D+L+0,20S+3.0 E+1.9 0.000536 +0.90D+W+1.60H 0.05011 +1.20D+0.50Lr+1.60L+1.60 -0.8970 +0.70900+3.0E+0.90H 0.0 +1.400+1.60H 0.0 +1.400+1.60H 0.8314 +0.7090D+3.0E+0.90H -0.05043 +1.20D+0.50Lr+1.60L+1.60 0.001028 +1,20D+0.50Lr+1,60L+1.60 0,0 +1.391 D+L+0.20S+3,0 E+1.9 0.0 +0.7090D+3.0E+0.90H 0.0 +0.90D+W+1.60H 0.0 +1.391D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1.9 -0.000531 +0,90D+W+1.60H -0.9021 +1.391 D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1.9 0 . 0 +1.400+1.60H 0.0 +1.400+1.60H 0.8368 +1.391 0+1.+0.20S+3.0E+1.9 0.000536 +0.90D+W+1.60H 0.01210 .1.20D+0.50Lr+1.60L+1.60 -0.8953 +0.70900+3.0E+0.90H 0.0 +1.40D+1.60H 0.0 +1.40D+1.60H 0.001673 +0.7090D+3.0E+0.90H -0.03801 +1.20D+0.50Lr+1,60L+1,60 0.01241 +1.20D+0,50Lr+1.60L+1.60 0.09419 +0.7090D+3.0E+0.90H -1.721 +1.20 D+0.50Lr+1.60L+1.60 -.0000540 +0.90D+W+1,60H -0.1655 +1.391 D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1.9 0.8368 +1.391 D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1,9 0.000536 +0.90D+W+1.60H -0.000835 +0,90D+W+1.60H -1.418 +1.391 D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1.9 0.9021 +1 .391 04+0.20S+3,0E+1.9 0.000531 +0.90D+W+1.60H -0.08736 +0.90D+W+1.60H -1.939 +1.391D4+0.20S+3.0E+1.9 1.409 +0.70900+3.0E+0.90H -0.07277 +1.20D+0.50Lr+1.60L+1.60 0.05011 .1.20D-43.50Lr+1.601.+1.60 -1.062 +0.7090D+3.0E+0.90H -.000070 +0.90D+W+1.60H 0.001344 +1.20 D+0,50Lr+1.60L+1.60 -0.09948 +0.7090D+3.0E+0.90H -.0000590 +0.90D+W+1,60H -0.1002 +1,391 D+1+0.20S+3.0E+1.9 0.9021 +1.391 D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1.9 0.000531 +0.90D+W+1.60H 0.0 +1.40D+1.60H 0.0 +1.40D+1,601-1 -0.000536 +0.90D+W+1.60H -0.8368 +1.391D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1.9 0.8970 +0.70900+3.0E+0.90H -0.05011 +1.20D+0.50Lr+1.60L+1.60 0.0 +1.40D+1.60H 0.0 +1.40D+1.60H 0.05043 +1.20D+0.50Lr+1.60L+1.60 -0.8314 +0.7090D+3.0E+0.90H 0.1651 +0.7090D+3.0E+0.90H 0.8953 +0,7090D+3.0E+0.90H -0.01210 +1.20 D+0.50Lr+1.60L+1.60 0.9021 +1,391 D+L+0.20S+3.06+1.9 0.000531 +0.90D+W+1.60H 0.0 +1.391 D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1.9 0.0 +0.7090D+3.0E+0.90H 0.0 +1.400+1.60H 0.0 +1.400+1.60H 0 . 0 +1.400+1,60H 0.0 +1.40D+1.60H 0.03801 +1.20D+0.50Lr+1.60L+1.60 -0.001673 +0.7090D+3.0E+0.90H 0.0 +1.400+1,60H 0.0 +1.40D+1.601-1 0.8297 40,7090D+3.0E+0.99H -0.01241 +1.20D+0.50Lr+1.60L+1.60 -0.000219 +0.900+W+1,60H Shutler Consulting Engineers, Inc. 12503 Bel -Red Road Suite 100 Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 450-4075 Fax (425) 450-4076 Lic. # : KW-06000346 Description: Catwalk Frame Project Title: Engineer: Project ID: Project Descr: Printed: 19 MAR 2019, 8:43AM fte4ER \Sfilsfr- BUU 0-1 Licensee SHUTLER CONSULTING ENGINEERS Extreme Member End Forces Only Load Combinations giving maximum values are listed Member Label Axial Member " I " End Forces Shear Moment k-ft k Axial Member. " J " End Fo Shear k rces Moment k-ft 4-8 Min 5-6 Max 5-6 Min 6-7 Max 6-7 Min 6-8 Max 6-8 Min 6-9 Max 6-9 Min 7-8 Max 7-8 Min 7-9 Max 7-9 Mir; 9-13 Max 9-13 Min .000070 +0.90D+W+1.60H 3.438 1.20D+0.50Lr+1.60L+1.60 0.1420 +0.7090D+3.0E+0.90H 3.434 1.200-40.50Lr+1.60L+1.60 0.1396 +0.7090D+3.0E+0.90H 0.9307 .391D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1,9 .0.000234 +0,90D+W+1.60H 0.001409 1.20D+0.50Lr+1.60L+1.60 -0.9245 +0.7090D+3.0E+0.90H -.0000950 +0.90D+W+1.60H -0.5917 .391D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1.9 0.7534 .391D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1.9 .0000070 +0.90D+W+1.60H 0.1002 .391D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1.9 .0000590 +0.90D+W+1,60H -0.1651 +0.7090D+3.0E+0.90H 0.1311 +1.3910+L+0.20S+3.0E+1.9 .0000110 +0.90D+W+1.60H -0.000102 +0,90D+W+1.60H -1,180 +1.391D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1.9 0.0 +1,40D+1,60H 0.0 +1.40D+1.60H 0.0 +1.400+1.60H 0.0 +1.40D+1.60H 0.4936 +1,391D+L+0,20S+3.0E+1.9 0.000219 +0.90D+W+1.60H 0.4888 +0.7090D+3.0E+0.90H -0.002024 +1,20D+0.50Lr+1.60L+1.60 -.0000540 +0.90D+W+1.60H -0.1655 +1.391D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1.9 -0.8297 +0.70900+3.0E+0.90H 0.0 +0.7090D-4-3.0E+0.90H 0.0 +1.391D+L-40.20S+3,0E+1.9 -0.000102 +0.90D+W+1.60H -1.180 +1.391D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1.9 0.0 +1.40D+1.60H 0.0 +1.40D+1.60H 0.0 +1.40D+1.60H 0.0 +1.40D+1.60H 0.4936 +1.391D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1.9 0.000219 +0.90D+W+1.60H 0.0 +1.40D+1.60H 0.0 +1.40D+1.60H 0.002024 +1.20D+0.50Lr+1.60L+1.60 -0.4888 +0,7090D+3.0E+0.90H -0.06636 +1,391D4L+0.20S+3.0E+1.9 -0.1420 +0.7090D+3.0E+0.90H -3.438 +1,200+0.50Lr+1.60L+1.60 -0.1396 +0.7090D+3.0E+0.90H -3.434 +1.20D+0.50Lr+1.60L+1.60 -0.000234 +0.90D+W+1.60H -0.9307 +1.391D-4-L.0.203+3,0E+1.9 0.9245 +0.70900+3.0E+0.90H -0.001409 +1.20D+0.50Lr+1.60L+1.60 0.5917 +1.391D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1.9 .0000950 +0.900+W+1.60H -.0000070 +0.90D+W+1.60H -0.7534 +1.3910+L+0.20S+10E+1.9 -.0000590 -40.90D+W+1.60H -0.1002 +1.391D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1.9 -0.001028 +1.20D+0.50Lr+1,60L+1.60 -.0000110 +0.90D+W+1.60H -0.1311 +1.391D4.+0.20S+3.0E+1.9 1.180 +1.391D440.20S+3.0E+1.9 0.000102 +0.90D+W+1.60H 0.0 +1.40D+1.60H 0.0 +1.40D+1.60H 0.0 +1.400+1.60H 0.0 +1.40D+1.60H -0.000219 +0.90D+W+1.60H -0.4936 +1,391D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1.9 0.002024 +1.20D+0.50Lr+1.60L+1.60 -0.4888 +0.7090D+3,0E+0,90H 0.1655 +1,39104+0.203+3.0E+1.9 .0000540 +0.90D+W+1.60H -0.4936 +1.391D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1.9 1.180 +1.391D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1.9 0.000102 +0.90D+W+1,60H 0.0 +1.391D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1.9 0.0 +0.7090D+3.0E+0.90H 0.0 +1.40D+1.60H 0.0 +1.40D+1,60H 0.0 +1,40D+1.60H 0.0 +1.40D+1.60H 0.0 +1.443D+1.60H 0.0 +1.40D+1.60H 0.4888 +0.7090D+3,0E+0,90H -0.002024 +1.20D+0.50Lr+1.60L+1.60 -0.000536 +0.90D+W+1.60H -0.8368 +1.391 0+L+43.20S+3.0E+1.9 Extreme Member Forces Only Load Combinations giving maximum values are listed Mmbr Label Axial Dist from "1' Joint Moment Disi from "I" Joint Shear Dist from "I" Joint 1-2 0.09419k 0.0 ft 0.01210 k-ft 9.0 ft 0.09948 k 0.0 ft Max +0,70900+3.0E+0.90H +1.20D+0.50Lr+1.60L+1.60H +0.70900+3.0E+0.90H 1-2 -1.721k 0.0 ft -0.8953 k-ft 9.0 ft -0.001344 k 0.0 ft Min +1.20D+0.50Lr+1.60L+1.60H +0.7090D+3.0E+0.90H +1.20D+0.50Lr+1.60L+1.60H 10-11 -0.000670k 0.0 ft -0.000101 k-ft 1.102ft 0.1002 k 0.0 ft Max +1,20D+1.60Lr+L+1.60H +1 .40D+1.60H +1.391D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1.90H 10-11 -0.1655k 0.0 ft -0.9021 k-ft 9.0 ft 0,000734 k 0.0 ft Min +1.391 D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1.90H +1 .391D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1.90H +1.20D+1.60Lr+L+1.60H 11-12 0.8368k 0.0 ft -0.000101 k-ft 0.8571 ft -0,000531 k 0.0 ft Max +1.391 D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1.90H +1.20D+1.60Lr+0.50W+1.60H +0.90D+W+1. 60H 11-12 0.000536k 0.0 ft -0.9021 k-ft 0.0ft -0.9021 k 0.0 ft Min +0.90D+ W+1.60H +1.39/ D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1.90H +1.391 0+1+0.203+3.0E+1.90H 11-13 -0.000835k 0.0 ft 0.0 k-ft 0.0ft 0.0 k 0.0 ft Max +a 90D+W+1.60H 11-13 -1.418k 0.0 ft 0.0k-ft 0.0ft 0.0 k 0.0 ft Min +1.391D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1.90H 12-13 0.9021k 0.0 ft 0.8368 k-ft 0.0 ft 0.8368 k 0.0 ft Max +1.391D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1.90H +1.391D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1,90H +1.391D+L+020S+3.0E+1.90H 12-13 0.000531k 0.0 ft 0,000102 k-ft 0.8776 ft 0.000536 k 0,0 ft Min +0.90D+W+1.60H +1.40D+1.60H +0.90D+ W+1. 60H 2-3 -0.08736k 0,0 ft 0,01210k-ft 0.0ft 0,05011 k 0.0 ft Max +0.90D+W+1.60H +1.20D+05011+1.60L+1.60H +1.20D+0.50Lr+1.60L+1.60H Lic. # : KW-06000346 Description atwalk Frame Shutter Consulting Engineers, Inc. 12503 Bel -Red Road Suite 100 Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 450-4075 * Fax (425) 450-4076 Project Title: Engineer: Project ID: Project Descr: Psb Printed: 19 MAR 2019, 8:43AM '''.11164-70:t[tiatkidilpOCUMEillENEg-- •=1IStaiti3 tE Licensee : SHUTLER CONSULTING ENGINEERS Extreme Member Forces Only Load Combinations giving maximum values are listed Mmbr Label Axial Dist from 'IJoint Moment Dist from T Joint Shear Dist from 'I' Joint 2-3 -1.939k 0,0 ft -0.8953 k-ft 0.0ft -0.8970 k 0.0 ft Min +1.391D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1.90H +0.7090D+3.0E+0.90H +0.70900+3.0E+0.90H 2-4 1.409k 0.0 ft 0.0 k-ft 0.0 ft 0.0 k 0.0 ft Max +0.7090D+3.0E+0,90H 2-4 -0.07277k 0.0 ft 0,0 k-ft 0.0ft 0.0 k 0.0 ft Min +1.20D+0.50Lr+1.60L+1,60H 3-4 0.05011k 0,0 ft 0.01241 k-ft 1.0 ft 0,8314 k 0.0 ft Max +1.20D+0.50Lr+1.60L+1.60H +1.20D+0.50Lr+1.60L+1.60H +0.7090D+3,0E+0,90H 3-4 -1.062k 0.0 ft -0.8297 k-ft 1.0 ft -0,05043 k 0.0 ft Min +0.7090D+3.0E+0.90H +0.7090D+3.0E+0.90H +1.20D+0.50Lr+1.60L+1.60H 4-8 -0.000109k 0.0 ft 0.4936 k-ft 8.0 ft 0.001028 k 0.0 ft Max +1.40D+1.60H +1,391D+L+0,20S+3.0E+1,90H +1.20D+0.50Lr+1.60L+1.60H 4-8 -0.06636k 0.0 ft -0.8297 k-ft 0.0 ft -0.1651 k 0.0 ft Min +1.391D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1.90H +0.7090D+3.0E+0.90H +0.7090D+3.0E+0.90H 5-6 -0.1420k 0.0 ft -0,00010 k-ft 5,694 ft 0.1311 k 0.0 ft Max +0.7090D+3.0E+0,90H +1,40D+1.60H +1.391D+L+0.20S+3,0E+1.90H 5-6 -3.438k 0.0 ft -1.180 k-ft 9.0 ft 0.000141 k 0,0 ft Min +1.20D+0.50U+1.60L+1.60H +1.391D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1.90H +1.200+1 .60Lr+1+1.60H 6-7 -0.1396k 0.0 ft -0.00010 k-ft 0.3673 ft -0.000102 k 0.0 ft Max +a 7090D+3.0E+0.90H +1.40D+1.60H +0.90D+W+1.60H 6-7 -3.434k 0.0 ft -1.180 k-ft 0.0 ft -1.180 k 0.0 ft Min +1,20D+0.501j+1.60L+1.60H +1.391D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1.90H +1.391D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1 .90H 6-8 -0.000234 k 0.0 ft 0,0 k-ft 0.0 ft 0.0 k 0.0 ft Max +0.90D+W+1.60H 6-8 -0,9307k 0.0 ft 0.0 k-ft 0.0ft 0.0 k 0,0 ft Min +1.391D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1,90H 6-9 0.9245k 0.0 ft 0.0 k-ft 0.0ft 0.0 k 0.0 ft Max +0.7090D+3.0E+0.90H 6-9 -0.001409k 0.0ft 0,0 k-ft 0.0ft 0.0 k 0.0 ft Min +1.200+0.50Lr+1.60L+1.60H 7-8 0.5917k 0.0 ft 0,4936 k-ft 0.0 ft 0.4936 k 0,0 ft Max +1.391D+L+0,20S+3.0E+1.90H +1.391 D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1.90H +1.391D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1.90H 7-8 0.000127k 0.0 ft 0.000101 k-ft 0,6531 ft 0.000219 k 0.0 ft Min +1.20D+1.601J+0.50W+1.60H +1.20D+1.60Lr+0.50W+1.60H +0.90D+ W+1.60H 7-9 -0.000132k 0.0 ft 0,002024 k-ft 1.0 ft 0.4888 k 0,0 ft Max +1.20D+0,501J+1.60L+1.60H +1.20D+0.50Lr+1.60L+1.60H +0,7090D+3.0E+0,90H 7-9 -0.7534k 0.0 ft -0.4888 k-ft 1.0 ft -0.002024 k 0.0 ft Min +1.391 D+L+020S+3.0E+1.90H +0.7090D+3.0E+0.90H +1.20D+0.50U+1.60L+1.60H 9-13 -0.000734k 0,0 ft 0.8368 k-ft 8.0ft -0.000670 k 0.0 ft Max +1.20D+1.60Lr+L+1.60H +1.391D+L+0.208+3.0E+1.90H +1,20D+1,60Lr+L+1.60H 9-13 -0.1002k 0.0 ft -0.4;8 k-ft 0.0 ft -0,1655 k 0,0 ft Min +1.391 D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1.90H +0.70900+3.0E+ 0.90H +1.391D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1.90H Member Stress Checks.., Stress Checks per AISC 360-10 & NDS 2012 Member Label Section Label Material Max. Axial + Bending Stress Ratios Load Combination Ratio Status Dist (ft) Max. Shear Stress Ratios Load Combination Ratio Status Dist (ft) 1-2 10-11 11-12 11-13 12-13 2-3 2-4 3-4 4-8 5-6 6-7 6-8 Columns Columns Columns Braces Beams Columns Braces Beams Beams Columns Columns Braces Stee Stee Stee Stee Stee Stee Stee Stee Stee Stee Stee Stee +1.391 D+L40.20S+3.0E+1.9 +1.391D+1+0.20S+3.0E+1.9 +1.391D+1.+0.20S+3.0E+1.9 Angle, Do Hand Calc Error: rts <= 0 +1.3910+1+0.203+3,0E+1.9 Angle, Do Hand Calc Error: rts <= 0 Error rts <= 0 +1,391D4L+0.205+3.0E+1.9 +1.391D+L+0.20S+3.0E+1.9 Angle, Do Hand Calc 0.064 0.060 0.063 99.000 0.000 0.066 99,000 0.000 0.000 0.090 0.086 99.000 PASS PASS PASS Ratio > 1. No Stress PASS Ratio > 1. No Stress No Stress PASS PASS Ratio > 1. 9.00 9.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 9.00 0.00 0.00 +0.7090D+3.0E+0.90H +1.391 CH-L+0.20S+3.0E+1.9 +1.391D*1+0.205+3,0E+1,9 Angle, Do Hand Calc N/A +0,7090D+3.0E+0.90H Angle, Do Hand Calc N/A N/A +1,391D+1.40.203+3.0E.1.9 +1.391D+1.+0.208+3.0E+1.9 Angle, Do Hand Calc 0.003 0.003 0.027 99,000 0,000 0.027 99.000 0.000 0.000 0.004 0,035 99.000 PASS PASS PASS Ratio > 1. PASS PASS Ratio > 1. PASS PASS PASS PASS Ratio > 1. 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 SHUTLER JOB 5+ T� - CONSULTING =I ENGINEERS, INC 12503 Bel -Red Rd., Suite 100 Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 450-4075 FAX (425) 450-4076 SHEET NO. S al CALCULATED BY AR DATE 31-zigolq OF . SCALE JOB C. (9PrST-Pr- "7- SHEET NO. 02 g OF anal= SHUTLER NM= CONSULTING ENGINEERS, INC 12503 Bel -Red Rd., Suite 100 Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 450-4075 FAX (425) 450-4076 CALCULATEDBY DATE 3 SCALE 11 # 711 • 1 Y 3 '41 Elm= NE mum "1'111 111111111111 1111111111111111111111111111111 11110111111111 11111'111111 March 13, 2019 Mr. Ben Hayman City of Tukwila Fire Departmen 6300 Southcenter Blvd. #209 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Project: Shasta Beverages Tukwila, Washington Subject: Shasta Beverages Fire Dear Mr. Hayman: CODECC.L APPROVi APR 2 5 2319 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION on PERMIT CENTER oogg RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA c On Va ua MAR 27 2019 Coffman Engineers, Inc. (CEI) has been retained by Shasta Beverages to perform an evaluation of the fire protection and life safety at the beverage manufacturing and storage facility located at 1227 Andover Park E, Tukwila, Washington. The evaluation is limited to a visual evaluation. The evaluation will be conducted in accordance with the following applicable codes and standards: • City ofTukwila Fire Code, based upon the 2015 International Fire Code with City of Tukwila and State of Washington amendments (CTFC) • City of Tukwila Building Code, based upon the 2015 International Fire Code with City of Tukwila and State of Washington amendments (CTBC) • NFPA 13 Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems, 2019 Edition (NFPA 13) per Tukwila Municipal Code Section 16.42.020. • NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code, 2019 Edition (NFPA 72) per Tukwila Municipal Code Section 16.42.020. • NFPA 70 National Electric Code 2017 Edition (NFPA 70) per Tukwila Municipal Code Section 16.42.020. • Tukwila Municipal Code Title 16 Buildings and Construction (TMC) The facility contains unpennitted work, including modifications to the fire protection system. The facility was inspected by the City ofTukwila Fire and Building Department and is currently under a work stoppage until further evaluation. A site walk was conducted on Friday March 1, 2019 with Shasta Beverages, CEI, Shutler Consulting Engineers Inc. (Structural Engineer) and the City of Tukwila Fire and Building Department. It is anticipated the steel rack structural integrity and compliance is to be addressed by the Structural Engineer. Fuel gas systems and refrigerant systems were not considered a portion of this evaluation and should be reviewed by a mechanical engineer. Portions of construction currently in progress (e.g. QA Lab and mechanical equipment installation) could not be evaluated as a portion of the visual survey and should be evaluated as a portion of the permit process or surveyed at a later date. For the purposes of this evaluation the facility is identified as two sections: the original plant and warehouse expansion (see Attachment #1 for clarification). The warehouse expansion (northern portion of the facility) was an addition to the original plant in 2011. It was indicated to CEI that this warehouse expansion was permitted however, racking and equipment layout within the SEATTLE I 1101 24° Ave., Ste. 400 I Seatde, WA 98101-2923 I 206.623.0717 LASTING mammy results I relabonstups www.coffman.com Mr. Ben Hayman City of Tukwila Fire Department March 13, 2019 Page 2 warehouse expansion has changed and was not permitted at the time of survey. CEI has not reviewed permit drawings for the warehouse expansion from 2011. CEI conducted site surveys of the entire building on March 2' and March 4th. Locations of deficiencies can be found in Attachment #2 for reference. Additionally, pictures of the deficiencies can be found within Attachment #3. Fire Suppression The facility is fully sprinklered, although, areas within the building contain unpernvtted sprinkler work. CEI has not reviewed drawings or calculations for the sprinlder protection within the facility. Riser placard information was used to determine the sprinkler protection found at the facility. The risers are located along the south exterior wall, centrally located within the plant. The location of the risers can be found in Attachment #1 for clarification. The original plant is protected by two wet system risers which divide the plant into two zones. The zones are divided between east (System #1) and west (System #2). The risers appear to have been designed utilizing a pipe schedule system. The wet systems throughout the plant utilize Grinnell Duraspeed SSU-3 Upright Sprinklers which appear to be over 50 years old. Recent 5- year testing indicated that a sample should be sent off for testing in accordance with NFPA 25 Section 5.3.1.1.1. Testing of the older sprinklers should be verified and performed every 10 years. The wet risers also supply two dry systems. One dry system (System #3) is located adjacent to the wet system risers and protects the exterior oil drum storage area. The other dry system (System #4) is located above an electrical closet and protects the loading dock. An air compressor, located adjacent to System #4, supports both dry systems. It appears the dry system location is an existing condition. A picture of the location of System #4 can be found below for reference. Figure I. Location of System #4 \, Mr. Ben Hayman City of Tukwila Fire Department March 13, 2019 Page 3 The warehouse expansion, in accordance with riser placard information, is protected by an ESFR sprinlder system, utilizing Tyco TY7226 K16.8 pendent sprinklers, designed to a minimum operating pressure of 35 psi. 12 sprinklers were calculated as a portion of the design. Fire extinguishers (3-A:40-B:C) are readily indicated by red column paint and signage. They are located throughout the facility and appear to be positioned in accordance with CTFC Section 906. Fire Suppression Deficiencies CEI has identified the following deficiencies associated with the fire protection system: 1. Permits, drawings, hydraulic and seismic calculations should be provided for all portions of the systems which were unpermitted in accordance with local and state requirements. 2. Testing of a representative sample of the standard response sprinklers over 50 years old should be verified in accordance with NFPA 25 Section 5.3.1.1.1., or replaced at this time. If testing, sprinklers will need to be tested every 10 years thereafter or sprinklers should be replaced. 3. Isolated and continuous obstructions exist that are wider than 2 feet within the warehouse expansion. ESFR sprinkler obstructions must comply with NFPA 13 Section 14.2.11.2 and 14.2.11.3. This limits the obstruction width of ESFR sprinklers to 2 feet, unless other exceptions are met. It does not appear that the obstructions identified comply with the available exceptions. For example, the unit heaters located near the ceiling level, open grating and the conveyors within this portion of the warehouse would be considered obstructions. Additionally, isolated and continuous obstructions exist within the original plant wider than 4 feet. Sprinklers should be installed under obstructions wider than 4 feet in accordance with NFPA 13 Section 9.5.5.3.1. Sprinklers are not required underneath obstructions that are within 24 in. or less above the floor in accordance with NFPA 13 Section 9.5.5.3.1.5. Obstructions exist throughout the original plant that are in excess of 4 feet wide and further than 24 in. from the ground and are identified in Attachment #2. Sprinlders should be installed underneath obstructions such as unit heaters, open -grating and conveyors in accordance with NFPA 13 Section 14.2.11 and 9.5.5.3.1. Mechanical equipment (e.g. palletizers) should not be considered an obstruction. Sprinklers are not required to be installed within mechanical equipment not intended for occupancy in accordance with NFPA 13 Section 9.2.10. Further discussion is required regarding the approach to protection underneath obstructions. Any potential for an alternate method to prevent combustible loading underneath the obstructions should be coordinated with the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Mr. Ben Hayman City of Tukwila Fire Department March 13, 2019 Page 4 4. During the survey it was identified that branch lines were not provided with end of line restraints in accordance with NFPA 13 Section 18.6. Provide end of branch line restraints throughout all portions of unpermitted work. 5. Sprinkler protection is obstructed due to the blue tarping installed at the ceiling level. In accordance with NFPA 13 Section 10.2.7.1.2 and 11.2.5.2.2., tarping should be removed or relocated so as not to obstruct sprinkler discharge. 6. It does not appear the CMU wall for the new Ammonia Refrigerant System was installed with respect to sprinlder locations. Sprinklers are located further than 7.5 feet from the new wall as required by NFPA 13 Section 10.2.5.2. Revise sprinkler arrangement within the new Ammonia Refrigerant Room. 7. Wiring is found utilizing sprinkler piping and air supply piping from compressor as a support. Sprinlder system components shall not be utilized to support non -system components in accordance with NFPA 13 Section 4.9. Remove wiring from sprinkler system components. 8. An escutcheon was found damaged in original plant mezzanine conference room. This escutcheon should be repaired. 9. Sprinkler protection is not found underneath west stair from the new mezzanine conference room in accordance with NFPA 13 Section 9.5.5.3.1. Provide sprinlder protection underneath this stair. 10. Fire sprinkler risers are located within a chain linked enclosure in the maintenance area. Locking arrangement requires a passcode. Access should be provided to fire sprinkler risers to fire department. Revise door locking arrangement. High -Piled Storage Warehouse Expansion The commodity classification is identified as Class I -IV to a maximum storage height of 25 feet on the riser. However, the ceiling height is 25 feet and storage should not be found within 3 feet of ESFR sprinklers in accordance with NFPA 13 Section 14.2.12. Therefore, the maximum storage height should be 22 feet. The commodities located within the north section of the warehouse include the following: PET bottles (Class I -IV), Wood Pallets (High -Hazard), Cardboard Boxes (Class III -IV) and Aluminum Cans (Class I). The wooden pallets can be stored to a height of 22 feet in accordance with NFPA 13 Table 20.14.1.2(c). The Class I -IV commodities can be stored to a height of 22 feet in accordance with NFPA 13 Table 23.3.1 (solid pile) and NFPA 13 Table 23.5.1 (racks). Additionally, the sprinkler system is sufficient for the storage of Group A cartooned nonexpanded plastics if found within this area in accordance with NFPA 13 Table 23.4.2 and NFPA 13 Table 23.6.1. The maximum pile dimension for Class I -IV commodities is 100 feet and for idle pallets is 50 feet per CTFC Table 3206.2. Mr. Ben Hayman City of Tukwila Fire Department March 13, 2019 Page 5 Original Plant Since the original plant is provided with risers designed utilizing a pipe schedule system it is unclear if the original sprinkler system was designed to support high -piled storage. High -piled storage is considered storage over 12 feet for Class I-1V commodities. It is recommended that high -piled storage be relocated to the warehouse expansion, unless hydraulic calculations are performed to verify the existing system can support high -piled storage. This would allow a maximum of 12,000 square feet of high -piled storage within this portion of the plant due to the lack of additional features (fire department man access and smoke and heat vents) required by CTFC Table 3206.2. Back-to-back shelf storage is found on the new upper mezzanine, above the maintenance area. Total shelf depth is 36 inches. The shelves are 70 inches high. Shelves contain cartooned Group A plastics. A vertical barrier does not separate the front and back of shelves. Additionally, the shelf storage contains open -top plastic containers. Tops should be provided to the open -top containers or located on the lowest shelf. Backs should be provided for the shelves in accordance with NFPA 13 Section 3.3.12. This will allow for the area to be protected in accordance with Ordinary Hazard Group 2 requirements per NFPA 13 Table 21.3.1. High -Piled Storage Deficiencies CEI has identified the following deficiencies associated with the high -piled storage within the facility: 11. High -piled storage should be relocated from the original plant unless the sprinkler system can be hydraulically calculated to verify to support high piled storage. 12. Provide open -top containers with lids or relocate open -top containers to lowest tier of shelves in accordance with NFPA 13 Section 20.3.3. Install vertical barrier (3/8-inch plywood, particle board or .78 mm sheet metal) for back-to-back shelf storage in accordance with NFPA 13 Section 21.3.1. Maintain aisle width of 5 feet. 13. A condition exists in Section J of the warehouse expansion where solid piled storage is placed adjacent to rack storage without aisle separation. Solid pile storage and rack storage should be separated by aisles in accordance with CTFC Section 3206.9.1 and. NFPA 13. Aisles shall be maintained in accordance with CTFC Section 3205.4. Maintain a minimum 44 in. aisle width between solid pile and rack storage. 14. Clear paths to exits are not clearly identified, defined or maintained within the warehouse expansions. Fire department access doors and exit doors shall not be obstructed in accordance with CTFC Section 3205.4. The path of egress travel to exits shall be marked by readily visible exit signs to clearly indicate the direction of egress travel in cases where the exit or the path of egress travel is not immediately visible to the occupants in accordance with CTBC Section 1013.1. Maintain and identify clear paths to exits. \ Mr. Ben Hayman City of Tukwila Fire Department March 13, 2019 Page 6 Fire Alarm System This facility is provided with an audible and visual fire alarm notification and manual fire alarm stations at each exit. CEI did not review a points list, programming or perform any functional testing of the fire alarm system. An automatic fire alarm system is required by TMC Section 16.40.010 in all new structures. However, this does not appear to be applicable to the existing structure. Smoke detection is provided over the fire alarm panel and notification appliance circuit power supplies. The facility utilizes an obsolete Radionics Omegalarm D8112 system which is located adjacent to the sprinkler risers (see Attachment #1 for clarification). It appears that hardware has been upgraded within the fire alarm control panel utilizing a Bosch 9412G hardware. The system also utilizes Silent Knight Power Modules Model 5495. A Bosch annunciator is provided at the main entrance. A picture of the fire alarm panel can be found below for reference: Figure 2. Fire Alarm Control Panel Fire Alarm System Deficiencies CEI has identified the following deficiencies associated with the fire alarm system: 15. Panels should be installed and maintained in accordance with their listing in accordance with TMC Section 16.04.050.D. For example, Radionic modules should not be mounted on the panel doors within the Silent Knight 5495 and Bosch 9412G. Bosch modules should be mounted with DI37 mounting brackets. Modules located within the Bosch control panel are limited to four modules mounted in the panels approved locations. Mr. Ben Hayman City of Tukwila Fire Department March 13, 2019 Page 7 Additionally, Radionics modules should not be installed within Silent Knight booster panels. Non -power limited fire alarm and power -limited fire alarm cabling are installed within the fire alarm control panel within 0.25 in. of one another. NPLFA and PLFA must maintain a 0.25 in. separation within the same enclosure in accordance with NFPA 70 Section 760.136(D). Furthermore, stepdown transformer is not provided with proper protected closure and not secured. Install panels and devices in accordance with their listing, NFPA 72 and NFPA 70. 16. Fire Alarm notification devices are not provided for the new kitchen, locker rooms, conference room and new production office. Visible notification devices are required in common use areas in accordance with CTFC Section 907.5.2.3.1. Provide audible and visible notification devices in these areas. Fire Department Access Fire department man doors are provided every 150 feet around the warehouse expansion containing high -piled storage. The rear of the facility is abutted by a railway preventing access. Pad -locked secured vehicular gates are provided on both sides of the facility preventing fire department access. These gates are manual and not UL listed which would be required for new facilities in accordance with TMC Section 16.16.070.19. It is not apparent these are required for existing facilities. A Knox -box is provided at the front entrance to the facility. The owner should coordinate the required keys to the facility within the Knox -box providing the fire department with access to all areas of the building. The existing facility lacks fire lane markings and turn- arounds in accordance with TMC Section 16.16.070. Compliant fire department vehicle access shall be determined by the City ofTukwila Fire Marshal for existing facilities in accordance with TMC Section 16.16.070.16. Clarification should be sought from the Fire Marshal with respect to fire department access. Means of Egress CEI reviewed exit arrangement and exit discharge from the facility. Most exits are provided with exit signage and manual pull stations within 5 feet. A door, which could be utilized for exiting within the original plant, north of the offices, is not provided with exit signage or a manual pull station, however, it does not appear this door is a required means of egress. A nonilluminated exit sign and manual pull station are provided within the southern exit of the original mezzanine conference room. However, this area does not appear to require two means of egress due to the occupant load. As a result, exit signs are not required from the space and shouldn't require illumination. CEI has identified the following deficiencies associated with respect to the means of egress: 17. It is recommended that the common path of egress travel should be reviewed in accordance with the new equipment permit plans. Common path of travel shall not exceed 100 ft. in accordance with CTBC Table 1006.2.1 for sprinklered Group F occupancies. i Mr. Ben Hayman City of Tukwila Fire Department March 13, 2019 Page 8 18. The rear exit door swings into the building (against the path of egress) and discharges on the rail track. Exit discharge must provide safe access to a public way in accordance with CTBC Section 1028.5. Doors serving an occupant load of 50 or more should swing in the direction of egress in accordance with CTBC Section 1010.1.2.1. This appears to be an existing non -compliant condition. This does not appear to be a required means of egress in accordance with CTBC for this facility. Further discussion regarding this issue may be required. 19. Exit discharge to a public way is not provided to the north warehouse expansion and southwest corner of the facility in accordance with CTBC Section 1028. The minimum width or required capacity of exit discharge components shall not be less than the minimum width or required capacity of the exits being served in accordance with CTBC Section 1028.2. The gate to the northern drive is locked with a pad -lock, allowing only a 2-foot gap along the fence line. A man gate exists through the northern fence which also utilizes a pad -lock (although provided with a firefighter key -box). The southwest gate does not offer any man access. In the event of an emergency there is the potential for both security gates along the drives to be locked. Exit discharge should be revised to provide proper access to the public way for occupants. 20. A security gate is installed on the northwest exit from the facility that swings in the opposite direction of the exit door. The space between two doors in a series shall be 48 inches minimum plus the width of a door swinging into the space. Doors shall be arranged to comply with CTBC Section 1010.1.8. Remove the security gate is removed. Hazardous Materials CEI performed a classification of the hazardous materials found within the facility. The classification of hazardous materials was in accordance with Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) information provided by the client. CEI did not perform an inventory of the hazardous materials. A draft copy of the Hazardous Material Inventory Sheet (HMIS) can be found in Attachment #4 for clarification. A final copy of the HMIS should be provided by Shasta verifying the quantities of hazardous materials to the City of Tukwila. The hazardous materials found on -site are primarily concentrates used in the production of soda. Once mixed with water, the concentrates are diluted to a concentration no longer to be considered a hazardous material. However, the storage of the liquid concentrates in their pure form are considered a hazardous material by the CTFC. The concentrates are primarily ethyl -alcohol based and water miscible. The concentrates are mostly considered either flammable/combustible liquids or corrosive and are stored in 5- gallon plastic containers. Aerosols were segregated into a separate HMIS sheet due to their unique classification. The facility is currently considered one control area. For additional control areas 1-hour fire barrier separations would have to be constructed m accordance with CTBC Table 414.2.2. The maximum allowable quantities of each hazardous material are found below in Table 1 in accordance with CTBC Table 307.1.1. A 100% sprinkler increase was already included within the quantities / Mr. Ben Hayman City of Tukwila Fire Department March 13, 2019 Page 9 identified within Table 1. It is the intent of the client to store flammable and combustible liquids in flammable and combustible liquid storage cabinets for an additional 100% increase which is identified. Flammable liquids storage cabinets must be constructed in accordance with CTFC Section 5704.3.2 and are limited to 120 gallons per cabinet. Table 1. Maximum Allowable Quantities (MAQ) Liquids . . 1, terial Combination of IA+IB+IC Storage i\IAQ O , Sprint:levet] Only 240 gallons Storage MAO (if . li ocated n calppels) 480 gallons Class 11 240 gallons 480 gallons Class IIIA 660 gallons 1320 gallons Class IIIB Unlimited Unlimited Corrosive 1,000 gallons 2,000 gallons In addition to the concentrates, the facility utilizes other materials, such as lubricating oils, which are required to comply with the maximum allowable quantities listed above. Aerosol maximum allowable quantities were determined in accordance with CTFC Section 5104.2. Aerosol storage exceeding the quantities above should be stored in separate flammable liquid storage cabinets. Class 1 Table 2. Maximum Allowable Quantities Aerosols 'Material Storage AlAQ Sturag.e MAQt located in oltmcts) Unlimited Unlimited Class 2 Class 3 Combined Class 2 & 3 1,000 pounds 500 pounds 1,000 pounds 2,000 pounds 1,000 pounds 2,000 pounds In addition to the materials listed above Shasta utilizes "Accu-Tab SI Calcium Hypochlorite Tablets 59422" or chlorine tablets. These tablets are classified as a Class 3 oxidizer. These tablets are necessary for cleaning a maintenance of equipment. In accordance with CTBC Table 307.1.1 footnote k the maximum allowable quantity associated with these tablets is 200 pounds, if approved. It is recommended that these tablets be segregated from the other hazardous materials and stored in approved containers in accordance with CTFC Chapter 6303. Fire Protection for the storage of concentrates in flanunable liquid storage cabinets is outside the scope of NFPA 30 which more intended for rack, solid -pile or tank storage of flammable and combustible liquids. The storage arrangement is most reflective of Extra Hazard Group II in accordance with NFPA 13 "spaces with substantial amounts of flammable and combustible liquids." As a result, the sprinlder system should be hydraulically calculated for Extra Hazard Group II per NFPA 13 Section 27.5.4. An outdoor overhang of the facility is sprinklered and utilized for oil drum storage. Liquid transfer in the oil drum storage area occurs over containment pallets. The exterior oil drum storage is existing and appears was intended for oil drum storage. The exterior oil drum storage Mr. Ben Hayman City of Tukwila Fire Depai intent March 13, 2019 Page 10 area contains the following oils: waste oil (Class IIIB) and variations of Shell Oil (Class IIIB). It appears to have been designed in accordance with the pipe schedule system for Extra Hazard in accordance with NFPA 13 Section A.27.5.4 for existing buildings. This area should be included within the maximum allowable quantities as it is not provided the separation to be considered outdoor storage in accordance with CTFC Section 5704.4.2.4. CEI has identified the following deficiencies and recommendations for the hazardous material storage: 21. Owner shall provide quantities for final HMIS form and submission to the City of Tukwila. 22. Relocate compressed gas cylinders away from fire alarm panel and fire sprinkler risers. 23. During the survey it was identified that hazardous material storage was not properly segregated or maintained from ordinary combustibles. Additionally, waste containers were not properly stored as full containers. For example, discarded containers were found behind sugar tanks, oil was stored next to combustibles and old containers in outdoor oil storage area not properly disposed. Hazardous material storage should be properly managed throughout the facility. 24. Aerosols should be segregated in their own flammable liquid storage cabinets. 25. Maintain 5 feet separation between vent or fill openings from unclassified electrical equipment during oil transfer. All electrical equipment within 3 feet of drum filling in outdoor oil fill station should be electrically classified as Class 1 Division 1. Electrical equipment within 3-5 feet should be classified as Class 1 Division 2 and also extending 10 feet in all directions 18 inches above the floor. 26. Chlorine tablets should be segregated and properly stored away from flammable and combustible liquids. The use of a 200-pound maximum allowable quantity should be approved by the Fire Marshal. 27. Hazardous materials placards at facility should be updated to reflect HMIS NFPA information. 28. Maintain oil transfer within the oil drum storage area over containment pallets large enough to contain a spill from the largest container. 29. 120-B:C Extinguisher for outdoor oil drum area should be inspected. Extinguishers is missing inspection tag. 30. Provide a hydraulic calculation for Extra Hazard Group II to store flammable and combustible liquid concentrates and oils within the original plant in accordance with NFPA 13 Section 27.5.4. Mr. Ben Hayman City of Tukwila Fire Department March 13, 2019 Page 11 31. Flammable and combustible liquids (including waste containers) were found stored adjacent to ordinary combustibles. Flammable and combustible liquids, including waste containers, should not be stored within 8 feet of ordinary combustibles in accordance with CTFC Section 5704.2.6 and 5704.3.3.8. Additionally, flammable and combustible liquids should not be located near paths of egress in accordance with CTFC Section 5704.3.3.3. It is the intent of Shasta to relocate flammable and combustible concentrates to flammable liquid storage cabinets. 32. Hot -work areas (temporary and permanent) must comply with C1'TC Chapter 35. This includes the use of noncombustible partitions to segregate hot work areas from other combustibles. Review and implement operation requirements for hot work procedures as required by the City of Tukwila. Ammonia Refrigerant Systems The facility contains two ammonia refrigerant systems, existing and new. The new system is currently under construction and will replace the existing system. Refrigerant systems are exempt from the maximum allowable quantities and H-occupancy requirements in accordance with CTBC Section 307.1.1 Ammonia refrigerant systems are outside CEI's area of expertise and should be reviewed by an experienced mechanical engineer in refrigerant systems in accordance with CTFC Section 606, International Mechanical Code and International Institute of Ammonia Refrigerant (IIAR) requirements. The room is required to be sprinldered in accordance with CTBC Table 509 or provided with a 1-hour fire resistance rating. Utilizing FM Global Data Sheet 7-13 Mechanical Refrigeration and NFPA 13, the sprinkler system for the refrigeration space should be protected as Ordinary Hazard Group 1. Mr. Ben Hayman City of Tukwila Fire Department March 13, 2019 Page 12 Conclusions and Recommendations The opinions and potential solutions contained herein are based solely on a visual inspection of the of the facility. Proper hazardous material and hot -work permits should be obtained from the City of Tukwila. Additionally, drawings should be submitted to the City of Tukwila for all unpermitted work that was performed at the facility. Additional findings or recommendations may come as a result of reviewing drawings and calculations associated with these permit submittals. If you have any questions or comments relating to this report, please feel free to contact me at 206-623-0717. Sincerely, COFFMAN ENGINEERS, INC. David Gramlich, P.E. Fire Protection Engineering Mr. Ben Hayman City of Tukwila Fire Department March 13, 2019 Page 13 Attachment #1: Facility Layout rehouse Ex Ex. nslon no Mr. Ben Hayman City of Tukwila Fire Department March 13, 2019 Page 14 Attachment #2: Location of Deficiencies • hentam 11 L mot•. :a� �uum ; `;_i -� � JIIVI 1227 ANDOVER PARK Mr. Ben Hayman City of Tukwila Fire Department March 13, 2019 Page 15 Attachment #3: Pictures of Deficiencies for Reference IrIONINIPP Figure 3. Obstructions associated with Item #3 Mr. Ben Hayman City of Tukwila Fire Department March 13, 2019. Page 16 Figure 4. Obstructions to Sprinkler Discharge (rollers in front and mechanical platform) Associated with Item #3 Mr. Ben Hayman City of Tukwila Fire Department March 13, 2019 Page 17 Figure 5. Unit Heater Obstruction Associated with Item #3 • Mr. Ben Hayman City of Tukwila Fire Department March 13, 2019 Page 18 Figure 6. Obstruction greater than 4Jt. wide associated with Item #3. 0 Mr. Ben Hayman City of Tukwila Fire Department March 13, 2019 Page 19 Figure 7. Obstruction greater than 411. wide associated with Item #3. e Mr. Ben Hayman City of Tukwila Fire Department March 13, 2019 Page 20 Figure 8. Obstruction greater than 4ft. wide associated with Item #3. Mr. Ben Hayman City of Tukwila Fire Department March 13, 2019 Page 21 Figure 9. Blue tarp obstructing sprinkler discharge associated with Item #5 Mr. Ben Hayman City of Tukwila Fire Department March 13, 2019 Page 22 Figure 10. High -Piled Storage in Existing Warehouse Associated with Item #11. Mr. Ben Hayman City of Tukwila Fire Department March 13, 2019 Page 23 Figure 11. Solid shelving and open top containers associated with Item #12. Mr. Ben Hayman City of Tukwila Fire Department March 13, 2019 Page 24 Figure 12. Radionic modules mounted on Silent Knight Panel doors associated with Item #15. Mr. Ben Hayman City of Tukwila Fire Department March 13, 2019 Page 25 Figure 13. Fire alarm panel wiring associated with comtnent #15. Mr. Ben Hayman City of Tukwila Fire Department March 13, 2019 Page 26 Figure 14. Exit on to Rail Track Associated with Item #18 Mr. Ben Hayman City of Tukwila Fire Department March 13, 2019 Page 27 Figure 15. Vehicle Gate Associated with Item #19 Mr. Ben Hayman City of Tukwila Fire Department March 13, 2019 Page 28 Figure 16. Exit discharge gates locked associated with Item #19. Mr. Ben Hayman City of Tukwila Fire Department March 13, 2019 Page 29 Figure 17. Exit discharge gates locked associated with Item #19. 0 Mr. Ben Hayman City of Tukwila Fire Department March 13, 2019 Page 30 Figure 18. Man -Gate Associated with Item #19 Mr. Ben Hayman City of Tukwila Fire Department March 13, 2019 Page 31 Figure 19. Security Gate Associated with Item #20 Mr. Ben Hayman City of Tukwila Fire Department March 13, 2019 Page 32 sog Figure 20. Compressed gas cylinders stored adjacent to Jire alarm panel and risers. Mr. Ben Hayman City of Tukwila Fire Department March 13, 2019 Page 33 Figure 21. Flammable and Combustible Liquid Storage Associated with Item #23 1 0 Mr. Ben Hayman City of Tukwila Fire Department March 13, 2019 Page 34 Figure 22. Propane stored adjacent to combustibles associated with Item #23 Mr. Ben Hayman City of Tukwila Fire Department March 13, 2019 Page 35 Figure 23. Flammable and Combustible Liquid Storage Associated with Item #23 Mr. Ben Hayman City of Tukwila Fire Department March 13, 2019 Page 36 Figure 24. Lube oil stored adjacent to combustibles associated with Item #23 Mr. Ben Hayman City of Tukwila Fire Department March 13, 2019 Page 3'7 Figure 25. Flammable and Combustible Liquid Waste Storage Associated with Item #23 Mr. Ben Hayman City of Tukwila Fire Department March 13, 2019 Page 38 Figure 26. Open oil drum near what appears to he unrated electrical equipment and oil drum not found on containment pad associated with Item #25 & #28 Mr. Ben Hayman City of Tukwila Fire Department March 13, 2019 Page 39 Figure 27. Extinguisher lacks inspection tag associated with Comment #29 1 Mr. Ben Hayman City of Tukwila Fire Department March 13, 2019 Page 40 Attachment #4: Draft HMIS UMer'moat/ eE PMwn, I a Wlwe dal. stow nal analUM as pot atthe 62MN0aa mated* BIVe ttOntbt%Fanc41 Ham aa1l7buAiih 4UMlllfl6 TO BE Sf LMF W' Nwrtl Lpb Tgpypat TMde Marne Chemical.mte<,faUPana%Fend uepeMima fe OemlwEAbman Saeeke Nn PAy%d Rtle Owbtty,_ a+NUM U� FP Fla � MmW WaMe lw4hw0 u b Y X !A MB CmesNeit.eo i aPeav T Qasl OaNiet Oast OYl6fr dm3 OxidateOxidateWffiN Coss a a u6*A�M 64.1s5 Flammable Nrt.Olad Me,04pe Fbwr Otrk Add TIB29 �"i GA H634<3 _ Water NntavH liaems 4B4,1R3 diamond SIX aU Mann* sholell Et5y4Akdwl 64-17.5 WINS Fkrtm+dNe Nrt-£amnu54 i3awr55]886 aPe CNkArM TIBIA M Na NFFA X P101014 Avy04 614,1 matt Nall. Flavors TT32185 donor. as 3ffi IAsa..a� a %able! Mal Alcohol 6417-5 O6c Arid 7,921 Na Napa wow Mart 1120004ta Ftammatde Nat. Mango Tape flavor S5TL9 KM. Fawn 11y4.1t-5 M Esns tlanro7m X wet n an ra,mNatapH vl E1by3Akafid 6411-5 Fpmmnbk Nat Sint., Type Mawr 555206 Q. Add Warn 77,929 7r32185 MONWA Cwnnwndon SOS mut. saw raw.), To Natural F6wn an Rannoe11066313 Fixnmade Sweet FLNat fthy4Akole15O106 64It3 M GA 2,3,0 Fpmmabk Lean RssM+ry651*61ype Cent No 2NNIA1oo4d50.100% 6M123 M UA 23.0PG EHa3IAkeltati -10% 6a-47-5 Femme* MY-091'1664 lemon 71041p (R7{tjtirtn ene i-TO% 1999"Zr-5 M GA 2,34 X Hepaatataw l-14% Gammakeryinene 1-10% 2,913 95.215.4 Flammable gO-261-563-9 Peat212735 EM*Mw5W7A90% 6417-5 M GA 2,3,0 Ftsmmahk O&39b59R30range 712345 EM*AkoNH3A50% {.Rr(+1Limwekx1-IO% M-32-5 59et3.223 2,3,0 FiammnMe Pear!, T12291 Ethyl 1,2,3.Fro4arw440 Pid WIT. No MfPA HAM 2,3,0 X Ftxnmabk Nat Umeade Type FLErtrxt 3059223S ENM Akdroi25-50. 64323 M GA 2,3A X Ethyl .acetzte 1-31i 141J66 tameable Nat Pilmap44700la e Fula. EO*Aka4a10rpma Canefibt4% 6417-5 a40NFPA 2317949 Aoktr Add al% Methyl Sulfate al. 6429, 75.3 d947444 =SOS nay, Aku5ai 75-100r4 64173 N4NWA ipmmabk Pat Caporals Type fHwrr03EOJP [flap *Id .01-25% V1�anillin O1-25% 7I93-0 111435 M 62 dWnuwM on 5L5 XMAW, owaerW.V. .15421 win namaelauawl Et 41724 roi3OO5N 6412-5 82004 a H32413srry7ype Hat Flavor 202341 Pry%enkAdd 430M ice+ M UA H4MaFA Y oAxse�6a u MO Autac0l0% Propyi AlNnol l-10A 42-t83 r1.238 npwnprndm505 anFasamaaiaaMl 181633im4H40-20% 64175 a Cranberry Type.. Fawrr03043 FmmlwR Add Pigi fbtaAID% Prot*Ak0hat 1-1031. 79834 141a66 72234 GA X MpmptKgbu OpaM747464 aOpan.eletwWl 4131 Fuit 4#*141*Flaw* 0ny64640.10t40.6,14 64-173 NuNWA Mt. KW, Atairatill14 Nammnble 18881733r6 .MesBlahyde0.1% 050t-0 dH %Ion5O5 ae0%..M.v pAWvptttu as v. a.maanlcwwn GmMI%xble 005. Pkt3Mnfmh Flavor M W WnS 3]88p A0{taldehyde 01% ]60]-0 M W N0 6F82. diamond an 5D5 Nat Talt{erbaa Eatm4[0C A 18.1001110080 Flammable MN Aka.40604 64-17-5 M GA574009 JIrlt�ondon 505 x naWrvlit War wM r%la Nmnur40880 EON4.06015090% 61-17-5 Flammable Chocoluarw. Nat flavor eland Gteead21d0% 56815 M W 1,3,0 x 911426 2-1-1eplanone Marla Add 110i3-0 107A26 Ethyl Alcohol 50-90% 6417-5 Gobforbad. Nat-Flavor6054 limmene l3% 59853)5 Flammable 913339 P.n..1% (Mal 80566 5391405 M GA2,3,0 Salmk .51] Ethyl01rani 5 MN 6a-11-5 ace. Add 1.5% 6419.7 Hat Flavor, Patb.F. 712063 LirriFlammable � �� BeMN Acetate 'v19031-]leJGi M W l,Ip N BOUM nowt MOORED ]0 MSSWr peter Fl. annam..anw 1 Ft. Butyrate 105-54-4 2.1 Alcohol 5.0% 17-5 Flammable Nat Flavor, Tangerine 716951 tilmene1-5% 59802]3 M CM 2,IA x aMty6r n�.0 P m. 8u568 alanammW2 0.41 Flammable Nat Mbe4 Wald E.]1 AF.Im160M% 64-17-5 M W A 5i1 dlamondfm505Pro Flammable NA.Grapehutt Flaw O]1391 Etlryl Akdd90100% 6L3]-s M GAHMG Wee 2.3.0 Kama mmµ(Wbpeo.oa a a lateal Ethyl Alcohol 64-17-5 Flammable Nat. Black Chang Type F0vor 557826 A ClarkAda Water Natural Flacon T939 ])31-18-5 W No 102A diamond mSOS xmower O62208, eutWer praef •.0 ale WWII Cinnamic Ak 3050% Names 10-15% 91366-488 6056-2 dimmable Cassia Nutmeg COMASA0a1100 one 1-5% 5989-2]-5 M GA 0,2,0 x maw �6P715+pl Lopatin 1-5% Sere%al% 91#5 94-59-7 Wmmabl ale •oval &anatdehyde01% 10052-7 Flammable Cknamyl%oval.% A12302 Butanak Add 11027-2 M GA 0,2,0 x Flammable w Nat Cbarry FlaWOMCN-31360 Ethyl Ncahol 7585% 61-1)3 M GA 2,A,D % Bow. Kam Newer° cumtrte fari0 O m le flammable woe) EastmanNo lli. (006,1ble EAN 9083665AlR Sucroseaahte 4Dd0yrn50 272163]-1 M GA HM611P % Combustible FlavorrNn-type 3309153101 Propylene PropNme 0122850100% 5)-556 M W 1,1,0 Nan -hazardous Gum lac. Bean O-300 3313218001 - 331321.. S W 1,0A aOBbee Combustible Combustible Sveamest Enhancer it Nat 3.159551 Wyce150-100% 5]-55-2 M W 3,2,0 % Flammable Nat 6 MMfl'llWatxmelen FLwr Propylene Glycol 34506 Oft Akb6d 30-.4 57.556 .17-5 M W ],3,0 x 60g428.01615090Y Imonerc 59893i]--5 flammable Nat Cemm Flaw Went 2150030 am1Pleene1401.50 % Gammarepinene 11(% 12791.3 99�9{.1 M W 2,361 bled0.1-1% 5391-25 Alph-7101,e0.41% )285-]0e Comburtibk Natpuatflawr WoM]11828 Pr1yytNn Gyim150100% 57-55-0 M W 0,2,0 % Flammable Nat O,ar%e ilaww1M271n03 ,RmmwN�110% W 59M}2>5 M W 2,3,0 % CmmbuHlblm Nat. Bac4 Che. flavor 5743 y5 M W Na NFPA dlannnd an 505 Mamma. 1.3th 6017267 MO Alcohol 50-70% E4-17-6 M GA No ?OM HMIS 1,3,0 X salmOrOPM MOM. 30 mxammy mxxxx,33..363 .. is Fkmmabla usmal CeeM3ustible MIA MoMMtly Mane impel; 704674 Propylene GA. 57-5S. M GA ;1.0 X Flommable H. Lab. Num flavor Wonf 702830 Woe Akdroll.0,15% 7140,4ene Grytel 64-17.5 57.55-6 IA GA 1,3,0 X e Nee St Woes Bread Floor 7011143 8Mspol 41143.4 Gi tiMeatin 5145,6 M GA 14-4-7X Combuttlble Flat Cloudy Cmololon 701809 TS 64 GA 1,2,0 0 Combuttible Nrt 8 AM Tiimmind Haw 701811 PromAene Glyed Itentaldehyde 57.55.6 M GA 1,2,0 X flammoble Nati Ask /WM FIX.702813 Ettiyi Akoh0126-301413614) Amealthillyde 6.17-6 IO GA 2,3,0 X Combustible Net Cann Stools. 702814 TS M 2,2,0 X ,,,,,,,,,.. NAL lemon 1111ht FIAVOI Ua ln 701826 MO 003.1.5013 64-17-5 IA 1.4-0 X Flammable llillPe . me861lee Flom Walt 702836 E thyl Akoho110,2514120%) 8,8.0., 00 64-17-5 37-05. hil 2,3,0 X Flamm. NM, lima Fla., Extract 701847 31974Mec.125,501314013) 6417-5 M GA 1.3.0 X Combustible Sieroll 011 Mier. 117.17 Citrus Asrantiom I_ Vas. Armira 301630-4 M GA elo NM diamond en SOS X flammable teat Coto.). Type flavor 15.3 14549 Ethyl Alcohol 75-100% Acetaldehyde 64-17-5 75-07. M GA llo NFPA diamond on SOS X 500844 POW MOMMOTO PRoft33,¢xXLM(3.64.13 xx lb er 18 roam.. UmM Hamm..m AM. Trae Nat M., 03044083 - GA No IONA elbowed on SOS X . xeSsum XmoRmxtmx - SHEETS kry551. OTNER SOS 0.11A MOW. Flammable Nat. Orange 011 Mori 00001 0.3 0.40ne11e6070% 00nal0017.5-10% AretaltleM1MM15-533 .811-2.3% 1-14esenal 0.1-0.6% 1-Methyl...me 0.1-03% 1.863 78-30-6 7507. 6352-40-6 6728-26-3 1111-75-3 64 GA 2,3,0 x Melaxe ix Apnea SIS CombustIble Strassterry Waterrnebn Won, WS 1046676 - 15 M GA lb MFOA diamond en SOS X Combustible E*Shot Pineapple NBA W / Cloud 69100003203 Propylene Glycol 57-55-6 M GA Ho WA diamond on SOS X Cambosnbla Nesstra I Cloud emulsion 304300051( 217115 - TS M GA No %SPA dismeed en sos X namelloble Net & Mt Cherry Lime Type Flavor 10.101640 EIIM Alto60110-40% ls Beeidehyde 1-10% Iluielt Aeld 1-10% 64-17-5 100,52-2 107-51.6 At No 11FPA demand on 5b5 X CombustOole Not Isunch Flo. Wore Mon 37591311 2.00M0h5d0 leo CA5 • Provided NI GA No WA diamond on 5C6 X Flitiomabla Tamer. Fat. 111156 18866 EOM Akohol 5010% .txxstme 1-5% 6447-5 55119-27-6 6,4 GA 2,4,0 ft mesa tow itit.aut to MOM. Coltelfle OF NO es. ia, is Ms Ustu31) Flammable Cinema., extract 0112 18712 Ethyl Aleohol 50-100% (bowels ALO 6,10% Ilentralelehyde el% 64424 043116234 100,514 MGA 0,4,0 X eestMe roost M011010 TO MOM, t1.39/1.921sh IA o ra naehmomeemi Flammable Passkin Frolt Type Mend II/063 17.3 ethyl Witted 31W% &elk Pad 1-5% O trie Add SO 1-5% Umonexe 41% Damaseenene el% 14-17-5 0,15-7 77.52-3 5589-17-6 23696-85-7 M GA 2,4,0 X 0011149 oultit nratiettErru Mum, cuMX3,333f .33 as is fumes. .16 FNrnnaMe CO. Cale Au 15113ypee WAAveNe 83412 163112 EN. NwM13o-50% Add:Y% Mgt dn6 ry1� a1% MetlrN Mes<al.en WEN. 65173 6410] ] O 7403-1 3b01-1 M W 1,3A % Flammable Nat Flavor Pineapple 86221 616731 ENM Akobol 50 0% A1.0.1% M a< 65175 312-1. M W 13A x EllryIA%oh6110-15% 6417-5 Nat C.a..nm Blend ll1165 VanNln 1-5% 131-3}5 Com0u6NMe 611165 Ilerayl Almlwl1-5% MMNMopentenolone 100-51-6 8071-7 M W 2.2.0 x NrnMa1e5pe<1% S9025-3 Nat MN. Berry Fl Wmsf MN Alm. 6570% 641]3 .1188A Flammable FANWMS Acetic And 1.3% 64]4] M W MHmnd m 505 % flammable Nat At,Punch Type FL FAC5510 Ethyl Alcohol 90100% 641]-5 M GO No HFPA TM./ Otrate 1-3% 7733-0 demand m545 nameable Hat CacanucF671X Water Tape ld 6.1Alm90-1m% 60-5 41 M GA X�arnoF nLm SM flammable32M171u11 NatM &. Nave Type Flavor 62070e11e G11w150100% 60. M.. 252511 57-55-6 .17-5 M GA ],3,0 Combustible Flavor 88t Type 5209153101 Propylene Glycol 50-100% Propylene 57-55-6 M GA 13,0 Flammable yu ttateam21.57 - TS M G A NOHWA Wamond on WS Combu%161e 08631785dt400bm1a Tyq OP. - 8016-20-1 M GA 12,0 x combustlbM Grange Essence Oil IOodN 1509 - 68514754 M GA 2.213 Cvm16016. WNumwB Fastlndhn - 8001.5S M W 2,254514 Com amble annamNlamale6x Bpuac Add 11027-: 02.0 x Combustible Vanillin FCC613107 - 121333 2.2.0 x Combustible AMelly.e C-16 FCC 611•11.8N Phenyl GNtl4a[e 71-618 0.2.0 k Combustible ClimarnIc Nmhol 22716 101341 5/M w 2,2,0 % saMA4ae. %ass. nameable Gran TyNat. 3209145331 P7WNene Gly4Wxil00% Ethyl 0001w11.510% 57-55-6 64-113 M GA w 1.3.0 EMNNmbd 50.70% 61-17-5 (AHa%Mwnene 1-10% 598}2]-5 Minable Nat Lemon flavwWmf1150050 �M'Wn°^e 1-10% Gam a-terpircrc 1-1011 1]]31-3 0}65J M w l,3.0 k Cttn10.1-1% 5392-105 ANM-PMane 0.11% 7765-7. Flammble Mat f AK Wsberry flavor EMN Alcohol 20-30% 61-17-5 M GA 2.3,0715036 X Propylene G.0150 7051 57-55-6 Cambuttrble Nrt.6Mt Pe44 Flavor 2701 MNAd41020% 8emMid 6417-5 12051-4 W ],],0 N VaMM130% 121-33-5 Flammable NatArt. ba Wamme n Ham 718210 Mpy1n Oe B1y[d 5030% E1651 Aka.3050% 5>SSd 641]3 M w 3,3,0 Con0luatld8 Nat. Pear i%vor Wonf21]828 M.N. Glycol 90100% $7353 M w 0,25 x Comku0ible Nat. Ovary* Wont 712315 (131.11mpnma 1-10% 5984113 M GA 2,2,0 x fdNN,stlble Nat Strawberry Banana ilmor W0rl2]16126 1005.0e Glycol 1'10% Ethyl 6N00011.10% 57.553 6417.5 M W O,LA X Flammable Nat 6rarye Gs.,Won, 1500l9 ENM Aland S51.10 610 .IOmmwne 1A10% 641]3 598¢213 M W 2,3A % Comavnit. Nat Pear Flavor W.71.1627 mopos,* GNmc 00]00% 57.553 M W 0.7,0 % Cm0b6Hlble Mop AM Flavor 3209105031 PmiMmeGN[o154F100% ENO Alcohol<2.5% 5>�356 6517.5 M 6A 1,2,0 ff NonMamtdom Ma4AEA N3 460o wi G01c Add AM3dmms 7202-Mt 5 Ne.Mr E0m6mrtlMe SNMn SrapeeWNk>%iillli Add ttAr mte MGM $IMIMM2 M 3* 1.19Sodium X 7 7440511 5 3]0362595ikfiNTd Pe0MU GA. MGM% 51-Sid M GA. 1,2,0 X CdnW36uizlMa GAMIN, Gomm EMAA Tye Emulsion 702680 43 M Pb WM tl4nnM on MS Com2m50Me Watermelon Fl.Arm 3209391301 mp3lone GlpsM 50.100% 5155E M GA 1.19 X N4m2fvwdaw OO4084.0MVdrax 77-92-9 5Fromm NPnNamrdc8 %nM 0mcn82%96099413ri NA S 1,0,0 NAWAA N0Mamednuz Tr150dbm G0rt609mderte 613244.3 5 m250N3 NonliGNA A MAGMA,C0,8M. T4 NMonohydrate 6100 05E S 03503 N0n44Mwd4NS Mumemfmrtme 011420 010be4206 Com Mnpi0kAme AMA. NerviaraMpu ChNau: 7100M016430 kmlmNn NM601506e Com5yrv8 6014434 54 GA CareAva Pl+wpt.o*Add 75% 79.394 M 29A x Cem502* P.P. G 8/P.la MP CarMM6Wk S2G% xphrmmrypnpam2aF 2333R6i MOP Nz GA LIP X WNg470176ON 30309% 600.87. AMminmm8enio2kt T23% M.S. Com6v01Me Premrtlu6e FG31 Srcm Oahe ld% OIPa%,m Se6w[e YS% 1314-1,2 M Gi. 1.1.017265-1,14 X G1Surd Mam4Neh5% 2.96724 NonManntomn Mara.OM,MM Tetndwbruelky4meb-1t{J% Carbon pbtlde 32% 127.193 114-304 M GA 2,0.0 GAMO 1b4 Certnpinduar41150220 1.544o4ykMl10r1,9,41Na4azoie.1-1% 1353G13{ M GA 2,1,0 X Corms.;memlmr Glml Mawmetiml Mer0-13% 102-99-1 CombunNMe 600 Force Advacedx3040i52 Mandan. SAO% Surfed. 64ndln% 14-93-5 T.S. M GA 3.1.0 X Carbon AGM S-20N 1333E64 CombustWe Smarm Alm Mk P7O5Nene GMeoI MGMM.0er3-20% 779353 M GA 1.1,0 X NM,Oo*N AIONN1435100e e10% 042-669 240Mmm O86E143330.60% 64342E50 Residual Oft 10.30N 64742014 Com6100Me 1obo.04R10015411 MAMA Clai 10.20. 59742E2-1 Nt 60 2.1A X Na4m11M.1-1% Gumem.1,1% 9x-209 00-624 MAIIMM 047e14MM2e601005 2599241.5 -_ Comb.* 3tt16e 042Th4400Ger MM.Oink Add S.56O20.30% 900%96-0 M GA MAGI, 1,.1 % %G'Ma41,51,213% Cumm00.1.1% 52b*4 9942E 14Mnd1ene 1/204641 'Femme NTdeu3om 68156569 Cmbm Gm, mn Mrt 6XmN 4544 100.5108 M OA 3,2,0 2-000244111e444e 51655-65-3 21NN9,191*decme 197863NB Whits 4Onenl 0116l 1005t 47-5 O Nn6uNiMe eplvriM gnNrtU 20DT3499 Amebic" AMA.. 8em0a0e2090% IMMAtene lS% 629p54A 9003-19-6 M GA 2,1A ONo.Wmsebw0e 1.5% 17265-144 NomN GAGIGA Tool 7411Blue CMzt4; 6N Nm-fina 110ma Nc-0O Whee4%54545%W heels IdumIMm ONde60.84x ifkmn CAM. COMA 3N-363 406 -1 6 44Mrylk Potrmer MAGMA 25062-030 Co1MAGMIA Gmm,MM12037772 annk AEE5.1% 2401-554 M GA ;to X Olpeoy36me 5ya7 MPP M5IM Ez0ai1S% 26422ffi2 TAM AZA#RN.Aa12.5119 ob*M r ,.aA,A.e. PNMnel6Nenefd4i7440455!841315+0% 9019874 M GA ;3A 4 O4*(C*N4NC012351014 101EE8 ¢p „ " x xxx aawo a q qa� q 2 a ca „ c 4 m o mm R o„ « na'�° n 3 3 333 3 3 3 3 3 3 33 3 3 3 33 3 3 3 3 3333 ! F F!F ! F F F F F F F! F+ ! FF ! ! F F FFFF F 9, 3W�a33:��� $3 m" Z n„q ns A- !I6 yN '' gm Mpn ;° p"g q •43 ^"nmmMba�m$¢�ia��� g �$�FE� y@MJ�^mnnptp pY S; n"R'PA �nn�A n"A Fi"Eb E3 i1 - ; CO o ; ff„b .� �1; g�� a �EagE dd F of = u r EE d d gggWEtEsW 7 g a � WSW E dd Rai =0� S is � o " Y p a m a � 3 '' 9 9- 5 wa� d � gg 8 iz 3 x E x 3 i 3z 4 S i R ay'� P£ a C 3 p3 Y 3 gg (j� I 3 3 ; F 1 • s 3 i 1 5 j z y-g+3� Gi z z 8 z p g ,. yty+ 6' A p �Ap.Eo 980 t 1 Q i E E tldG B R B 8=il G 9 E gg$oH - :. lyg ag t 3 Ci '-; ..R2SP5*g^raY b j jj,'�t5}t� s�E+y Ym gS=xsz - i,S¢oy 8�I 1 , g� gg Yz �i i gg ¢Y} a y 9 ti Yz Qrr1 z^10 d i a 1 C 11utiu tHn!I! f o ' $ € £F;€F( wa�a o FF F FF Hauau�aaaka� F FFf; e € € ;FRs t€Rf tFR€ C I C; i C CCEE L C I I 3 LCL L I C I IILL C i I IIi3IC y a g. j g )Y) Q)) g b u Y b b b u p b b b b b YmwYL0 bbbbb b b b ::� b b bbb b u L o u b 0 gbbm Y y ebb b b u b ✓rr bbbbbb b 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 oaooc o 0 0 0 0 0 000 o 0 0 a 0000 0 a o 0.00oo � x xxx x x xx H g^a � 0 ,a CorroNve; Flammable Gra. 205 428600 EOM Asotrtel.34. elb4 Butyrate 00% Glacial Mak Add 0.4616 1417796 105-594 64-19-7 NI . 2,3.0 0 X X Corro.e, Flammable Grape 207 429800 Ethyl Ax•Mte Acetic Add Glatlal MINI Aloolsol No CA511 A.A. ItA GA 2.3.0 0 X X BOILTI4 PPM UMW. TO p.p., wxxxx p ....,x Greg...U.4 Flammable Grape Flamm 2 4211500 Uhl Alcohol <SON 6917-5 SA GA 1.3,0 0 X 494107a00ous Grapefruit 1430100 Ethyl Alcohol 6917-5 SE GA 1.1,0 0 Notellumslo. 00.1. 2 430102 Ethyl Akohol 6917.5 lut 110 1,1,0 0 Flameable 09/ llm94321191 EOM Alcohol 915.6% 69729 AA GA 1,2,0 0 X Nem.. MN San. 1 432200 Ethyl Alsobel 915.3% 64-17.5 M pp 0 X Elotemable KW Strew.. 432300 CMG AIGAM 41,6% &el. 42 GA 1,34 0 X Combustible le !Noxell MP/lemonade 453930 Ethyl Aloolsole15. 64.10.5 M GA 1,4,0 0 x Combustible 14 Moen% 85Ptlemonade 2 453802 eimi Alcohol El. 44-17-5 M GA 1,2.0 0 X Flamm. Lemon Or. 201,04600 EMMA.. 50-10144 64.11-5 M GA 1,3.0 0 X Nomllatranlo. Marearita Color 3 437013 Ettryt Moo. 64-17-5 M GA 1.1,0 0 N0405*40ou0 Marprits 00E07011 Etbel Aleolsol 69174 m GA 1,1.0 0 Flames. Marpr. Flavor 1 437010 66o4 Alesisol 91516 64.17-5 M GA 1.34, 0 flammable Melon Pamela 1 437015 Ethyl AMsbol 30% 64-17-5 M GA 1.3.0 0 X 0.064rt15e Moon Mist flavor 1 437025 CHM M.. 69175 MI GA 1.14 0 X p.....,....p.r., Comb... Moon Mist Slava 2 437028 Eth AletshMM___ 69179 IA GA 1,1,0 0 X 04011016011 IV. AS OM 60,1,507,180 WOO MISt Fiala' 3 434705 Ethyl Alcohol 64779 , M GA 1,1,0 0 X GANIKENS IMO AS MOO CarebesOble Mere Peplool 44700 Etbel Aleobal 04-10-5 NI GA 1,24 0 X Ram.. Hat, Tartxerin• FUvor 7169. 6114148.91 40-60. 64-1,5 M GA No NOoo 505 M o dem. 0 X IMINd PONT IgallWrIM .OPERLY CIASSIPI CH, 69. , IA or ie nun.. tlexel Flammable Nat. Cranberry Rube. 703970 0994e0e Glycol 54100% Ethyl Alcohol 7.91014 5,596 61-17-5 IA GA 1.10 0 x flammable Nat Grapefruit flavor 706483 6705141011nO 60.100M 64-17-5 M GA No NFPA dlemond on 5M 0 X staNO6 Moir afAIXRIOTO mammy 6xxx., xxx{ . yi, or ie llamrmiateuateel Corro.et Florarnable 4at.1.9.11468 714565 MEI Alasbol 2.950. (91.61.1 Oenatvred Akellel ..aMene Giyeal 1,24499701991 64-17-5 No CAS It Aiwa* 61 13 2,3,0 0 0 0 Flammable Nat Leman Flavor Woof 150030 Ethyl Ateerhol 5070. 1.01,08.9.9. 5.1sinene gamtna-Teminene 0.1 e M.O.. 69179 5986475 12,9,3 9.89 536190-5 7789846 AA GA 2.3,0 0 X flammaNa Nat lime Ltonoo Harm Extract 09584 E771Alcohol 6917-5 IA GA No NFEA planyand en SOS 0 X MORE XtrVikin ON REWIRED 111 LAMA" CIAMPI IS, el. Mum pow Nei nay. 13 .... IA la. or 8 nommaies u9oN1 Flammable Nat Ger* 71E688 70G1Alcohol 2950.096M Csenature4 /491191 61-17-5 NI GA 2,3,0 0 X Flan.. NM...9 ,9l. MO Matt. 6477.5 M GA . NAPA dbmteed .505 0 X WI. POW /111X10.10 P1.014XLVCIAVAPOP 04 .rIA et NE... timete Cortareot Flammable Nat. 641.ml 0.872VWool 710925 Ethyl ANOKA 0.70. Acetic 9AI Nat 64179 6916.7 NE GA NEPA dion amondNo 505 0 X X Flammable Nat Orange Fla. 07 02103 MEI 4.119150-70% 1.81.01110*n7ne 64-17-5 558977-5 IN GA 2.34 0 X PRODURROPA MHO teecANATON NM MN cuaNGEo IN THE Pa . CAKINALLY NAT ORANGE flAvoll woos ssto,. Flammable NAL Passtonentit 7120E0 Friml Moolvi 50 - WM Ace. Arid 1. 5. Otric KW 50 1.5% listione. ol. Gamtimenme 0.% 64-17-5 691_9-7 7790.6 5.9.27.5 23696457 el GA 790 0 X 11.1.x..p.,,popx.o.r. PROPOINCLASS,{1,1F..0, a tit Nom. OW/ e3 9n Ia 0 ogf tln M�tl 1 !1I x 1 x zz x x x x x O O O d 0 Op000oOo 000g00p a o 0 p o0 o OOOOp000 0 0 tq P. E q� q p4 p44;d�±°�� �.,1. q�mQ• p i q Qm n �0.4Q4gQ• 4 ::;: 3 3 3 3 333333`3333333333 3 3 3 3 33 3 33333333 3 3 3 3 b 3 I F I 2 IEFFFFIFE IF EIIIFFF I I E I IF I EFFFFFFS F I I 2 2 F her �� Nri��nnnn� p n ^�n € N nn » £ x nN E u/rr'' H !I ?: �iW` yQ �4jCy�0°A �p �RR ncc o•'�fr{� 1X 4f �;����"� G�..yi& gg I9 7�EE• q'..0 333 » _ E� j %x i i6s'�gg� •4 Location of Chemicals (Chen Ones Udine Drmide_,-,_m This Stete,,,eA.401es To: lrn«wnet u58-open Line Closed Storage Business name: Shasta Benerages Address: 1227AndworPark E, Tukwila, WA98188 Dederatlon: Under penalty of perjury, l deetere the above and susequent information, p as part of the hazardous materials inventory statement, is true rind correct. Printed Name: Signature: • *ESTIMATED QUANTITIES TO BE STORED.. T8k: Date: fndlc4letheat emkai 703 As Dedginstetl On AREA: Control Area el Hazard Class Common Trade Name Chemical Name,Components,and Concentration Chemkal lib. D4it Service Na. P Phaslol Stale Quantity on Hand Units NFPA t>o flonHon Annual Waste Throughout 3 2 3 Comment Aerosol Androil Aerosol White Mineral Oi160100% Petroleum Gas 10-3096 8042-47-5 68476-86-8 G iB 1,4,0 0 X Aerosol Premakabc Xbeme Green 12063357 Isobutane 15-40% Propane 15-40% Helene 15-40% Petroleum Distilates 10-30% 72-28-5 74-98-6 110-54-3 64741-88-4 LB 2,4,0 X Aerosol Pentra-Foam Aerosol, MM 12061837 Petroleum Distillates 3060% Petroleum Distillates 10-30% Propoane Butane Chlorinated Paraffin 64742-65-0 64742-54-7 74-98-6 106-97-8 63449-39-8 M LB 1,4,0 % Aerosol glow Aerosol, MM 12039399 1-Tebadesxrre 10.30% Butane 5-10% D-Limprtame 3-7% Peg-4 Rnpeseedamide 1.5% Propane 1-5% 1130-36-1 106-97-8 5989-57-5 85536-23-8 74-98-6 M LB 2,4,0 X W.5] Aerosol Premaluhe %creme Green 12054553 Propane 30.60% Hexane 10-30% Petroleum 0lstilates 10-30% Butane 10.30% Heptanes 5-1096 Cakium Carbonate 3-7% Cycloheasane 1-5% 74-986 110-54-3 64741-88-4 106-97-8 142-82-5 1317-65-3 110-82-7 M LB 2,4,0 X Aerosol Gasket Maker -Red, MM 12789430 Hydroid -terminated polydimethylsllosene Petroleum distillates 1,1-Difluoroethane Ettttt,iecetosysilane Methyltrla cetonyslane 70131-67-8 64742-46-7 75-37-6 17689-77-9 4253-34-3 M 18 2,4,0 X 4 r • Aerosol Gasket Maker -Blue, MM 10033453 Hydroxl-terminated polydimethylsiloxane Petroleum distillates 1,14ifluoroethane Ethyhriacetoxysilane Methyltriacetoxysilane 70131-67-8 64742-46-7 75-37-6 17689-77-9 4253.34-3 M 113 2,4,0 X Naptha light alkylate 64741.66-8 Potybutene 9003.29.6 Aerosol Hold -Fast Plus Aerosol Propane 74-98-6 LB 1,4,0 X Butane 106-97.8 Butane 2.4% 106-98.8 Sodium Bicarbonate 2.3% 144-55-8 Aerosol Battery Terminal Cleaner 74103 Ethylene Glycol Manoburyl Ether 1.2% 111.76.2 M LB 1,1,0 Propane 1.2% 74-98-6 Isubutane 1-2% 75.28-5 Sodium Hydroxide 1-5% 1310-73-2 Non -Flammable; Coil and Filter Cleaner 74165 Sodium Gluconate 1-5% 527-07-1 M LB 3,0,1 Toxic; Corrosive Propane/n-Butane0.5-L5% 68476-86-8 Silicone 8-18% 63148-62-9 Aerosol Insta-Clean74121 Butane4-8% 106-97-8 M LB 1,1,0 X Propane 2-4% 74-98-6 Aerosol Safety Solvent IV Degreaser Trichloroethylene 60-10096 79-01-6 M LB 2,1,0 X CO2 2-3% 124-38-9 Isoparaffinic Petroleum Distillate 29-52% 64742-47-8 Aerosol Citrusolve Aerosol 74115 D-timonene 25-44% 5989-27-5 M 18 1,3,0 X Propane 7-14% 74-98-6 N-Heptane 70.90% 142-82-5 Aerosol IBS Brake Parts Cleaner 1174111 Isopropyl Alcohol 1-10% 67-63-0 M LB 2,3,0 X CO21-10% 124-38-9 Ethyl Alcohol 1-10% 64-17-5 Ethanol60.100% 64-17-5 Aerosol Dylek P5 II,MM 12057466 Methyl Acetate 10-30% 79-20-9 M LB 3,4,0 X CO21.5% 12438.9 Naptha 40.50% 64742.49.0 3EE07 - Food Grade Silicone HFC-152A 30d095 7537-6 Aerosol 2-Methylpentane 10-2036 107-83-5 M 1B 2,4,0 Aerosol Polydimethyluiloxane 3-5% 63148,52-9 N-Hexane 1.3% 110.54.3 Acetone 24.43% 67-641 Butane13.24% 106.97.8 Aerosol Silicone Spray 74108 Hexane 13-23% if17-Sd-3 M LB 2,3,0 X Propane 5-11% 74.98-6 Isobutane 5-11% 75-28-5 Silicone 2-5% 63148-62.9 0 0 0 0 0 R---VL�.'_,:D FCR �0�� ���"^ -� I��[�� ^~—�� �~^-' �~`^~^~�APPROVED �����^�1� rom^~w��w ' �� . �� City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION @�U��������� W��� N�N��U� ����� ����. ���m��� �m��� All firms contracted by Shasta Beverages Inc, because they are employers, are required by the Occupational Safety and Health (DSH) Act of 1970 to provide safe and healthy employment to their employees. It is also our policy as an employer to be responsible for providing a safe and healthful work environment for employees. Contract work, especially in occupied buildings, may present situations or conditions that may adversely impact the safety and health of employees. RESPONSIBILITIES All personnel responsible for managing contracts will ensure that: l. Each contractor is provided with warnings ofhazards and information about our programs for abating these hazards. 2 Each contractor is informed nfour safety, health, and environmental requirements. ]. The work is conducted in a safe and responsible manner in compliance with applicable regulations. Project Manager The Project Manager will require the contractor to: l. Meet all applicable federal, state, and local environmental, health, and safety regulations. 2. Provide its employees with the necessary training, medical exams, and safety equipment. 3. Submit written comprehensive safety and health plan for the specific contract undertaken. 4. Comply with all applicable federal, state, and local regulations and if found in violation of these being grounds for default of the contract. The Project Manager will: L Communicate the contractual, statutory, and other environmental, health and safety requirements to the contractor prior to the start of the contract. 2. Ensure that the safety and health plan is submitted with the bid package. M \ q0r, 19 () Cl � 9. Ensure that such requirements are addressed in the Request for Solicitation and/or contract paperwork. 4. Ensure that such requirements are observed. 5. Upon receipt of report of noncompliance or any condition, which poses a serious or imminent danger to health or safety, issue o request for immediate corrective action from the contractor. Project Manager The Project Manager will, prior to the start of the contract, inform the contractor of the requirement to observe all environmental, health, and safety provisions specified in the contract, provided by statutes/ regu|ationsorotherwise required. The Project MdnagervviU: l. Ensure that the Safety Manager is provided with a copy of the contractor's written health and safety plan for review prior to the pre -construction meeting with the contractor. 2. Ensure the Safety Manager is represented at all pre -construction meetings held with contractors. 3. Provide the Safety Manager with a tentative construction schedule for contractors on -site and immediate written notification of changes. 4. Notify Plant Staff ofcontractor work schedule, location, and special precautions or concerns prior to the start of the project. 5. Monitor the contractor's work performance and determine if contractor is complying with the contract health and safety plan and pertinent environmental, health, and safety regulations. Any questions regarding compliance with specific regulations should be referred tothe Safety Manager. 6. Ensure that the contractor completes all required permits and provides signature of an authorized person and/or appropriate personnel. 7. Notify the Safety Manager immediately of construction accidents and provide h{rn with a copy of the contractor's accident reports. D. Notify the Safety Manager immediately of an L8J complaint and/or inspection of contractor's jobs)te. Contractor Afirnl or individual contracted by our company is responsible for meeting all contractual agreements and for providing a safe and healthy workplace for its employees. The contractor will observe the following: l. Provide for frequent and regular safety inspections of the vvorksites, materials, and equipment bycompetent employees. 2. Notify the Project Manager of construction accidents in a timely manner. 3. Notify the Project Manager ofnon-formal L&I complaint notifications and/or L&l inspection of the jobsite. Safety and Health Plan When required by the contract, the contractor must develop and implement a comprehensive health and safety plan for his or her employees, which covers all aspects of onsite construction operations and activities associated with the contract. This plan must comply with all applicable health and safety regulations and any project -specific requirements that our company has specified. The contractor must provide the Project with a copy of this plan with its bid package. Acceptance of the contractor's health and safety plan only signifies that the plan generally conforms to the requirements of the contract. It does not relieve the contractor of the responsibility for providing employees with a safe and healthful work environment. This concept must be communicated to the contractor by the Project Manager and also incorporated into the contract document. Pre -construction Meeting Representatives of the contractor shall meet with the Plant Manager and Project Manager prior to the start of construction for the purpose of reviewing safety requirements and discussing implementation of all health and safety provisions pertinent to the work under contract. The representative will review the contractor's site -specific safety and health plan with the contractor as well as review all required safety data sheets (SDS) submitted for proposed products to be used by the contractor. Our company is required by OSHA standards, most notably 29 CFR 1910.1200, Hazard Communication Standard, to provide information to contractors on the hazards present at the work site. This information will be made available to the contractor in the project specifications (pre -bid) as well as at the pre -construction meeting. Fire Prevention and Protection The contractor shall prepare and carry out an effective fire protection and prevention plan, including provisions for the fire protection and suppression equipment set forth in this section. This plan shall be made part of the comprehensive safety and health plan submitted by the contractor with its bid package and cover the following: Housekeeping - Good housekeeping, with provision for prompt removal and disposal of accumulations of combustible scrap and debris, shall be maintained in all areas of the jobsite. Self - closing metal containers shall be used for disposal of waste saturated with flammable liquids. Codes and regulations - The contractor shall comply with the requirements published in the current revisions of the National Electrical Code, National Electrical Safety Code, and the National Fire Protection Association standards. Smoking - Smoking or other sources of ignition shall not be permitted in areas where flammable or explosive materials are stored or are present. There is a no smoking policy in effect within all our facilities. All such areas shall be conspicuously posted: NO SMOKING OR OPEN FLAMES Fires - Fires and open flame devices shall not be left unattended unless protected with automatic temperature control and cutoff devices. Cleaning and degreasing -Gaso|inemnd liquids with aflash point below 100 degrees Fahrenheit shall not be used for cleaning and degreasing. Building exits - All buildings, shops, and plant facilities in which employees are required to work shall have at least two well -marked and lighted exits. The two exits shall be arranged to minimize the possibility of both exits being rendered inaccessible by one fire or emergency condition. Fire extinguishers- Distinctly marked fire extinguishers rated 2A408:C urgreater shall be suitably placed as follows: l. One for each 3,000 square feet of building area or major fraction thereof. Travel distance from any point of protected area to nearest extinguisher shall not exceed 100 feet. Z. One or more on each floor ofbuildings with at least one located adjacent to each stairway. I At least one located outside but not more than 10 feet from the door opening into any room used for storage of more than 60 gallons of flammable or combustible liquids. 4. At least one located not less than 25 feet, or more than 75 feet from any outside Oarnrnab|e or combustible liquid storage area. 5, At {east one within SO feet of wherever more than 5 gallons of flammable or combustible liquids or 5 pounds of flammable gas is being used. Noncompliance with Safety and Health Requirements During the course of the contract situations of non-compliance with the contractor's safety and health plan or our company's safety and health requirements, will be brought to the attention of the Project Manager and the Plant Manager verbally and will immediately be followed -up in writing. Failure to correct the violation or continued violations shall be grounds, for termination of the contract. If after notifying the Project Manager and Plant Manager in writing of deficiencies of any health and safety violations which could pose an imminent danger, an immediate order to stop work will be issued. Should this occur, the Safety Manager would bring the matter to the immediate attention of the Project Manager, Plant Manager, and the Area Director. Such violations may result in the default of the contract. Safety Training The contractor must ensure that its employees have completed appropriate health and safety training when required by statute/ regu|ation and provide documentation of such training when required by the contract. Drug Free Work Place The contractor must ensure that its employees are drug free while working on the Shasta Beverages job site. The Project Manager and the Safety Manager shall determine if additional medical requirements (i.e., Drug Testing, immunizations) are required for contractor personnel prior to the start of work. ./ Incident Reporting The Safety Manager atour company will participate with contractors in the investigations of incidents resulting in injury/illness and/or damage or loss of property and also: near misses. Safety and Personal Protective Equipment Unless otherwise specified, the contractor is responsible for providing all necessary safety and personal protective equipment (PPE) needed by its employees. This equipment: must meet appropriate OSHA requirements and be in good working order. The contractor shall ensure that its employees have received appropriate training on the use and maintenance of safety and PPE prior to its use. Failure to correctly use appropriate safety equipment is a violation of the contract and may result in default of the contract. Documentation The contractor must provide our company with documentation of all required training, medical exams, permits, safety data sheets (SDS), etc., for his or her employees uroperations atthe pre - construction meeting. � CONTRACTOR SAFETY CHECKLIST 1.CONTRACTOR INFORMATION Name ofContractor: Business Address: Telephone No.:( Contact Person: Fax No.:( Company SIC Code: Years inBusiness: Emergency Contact Name: Emergency Contact Telephone Number: / 2. INJURY/ILLNESS HISTORY Provide your company's injury/illness experience for the past 3 years as reported on the OSHA 300 log. Number cfOSHA Recordable Cases Number ofLost/Restricted Workdays Number ofFatalities Number of Man -Hours Worked 2011 2012 2013 ^ 3.WORKERS'COMPENSATIO0 & What was your experience modification rate (EMR) for the past 3years? B.Name ofyour current Workers' Compensation Insurance Company: C.Have you provided ocertificate ofinsurance listing National BeveragesCorp and Subsidiaries as additional insured? Yes No 4.C|TATNONS Has your company been cited by OSHA in the past 3 years? YES NO If yes, list the violations: S.SAFETY PROGRAM EVALUATION (Only check those relevant huthe project) Yes 1.Ooyou have awritten Safety Policy? 2.Doyou have awritten Safety Program? 3.Doyou have awritten Accident Investigation Plan? 4.Doyou have awritten Substance Abuse Policy? 5�Dnyou have owritten Safety Rules? O�Doyou have awritten Discipline Policy? 7.Ooyou have awritten Safety Award Program? 8. Do you have awritten HmzCom Program? 9.Ooyou have awritten Motor Vehicle Safety Program? 1O.Doyou have nwritten Lock Out/Tag Out Procedures? 11,Ooyou have awritten Fall Protection Program? 12.Doyou have awritten Confined Space Program? 13.Doyou have awritten Forklift Program? 14. Do you have awritten PPE Program? 15.Ooyou have owritten Safety Shoe Policy? 1O.Doyou have owritten Respirator Program? 17,Dnyou have awritten Blood -borne Pathogen Program? 18. Are new employee safety orientations held? Copy No N/A Provided 1Q.Are employee safety meetings held? 2O.Are'too|box'safety meetings held? 21. Are field safety audits conducted? 22. Who conducts the field safety audits? 23.Doyou have Trenching tompatenC 24. Do you have Scaffolding 'competent' persons? 25. Do you hove'{Jua|ifiad' po|o/buwaro|imbens? 26.Are Crane and Boom truck operators qualified? 27. Does your company use crane lift permits? 28.Are your cranes inspected monthly? 2Q.Doyou check your drivers' records? 30. Do your Electrical Workers wear FR clothing? 31.Doyou 'Safety C}ua|ifv'youroub-contnautons? G.EMPLOYEE TRAINING Yes No How Often Yes ARE APPROPRIATE EMPLOYEES FORMALLY TRAINED WITH DOCUMENTATION |NTHE FOLLOWING SUBJECTS? Personal Protective Yes No N/A Respiratory Protection Emergency Response First Aid CPR Welding Rigging Fall Protection Hearing Conservation Hazard Trenching Safe� Communication` Confined Space Entry Electrical Safety Scaffolding _____ Forklifts Yes No N/A I). 7.PERSONyAEL 1 . Who will be responsible for safety on the job site? Name Title Will this person have responsibilities other than safety? Yes No 2. Who is your company's Safety Director? If not full-time, what percentage 96� Name Title 3.Who has the authority nnthe job site hocorrect orhave corrected safety violations? Name Title 4. Who or what facility will baproviding medicalaenvimesfmthe job site? Name Title The undersigned represents the data provided in this document is accurate and correct in all respects. All documents include herein are subject to review upon the awarding of this contract, Signature Print Name/Title Bierferak At& Specification Title: Spec. No.: GOOD MANUFACTURING PRACTICES , QCMI-003 Nature of Revision: Rev. No.: Revised Work Clothes Policy in Personnel Section 1 Issue Date: 3/06/2017 Approved by: vk A. Buildings and Facilities The grounds around a plant shall be kept in a neat and orderly fashion that precludes product contamination. 2. All litter and waste shall be removed on a timely basis. 3. Weeds or grass in the immediate vicinity of the building shall be neatly maintained to discourage harborage and/or breeding of rodents, insects, or other pests. 4. All areas in the immediate vicinity, which may lead to product contamination via seepage or foot -borne filth, shall be adequately drained. 5. In situations where grounds are not under the operator's control, care shall be taken through inspections or other means to effect exclusion of pests, dirt, and other filth that may be a source of product contamination. 6. All outside doors and windows shall be insect and rodent proof. 7. For the purposes of pest control, a white strip of paint shall be maintained at the juncture of the wall and floor, extending 18" upward and outward, on the inside of the plant. 8. Outside perimeter of plant should have 18" clearing of weeds and debris, 9. All doors and/or windows shall be kept closed when not in use. 10. Sufficient space shall be provided for placement of all equipment and storage of all materials. Spec. No. QCI-003 Page 1 Q:\QC MANUALWill Miscellaneous1QCMI-003 Good Manufacturing Practices 3-06-2017.doc BetFak ANL A. Buildings and Facilities (Cont'd) 11. Floors, walls and ceilings shall be of such construction to allow ease of cleaning, sanitizing and repair. 12. All overhead pipes, fixtures, and ducts shall be so installed and maintained to prevent drippage into the product or onto beverage contact surfaces. 13. Aisles or working space between equipment and walls shall be unobstructed and of sufficient width to allow employees to perform their jobs without the possibility of contaminating the product. 14. Adequate lighting shall be provided to hand washing areas, dressing locker rooms, toilet rooms and to all areas where beverage or ingredients are handled and equipment and utensils are cleaned. 15. All light bulbs and fixtures shall be of the safety type and properly shielded to prevent introduction of glass into the product in case of breakage. 16. Adequate ventilation shall be provided in all areas. 17. Adequate drainage shall be provided in all areas. 18. Leaded paints shall not be used and chromate primers shall not be used in the processing areas. B. Sanitary Facilities and Controls 1. Running water at a suitable temperature and pressure shall be in all areas where required for processing, cleaning of equipment, utensils or containers, and for employee sanitary facilities. 2. Plumbing shall be of adequate size and design to carry sufficient water to necessary stations, convey waste away from plant, and not to create any unsanitary conditions. Adequate floor drainage shall be provided in all areas where floors are subject to flood -type cleaning or where normal operations release water or liquid waste onto the floor. 4. Sewage disposal shall be made into an adequate sewage system. Spec. No. QCI-003 Page 2 Q:\QC MANUAL\VIII Miscellaneous\QCMI-003 Good Manufacturing Practices 3-06-2017.doc BeriPak Alt& 5. Adequate employee toilets and hand -washing facilities shall be provided within the plant. 6. All toilets shall be strategically located, designed and maintained in good repair and sanitary condition. 7. Toilet doors shall be self -closing and not open onto critical process areas. 8. "Wash Hands" signs shall be displayed in all employee toilets. 9. Adequate and readily accessible hand washing and sanitizing facilities shall be provided in critical processing areas. 10. All hand -washing facilities (including toilets) shall be furnished with running water of a suitable temperature for hand-washmg, effective hand cleaning and sanitizing preparations, and sanitary towels or suitable drying devices. 11. Easily understandable signs directing employees to wash their hands before they start work, after each absence from their post of duty, and when their hands may have become soiled or contaminated, shall be conspicuously posted in the syrup batching rooms, fill rooms, and any other areas where direct contact with raw materials occurs. 12. Rubbish or any waste shall be properly and promptly disposed of to minimize the development of any contamination source and any pest harborage or breeding grounds. C. Personnel 1. No person while affected by disease in a communicable form, or while carrier of such disease, or while affected with boils, sores, infected wounds, or other abnormal sources of microbiological contamination shall work in any capacity in which there is a reasonable possibility of beverage, ingredient, or packaging contact or of the disease being transmitted to other employees 2. Work clothes must be clean to prevent product contamination and loose fitting clothes that may become entangled in moving equipment or machinery shall not be worn. All persons shall maintain a high degree of personal hygiene. Spec. No. QCI-003 Page 3 Q:1QC MANUALWIll Miscellaneous\QCMI-003 Good Manufacturing Practices 3-06-2017.doc BekPaklr 4. Employees shall wash their hands before starting work, after each absence from the workstation, and at any time when the hands may become soiled or otherwise contaminated. 5. No visible jewelry is allowed in any production or process areas of the plant with the exception of a plain wedding band. (no stones allowed on wedding band) 6. No artificial fingernails or fingernail polish is allowed over open containers or in the fillroom. Where gloves are necessary, they shall be maintained in a clean and sanitary condition and kept intact. 8. All personnel working in the fill room, syrup room, depalletizers, or around open containers and ingredients must wear hair nets and beard nets as required. a. Sideburns extend beyond the earlobe; b. Wearing mustache longer than 1/8"; c. Wearing beard. 9. Company issued ball caps are acceptable, but must be worn over hairnets when working over open containers or ingredients. Note: Head scarves / bandanas are not allowed in plant work areas. 10. Clothing and/or personal belongings shall be stored only in designated areas away from the processing facilities. 11. Eating, drinking, chewing gum, or using tobacco shall be restricted to those areas so designated, and under no circumstances are to be allowed in the filling and batching areas. 12. All personnel shall be thoroughly trained in sanitizing techniques and beverage protection principles and should be aware of the danger of poor personal hygiene and unsanitary practices. 13. No objects such as pens, pencils, cigarettes, thermometers, tools, etc., shall be worn loosely above the waist or in shirt pockets. 14. Littering and otherwise contributing to poor housekeeping will not be allowed. 15. To insure employee safety, no open toe, open heel, high -heel, or soft shoe such as tennis shoes shall be worn while in the plant or warehouse areas. Ensuring compliance with these stipulations shall be the responsibility of the plant management. Spec. No. QCI-003 Page 4 Q:\QC MANUAL\VIII Miscellaneous\QCMI-003 Good Manufacturing Practices 3-06-2017.doc • BelePak At& D. Equipment and Utensils 1. All equipment and utensils shall be designed and constructed in such a fashion that will easily facilitate cleaning, sanitizing, and maintenance. 2. The design of all equipment and utensils shall be of a nature as to preclude adulteration of the product with lubricants, fuels, metal fragments, contaminated water, or any other foreign matter. 3. All equipment shall be installed in a manner that allows ease of cleaning of all adjacent equipment, walls, and spaces. 4. Product contact surfaces shall be corrosion free. All seams on product contact surfaces shall be smoothly bonded and maintained to minimize product or contamination buildup, 5. Any equipment in product handling areas that does not come into contact with the product shall also be constructed in a manner that allows ease of cleaning. 6. All regulating and recording devices (thermometers, etc.) shall be accurate, effective, and in adequate number to accomplish the designated purposes. 7. Each freezer and/or cold storage compartment shall be fitted with an indicating thermometer, temperature -measuring device, or temperature -recording device so installed as to show the accurate temperature within the compartment. The compartment shall also be fitted with an automatic control for regulating temperature or an automatic alarm system to indicate a significant temperature change in a manual operation. 8. All instruments used for measuring or regulating pH, acidity, carbonation, fills, and any other attribute of the finished product shall be accurate and properly maintained. 9. Any portable equipment not being used shall be covered and stored in a sanitary manner. Spec. No, QCI-003 Page 5 Q:\QC MANUALWIll Miscellaneous\QCMI-003 Good Manufacturing Practices 3-06-2017.doc 11I1111 11111111 -- � nn111�1'irlurrrw rllrllllll/llllll rlil}lwllrlllhlllll !%1111111hHhilll IIIINIIl CONSTRUCTION FENCE PLAN NE W{WANMP MANEMDOOMANO EVINSOMMFO4 VEN PRCCON DENSOPMENI lsu Caiela Ave, Ia+ Alam5m, CA SOIT REVISIONS BOBISSORYBUSISINI Z Z Z 0 Z 0 U SNUB NI/FIBER G005 EXIT NOTES 1, tA049,011,ME1EIN0?NA100,004RUkI) an,NAUYRIIRWA100 1 EX1g0011 10101DIVAx090110AISONCEMALLHAVE.WMffNNYOf NOttas MAN7f00FGANO3iMA, ( O'tgNAuiRI10,000904300u/E14tt0 ANDIMR1110NO{NA(11ERdtAiN ACCOROANCEMONiHENANOACNR101000 C1tlMADSE09ro+U0R. D119ON59lAl0AtUMWROAIAIMIE111011,N EY119GNS11L1tlI000010CIEOSOAN1AROENCYPONYRSt]RMiNA1001000V911 AN9liUMdYAOON N 001113$ NAN PoMN, INCASE Of POWERW1S1101.1AD A FGR101900RASN.AR4IEREADRYORNAIIE fROMIHEFGRBSADRANI11M11000/ A RN OREECCOI ENOMPOGE0RN000 SEE 101019A101=11IgNR 0. DO0RM4NOIF(tOCCh p009R 000RATODENCE551UUlE0CAUMMA WAIN Dl AND A MAR 40,904 04 NNONED MOOR. A. ACDDgR109SiAWIpi-0CIERNNENMICS00CM.. 9, A1tWwpS000RORERAR:aMARCDMhYWM1000101A151010,1.9AR t0 N4MN.MDEEGRE51NG110&'GM0.1SOILMMt0100100BiDkNREn ADA AW$S^$dR@OMGIbAC9113.AO 0,1Ek#e,050/10400CUA'ie. il. 111EM .10010 1.01 19,000 a1/0111.0111111a111W11E001CAN'INEAI flIFWA1010AkCACE. 11 BIiP0110119trtOkNFA00 OF401111UUWUIONSNl1FNO/JUM PROWO(nIr090000 £11100&kSUnik Nn&EHNf09F001109 0 1400E.AN491GENCYE{E.CIRICAESYSFJASNAILANOM40CAEYR106NAPR4 fClltlRrNO AREA. 0. RAm91,REAUEWG0U0NFRNMCFOOMGSEi1MSIGWfAR 011100109 AND SPACES NAT b, MOORS Elf ENCLOSURES AND EAT PASSAGRVAYI M TWINES 11000EDIONAVETWODRMDREE101I, ENIERMR EGRESS COMPONfl11S A100 Iwo 1E10E1 OR EV DECNAROE WIREgIDIVMGEEACCOM%P.NEDIORNMGNiiSRFGMREDIOIUVF MU00110010013. 0 1,110110R fqf IMIARGE ELEMENTS, M PFRfgRD IN 5E0104 IDO.i N IIA001000000I1HAVE 1WO DR MDRE MS EXIE1101000,K1. A REG10RE0 8113ECTI4d 1010.IA POP ENA DOGUARUE OW16001NIW.000RFA10RE0;G HAVE IW009MOREEp 1.. ty MFEA110010 0,9101R113RM1F.0101=10 FONHfd A OWAhW OPtNtRESS 011,0100 MAJIS AHD 31041 CO0461 W OWE 1AITERR} 400E E4lAMNt MAX OMOAFONRRAt01, DQ NSiAtAIONCFREPERDENCYt04401411kSNAILKN ACC0.t0.wC004015PC1Aw+1PoE• tt EMECDE%CYcOMkGFACboi1AlAtl6EARAANFEDIOPROMEMWttUAUU90N 110A15 g1041,1011 A00RAr; Of 1 t00FCANOIF Iil tW AND A 4041.1.1010A ANY 0011,9tlk 0.11005QCAND1II I1 UN /AfMOREDAAN'GME PAIN OF EGRf3S A11PtlR RRVEE, 0.IU0NA90NIEV[R WAl 1 ERMCIM106fQO1C00b 100TLAWITRI 100 AV00,410 ND AMNIA9IMAANYPOIN10F0(NF001.CANOIE OId11R9A11NF ND OF by /MCNOO DGNRNO WE DURATION. A MANMOAIDMMIWN R111W1gNiNY0R0100R,AOOa140101 SNA100111.EXCEEDFO. li MAY NA(ENYNO0D10N AWN OCCOANCY SNAIL IF 0001A WVM NAIGMAR UONIIY11047 101it0gRGWEDWENu1GSNACCUROANCEW0N01011 0 0R 0R 0000 0. PROWED 0111 ARTIfICW 00M 070 E ADEOUAIE TO PROVGE AN AV0110 Po01 CAN0!FS OW.R ME AREA Of 901000 A.0 NEMMIOP90M1118010W94ft00R1EN111A151ANOIi05$. 16. 100 N7AN10P 00PR11YSIEM SNA1 MAINTAIN A CLEAR CE000110014 OF by MA0Wl1M, LEGEND AND NOTES bAtC70SMOKE N1iMJM O' 40ADEDPORt4wWr041,1f4%ACEO I l EmtiOM,SNf=IEEACE-071N[N01Mt0A ARROR401D10ARS4001x1 041p10.0M7OC.CEINGACIMO0. ARROWNDIfArts Op0C0o0 FVADEDP0Rn0N 1001CAIESFACE0f4000N RtU4AAIC0 EN550N{ W/ AUG EYES, 1A11ERY RACKIW 9A111101Aatt EKRGENCYPRMWAY010010 00N :7 �0000 MUAO01AVE HOFR.AV101/001CAS W%i RUWAIE4%06tANLEWEYH001ACCoo ) .e-000MNAME NKK.—TIN OCCIPA:fi 10000A0RA;SF•1,01 L.—OL(0,44CY FACTOR FIRE EXTINGUISHER LEGEND 0077 0407100Y I4010 FA010010,1A161 A00,11C-1110110004111101K111111041100 1NATEAI101100 AVERAGEOf1 RO0110.0 1FAN0 AWH0UMAIANYP0Ni OF 0.1100SGNIXE M4ASM AONG ME MM 014GRESS Al F100R 1EVF0 01110PNA901110011.1$11A1110 F1000110010 , 01701110041001.CAND1E AVt1AGFANO A ._ WAN AE ANY ROM Of OM SOORCAIDLE A10H N0 OFiNEEMEROENCfIIGNiMG0Mi OURAIION. AMAnMOM1N4A0004400 I44004Ai10N 171IF0RA01Y RA00 Of +0101 30A110011EEXC1EOEO. { G,Y INI107pI E0WMN1 - R00000 00 110% LIB; EMa9NEa ■ F00M: 4 u1Y.uNi111111112.1 020110111111 40 147 51D0AOF AREA 1 136101121 IA01 29 20 07 26 MAIN AREA EXITING PLAN li L { 110 E, RAINIAAVEMUE MARNA CAt0ORNN,0IRN Pp1Q N644 P 1145R6000 x7A+Aol90,rom PROCO%0EY00%AENI 4}77(ai da Ave, lot Manilas, CA 90770 z U _ V w0 ce O w co Qd 0 N ti 000101000 z d a. z X W 09E110u40E9. G004 F Peiiiiit No.: 7881-02 Issuance Date: June 9, 2017 Effective Date: July 14, 2017 Expiration Date: July 13, 2022 King County WASTE DISCHARGE PERMIT Department of Natural Resources and Parks Industrial Waste Program 201 S. Jackson Street, Suite 513 Seattle, WA 98104-3855 ILA 17- 2°' FOAVT In accordance with the provisions of Chapter 90.48 RCW as amended, Public Law 92-500, and King County Code 28.84.060, a Waste Discharge Permit is issued to: Facility location: Business hours phone: Emergency (24-hour) phone: Mailing address: Shasta Beverages 1227 Andover Park East Tukwila, WA 98188 206-575-0525 206-575-0525 1227 Andover Park East Tukwila, WA 98188 IR:Via:F7D FOR CODE COri PLIANCE APPROVED APR 2 5 2019 City of Tukwila DING DIVISION Permission is hereby granted to discharge industrial wastewater from the above -identified facility into the King County sewerage system in accordance with the effluent limitations and monitoring requirements set forth in this permit. This peiulit is based on infoiniation provided in the peiiiiit application, which together with the following conditions and requirements are considered part of the permit. All requirements and ordinances of King County pertaining to the discharge of wastes into the King County sewerage system are hereby made a condition of this permit. All discharges and activities authorized herein shall be consistent with the terms and conditions of this permit. This peiinit is not transferable without authorization from the King County Industrial Waste Program (KCIW). Failure to provide advance notice of a transfer renders this waste discharge permit voidable on the date of facility transfer. By Despina Strong, Indus rialWar.) o Manager 11) twi 00 Permit No.: 7881-02 Expiration Date: July 13, 2022 Page: 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS S1 Emergency Contacts S2 Permit Summary and Company Identification S3 Special Conditions or Compliance Schedule S4 Effluent Limitations and Self -Monitoring Requirements S5 Sample Site Access and Identification S6 Notification Requirements S7 Monitoring and Record Keeping S8 Operations and Maintenance S9 General Conditions S10 Washington State Department of Ecology Conditions Company Fact Sheet King County Code — Title 28 King County Local Limits Permit No.: 7881-02 Expiration Date: July 13, 2022 Page: 3 Si. EMERGENCY CONTACTS KING COUNTY Industrial Waste Program (8 a.m. — 5 p.m., weekdays): 206-477-5300 Lydia Eng, Industrial Waste Compliance Investigator: 206-477-5433 Despina Strong, Industrial Waste Program Manager: 206-477-5444 Your emergency contact after 5 p.m. weekdays and on weekends is: South Treatment Plant: 206-263-1760 If unable to reach anyone at this number call: West Point Treatment Plant: 206-263-3801 WASHINGTON STATE DEPARTMENT OF ECOLOGY 24-Hour emergency spill phone number: 425-649-7000 Permit No.: 7881-02 Expiration Date: July 13, 2022 Page: 4 S2. PERMIT SUMMARY AND COMPANY IDENTIFICATION A. Summary Information The following industrial waste discharge sites have been identified for this facility: Sample Site No. Limit Type Daily Maximum Discharge Volume (gpd) Description A80131 King County Local Limits 79,000 Outlet from pH Equalization Tank Effluent limitations and self -monitoring requirements for this sample site are detailed in S4.A of this permit. . Reports Report Name Section(s) Due Date Monthly self -monitoring reports S4.A 15th dayof each month 14-Day Report: Discharge or peitnit violation S4.D Within 14 days after a discharge or peiinit violation becomes known 5-Day Report: Slug discharge or spill S6.A Within five days after a slug discharge or spill Hazardous waste discharge notification S6.D Within 90 days after waste is identified through RCRA. Washington State Department of Ecology Dangerous Waste Reports S6.D As requested by KCIW Installation/Upgrade of Pretreatment System Report S6.0 Prior to installation or upgrade Slug/Spill Control Plan S6.A As requested by KCIW C. Major Changes in the Renewed Permit This renewed peiniit contains the following major changes since last issuance: 1. The daily maximum industrial wastewater discharge volume has increased from 75,000 gallons per day (gpd) to 79,000 gpd. 2. Added a special condition for annual flow meter calibration verification. Permit No.: 7881-02 Expiration Date: July 13, 2022 Page: 5 . Adjusted poundage limits for metals in S4.A.1. Effluent imitations and Self - Monitoring Requirements based on the increased maximum daily discharge volume. 4. Changed S4.A.6 to be consistent with other similar food manufacturers with data logger for pH and discharge volume. This change allows the discharge of wastewater over pH if the equivalent NaOH mass does not exceed 21 pounds during the reporting day. D. Company Identification SIC Code No.: 2086 Hazardous Waste Generator No.: WAD 988470456 Industry Type: Food Processing - Soft Drinks Permit No.: 7881-02 Expiration Date: July 13, 2022 Page: 6 S3. SPECIAL CONDITIONS OR COMPLIANCE SCHEDULE A. Flow Meter Calibration and Calibration Verification The following are requirements for the calibration and calibration verification of flow meters. 1. The permittee must use calibrated flow meters to measure discharge volume and follow the manufacturer's specification for calibration. 2. At least annually, the permittee shall verify the calibration of the flow meter(s) used to calculate the discharge volume from the industrial wastewater treatment systems. a. The verification must be performed by qualified staff. This could be either permittee's employee or third party. b. The verification may be performed on site or at a vendor site. c. At a minimum flow meter verification must be conducted, either: i. by discharge to or from a vessel of known volume, ii. by use of another flow meter that is calibrated by an independent third party, or iii. by recalibration by the original manufacturer or another vendor. d. The acceptance limit for calibration verification is 90% -110% of the reference measurement. The permittee must re -calibrate the flow meter(s) per manufacturer's specifications if the verification fails. All self - monitoring data taken with flow meters that fail verification must be noted on self -monitoring reports until the subject flow meter is back within acceptance limits. Flow meter calibration and verification must be documented and records must be obtained and be maintained on site for a minimum of three years. Permit No.: 7881-02 Expiration Date: July 13, 2022 Page: 7 S4. EFFLUENT LIMITATIONS & SELF -MONITORING REQUIREMENTS A. Effluent Limitations and Self -Monitoring Requirements: 1. The permittee shall comply with the following discharge limits and monitor its discharges to the King County sewerage system as specified below. Sample Site No. A80131 Limit Type King County Local Limits Sample Site Description Outlet from pH Equalization Tank Parameter Arsenic, Totals Daily Average (mg/L) 1.0 Instantaneous Maximum (mg/L) 4.0 Maximum Loading' (lbs/day) 0.266 Sampling Sample Type Frequency Cadmium, Total 0.5 0.6 0.170 Chromium, Total Copper, Total Lead, Total Mercury, Total Nickel, Total Silver, Total Zinc, Total Cyanide, Amenable Nonpolar FOG 2.75 3.0 2.0 0.1 2.5 1.0 5.0 2.0 100 5.0 8.0 NA NA NA NA 1.202 NA NA 1.98 4.0 1.202 0.2 0.061 NA NA NA NA NA NA 5.0 1.65 NA NA 3.0 0.438 NA NA 10.0 3.0 NA 3.29 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA pH Daily Maximum Daily Minimum 5.5 Industrial Discharge Volume (gpd) 79,000 Minimum 5.0 Other 0 Maximum 12.0 Total 79,000 Continuous In -line meter Continuous In -line meter ' Applicable poundage limit for each parameter equals the daily average concentration in mg/L, multiplied by the flow in million gallons per day, multiplied by 8.34. A maximum loading of 0.01 is listed whenever the calculated poundage limit is 0.01 or less. Applicable poundage limit for arsenic, cadmium, chromium„ lead, mercury, and silver, have been adjusted to prevent significant increase of pollutants at South Plant Treatment Plan; influent. 2 For the determination of total metals (which are equivalent to total recoverable metals) the sample is not filtered before processing. Permit No.: 7881-02 Expiration Date: July 13, 2022 Page: 8 2. A self -monitoring report of all required and non -required sampling must be filed no later than the 15th day of the time period following the reporting period (i.e., the 15th day of the following month for monthly reports; January 15, April 15, July 15, and October 15 for quarterly reports; January 15 and July 15 for semi-annual reports; and January 15 for annual reports). The permittee shall use the KCIW self -monitoring form to submit results unless an alternate form is approved by KCIW. If no discharge has occurred during the sampling period, the report shall be submitted notifying KCIW that no discharge has occurred. The total volume discharged for any processing day shall be calculated by reading the volume passing through approved meter or shall be estimated using another KCIW approved method. The total volume for each processing day on which metal samples are collected shall be reported on self -monitoring reports. The total monthly discharge volume shall be reported on self - monitoring reports. 4. Volume and waste type from all batch discharges shall be recorded on the self -monitoring form. 5. For self -monitoring, the permittee shall collect composite samples in accordance with the following methods: a. Heavy metals and organics parameters (other than volatile organics): i. If time -proportioned composite sampling is authorized, a composite sample shall consist of four or more grab samples of equal volume collected at least 15 minutes apart and no more than two hours apart throughout the processing day from a well -mixed effluent chamber. ii. A flow -proportioned composite sample shall mean a sarnple composed of grab samples collected continuously or discretely, by hand or machine, in proportion to the flow at the time of collection or to the total flow since collection of the previous grab sample. The grab sample volume or frequency of grab collection may be varied in proportion to flow. b. A cyanide composite sample shall consist of four grab samples of equal volume collected at least 15 minutes apart and no more than two hours apart from a well -mixed effluent chamber. Each aliquot shall be collected, treated, and preserved in the field in accordance with 40 CFR 136 and 403 appendix E. Treated aliquots may be collected into a single container and analyzed as one sarnple. Permit No.: 7881-02 Expiration Date: July 13, 2022 Page: 9 c. For volatile organic analysis (VOA), a composite sample shall consist of four grab samples of equal volume collected at least 15 minutes apart and no more than two hours apart from a well -mixed effluent chamber. Each aliquot shall be collected and preserved in the field in accordance with 40 CFR 136. The individual grab samples may be composited (at the laboratory) prior to analysis. d. The three nonpolar fats, oils, and grease (FOG) grab samples shall be of equal volume, collected at least five minutes apart, and analyzed separately. When using U.S. EPA approved protocols specified in 40 CFR Part 136, the individual grab samples may be composited. (at the laboratory) prior to analysis. The result of the composite sample or the average of the concentrations of the three grab samples may be reported as Total FOG unless the value is 100 mg/L or greater, in which case the concentration of nonpolar FOG must be reported. e. For situations where the only discharge for the 24-hour period is of short duration (e.g., batch discharge), resulting in the inability to collect composite samples that meet the definitions described in Number 5.a-c above, the permittee shall collect grab samples every 15 minutes during the duration of the discharge. Regardless of the number of aliquots making up this sample, it will be used to evaluate compliance with daily average limits. 6. Periodic discharges of greater than pH 12 may occur provided that: a. Total daily discharge of cau tic solutions does not exceed 50 gallons of 5 percent NaOH (equivalent to 21 lbs/day NaOH). b. Discharges where the flow rate and pH are continuously recorded by KCIW approved data logging equipment, the mass equivalent of NaOH does not exceed 21 lbs/day NaOH. Each occurrence where pH 12 is exceeded in the discharge must be documented per KCIW approved methods. 7. Should an automatic pH recording system fail (if required by permit or compliance order), the pennittee shall manually check the pH at least four times per hour. Any discharge without a pH record shall be considered a violation of this permit. Permit No.: 7881-02 Expiration Date: July 13, 2022 Page: 10 B. Non -required Self -Monitoring All sampling data collected by the permittee and analyzed using procedures approved by 40 CFR 136 or approved alternatives shall be submitted to KCIW whether required as part of this permit or done voluntarily by the permittee. C. Violation Criteria Wastewater from regulated processes shall comply with the effluent limitations prior to dilution with other wastewaters unless a fixed alternative discharge limit is approved by KCIW. (See Section S8.C.4 for further information about dilution.) 2. A review of any violation will include consideration of testing accuracy prior to enforcement action. • The more restrictive limitation (concentration or mass) shall prevail for determining violations. 4. Daily average and maximum monthly average limits apply to composite samples and to grab samples from short-term batch discharges. 5. Instantaneous maximum limits apply to grab samples, with the exception of grab samples from short-teiin batch discharges. 6. The instantaneous minimum pH limit is violated whenever any single grab sample or any instantaneous recording is less than pH 5. The daily minimum pH limit is violated whenever any continuous recording of 15 minutes or longer remains below pH 5.5 or when each pH value of four consecutive grab samples collected at 15-minute intervals or longer within a 24-hour period remains below pH 5.5. 7. The limit for nonpolar FOG (mineral origin) is violated when the arithmetic mean of the concentration of three grab samples (taken no more frequently than in five minute intervals), or when the result of a composite sample exceeds 100 mg/L. D. Response when Violations are Detected When monitoring data shows a violation, the permittee shall: a. Take immediate action to stop the violation and notify KCIW within 24 hours of learning of the violation. Permit No.: 7881-02 Expiration Date: July 13, 2022 Page: 11 b. Collect a sample and submit new data to KCIW within 14 days of becoming aware of the violation. c. Submit a written report within 14 days of learning of the violation (14-Day Report). The report should explain the cause of the violation and corrective actions taken to respond to the violation and ensure ongoing compliance. 2. In the event the permittee is unable to comply with any of the conditions of this permit because of a breakdown of equipment or facilities, an accident caused by human error, negligence, or any other cause, such as an act of nature, the permittee shall: a. Take immediate action to stop, contain, and clean up the unauthorized discharges and correct the problem. b. Immediately notify KCIW and, if after 5 p.m. weekdays and on weekends, call the emergency King County treatment plant phone number in Section S1 so steps can be taken to prevent damage to the sewerage system. c. Submit a written report within 14 days of the event (14-Day Report) describing the breakdown, the actual quantity and quality of resulting waste discharged, corrective action taken, and the steps taken to prevent a recurrence. 3. Whenever an effluent check shows a pH violation, as defined in King County Code 28.84.060.N "Violations," the permittee shall take immediate steps to bring the discharge back into compliance. If this is not possible, the permittee shall cease discharge. 4. Compliance with these requirements does not relieve the permittee from responsibility to maintain continuous compliance with the conditions of this peiinit or the resulting liability for failure to comply. E. Limitations Applicable to All Sites . General The pennittee's discharge shall not interfere with the operation of the King County sewerage system, cause King County to exceed its NPDES permit limits, or endanger local utility or King County sewer workers. The permittee's discharge shall not violate any discharge standard, limitation, or specific prohibition of King County Code 28.84.060 or local discharge Permit No.: 7881-02 Expiration Date: July 13, 2022 Page: 12 limits applicable on the date of discharge. (See Section 28.84.060.D-F of King County Code.) Prohibitions previously referenced include, but are not limited to, substances causing fire or explosion hazard, flow obstruction, excess oxygen demand, and toxic vapors. Limitations listed in Section S4 include, but are not limited to, restrictions on settleable solids, organic compounds, hydrogen sulfide, and polar FOG. 2. Organic compounds No person shall discharge any organic pollutants that result in the presence of toxic gases, vapors, or fumes within a public or private sewer or treatment works in a quantity that may cause acute worker health and safety problems. Organic pollutants subject to this restriction include, but are not limited to any organic compound listed in 40 CFR 433.11 (e) Total Toxic Organics (1-10) definition, acetone, 2-butanone (MEK), 4-methyl-2-pentanone (MIBK), and xylenes. Dischargers are required to implement good "housekeeping" and best management practices in order to prevent the discharge of a concentrated form of any of the preceding organic pollutants. 3. Lower explosive limit (LEL) At no time shall two successive readings on an explosive hazard meter at the point of discharge into the King County sewerage system (or at any point in the system) be more than 5 percent of the LEL. No single reading shall exceed 10 percent of the LEL. 4. Closed cup flashpoint Discharges shall not have a closed cup flashpoint of less than 140° Fahrenheit or 60° Centigrade using test methods specified in 40 CFR 261.21. 5. Polar fats, oils, and grease Dischargers of polar fats, oils, and grease (animal and/or vegetable origin) shall minimize free-floating polar fats, oils, and grease (FOG). Dischargers may not add emulsifying agents exclusively for the purposes of emulsifying free-floating FOG. Peimit No.: 7881-02 Expiration Date: July 13, 2022 Page: 13 Discharges of polar FOG shall not result in significant accumulations, which either alone or in combination with other wastes are capable of obstructing flow or interfering with the operation or performance of sewer works or treatment facilities. 6. Temperature Discharge shall not cause the temperature of the influent at the King County treatment works to exceed 40° C (104° F). The temperature shall not exceed 65° C (150° F) at the point of discharge from the industrial source to public sewers and/or the metropolitan sewerage system. 7. Settleable Solids Discharge shall not have a settleable solids volume greater than 7 ml/L. F. Responsibility for Compliance It is the responsibility of the pet mittee to ensure that all effluent limitations of this peimit are met whether or not self -monitoring for the parameter is required. Permit No.: 7881-02 Expiration Date: July 13, 2022 Page: 14 S5. SAMPLE SITE ACCESS AND IDENTIFICATION A. Unobstructed access to sample sites shall be available to authorized KCIW personnel during noiiiial operating hours. The permittee shall be responsible for providing alternate sample sites in the event of obstruction of access or upon evidence of tampering with the monitoring equipment. B. The permittee shall allow KCIW to permanently label the sample sites used to collect wastewater samples. C. The permittee shall, at all reasonable times, allow authorized representatives of KCIW to enter, inspect, and sample as specified in King County Code 28.84.060.L, "Inspection and Sampling of Industrial Users." Permit No.: 7881-02 Expiration Date: July 13, 2022 Page: 15 S6. NOTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS A. Spills and Slug Discharges 1. The permittee shall notify KCIW immediately in the event of a spill or slug discharge to the sanitary sewer. A written report regarding the cause of the spill and/or slug discharge shall be submitted to KCIW within five days of the date of occurrence. The report should explain the cause of the violation and corrective actions taken to respond to the violation and ensure ongoing compliance. (See Section S8.B for spill and slug discharge control procedures.) 2. Following a spill and/or slug discharge, KCIW may require the submission or modification of a spill/slug control plan. B. Changes in Discharge Characteristics The permittee shall inform KCIW prior to any facility or manufacturing changes that will result in: Introduction of new wastewater pollutants 2. Significant alteration in the volume (greater than 20 percent increase from permit application) or character of the pollutants discharged to the King County sewerage system Discharge of waste streams not listed in the permit application 4. Addition of a new point of discharge or a new chemical, process, product, manufacturing line, or waste processing activity 5. Changes in the potential for spill or slug discharges No change shall be made until plans have been approved and either written permission or a new or modified peimit has been received. In no- case are any changes permitted that will cause violation of the effluent limitations specified herein. C. Installation/Upgrade of Pretreatment System A Professional Engineer's report per WAC 173-240 must be approved prior to installation or upgrade of pretreatment system. Permit No.: 7881-02 Expiration Date: July 13, 2022 Page: 16 D. Hazardous Wastes 1. Within 180 days following commencement of discharge or permit issuance, whichever is later, the permittee must notify KCIW, the U.S. EPA, and the Washington State Department of Ecology of any discharge of a listed or characteristic RCRA hazardous waste. Identifying the listed or characteristic RCRA hazardous wastes on the permittee's wastewater discharge pennit application serves as notice to KCIW. This is a one-time notification requirement. The contents of the notification may vary according to the quantity of waste discharged. (See "Notification of the Discharge of Hazardous Wastes" in King County Code 28.84.060.) 2. Whenever the U.S. EPA publishes new RCRA rules identifying additional hazardous wastes or new characteristics of hazardous wastes, the permittee must notify KCIW, the U.S. EPA, and the Washington State Department of Ecology if any of these wastes are discharged to the King County sewerage system. Notification must occur within 90 days of the effective date of the published regulation. E. Continuing Discharge after Permit Expiration Date This permit does not authorize discharge after its expiration date. If the permittee wishes to continue discharge after the expiration date, an application must be filed for reissuance of this permit at least 180 days prior to the expiration date. If the permittee submits its re -application in the time specified herein, the permittee shall be deemed to have an effective waste discharge permit or authorization until KCIW issues or denies the new waste discharge permit. If the permittee fails to file its re -application in the time period specified herein, the pennittee will be deemed to be discharging without a discharge permit after the current permit's expiration date. Permit No. : 7881-02 Expiration Date: July 13, 2022 Page: 17 S7. MONITORING AND RECORD KEEPING A. Record Keeping and Retention The permittee shall maintain records relating to all permitted discharges to the King County sewerage system including routine maintenance, waste disposal dates, manifests, self -monitoring reports, analytical lab results, pH monitoring records, and flow records. 2. All records required by the permit shall be available for review at reasonable times by authorized representatives of KCIW. 3 Records of all such testing shall be retained for a period of three years unless litigation or the direction of KCIW requires an extension of that time. Recording of Results For each measurement or sample taken to comply with this permit, the permittee shall record the following information: 1. Date, exact place, and time of sampling 2. Dates the analyses were performed 3 Person who performed the analyses 4. Analytical techniques or methods used 5. Results of all analyses C. Representative Sampling Samples and measurements taken to meet the requirements of this condition shall be representative of the volume and nature of the monitored discharge. D. Test Procedures All analyses shall be performed in accordance with procedures established by the administrator of the U.S. EPA pursuant to Section 304(g) of the federal Clean Water Act and contained in 40 CFR Part 136 and amendments thereto or with any other test procedure approved in writing by the U.S. EPA administrator, and/or KCIW. In all cases, except total dissolved sulfide, the detection limit shall be well below the discharge limit. Where 40 CFR Part 136 does not include a sampling or Permit No.: 7881-02 Expiration Date: July 13, 2022 Page: 18 analytical technique for the pollutant in question, sampling and analysis shall be performed in accordance with the procedures set forth in the U.S. EPA publication entitled Sampling and Analysis Procedures for Screening of Industrial Effluents or Priority Pollutants, April 1977 or Standard Methods, latest edition and amendments thereto, or with any other sampling and analytical procedures approved by the U.S. EPA. E. Lab Accreditation All self -monitoring data submitted to KCIW that required a laboratory analysis must have been performed by a laboratory accredited by the Washington State Department of Ecology for each parameter tested. This does not apply to field measurements perfoinied by the peiiiiittee such as pH, temperature, flow, atmospheric hydrogen sulfide, total dissolved sulfides, settleable solids by Imhoff cone, or process control information. F. Falsifying Information The act ofknowingly falsifying, tampering with, or knowingly rendering inaccurate any monitoring device, report, or method required pursuant to the federal pretreatment standards, King County Code 28.84.060, or special conditions of this permit shall constitute a violation of this permit, and shall be subject to the legal remedies available under "Revocation of Permit or Authorization" and "Penalties and Enforcements" in King County Code 28.84.060. G. Toxicity Testing If KCIW is required by the Washington State Department of Ecology to determine the source of a pattern of acute toxicity pursuant to its treatment plant NPDES permit, the permittee may be required to test its effluent for toxicity according to procedures to be deteiiiiined by KCIW. H. Signatory Requirements for Industrial User Reports Any report required by this permit shall meet the signatory and certification requirements listed in King County Code 28.84.060 and King County Code 28.82. Permit No.: 7881-02 Expiration Date: July 13, 2022 Page: 19 S8. OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE The permittee shall use waste preventative practices to reduce or eliminate contaminant loading to the King Comity sewerage system. These practices shall include proper chemical storage, spill prevention and notification, and maintenance and operation of any required pretreatment equipment. A. Chemical Storage Chemical solutions, solid chemicals, waste materials, oils, and solvents shall be stored in a manner that will prevent the entry of these materials into the King County sewerage system. Non -compatible chemicals shall be segregated and securely stored in separate containment areas that prevent mixing of incompatible or reactive materials. 2. The permittee shall install shut-off devices to all drains in any hazardous waste storage areas. Chemicals shall be dispensed only in roofed and bermed areas that eliminate potential spills to the King County sewerage system. 4. All empty barrels that have not been cleaned (steam -cleaned or triple -rinsed) shall be adequately stoppered and stored in an upright position. 5. Process tanks shall be located in a bell led, roofed, secured area capable of containing 110 percent of the volume of the largest tank. The permittee shall ensure that process solutions are used and stored in such a manner as to minimize spills of concentrated solutions to the sanitary sewer. B. Spill or Slug Discharge Control Procedures (See Section S6.A) In the event of a concentrated solution spill such as a tank failure, the permittee shall not discharge any spilled solution to the metropolitan sewer system unless laboratory test results indicate that the substance meets the conditions of this permit and the permittee receives approval from KCIW. 2. Concentrated waste or spilled chemicals that do not meet, or are not treated to meet, the discharge conditions of this permit shall be transported off site for disposal at a facility approved by the Washington State Department of Ecology or appropriate county health department. Permit No.: 7881-02 Expiration Date: July 13, 2022 Page: 20 3. The permittee shall maintain and inspect all process solution tanks on a regular basis. Any leaks shall be repaired promptly. 4. The permittee shall use spill prevention practices to preclude the discharge of liquids, solids, or gases which by reason of their nature or quantity are, or may be, sufficient either alone or by interaction with other substances to cause fire or explosion. 5. All process tanks and chemical storage containers shall be accurately labeled. Emergency phone numbers of King County, the fire department, the permittee's 24-hour corporate contact, and Washington State Department of Ecology shall be posted at all sites that KCIW requires. 6.. The permittee shall ensure that concentrated waste from process tank filters and other equipment is prevented from entering the sanitary sewer unless it is treated to meet the discharge conditions of this permit. 7. The permittee shall maintain and use product recovery options such as drag - out rinses for each plating bath or process as required to meet the discharge conditions of this peimit. Recovered materials shall not be discharged to the sanitary sewer unless they are treated to meet the discharge conditions of this permit. C. Pretreatment Equipment Maintenance and Operations All pretreatment systems used to bring the permittee's discharge into compliance with King County's discharge limitations shall be maintained continuously in satisfactory and effective operations by the permittee at the permittee's expense, and shall be subject to periodic inspections by authorized KCIW personnel. These systems shall be attended at all times during discharge to the King County sewerage system. In the event that such equipment fails, the permittee must notify KCIW immediately and take spill prevention precautions. 2. The peimittee shall not initiate construction or modification of a pretreatment system prior to receiving KCIW approval of plans and specifications per WAC 173-240. In addition, KCIW may require an engineering report and an operations and maintenance manual. 3. KCIW shall be contacted before the beginning of any limited experimental modifications or new equipment testing that could reasonably be expected to affect effluent quality or quantity. This experimental work shall proceed only after securing written approval from KCIW and following the pei ittee's adherence to any applicable special conditions. Permit No.: 7881-02 Expiration Date: July 13, 2022 Page: 21 4. The effluent limitations specified in this permit are to be met by treatment of the wastes for pollutant removal. The use of municipal water, groundwater, seawater, stormwater, or other materials, including waste products, for the purpose of diluting a waste to achieve those limitations is prohibited. 5. The permittee shall adequately maintain and efficiently operate all treatment or control facilities or systems installed or used by the permittee to achieve compliance with the terms and conditions of this permit. D. Water/Sewer Meter Requireinents The permittee shall obtain or maintain access to a water or sewer meter that can provide accurate information regarding industrial process wastewater and cooling water discharge to the sewer. Another method of volume determination may be used only upon approval by KCIW. E. Solid Waste 1. The permittee shall handle arid dispose of all solid waste material (as defined in WAC 173-304-100) not otherwise authorized by this permit in such a manner as to prevent its entry into the King County sewerage system. 2. All covers, screening devices, sumps, hoppers, conveyors, and other facilities provided for the recovery and handling of solid wastes are to be maintained in an efficient operating condition. F. Stormwater Stonnwater, surface water, groundwater, and roof mnoff shall be excluded, except where specifically authorized by this permit or King County Code 28.84.060, from the King County sewerage system. Permit No. : 7881-02 Expiration Date: July 13, 2022 Page: 22 S9. GENERAL CONDITIONS A. The discharge of any pollutant more frequently than, or at a level in excess of, that identified and authorized by this permit shall constitute a violation of the terms and conditions of this permit. Whenever the permittee refuses to take corrective action or continues the violating condition, the imposition of civil penalties including fines up to $10,000 for each violation per day and/or termination of this permit may result. Termination of this permit may require disposal of the industrial waste in some manner other than into the public sewer, private sewer, or side sewer tributary to the King County sewerage system at the expense of the person holding the peimit. Any person causing damage to a public sewer or treatment facility by discharges in violation of the terms and conditions of this permit shall be liable for any such damage incurred by King County as a result of such damage or discharge. Where criminal enforcement action is considered in a particular case, that case may be referred to state or federal authorities. B. The diversion or bypass of any discharge from any pretreatment facility utilized by the permittee to maintain compliance with the terms of this permit is prohibited except where unavoidable to prevent loss of life or severe property damage. The procedure outlined in Section S4.D shall be followed in case of such a diversion or bypass. C. After notice and opportunity for a hearing, this permit may be modified, suspended, or revoked in whole or in part during its terms for those causes cited in King County Code 28.84.060. D. If a toxic standard or prohibition (including any schedule of compliance specified in such effluent standard or prohibition) is established under Section 307(a) of the federal Clean Water Act for a toxic pollutant, which is present in the discharge authorized herein, and such standard or prohibition is more stringent than any limitation upon such pollutant in this permit, this permit will be revised or modified in accordance with the toxic effluent standard or prohibition and the permittee shall be so notified. Section 307(a) requires that the administrator of the U.S. EPA shall promulgate effluent standards (or prohibitions) for toxic pollutants that he or she has listed as such. E. Nothing in this permit shall be construed as excusing the permittee from compliance with any applicable federal, state, or local statutes, ordinances, or regulations. F. All requirements and ordinances of the U.S. EPA and the Washington State Department of Ecology pertaining to hazardous and toxic wastes, disposal facilities, and discharge of wastes into the King County sewerage system, are hereby made a condition of this peunit. Permit No.: 7881-02 Expiration Date: July 13, 2022 Page: 23 S10. WASHINGTON STATE DEPARTMENT OF ECOLOGY CONDITIONS This permit does not constitute authority for discharge into waters of the state. Any such discharge is subject to enforcement action by the Washington State Department of Ecology. Upon issuance of this permit, the peiinittee assumes the responsibility to abide by the following environmental requirements and any other appropriate regulations stipulated by the Department of Ecology. The Department of Ecology retains authority to enforce these permit conditions (RCW 70.105 and RCW 90.48). A. Conditions to Protect Ground and Surface Waters 1. Contaminated waters or wastes shall not be discharged to state waters. 2. Boiler blow down and water shall not be discharged to state waters. Solid chemicals, chemical solutions, waste materials, oils, and solvents shall be stored in a manner that will prevent the entry of these materials into state, ground, or surface waters, and in a manner that will prevent spillage by overfilling, tipping, or rupture. 4. The permittee shall handle and dispose of all solid waste material in such a manner as to not cause any adverse effect on ground or surface water quality. 5. Filtered solids or sludge shall be stored in such a manner that drainage from this material is prevented from either draining across public rights -of -way or entering the local storm draM system or the groundwater. 6. No emulsifiers or dispersants are to be used on waters of the state without approval from the Department of Ecology. 7. If corrosive processing solutions are used, the processing/plating floor shall be sealed with corrosion resistant material that prevents -leakage. This coating shall be repaired or replaced as needed. Questions regarding the implementation of conditions outlined in Section S10 should be directed to the regulatory authority, the Washington State Department of Ecology, at 425- 649-7000 (Northwest Regional Office, 3190 160th Avenue SE, Bellevue, Washington 98008-5452). • RECEIVED CITY OF TUKW L APR i 2 2019 PERMIT CENTER CODE CC: APPROVED APR 2 5 2019 City of Tukwila BUILD,NG DIVISION SARDEE SEMI - AUT MATIC DF,P ALLETIZER F „, of California 2731 EAST MYRTLE STREET STOCKTON, CALIFORNIA 95205 AREA CODE 209 PHONE: 466-1526 OD Gig TALE OF CONTENTS DEPALLETIZER ECTION 1 INTRODUCTION INGIPLES OF OPERATION INSTALLATION OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS OPERATOR'S DUTIES LUBRICATION ELECTR IC AL SYSTEM HYDRAULIC SYSTEM AIR SYSTEM - RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS LIST 4 5 6 7 9 10 ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS SCA-2910 (A) DEPALLETIZER CONTROL SCD-2902 (B) AUTO. PALLET STACKER CONTROL HYDRAULIC SCHEMATICS SCB-2959 (A) DEPALLETIZER SCD-A-2953 (B) :AUTO. PALLET STACKER PNEUMATIC SCHEMAT IC S SCC-2851 (A) DEPALLETIZER LAYOUT -DRAWINGS SCR-L-224 SCD-L-235 SCD-L'-236 (A) GENERAL LAYOUT AND DIMENSIONS (B) CONTROL LOCATIONS (C) OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL INTRODUCTION SARDEE AUTOMATIC DEPALLETiZEE DWG. SCf3-L-224 This manual is designed tohelp you b with your new Sardee Automatic Depalletize includes. • come acquainted Your machine 1. 1P_ *alto To ed extort tiC f 11 pal let tnfeed cdnveyors . 2.. Hydr is powered automatic hoist and empty pallet discharge conveyors. 3. Hydraulic powered sweep. 4. Automatic Pallet Stacker. 5. Hydraulic powered dol;ble high hoist. 6. Air powered automatic chipboard grippere. 7. .Hydraulic powered 21 1 -8" long acecumulation table. 8. HYdraulic powered cross conveyor and slat chain single filer. 9. Autom� 1 U eni p'aoa e Any mechanically experienced manual and following its instruct acquainted with this equipment Purchaser ;and manufai turer. sys S . Person making use of this on will become better the mutual benefit of both THE SA DEE CORPORATION PRINCIPLES OF .OPERATION This machine is designed to receive and automatically convey and depalletize fully loaded pallets of cans onto a continuous moving wire mesh t4e1t, across a 'dead plate onto; :a slat Chain conveyor, and acr ss another deed plate onto a four strand slat chain single filer. The ..only operator duties in the opera_ tion of the ;machine to me.OVE.1,11Y1 undress t1.10...1)41.1et' and watch for bac cans and ,bad The empty pallet is automatically conveyed out of the'Hoist and into an AutomOtic Paliet 'Stacker where itt is stacked in an orderly .fashion (r,ecommended)not to exceed ten pallets high. . A typical :automatic machine cycle is as°follows: C 10 rELECTRIC CONTROL CONTROLSSCHEMATIC LS Limit "Switch PHC Photo Cell CR -- Control Relay Storage Conveyor and Staging Conveyor are ful'1 (pallet nuMber 1, 2, 3;,4 & 5 dwg. No SCD-L-235) ,' and the Hoist'' has 1c rered lwith On empty pallet on I t. REF. DWG. SCD-L-235 DEFINITIONS: n the Hoi,s rase Shrouds and' I aches FC move forward armi ng ottom it actuates LS.�.:10 which opens Side signalling _the empty nallet conveyor to e empty: pallet our of the: Horst,.. The empty; pal et irnoves ,out of the Hoist and ;actuatees. LS--6 (this action can beyduplicated by "EMPTY PALLET OVERRIDE BUTTON" f'there is no empty pa"lle; This latches CR 2 which closes the. Pallet Stop and overt des LS staYting the Pallet Stag ug Conveyer forw;ard which moves Pallet dumber 1 into thetRozst. As Pal;et . the P11e` the Pa11.,4 Pallet Number 2 moving forwar.actuates and holds LS-3, continues forward,, and Stops; when it reaches and actuates LS i# stoppingthe Pa 7llet Staging Conveyor. Note: CR-2 was unlatched (ref. i�istruc on riot to pallet 2 reaching LS-4. SECTION 2 6. When Pallet Number 3 reaches and actuates LS-2 the Storage Conveyor "stops. Note that if the Storage Conveyor and Staging Conveyor are empty, they will continue to operated until newly added pallet ;reach their proper locations. 7. Reference Instruction #3. Pallet Number 1 moves into the Hoist` against the Pallet Stop actuating LS-S which latches 'CR,s-1 causing the hoist to go up. Note. If `Pallet .is leaning badly backwards LS-19•on Safety stop will be actuated stopping cycle and wait<for correction. The Hoist rises with Pallet Number 1 releasing LS-1'0 which unlatches • CR-2 and CR-3 opening the pallet stop, closing' the Boist Side Shrouds and stopp.ing!the Empty Pallet Conveyor, 9. The Hoist continues to rise until it actuates LS-11 stopping in position for ttop chipboard removal. Note: if stopping the hoist for top chipboard removal is not desired remove jumper between. wires 4Srand 50 (Ref. Dwg.' SCA-2910) Actuation of LS-11 also latches CR-9 which starts i the accumulation belt into fast speed to travel newly swept cans to discharge end ofaccumulation table rapidly and not stary the line. The table has been nearly emptied duringFtpallet change ime. The length of time that the accumulation belt runs fast is adjustable 'from-0 to 60 seconds by adjusting time .delay on CR.-9. '10. If top chipboard removal is desired swings the vacuum cylinders down. Li. When the vac um cylinders reach "DOWN" LS-1.7 is actuated latchin CR-8 which starts vacuum to cylinders. The vacuum cylinders extend and return picking UP the chipboard. The required time to pick up chipboard is 4adjustab1e with the time delay on CR-8' After the time delay has expired on CR-8, the cylinders swing up feeding the chip board roller&"where it is .rolled°into the chipboard;hopper and stacked, in an orderly stack. Note: if chipboard jams 'inrollers LS-14 will be held actuated and another sweep cannot he made „until rollers are cleared. 5 12. As the cylinders swing up, LS-16 is d L switch and was. not actuated LS-11 will latch CR-7 which Whet'', LS-16 is a one waystart 14. The Sweep begins and. he sweep bar releases LS-15 which carries the sweep to 'completion when it is re -actuated by the Sweep bar. Nam: CR-7 cannotstart chipboard removal until PHC-1 is light and the sweep is complete. 15. When LS-15 is re —actuated the vacuum cylinders swing down instruction=numb.ers 11 and 12 are repeated. 16. Instr..uction 13-15 are repeated until the last layer of cans is swept. At this time the Hoist has actuated,.LS -12 which unlatches 0-1 when LS-16 is actuated after last chipboard removal causing the Hoist to lower. 17. The Heist lowers to the bottom actuating LS-10 and ,begins new pallet leyele. The empty pallets will be transferred along the Empty Pallet Conveyor and automatically stacked in the Pallet iStaeker. NOTE. THE ;ENTIRACHIMAY BE RUN MANUALLY. • • • ,..AUTOMATIC STACKER OPERATION REF. DWG. SCD-2902 . Empty Pallet is conveyed into Stacker and actuates LS-51 which starts the Stacker Hydraulic Pump. 2: When the pump starts, the Stacker Hoist starts upward stacking pallet on mechanical clamps. 3. When the Hoist reaches toP Position it actuates LS-53 . stopping the Hydraulic Pump and the Hoist free -falls to the bottom leaving the pallet stacked on the mechanical clamps. ,•• INSTALLATION DEPALLETIZER Your Sardee Depaletizer is delivered to you pre --wired , lubricated and fully tested. Installation of the unit ,is simple and the following check st is provided, for step by step installation to assure proper operation•and long wminimutn iiai. 1 na e ;..ife 2; Remove all {cr for intransit If machine ;is pneumatic and L-224) . No'te INSTALLATION CHECKS LEST ting, bracing, etc. from machine, checking dmage, if any in the process. dis-assembled , re -assemble and, make. hydraulic, electrical connections. (Ref. dwg. no. SCB- Hydraulic connections are color match marked. Place unit in area of final installation. Drill necessary;, anchoring holes a$ required. Level unit carefully and bolt in place. Connect powered. chain conveyor inf eed and discharge sections e. along with Eardee Automatic Stacker and bolt in. pia Make all conveyor electrical and hydreu and Stacker. c connections on powered chain Connect electric power supply to control panel. With the above steps completed, refer to Section -- Operation In truction for Startup and Familiari gation Procedure, before attempting to start up the unit. TION OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Your Sardee Depallet.zer is shipped fully .adjusted, tested and checked out Yfor the three piece 211 x 413 steel can. Prior to starting your Depalletlzer, follow the following_ eheok list step ;by step .and your machine should operate properly' from the'beginning. OPERATION CHECLIST (ref. dug, SCD..L-236} 1. Set AUTO -HAND selector switch to HAND pos 2. Set DISCHARGE•RjN-STOP to STOP position. 3. Set ACCUM.BELT_ FAST -SLOW TO SLOW POSITION. 4. Pull red POWER ON -OFF button to out position. 5. Jog HYD.' PUMP START & HLD. PUMP STOP button to check for proper rotation of motor. (See arrow onmotor). Leave. pump runniig 6. Set DISCHARGE RUN -STOP selector switch Check Ace illation Belt for tracking. Set air pressure regulator to RUN position. approximately 50 P S.I. 8. Operate Patlet Conveyor wing switches FORWARD;& REVER to see if pe�ration iscorrect. STOP AND :MOIST correct. SHROUD selecto 10. •Push SWEEP button checking for correct opera 11 . Push HOIST :UP & HOISST 'Down button to Leave -Hoist in full down position. 12. Load 3-4 :fli.�1l pallets .onto Storage Conveyor. (Ref. -235) and undress them. Set. AiT0 HAND selector posi.ti .., Pallet #' ' u. ? move to LS 4 posttioit .. Pallets #2., 3 & ;! + advance forward to LS-2 position. 13. Push EMPTY PAL. OVERRIDE b,z' to . This begins the Automatic Depalletiz`ing cycle. ' Pa1Y e' # wt] 1 cove' into Hoist and be depalletiz,ed}. Refer to Se#;• _o #2 for continuous Automatic Depalletizing cycle inatrr. -' `_o is . Note: THE EMPTY PAL. OVERRIDE button should not have to oe, p'umed again as the empty pallet switches tion. ee if operation is corre g. SCD-L ch to AUTO stop, while t. 14. Storage Conveyor can be controlled by operator for loading. of pallets by setting PAL. STOR. CONV. to HAND position'.and moving conveyorFWD. or REV, with wing switch. Note: if:not in use leave$Se"lector ' switch at AUTO position. 15. If LS-19 is iactuated by leaning pallet the operation of depalletizin,g 41i l -stop,. . .put .machine back in operation, set .AUTO -HAND selector switch to HAND position and lower hoist. Straighten pallet and place AUTO -HAND selector switch back to AUTO position.. Machine will start back in automatic operation, PALLET: STACKER;OPERATION The Pallet Stacker is fully adjusted and is started>simply by. placing selector switch located on rear right hand leg to the ON position. Manually undress pallets. Control Storage Conveyor for loading. watch •far ;69 sand ,er r: Inca ro . S8G'. Oil# HOJ A. B. ST SECTION Grease all bushed s SAE 30 oil .on hoist machine opera'titn. SINGLE FILER A. SAE 30 o PALIT CtTN COIF A. SAE 30 oil of machine SAE 30 oil" of machine B. ATION DEPALLETIZER pockets weekly through grease t;ttings. hains approximately 'every 40 hours of n drive cha EYOR on conveyor .perationi on conveyor d operation. STACKER A. Grease all SWEEP A. • SAE 30 oil cn cha': movable pa eve chain appro hours of chain operation. ely every 40 hours ive chain approximately every 40 house s weekly. s approx-. tely eve 40 hours of machine operation. CHIPBOARD REMOVAL SYSTEM A. SAE 30 oil. on chipboard roller drive hours of chain operation 'lours of machine operation --dismantle clean. NOTE DO NOT; OIL OR LUBRICATE AVACUUM CYLTNDUS . every B. Vacuum cylinders eu y 40 BEARINGS All bear-inga are;. reopnrnendeci €1ubri SPA 100 RPM 500 RPM 1000 `RPM 1500 RPM Any Speed Any Speed Any Speed Any Seed acc ati. TEMI?ERATURE Up to 120° F Up to 150°F Up to 210°F Ctver. 21:0°F Up to 150°F Any ITemp, Over 150°F Any 'Temp. or y .ire-lubri.ca en, .chart cha3.n approximately every 40 ed with the fo3.3.owing CLEANLINESS Clean Clean C1 can Clean Dirty Very 'Ditty Di r ty rreme ,Conditions and GREASING INTERVAL 6 to IZ montn�e 2 ..to ;.6 months 2 weeks to 2vmonths Weekly . week Daily Daily tol Month to, weeks to 2 weeks t+ '2 weeks YSTEM SCD-29o2 All SardeeDepalletizers shipped from the factory are wi_ for 46oy, 60 HZ!, 3 phase unless another voltage is specified. The main control circuit is 120V, 60 HZ provided by a transformer with a two voltage primary. All fuses and heaters are .V©r 440 volts and must be replaced should a lower voltage (220) be. used All wire s THWN or equivalent and sued for ,.220 volt operation. All; :spare wires in the system are numbered 66 and if used :pe. sure OnAr,t em. The Depalletizer:autornatic operating signals are given'by switches located at required positions throughout tZema hive (Her. dwg. SOD-L-235) . The following is a summary of these switches, their; location, function and ad;ustment. TT SWITCIiES (LS) LS-2 Located at Depalletizer end of Storage Conveyor actuated by ;pallet, FUNCTION: Stops pallet on Storage Conveyor -in position ready to transfer to Staging Conveyor upon demand. ADJUSTMENT: None required. Located in center of Staging Conveyor actuated by pane FUNCTION: Starts pallet on Ready Conveyor forward onto Staging 'Convey►or. ADJUSTMENT: ' None ;re'quired . Located at Depalleti,zer end of ,Stagging Conveyor actuated by pallet. FUNCTION: Stops pallet on Staging Conveyor in position ready to, enter the Depal letizer Hoist ` upon d emand . ADJUSTMENT: None required. LS-3 LS-5 Located .at forwa, d foist Conveyor by Pallet Stop actuated by,pellet FUNCTION: Signals that a new full pallet is in the Hoist and thus starts the Hoist up., ADJUSTMENT: .Ad ust arm to actuate when pallet is fully in Hoist and against .Pallet Step. LS-6 Located five feet from Hoist on Ernpty Fa11et Conveyor actuated. by empty _pallet; traveil rg µtint of the Hoist. FUNCT aN Overrides LS-- :�,�c1 starts new full `pallet in ADJUSTMENT: None req .t r•ed SECTION #7 • LS-1O Located op lower left hand Hoist frame actuated by Hoist. FUNCTION: Signals that Hoist is full down. • ADJUSTMENT: Adjust on mount to actuate when Hoist is full down. LS-11 Located on lower left hand Hoist frame above LS-10 actuated by Hoist. FUNCTION: Stops Hoist in position for top chipboard removal. ADJUSTMENT: Move up or down on mount to stop Hoist in convenient location for top chipboard removal. LS-12 Located on upper left hand Hoist frame actuated by Hoist. FUNCTION:Signals that the last layer of cans has been swept . and hoist. is full PP. ADJUSTMENT: Adjust on mount to be actuated when Hoist is in position for last layer sweep. LS-14 Located on Chipboard roller frame actuated by chipboard. FUNCTION:' Stops automatic cycle if,chipboard jams in rollers. ADJUSTMENT: Adjust aria to be actuated by chipboard when fed into rollers, LS-15 Located on Sweep frame actuated by sweep bar. FUNCTION: Stops sweets when same is completed. ADJUSTMENT: Adjust arm to be actuated by sweep bar. LS-19 Located on Hoist Up Safety Stop actuated by top cans on badly leaning pallet. FUNCTION: Stops Hoist UP so that cans cannot damage chipboard grippers. ADJUSTMENT: Adjust arm on switch to be actuated by mechanism. LS-51 Located on Pallet Stacker Conveyor frame actuated by empty pallet. FUNCTION:! Starts stactc. cycle. ADJUSTMENT: Adjust arm on switch to actuate when pallet is fully inside SLacker. LS-53 Locateciat end of Stacker Hoist actuated by cam on Stacker Hoist shaft. FUNCTION:! Stops Stacker HYD. Pump and lowers Stacker Hoist. ADJUSTMENT: Rotate cam on Shaft to actuate switch when hoist is above pallet clamps. PHOTO CELLS (PHC) PHC-1 Located inside Sweep frame, actuated by tops of cans. FUNCTION: Stops hoist up. ADJUSTMENT: Move up or down to stop hoist when bottoms of cans are 1/8" above the tin line. PHC-2 Located on side of Accumulat!on Table actuated by cans. FUNCTION: Stops sweep when accumulation table is full. ADJUSTMENT: None required. CONTROL : RELAY TIME DELI! :' LAT aR Uz LATCH i SCR_ *L or U 'D ) CR--6I,TD Located, on CR-6 in main panel. FUNCTION: Latches CR-7 through LS-11 and releases so that, CR-7 unlatch does not crew to relay -ebetter. •ADJUSTMRNT. Adjust time delay for. 1 second. CR-7UTD Located: on CR-;7 in ma .n panel. .FHXCTIopt. Delays hoist from going up. ADJUSTM 'T: Adjus t me deli for enough time to clear chipboard of Hoist (Approx. 2--? seconds). LocatedE on CR-8 in main panel FUNCTION: Delays vacuum cylinder return. ADJUSTM ;NT. Adjust time eiay f'or enough t le for vacuum yl nders o pick up chipboard (Approx 2-4wseco4ds CR-9UTD Located; on CR-9 in main Pere.,. FUNCTIO T: Speeds .:gyp accurfaia :ion belt. ADJUSTMENT: Ad just time delay for enough time for riew..J swept layer of cans to reach discharge e:J of accumulation belt (Ipprox.. 30 seconds). This machlre is shipped filled with She11 Tellus #27 hydraulic oil and, when changed, must be replaced with, same egRivaleo.t. Ifxthe constant ambient temperature is greater than 80 F, Shell Tellus #29 hydraulic oil or equivalent should beused. The filter element 'should be changed a 'ter t :e ,first 100 hours of machine operation aid periodirsl'ly thereafter .with every Oil charge. The mach ,he is shipped with an -extra filter element -Stara ri ' t"h e " 1 " MO ."� The hydraulic oil should be changed on a new unit after six months or 2000 hours of opera;ton, whichever comes fi4stt_, and thereafter every one year or 4000 hours, whichever comes first The power 1pack for the hydraulic system of your Depalletizer ' :consists of a +0 gallon reservoir with a 40 H.P., 230 4+60V, '3 phase. 1800 RPM electric root or powering (2) 4. 5 G.P.M. Dpubleu A #H-3 hydraulic pumps. The system has various valves throughout which perform ' the 'verious tasks at ,hand and is piped with s ,.eel .hydrau i 4 : tubing wherever §possible. The fallowing'is a summary of values contained in your Sardee DepalJ.etizer Hydraulic System. Refer the schematics (SC13-2959 SCD-A-2953) to find system locations 1; DFC-1 DFC -2 DFC DFC-5 D±RECTIONAL . ,FLOW CONTROL (DPC ) Hoist "JP' and Sweep Controi.. LOCATIQ : One `Power f r r..e .star • FUNCTION: So i eno d off, tern ted ve ADJUSTMENT• Hoist "DOWN" eonti-o LO.CATIQN: ln. power ADJUSTMENT _ None FUNOT19N Sol Hoer Pallet Storage .Corxtixev:�r Cor:trQl. LOCATION. 0n .Power F'rarr : i:ar_i f old. FUNCTI N: Solenoid operated vRive fori ar.ct and reverse. ADJUST M ENT4. None PalletStaging Conveyor Control. LOCATION: On Power Frarne ;:tan;tf o . FUNCTION: Solenoid ,operate valve f cx•war•s anj reverse. ADJUSTMENT.; None op9`cte, awe+6p f'rrtame plumbing. operated alve t 0 SECTION DFC-b Es pty ' 11et Convey LOCA 'Io_ On, Power FUNOTIO' Solenoid Conveyoir ADJUSTMENT : None or Control. Fraold. oy erated valve to move forward and reverse. y P. DFC-9 .Accumulel Ling Beat! Cross )onveyor & Single ;Filer Contro] LOCATION: On Power crane manifold. FUNCTION. Sc lenold o ;eiated },relive to start end stop discharges ADJUST N NT: „,None FLOW -CONTROL {FC CAUTION: i REMOVE SNAP RING AND LOOSEN SET SCREW BEFORE ADJUSTING SPEED CONTROLS. TIGHTEN SET `'.SCREW AND I REPLACE ,.SNAP RING AFTER ADJUSTMENT. FC-1 Sweep Speed Control. LOCATION In Power f reme Plumbing. FUNCTION: Regulates Sweep speed. ADJUSTMENT: Screw in (clockwise) to speed up>>$weep. out (counterclockwise) to slow down'sweep. . FC-2 Pallet Conveyor ,Speed Control LOCATION: In Power Frame Plumb! ng FUNCTION; Regulates forward znd reverse speed 1 pallet conveyor together anti forwa chipboard rollers. ADJUSTMENT: Screw in (ciockwise) tospeed up conveyors, out (counterclockwise) to slow down conveyor As the conveyors speed uP chipboard rollers slow down. FC-3 Single Piker Speed Cont.rol.' LOCATIO I. At Single F'....ler motor . FUNCTION; R, gul. tea ,single f'i;ler Peed. ADJUSTMENT: Screw :ir, (clockwise to speed up single fil out (counterclockwise, to slow dawn. FC-6 Accumulating belt s e LOCATION; Near.accum FUNCT tQN: Regul ties ADJUSTMENT: Screw belt, oul z control. ,:.ate::g .belt el.t. speed. cla e) o; FO-1 O Cross . Conveyor speed ontro: LOCATION 'At cross conveyor, motor. FUNCTION: Regulates cros,s conveyor , speed . ADJUSTMENT: Screw in 'c�Lc w'kWise) to speed up ,cros out (cant rrc:ockwise) to slow down.. Mc) toT. of al rd spee to speed up a+ ckwtse) to sl cumula t w down. er RV-1 A&B Primary system pressure relief. LOCATION: On hydraulic power unit. FUNCTION: Relieves system pressure when safe ? in it is ' exceeded. .ADJUSTMENT: Preset at 1000-1300 P.S.I. To re -adjust, raise Hoist to top and hold reading pressure gauge. Screw in to -increase, out 'to decrease pressure. DO NOT ADJUST OVER 14O0 F.S.I. RV-2 Sweep system pressure relief. OCAION.: In..}Power Frame =plurbing. FUNCTION: To stop sweep in case, of sweep jam. ADJU?STNENT Preset at 250 P.SI. DO NOT ADJUST. D iif M A N C TELEPHONE: kk H E S P"rroducfs T E R, 313428.8314 ' 1 M 1 C H I S A tHCIT N, Co. 1.). � 8. A. t1111111111111111{It11t1IiHt1#II1111111ti1111iI111111it1111i1l1111111111111111111111111111####111#11N A SUBSIDIARY v OP BROWN ThTflAL D 3NA11PwZ Mso. CO. LIST Customer SCR I�f COI' P Quote No. Date By Distribuut�o%r N Address ' /� S.O. No. L.."7-r?i.879rA.11 r � / /� sro 7o, C4 /�� %WIC��(r�i/'e4 J/1•i 4, 1, P 1 a PON 5z 6 7131 Data 0.7/7Z 8y x .5 ? _ Ft3 c3 $ 7/ Ouantity this order 2 . ..1444�i Sheet_,L... of / ITEM QUA. PER UNIT PART NO. DESCRIPTION l / , 040 6 519-e e. i vo /, 1 / 0 ,0oz4--o•oz 171f 40( M "G. /1'. : trr 1 /f3-//3 - 8 --/a : / 't./ t P 5P-.1/629 ....�. /4 HP /Nov re 7)N1 .1c) fA.1773 "r G /.$' T fA . /?E.4.l,qNc.G E4EC. AA i il - / sP—/340 M-.3°v r<5N.4rr C'ouPlr) sP-/3181. .il, ............... , 1 if' 0t3 . sn-/34$7 / 3/8" J1v0 S" 1 C cf u i7 4. /A1 6 ! ,3p- 13Z/+ � f�'c'C ._ caa .Sv cT/c 4 r, 4-' E" .► . 15r-46 2M -.d4Z ,qEis- / F. r v44vr { /24 4 Al A i. 5 • - r � 1 1 ' 4o-00420-05 f � T 4 W,EE7 /•«4A/ 9 r-• 34/i/, .4t 4,VORGrp Pt 15L 6-77J3 ♦ • • "% A `.�Ca1• v.:4mmIR, trllCtllC)AN 46156 A SI'RSIi3l1J V P! hr.rt.a Are?". Co. . •4 t .\ • . if T r • r • • -1 POWER UNIT STARTUP INFORMATION While in transit or during installation, a power unit may be subjected to many unusual conditions. On systems with separately mounted pumps and motors, the alignment between shafts should be checked with an indicator or straight edge and adjustments made if necessary. Pump misalignment drastically reduces pump bearing life. 2. Fill the reservoir with a premium grade hydraulic fluid with a viscosity index. of 90 or higher. For machine tool feed, and similar applications at pressures to 600 PSI and temperatures to130°F, a fluid viscosity of 150 SSU at 100°F is permissible. For higher pressures and temperatures, a fluid viscosity from 225 to 325 SSU at 100°F will provide maximum pump service life. For cold startup -applications at fiemperatures down to 0°F, Automatic Transmission Fluid, Type A will usually prove satisfactory. Connect the motor to the proper electrical source, checking the motor nameplate for proper wiring of dual voltage motors. Jog the motor to check rotation. Poly -phase motors are bi-directional and proper rotation can be established by ' reversing any two power leads. The electrical characteristics for valves are shown on solenoid covers. CAUTION; Simultaneously energizing both solenoids on double solenoid valves will cause coil burnout. 4. System pressures should be set as low as possible to prevent unnecessary fluid heating; on some applications, this setting may be from 50 to 200 PSI above necessary static pressures to_overcome dynamic pressure drop or to achieve proper acceleration. . 5. Pump noise and !'crackle" le'riiost often caused by air entering the pump suction. The tightening of suction fittings will usually eliminate such problems. If pump fails to prime, vent pump discharge to atmosphere to establish fluid flow. 6. The fluid level should be maintained so it always shows in the sight gauge. This is of utmost importance when an immersion type heat exchanger is used to prevent condensation from collecting on uncovered cooling coils. 7. After the first few hours of operation, any foreign material from the system plumbing will be flushed to the reservoir. It is good practice to drain and replace the initial filling, and to clean the reservoir and suction strainer. 3. For most industrial applications, an operating temperature of 150°F is consid- ered maximum. At higher temperatures, difficulty is often experienced in main- taining reliable and consistent hydraulic control, component service life Is reduced, hydraulic fluid deteriorates, and a potential danger to operating personnel is created. 9. At least once a year or every 4,000 operating hours, "the reservoir, suction strainer and airvent filter should be cleaned; at this time, check the entire system for possible future difficulties. Some application or environmental conditions may dictate such maintenance be performed at more frequent intervals. MANC Products Co. RR. MICHIGAN POWER UNIT STARTUP INFORMATION t '" HFM .U.H '.1. 10 64 .N DRAWIN© NO. ko-00806-02 V.H ••••..um.r am/Shoop, Nf.CO. wT. + A 8 C 0 E ! G ** T- 20-F 160 1.8 24-3/8 18 20-1/4 2-1/2 5-1/2 7 .6 T. 30-7 290 3.6 36-3/8 24 20-1/4 3-1/2 7 10 .7 T- 40-7 390 3.6 36-3/8 24 30-1/4 2-1/2 7 18 .9 T- 60-F +1t40 6.1 48.7/8 30 22-1/4 5-1/2 8 14 16 1.1 T- 904 440 6.1 48-3/8 30 22-1/4 2-1/2 8 14 16 1.4 7-1004 560 7.6 60-3/8 30 25-1/4 5-1/2 8 14 16 1.7 7-I20lF 560 7.6 60-3/8 30 25-1/4 2-1/2 8 14 16 2.0 + GALLOIIS PER INCH OF 01L 1I LOCATION TO DE DETERMINED BY CUSTOM DIIIT 1IEf GN OR AS SPECIFIED ON PI*CNASI ORDER. * * MINIMUM NEAT REJECTION RATE IN HORSEPOWER WITH RESERVOIR FILLED TO NOMINAL RATED CAPACITY. AND WITH REASONABLE CLEARANCES TO ALLOW FREE CIRCULATION. OIL TEMPERATURE 60° ABOVE AMBIENT. le Mt NM Ica 1 6 == = = arc:= a¢a = = J } r $e a= GAF war log a0: =BAYS » . = ae ar >rt vs* = zne Double A Products. Co. A A.60.A.y da..... • SP A ESSORIES ITEM PART N0. I AIR VENT FILTER 0P-2948' 2 FILLER STRAINER SP-2949 3 COVER GASKET 40-00726-03 4 CLEAN QUT COVER 40-00644.02 5 SIONT CASE AWAKE SICNT. BABE ASSEMBLY WITH MANOMETER SIGHT GAGE PART$ 1!0-00611-10 40-00611-11 40-00611-0) 40-00611-02 B2-20341-0B 40-00615-10 my. CAST IRON LENS. ACRYLIC 0alINC 31I6 x 3-7/1 TREAINIIETEA HY©R UC RESERVOIRS °++•12 S71 NYMAN 0AWIHGHO. 40-00405-02 characteristics Design (Gerotor) fixed, positive delivery Mounting Bose, flange, pilot Connections. Inlet Pipe Size .................... . . . . . . . . . . * . 1-1/4 Outlets Pipe Size ...............................3/4 Pipe Thread ....................... . NPTF or BSP Drive connections Flexible coupling, gear, chain or belt Shah diameter -, ............... .999/.998 key 1/4 x 7/8 rotation Right hand, clockwise, viewed from shaft Speed endLeft hand, counterclockwise, is available. minimum ...... ............. ....... ........ . 400 maximum 1800 (except for H-12 which is 1200) Pressure, maximum continuous 2000 (except for H-8 which 1s 1500 and H-12 which is 1200) Output and HP) See Performance Graphs, Application Requirements) and Performance Catalog 20-07465-01 Weight (approx) pilot flange base H-H, 59 �3s 79 Ibs 76 Ibs Service information provided here concerns two single pimps of the H series which are assembled on a common drive shaft. Various sizes within these series provide several possible combinations. Figure 2, page 2, is a cross sec- tion view of a flange mounting double pump. Assembly of each unit is specified by the code model stamped into the name plate attached to the body of the pump. The model code Is shown in Figure 3, page 2. operation Pumping is done by Gerotor sets comprised of inner and outer elements rotating within a body. The inner element is keyed to the drive shaft. As the shaft turns, the gear of the inner element turns' the outer element (Figure 1) so that chambers between the teeth enlarge and draw in fluid REASING VOLUME (INTAKE) as they pass by the inlet port. They decrease In size to force the fluid out the outlet port as they complete the cycle. One cycle occurs for every seven to nine shaft revolutions. Size and number of teeth and width of Gerotor element determines the amount of fluid pumped. Figure 1 MANCHESTER, MICHIGAN HIGH WYCOMBE, BUCKS, ENGLAND S-10008 DOU PORT PLATE GEROTOR SET 11111111111111 SHAFT COUPLIN t11110011p111 *Nor, Figure 2 GEROTOR SET PLUG HERE FOR CLOC SE ROTATION CLOCKWISE ROTATION PLUG HERE FOR COUtd'fERCLOCKY ISE ROTATION ti DRIVE Soule END SIZE rates► DRIVEN sow, - END OIZE NOM - MOUNTING - ROTATION (Mewed fro Ihel! end)m - OPTIONS DESIGN '',READ H • 3 5 8 12 H 3 5 $ 12 p Clockwise t C Counter- clockwise 10 Std shaft 20 Tlw shaft 30 External drain 40 Thru shaft- ,external amity B1 " No symbol NPTF E SSP Figure 3 preventive maintenance %/Fluid viscosity should be more than 80 SSU at maximum operating temperature. j/Make certain circuit fluid ;connections are tight to pre- vent leaks or entry of air into the system. %/Look for signs of shaft seal leakage. Replace seals If necessary. j/Check reservoir fluid level to assure an adequate supply at the pump intake. When adding fluid, always pour it through a 200 mesh ow finer screen. I/Inspect the filter element and rep lace it if necessary. Continual filtration shou Id be done by the use of a 25 micron, full -flow filter or a 10 micron by-pass Filter. Look for f I u id contamination. If it is contaminated, drain the system and throughly clean the reservoir. NOTE No periodic adjustments are required. All lubrication in the pump is provided, by system fluid flow. Check body screw torque. Retorque if necessary. Reassembly, page 5.) %/Change the filters and flush the systemprom it and re- fill it with clean fluid. 1/The reservoir air breather should be replaced if it is dirty. • ✓Lubrication vf :heft coupling should be done as specified by the coupling manufacturer. Make certain shaft align- ment with the driving source is maintained within the recommended allowance (see Installation, page 5).. „,Z,,,,,,,,,....5” trouble shooting It might be one ( f.these things. Not delivering fluid properly? *Pump may be driven in the wrong direction of rotation *Drive shaft broken, or shaft key sheared (direct drive) •Intake pipe from reservoir blocked, or vis- cosity'too-heavy to prime (Viscosity should not exceed 600 SSU) *Intake air Teaks *Pump not priming *Fluid level too low System pressure too low? *Relief valve set too low *Worn pump parts causing extreme internal leakage Making noise? *Partly clogged intake strainer or restricted intake pipe *Defective bearing *Air leak at pump intake pipe joints or shaft seal *Drive speed too fast or too slow *Coupling misalignment • Shaft seal leaking? *Seal wom or damaged *Excessive pressure on seals Excessive heat? (over 400° F. or hot in comparison with circuit lines.) *Too much thrust on bearings *Fluid temperature too high Reverse immediately to prevent seizure. Check direction of drive rotation (proper rotation direction is indicated by arrow on the body). Remove pump from mounting and determine damage to the pump. Replace if necessary. Drain system. Add clean fluid of proper viscosity and specifications. Filter it as recommended. Check system filter for cleanliness. Check intake connections. Tighten securely. Loosen connection in outlet line. Bleed air until fluid flows. Reservoir fluid level must be above the opening of the intake pipe. (The system should always be checked at initial startup to make certain it is filled with fluid.) After initial start up, reservoir fluid level should be re- checked. Fluid should be added If necessary. Adjust the relief valve. Use a pressure gauge. Replace Gerotor sets and take required corrective steps after examination of pump parts such as the port plate and heads. Pump must receive intake fluid freely or cavitation results. Drain system, clean the intake pipe, and clean or replace the strainer. Add new fluid and strain by recommended procedures. Replace the bearings and inspect the shaft. - Pour fluid on joints and around the drive shaft seal while listening for change in sound. Tighten joints as required. Replace the shaft seals if necessary. Check the shaft journal for scoring at the contact area and replace if necessary. Drive pump within its recommended speed range. Check the bearings and seals. Replace if necessary, and realign shafts. Always check before start up. Allowable misalignment is .005. Replace seals. (See Reassembly.) Check for restrictions or excessive length of line on externally drained models. Internally drained models should have drain to inlet side with not more than 10 psi pressure. Shaft must not be out of line more than .005 with the power source shaft. Shaft ends should have a gap of 1/8 minimum. Pump should be shut down immediately after comparing pump, inlet line and reservoir temperatures. If the pump is excessively hot, it should be overhauled. 3 repair and overhaul CAUTION Tum the electric power off and relieve the system of trapped pressure before opening any circuit connections. Cleanliness is extremely important in the care of hydraulic systems. Only a clean, Tint -free work surface should be used. Areas around openings to be made in the system should be care- fully cleaned to keep dirt from entering. All exposed ports of the system should be capped or covered. Disassemble only as faras necessary to correct or prevent future trouble. This may be done as in Figure 5, pages 6 and 7 without the use of special tools. Trouble shooting may be done with the help of the analysis on page 3. Remember that many seeming pump failures are really failures in other parts of the system and should be tracked down before corrective action is attempted. Strategically located representatives oV Double A products not only offer new units in case replacement is necessary, but also often hove warehouse ports, repair, and overhaul facilities available. Also offered at the Double A factory are two types of specialized pump repairs: Pump repair or overhaul also is offered at the Double A ory: All parts are replaced except castings. A new pump runty is issued. Specialized field service help is available From Double A representatives as required. Service Tools Special tools, with exception of a shaft seal driver, are not needed to service these pumps. The seal driver con be made • as shown in Figure 4. Pumps should be token apart as shown in Figure 5. Bearings which remain in the heads 'and bodies during disassembly should be pulled for inspection or replacement. After disengaging the pump from its shaft coupling or other drive connection, detach the base or flange and shaft key. Place the pump cap or head end up In a vise which has pro- tective jaws. Remove the four cover screws, cap and gasket. The bearing should slip from the shaft as soon as the snap ring is off. The eight body screws which are torque tight to 40 ft Ibs then are loosened to permit removalof the head, and shaft bearing. Remove the eccentric ring and Gerotor set,locating pin,and key. Unscrew eight bolts from the body. d head and rem The Gerotor set is then slipped from its key on the shaft. After loosening the four screws securing the seal housing and head, slip the head, bearing, and bearing retainer off. Unfasten the snap ring for. removal of the bearing and its "0" ring. The remaining snap ring, seal housing and seals are ready for removal. Repair Wash metal parts In clean mineral solvent and blow them dry with filtered .compressed air. Place them on a clean sur- face for inspection. •Replace all bearings at eachoverhoui . Otherwise, bear- ings should be checked For wear, cracks, pitted races and balls by rotating them under pressure. Replace if defective. •Replace shaft seals, "0" rings and gasket exposed For repair. Replace completely at each overhaul. •Shaft journal for the seal should be scanned For wear or scores. Replace the shaft if scores cpnnot be removed by light polishing. A smooth groove not exceeding .005 is acceptable. •Lightly stone Gerotor•set foces as a precaution against burrs or other raised surfaces caused in shipping or hond- ling• Reassembly Dip ports in hydraulic system fluid so they slip into ploce easily. Small amounts of grease or petroleum jelly compatible with system fluid may be used to stick "O" rings in place during assembly. Parts are ossembled in reverse order of disassembly with the following points observed. 'With use of shaft seal drivers (Figure 4), assemble the two shaft seals so they are back to bock with the space between them filled with grease compatible with system fluid. The inner seal lip should be exposed at the face of the pump. Make certain the inner seal is inserted squarely into the housing with the shoulder of the inner seal driver bottoming squarelyagainst the housing face. The some care should be used in inserting the outer seal . Before thrusting the shaft into the housing and through the seals, fill the keyway with o "holP' key or heavy grease to make certain it doesn't cut the seals. ()Press the bearings into the body about 3/64" below the surface facing the port plate. An arbor press may be used• for this. •In internally drained models, the drain plug in each head must always be located on same side as the outlet parts. Both drain ports in each head are plugged in externally drained models. •Be certain locating pins and eccentric dowels are in- serted correctly. Torque bolts in pump heads to 40 ft/Ib. •Turn the shaft by hand before assembling the end cap to make certain internal parts rotate freely. Never :tort o pump which shows evidence of binding. Changing shaft rotation direction — Direction of rotation depends on the eosition of the eccen- tric °rings -and port plates. To change rotation, loosen the eight bolts securing each head to the main body.(Discharge is right or left-hand as viewed from the shaft end.) •Clockwise rotation (right-hand discharge) Counterclockwise rotation (left-hand discharge) Position the port plates and eccentric rings with outside grooves aligned on top, as shown in Figure 5, poge,7. Insert the locating dowels through the bottom holes. •Counterclockwise rotation (right-hand discharge) Clockwise rotation (left-hond discharge) Rotate the port plates and eccentric rings I80° about the shaft center line, so that the outside grooves ore on the 'bottom. The locating dowels are not 'used. Relocating outlet ports — To change location of outlet ports, loosen eight bolts in each head and free main body containing ports. Rotate the body 180° about vertical axis, so that foot mounting holes re- main on the bottom. For internally drained models relocate drain plugs to same side as outlet ports. If shaft rotation is to remain the some,rotate eccentric rings and port plates as mentioned above("Changing shaft direction"). Otherwise, direction of shaft rotation will be reversed. installation If the pump has been extensively repaired or renovated, be careful to reinstall it properly. (See Installation Drawing I- 10006.) The pump may be installed in any position. But make certain the direction of shaft rotation conforms to that of the power source. Because it Is important to adequately align the shafts, o flexible coupling should be used. Extreme cans is necessary to avoid excessive side Toads on pump shafts when belts, chain drives, spur gears, and other types of drive connections are used. The shaft must not be out of line more than .005 with the power source shaft. Shaft ends should have a gap of 1/8 minimum. Circuit lines must be thoroughly clean. Appropriate sand blasting, wire brushing and pickling methods should have been used For this at initial circuit application. A quick check should be made to make sure the number of tube bends has been kept to a minimum and that their minimum radii is correct. (Bend radius -is at least 3 times the inside dia- meter of the tube.) Further, only os many fittings and connections as required fot proper installation should be used. Also, be sure filters are sized and located properly. Such precautions mini- mize flow resistance and the possibility of leakage. Inlet pressure should not exceed 10 psi. A vacuum of 5 inches mercury or less should not result in cavitation. Pump life is shortened by continued operation over speed and pressure ratings and recommendations. A relief valve should be located downstream from the pump to limit pressure demands. It also should be located away from the pump and toward the source of any possible line shocks from such things as directional control shift. it should be set high enough, however, to permit the system to meet its Toad requirements. Start -Up With a minimum drive speed of 400 rpm, the pump should prime almost immediately. providing air has been purged from the system. If necessary, the pump may be "jogged" to fill the case. Failure to prime promptly may result in damage from lack of lubrication. A fitting may be"loosened" at the pump outlet side to bleed trapped air. NOMINAL SIZE RING ROTOR SET PORT PLATE KEY SHAFT H-*-H-3 20-45203-02 20-69050-02 20-44613-02 20-18239-02 20-33435-02 H-*- H-5 20-45204-02 20-69425-02 20-44614-02 2 18240-02 H-*-H-8 20-45205-02 20-69426-02 20-44615-02 20-18236-0i 20-33434S-02 H-*-H-12 20-45206-02 20-69428-02 _20-44616-02 20-36000-02 RING DO (2 REQ'D) 20-45232-02 HEA 83-18020-03 BLEED SCREW 83-15090-05 SCREW (8 REQ'D) TORQUE TO 40 FTA S 83-63427-01 SNAP RING 8 53007-.01 BEARING 20-22031-02 GASKET 20-45235-02 CAP 83-15032-05 BOLT (4 REQ'D) 20-60903-02 BEARING 20-44617-02 OUTLET FLANGE (2 REQ'D) .5084-05 SCREW 8 REQ'D) 20-60907-02 BEARING 20-36001-02 LOCATING DOWEL 83-32404-02 SCREW (4 REQ'D) 20-67200-02 NAME PLATE 82-20218-07 RING 20_67 35_0i (2 R Q'D) DIRECTIONAL LABEL 20-60907-02 BEARING 20-35262-02 COUPLING 20-35300-02 SPACER 20-11757-02 KEY RETAINER . 2 REQ'D, 3 8. 5 GPM ONLY) tr83-15109-05 SCREW (4 REQ'D) 20-44618-02 82-20132-07 INLET "0" RING FLANGE -44612-02 BASE MOUNTING 84-------83-13131-03 SCREW (4 REQ'D) - oubie--A NOMINAL SIZE PORT PLATE ROTOR SET RING KEY SHAFT H-3-H-* 20-44613-02 20-69050-02 20-45203-02 20-18239-02 ,m_13437_02 '''' '''' H-5-H--* 20-44614-02 20-69425-02 2 452 -02 20-18240-02 H-8-H-* 20-44615-02 20-69426-02 20-45 05-02 20-18236-02 20-33438-02 •••• H-12- ft.* 20-44616-02 20-69428-02 20-4520 02 • 20-36000-02 RING DOWEL (2 REQ'D) 20- 6001-02 LOCAT I NG DOWEL 20-11786-02 20-452 2-02 HEAD 83-18020-03 PDRAIN PLUG • 83-13134-03 SCREW (4 REQ'D) 83-13033-03 • SCREW (4 REQ'D) 20-22031-02 GASKET 83-63432-01 SNAP RIN (2 RE 'D) 786- KEY 20-11757-02 KEY RETAINER (2 REQ'D, 3 & 5 GPM ONLY) 3-63432-01 SNAP RI NG 83-15090-05 BOLT (8 REQ'D) TORQUE TO 40 FT/LBS 20-60903-02 BEARING NOMINAL SIZE SHAFT H-*-H-3 0-2 33437-02 H-*-H-5 20-33438-02 H-*-H -12 KEY 20-44608 HOUSING 82-20136-07 "0" ING 82 1011-21 EAL 83-13033-03 SCREW (4 REQ'D) t:• 82-20136-07 "0" RING 0-53006-01 THRUST BEARING 0-51701-01 BEARING RETAI NER EZENni.,!$ .t.4,40%,vaNt,, 20-44619-02 FLANGE MOUNTING 2-01013-21 SEAL (2 REQ'D) 20-44608-02 HOUSING tit!) •714, 11111111111VIIIIIIIi ,111111001111111111111111111 1111 ; r 110.M1 0-53006-01 THRUST BEARING 83-63432-01 SNAP RING REQ'D) THRU SHAFT STANDARD PUMP Figure 5 7 spare parts recommendation for maintenance NAIVE • - PART NUMBER OTT. PER UNIT SPARES * RECOWMD STANDARD THRU SHAFT STANDARD THRU SHAFT , 20-11757-02 20-11786-02 20-11704-02 20-18239-02 20-18240-02 20-22031-02 20-33435-02 20-33436-02 20-33437-02 20-33438-02 20-35262-02 20-35300-02 20-36000-02 20-36001-02 20-44607-02 20-44608-02 20-44612-02 20-44613-02 20-44614-02 20-44615-02 20-44616-02 20-44617-02 20-44618-02 20-44619-02 20-45203-02 20-45204-02 20-45205-02 20-45206-02 20-45232-02 20-45235-02 20-51701-02 20-60903-02 20-60907-02 20-67200-02 20-67435-02 20-69050-02 20-69425-02 20-69426-02 20-69428-02 80-53006-01 80-53007-01 82-01013-21 82-20132-07 82-20136-07 82-20218-07 83-13033-03 83-13131-03 83-13134-03 83-15032-05 83-15084-05 83-15090-05 83-15109-05 83-18020-03 83-32404-02 83-63427-01 83-63432-01 84-01309-03 84-01311-03 • KEY RETAINER (3 & 5 SIZE ONLY) KEY SCREW. ..... ..... ..... .. ROTOR KEY (3 SIZE) ROTOR KEY (5 SIZE) GASKET DRIVEN SHAFT (3 & 5 SIZE) " . DRIVEN SHAFT (8 & 12 SIZE) DRIVE SHAFT (3 & 5 SIZE) DRIVE SHAFT (8 & 12 SIZE) SHAFT COUPLING BUSHING SPACER (I1A1 & 21A1) ECCENTRIC PIN LOCATING PIN BODY SEAL HOUSING . ............. BASE MOUNTING...... ...... PORT PLATE (3 SIZE) PORT PLATE (5 SIZE) PORT PLATE (8 SIZE) PORT PLATE (12 SIZE) FLANGE INLET FLANGE FLANGE MOUNTING ECCENTRIC RING (3 SIZE) ECCENTRIC RING (5 SIZE) ECCENTRIC RING (8 SIZE) ECCENTRIC RING (12 SIZE) HEAD CAP BEARING RETAINER BEARING ........ ........ BEARING NAME PLATE DIRECTION LABEL ROTOR SET (3 SIZE) ROTOR SET (5 SIZE) ROTOR SET (8 SIZE) ROTOR SET (12 SIZE) THRUST BEARING THRUST BEARING SEAL "0" RING "O" RING • "O" RING SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW... ............. SCREW SNAP RING SNAP RING (FOUR USED FOR THRU SHAFT) . PIPE PLUG (FOR "30" MODELS ONLY) PIPE PLUG 4 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 4 4 4 4 8 16 4 2 4 1 2 2 1 4 2 1 1 1 2 - - 2 2 1 1 4 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 - 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 - 4 • 1 2 2 8 4 4 - 8 16 4 2 4 - 4 2 1 ' 4 1 1 1 1 12 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 2 - 0 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5 10 10 1 1 5 5 5 5 5 5 12 6 6 12 1 1 1 1 2 4 1 1 1 5 10 10 1 • - 4 2 1 1 1 12 - - 2 2 1 1 4 2 - 0 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10 10 10 1 1 5 5 5 5 10 - 24 6 6 12 2 1 1 - 2 4 1 1 1 - 20 10 1 IMPORTANT: FURNISH COMPLETE MODEL NUMBER WITH PARTS ORDER. *Forevery five valves in operation. 69 FLEXIBLE SHAFT COUPLINGS • APPLICATION A DRY RUNNING THREE PIECE FLEXIBLE COUPLING GENERALLY USED TO CONNECT AN ELECTRIC ROTOR TO A HYDRAULIC PUMP. • CONSTRUCTION MBNESIUM ALLOY AND NEOPRENE INSERT PROVIDES; SETTER MLANCE, NIGHER RPM. PREVENTION OF SHAFT CORROSION, REDUCTION OF SMOCK LMO, MINIMIZATION OF BEARING LOADS, A11D RESISTANCE TO ABRASIVE WEAR, NE0►RENE DRIVE INSERT MS NIGH RESISTANCE TO WEAR EXCEPT WIEN SUBJECTED TO EXTREME MISALIGNMENT WHEN IT WILL MAR RAPIDLY, PAEYEIIYHNC DAMOE TO BEARINGS. NO METAL TO METAL CMACE. THUS ELIMINATING THE NEED FOR LUBRICATION WILE REDUCING NOISE. INSTALLATION RAPID INSTALLATION REQUIRES ONLY STMIOHT EDGE AND FEELER GAGE TO INSURE PROPER ALIGNMENT. FOR LONG INSERT LIFE MISALIGNMENT SHOULD NOT EXCEED .010 PARALLEL 0R 1' ANGULAR. MODEL NUMBER M-100 M-200 M-300 M-400 M-500 M-600 H-700 DIMENSION A 2.60 2.90 3.45 4.00 4.00 5.97 6.90 6IHENSION 6 2.6 3.1 3.6 4.3 4.7 6.0 7.1 DIMENSION C 2.00 2.25 2.90 3.05 4.00 4.50 5.19 SHAFT SPACING MIN. 1/16 1/16 1/16 1/16 1/16 1/16 1/16 SHAFT SPACING MX. dl3/4 7/8 7/8 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-3/8 1-7/8 MAX. BORE 7/8 1-1/8 1-1/2 1-3/4 2-1/4 2-1/2 2-7/8 MAX. FRAME T 145T 184T 2152 250 326T 365T 405T MAX. FRAME TS ---- ---- ---- RUTS 405T5 445TS ...- RP RATING 1200 RPM 25.2 33.6 63.6 102 133 262 396 HP RATING 1000 RPM 37.8 50..4 95.4 153 200 .392 595 APPROX. HEIGHT LBS. 3/4 I 2 3 4 7 12 Double A Products Co. Manchester, MIch19•n ADYO.IW.ry M bowl F D1..p. M.n.M1alwln0 Cowpony SHAFT COUPLINGS JCB f DRAWING NO. 40-01146-02 xa..r.% ..% I.... PRECISION SUMP -TYPE SUCTION STRAINERS FOR USE IN INDUSTRIAL HYDRAULIC AND OTHER SIMILAR SYSTEMS • EXCEEDS CURRENT INDUSTRIAL STANDARDS PROVIDING MORE THAN DOUBLE THE ELEMENT AREA NECESSARY TO MEET THE NOMINAL GPM RATING OF EACH STRAINER, INITIAL PRESSURE DROP ACROSS THE ELEMENT IS LESS THAN 0.30 PSI AT NOMINAL RATINGS WITH 225 SSU FLUID. • USE WITH ALL FLUIDS THE PLEATED MOREL WIRE CLOTH ELEMENT, BLACK OXIDE FINISHED FRAME AND CAPS PERMIT THE USE OF ALL MODERN FLUIDS INCLUDING FIRE RESISTANT FLUIDS. NOTEI IT 15 000D PRACTICE TO USE,THE NEXT LARGER STRAINER WITH FIRE RESISTANT FLUIDS WITHOUT REDUCING THE STRAINER PIPE SIZE EXCEPT AS NECESSARY AT THE PUMP INLET. • EASY CLEANING N0 T00L5 REQUIRED. SIMPLY UNSCREW THE CAP BY HAND AND REMOVE THE MODEL WIRE MESH ELEMENT. THE ELEMENT IS QUICKLY FLUSHED IN ANT COI*40N SOLVENT AND/OR BLOWN CLEAN BY SHOP AIR. THERE ARE N0 SEALS TO REPLACE, AND THE STRAINER IS PROPERLY ASSEMBLED WITH THE CAP FINGER TIGHT. • STANDARD 200 MESH ELEMENT THE 200 MESH (74 MICRON) ELEMENT IS RECOMMENDED FOR MAXIMUM SERVICE LIFE OF OTHER `SYSTEM.COMPONENTS. "TM15 RECOMMENDATION AL50 APPLIES TO FIRE RESISTANT FLUIDS IF THE MINIMUM START UP TEMPERATURE EXCEEDS 50°F. THE USE OF HEATERS TO PROVIDE SUCH STARTUP TEMPERATURES IS USUALLY CONSIDERED MORE PRACTICAL THAN THE USE OF SEMI - STANDARD COARSER ELEMENTS WHICH WOULD RESULT IN SHORTER SERVICE Lift TO OTHER COMPONENTS. • OTHER ELEMENTS 100 MESH (149 MICRON) • 60 MESH (238 MICRON) NPT r iC10EL GRA RA IG NPT X Y Z �A � IK WT. L[35 F5 -200 5 1 3-9/16 3-3/16 3-1/16 65 1/2 P10-200 10 I 5.5/16 50/16 3-1/16 125 3/4 P20-200 20 1-1/4" 7.1/8 6-9/16 3-1/16 165 1 P30-200 30 1-1/2 7-1/2 6-7/8 4-1/16 216 1-1/2 P40-200 40 2 8-1/8 7.3/4 5-1/16 310 2 P50-200 50 2 11-1/8 10-7/16 5-1/16 416 2.3/4 P75.200 75 2-1/2 12 10-5/8 6.9/16. S20 3-1/2 ►100-200 100 3 14.1/8 I2.5/8 6-9/16 620 4 SUFFIX -200 IN MODEL NUMBER SPECIFIES THE STANDARD 200 MESH ELEMENT. THE SEMI -STANDARD 100 MESH DR 60 MESH ELEMENT IS SPECIFIED BY SUBSTITUTING -100 OR -60 RESPECTIVELY. Th)0015/0 N ANC Products CO. ER. MICHIGAN a ....,►,a...r Ilr.ww 1 Tharp* SUMP -TYPE • SUCTION STRAINERS al; w.. DRAWING NO. 40-00403-02 characteristics Design Mounting Connections H end D Inlet Pipe Size 1 1/4 Outlet Pipe Size 1 1/4 Pipe Thread ... . ...................... NPTF or BSP Drive connections Flexible coupling, gear, chain or belt Shaft diameter .748/.749 std., .998/.999 thru shaft key 3/16 x 7/8 rotation ... -Right-hand, •• 1ockwise, viewed =•from shaft end. Left hand, counterclockwise, is available. minimum ........................................ 400 maximum IL • 1800 (except for H-12 which is 1200) ....2000 H-5 (To 1200 RPM) 2000 H-5 (Above 1200 RPM) 1500 H-8 1500 1200 Weight (approx) pilot flange base 52 Ibs 64 Ibs 62 Ibs aux. 57.5 69.5 67.5 Service information provided here concerns four sizes of single pumps. Figure 2, page 2, is o cross section view of o flange mounted pump. Optional de- signs incorporate o double end shaft or D size auxiliary tube or pilot pressure pump. Assembly of each unit is specified by the code model stamped into the name plate attached to the body of the pump. The model code is shown in Figure 3, page 2. operation Pumping ,is done by Gerotor sets comprised of inner and outer elements rotating within a body. The inner element is keyed to the -drive, shaft. As the shaft tums, the gear of the inner element rums the outer element (Figure 1) so that chambers between the teeth enlarge and draw in fluid INCREASING VOLU (INTAKE) as they pass by the inlet port. They decrease in size to force the fluid out the outlet port as they complete the cycle. One cycle occurs For every seven shaft revolutions. Size and number of teeth and width of Gerotorelement determines the amount of fluid pumped. Figure 1 MANCHESTER.' MICHIGAN HIGH WYCOMBE, BUCKS, ENGLAND &10003 Double A PLUG HERE FOR CLOCKWISE ROTATION CLOCKWISE ROTATION PLUG HERE FOR COUNTERCLOCKWISE RC}TATION Figure 2 ' iEatE# #IZE (NOM) MOUNTING ROTATION (Vlswsd HIM shaft end) OPTIONS DE#ION — DEMON PILOT PRESSURE OR 4aaE PUMP SIZE SERIES I NoM THREAD D ONr TON H 3 5 8 12 P Pilot No Symbol Clockwise (std) Counter - Simard shaft 20 Thru shaft 30 External drain 40 Thru shah with external drain , 81 No Symbol Pump Not D - Used 1.0 1 5 - Ne Symbol NPTF E SSP e preventive maintenance Make certain circuit fluid connections are tight to pre- vent Teaks or entry of air into the system. Look for signs of shaft seal leakage. Replace seals if necessary. ✓Check reservoir fluid level to assure an adequate supply at the pump intake. When adding fluid, always pour it through a 200 mesh or finer screen. ✓Inspect the filter element and replace it if necessary. Continual filtration should be done by the use of c 25 micron full -flow filter or o 10 micron by-pass filter. YLook for fluid contamination. If it is contaminated, drain the system and thoroughly cleon the reservoir. NOTE No periodic adjustments are r eq u I r e.d All lubrication in the pump is provided by system fluid flow. Check body screw torque. (See Reassembly, Page 5) Retorque if necessary. Change the filters and flush the system. Drain it and re- fill it with clean fluid. rThe reservoir oir breather should be replaced if it is dirty. ✓LubricaHon of shaft coupling should be done as specified by the coupling manufacturer, Make certain shaft align- ment with the driving source is maintained. within the recommended allowance. (See Installation, Poge 5) trouble shooting It might be one of these things. Not delivering fluid properly? •Pump may be driven in the wrong direction of rotation *Drive s ha f t broken, or shoft key sheared (direct drive) *Intake pipe from reservoir blocked, or vis- cosity too heavy to prime. (Viscosity should not exceed 600 SSU) *intake air leaks •Pump not priming •Fluid level too low System pressure too low? •Relief valve set too low •Wom pump parts causing leakage xrre intemol Making noise? •Portly .clogged intake strainer or restricted intake pipe •Defective beoring •Air leak at pump intake pipe joints or shaft seal *Drive speed too fast or too slow *Coupling misalignment Shaft seal leaking? *Seal wom or damaged •Excessive pressure on seals Excessive heat? (over 400° F. or hot in comparison with circuit linos.) •Too much thrust on bearings •Fluid temperature too high Reverse immediately to prevent seizure. Check direction of drive rotation • (proper rotation direction is indicated by arrow on the body). Remove pump from mounting and determine damage to the pump. Replace if necessary. Drain system. Add clean fluid of proper viscosity and specifications. Filter it as recommended. Check system filter for cleanliness. Check intake connections. Tighten securely. Loosen connection in outlet line. Bleed oir until fluid flows. Reservoir fluid level must be above the opening of the intake pipe. (The system should always be checked at initial start up to make certain it is filled with fluid.) After initial start up, reservoir fluid level should be re- checked. Fluid should be added if necessary. Adjust the relief valve. Use a pressure gouge. Replace Gerotor sets and take required corrective steps after exams of pump parts such as the head and eccentric ring. Pump must receive intake fluid freely or covitotion results. Drain system, clean the intake pipe, and clean or replace the strainer. Add new fluid and strain by recommended procedures. Replace the bearings and inspect the shaft. Pour fluid on joints and around the drive shaft seal while listening for a change in sound. Tighten joints as required. Replace the shaft seals if necessary. Check the shaft journal for scoring at the contact area and replace if necessary. Drive pump within its recommended speed range. Check the bearings and seals. Replace if necessary, and realign shafts. Always check before start up. Allowable misalignment is .005. Replace seals. (See Reassembly) Check for restrictions or excessive length of line on externally drained models. Internally droined models should have drain to inlet side with not more than 10 psi pressure. 5hoft must not be out of line more than .005with the power source shaft. Shaft ends should hove a gap of 1/8 minimum. Pump should be shut down immediately after comparing pump, inlet line and reservoir temperatures. If the pump is excessively hot, it should be overhauled. repair and overhaul CAUTION Turn the electric power off and relieve the system of, trapped pressure before opening any circuit connections. Cleanliness is extremely important in the care of hydraulic systems. Only a clean, lint -free work surface should be used. Areas around openings to be made in the system should be care- fully cleaned to keep dirt from entering. All exposed parts of the system should be capped or covered. Disassemble only as far as necessary to correct or prevent future trouble. This may be done as in Figure 5, poges 6 and 7 without the use of special tools. Trouble shooting may be done with the help of the analysis on page 3. Remember that many seeming pump failures are really failures in other parts of the system and should be tracked down before corrective action is attempted. Strategically located representatives of Double A products not only offer new units in case replacement is necessary, but also often have warehouse parts, repair, and overhaul facilities available. Also offered at the Double A factory are two types of specialized pump repairs; Pump repair or ,overhaul also is offered at the Double A factory. All parts are replaced except castings. A new pump warranty is issued. Specialized field service help is available from Double A representatives as required. Service Tools Special tools, with exception of shaft seal drivers, are not needed to service these pumps. The seal drivers can be made as shown in Figure 4. Disassembly Pumps should be taken apart as, shown in Figure 5. • After disengaging the pump from its shaft coupling or other drive connection, detach the base or flange and shaft key. Place the pump cop or head end up in a vise which has pro- tective jaws. Remove the four cop screws, cap and gasket. The bearing should slip from the shaft as soon as the snap ring is off. The eight body screws which are torque tight to 40 Ft Ibs then ore loosened to permit removal. of the head, and shaft bearing. Remove the eccentric ring and Gerotor set,locating pin,and key. Before pulling the body, bearing and seals, make certain the shaft key is removed. Remove two shaft seals and snap ring holding the bearings from their locations in the body. The bearings are then free For removal from both the body and head. Repair Wash metal parts in clean mineral solvent and blow them dry with filtered compressed air. Place them on a clean sur- face for inspection. •Replace all bearings at each overhaul , Otherwise, bear- ings should be checked for wear, crocks, pitted races and bolls by rotating them under pressure. Reploce if defective. •Replace shaft seals, "0" rings and gasket exposed for repair. Replace completely at each overhaul. •Shaft journal for the seal should be sconned For wear or scones. Replace the shaft if scores cannot be removed by Tight polishing. A smooth groove not exceeding .005 is acceptable. •Lightly stone Gerotor set faces os a precaution against burrs or other raised surfaces caused in shipping or hand- ling INNER `SHAFT SEAL DRIVER Reassembly Dip parts in hydraulic system fluid so they slip into place easily. Parts are assembled in reverse order of disassembly with the following points observed. With use of shaft seal drivers (Figure 4), assemble the two shaft seals so they are back to back with the space between them filled with grease compatible with system fluid. The inner seal lip should be exposed at the face of the pump. Make certain the inner seal is inserted squarely into the body with the shoulder of the inner seal driver bottoming squarely against the body face. The same care should be used in inserting the outer seal. Before thrusting the shaft into the body and through the seals, fill the keyway with a "half' key or heavy grease to make certain it doesn't cut the seals. 'Assembly is the same for either clockwise or counter -clockwise rotation. Align the notch orb the ring with the name plate and groove in the body. insertion of the pins further assures correct assembly. •The 83-I8020-03 drain plug screw 1s used at all times in the discharge side of the pump. Standard H pumps drain in- temally. If external drain is used, a 20-45233-02 head is used. This head differs from standard only in the drain open- ing it provides. It also uses two drain plug screws at all times. •Be certain locating pin aligning the head, ring, and body is in- serted correctly. •Tum the shoft by hand to make certain internal ports rotate freely. Never start a pump which shows evidence of binding. installation If the pump has been extensively repaired or renovated, be careful to reinstall it properly. (See Installation Drawing 1-10003.) The pump may be installed in any position. But make certain the direction of shaft rotation conforms to that of the power source. Because it is important to adequately align the shafts, a flexible coupling should be used. Extreme care is necessary to avoid excessive side loads on pump shafts when belts, chain drives, spur gears, and other types of drive connections are used. The shaft must not be out of line more than .005 with the power source shaft. Shaft ends should hove a gap of 1/8 minimum. Couplings should not be driven into position on the shaft. Circuit lines must be thoroughly clean. Appropriate sand blasting, wire brushing and pickling methods should hove been used for this of initial circuit application. A quick check should be made to make sure the number of tube bends hos been kept to a minimum and that their minimum radii is correct. (Bend radius is at least 3 times the inside dia- meter of the tube.) Further, only as many fittings and connections as required for proper installation should be used. Also, be sure filters are sized and located properly. Such precautions mini- mize flow resistance and the possibility of leakage. Inlet pressure should not exceed 10 psi. A vacuum of 5 inches mercury or less should not result in cavitation. Pump life is shortened by continued operotion over speed and pressure ratings ond. recommendations, A relief valve should be located downstream from the pump to limit pressure demands. It. also should be located away from the pump and toward the source of ony possible line shocks from such things os directional control shift. 1t should be set high enough, however, to permit the system to meet its load requirements. Start -Up With a minimum drive speed of 400 rpm, the pump should prime almost immediafely providing air has been purged from the system. If necessary, the pump may be "jogged"' to fill the case. Failure to prime promptly may result in damage from lack of lubrication. A fitting may be "loosened" at the pump outlet side to bleed trapped air. NOMINAL SIZE (GPM) SCREW (8 REQ'D) ECCENTRIC PIN (2 REQ'D) LOCATING PIN RING GEROTOR SET H-3 83-15084-05 20-35016-02 20-11787-02 20-45203-02 20-69050-02 H-5 83-15085-05 20-35017-02 20-18234-02 20-45204-02 20-69425-02 H-8 83-15087-05 20-35018-02 20-18233-02 20-45205-02 20-69426-02 H-12 83-15089-05 20-35019-02 20-18232-02 20-45206-02 20-69428-02 83-15032-05 BOLT (4 REQ'D) 20-45235-02 CAP R s TA ION clockwise clockwise TORQUE TO 40 FTABS 20-60903-02 BEARING 83-63427-01 SNAP RING 20-22031-02 GASKET SIZE 1.0 20-35261-02 1.5 20-35274-02 1.0 20-35261-02 1.5120-35274-02 20-67200-02 NAME PLATE 3 2404-02 SCREW (4 REQ'D) 20-45223-02 BODY 20-67435-02 (INT. DRAIN) 20-67436-02 (EXT. DRAIN) DIRECTIONAL LABEL 20-45232-02 HEAD (USE 20-45233-0 HEAD FOR EXTERNAL DRAIN) 80-53007-01 83-18020-03 DRAIN PLUG SCREW BEARING (USE 2 FOR EXTERNAL DRAIN) 83-13030-03 SCREW (6 REQ'D) 20-11824-02 RETAINER (2 REQ'D) 80-55009-01 BEARING 20-35275-02 SHAFT 83-32404-02 DRIVE SCREW • (4 RECK)) 20-67206-02 NAME PLATE GER. OR E 20-62802-02 20-62803-02 20-62802-02 20-62803-02 20- -02 20-4 -02 20-4 2 20-44644-02 NUT (4 REQ'D) 83-42059-02 WASHER (4 REQ'D) 83-11502-02 STUD 4 REQ'D) 20-18236-02 PIN 20-44645-02 BODY 82-01000-21 SEAL (2 REQ'D) 83-51081-01 PIN (2 REQ'D) D PUMP 83-52056-02 ROLL PIN Figure 5 NOMINAL SIZE (GPM) KEY SHAFT STANDARD THRU H-3 20-18239-02 20-33409-02 20-33410-02 H-5 20-18240-02 20-33411-02 20-33412-02 H-8 20-18236-02 20-33413-02 20-33414-02 H-12 20-33415-02 20-33416-02 20-11756-02 KEY 20-11786-02 KEY (THRU SHAFT) 20-11757-02 KEY RETAINER (2 REQ'D, 3 & 5 GPM ONLY) 83-63028-01 SNAP RING 20-60903-02 BEARING SEAL (2 REQ'D) STANDARD 82-01011-21 THRU SHAFT 82-01013-21 P-555 FLANGE KIT (INCLUDES 20-45009-02 FLANGE AND (6) 83-13080-03 SCREWS) P-554 BASE KIT (INCLUDES 20-45010-02 BASE AND (6) 83-15082-05 SCREWS) 7 spare parts recommendation for maintenance PART NUMBER NAME UM PER UNIT SPARES* BECOLTNO H H-D 20-11756-02 KEY . 1 1 1 20-11757-02 KEY RETAINER.(3 & 5 SIZE). 2 - 2 20-11786-02 KEY, THRU SHAFT 1 - I 20-11787-02 LOCATING PIN (3 SIZE) 1 1 1 20-11824-02 KEY RETAI NER . . . - 2 1 20-18232-02 LOCATING PIN (liSIZE) . 1 1 1 20-18233-02 LOCATING PIN (8 SIZE) 1 1 1 20-18234-02 LOCATING PIN (5 SIZE) 1 1 1 20-18236-02 ROTOR KEY (8 & 12 SIZE) . 1 1 1 20-18239-02 ROTOR KEY (3 SIZE) 1 . 1 1 20-18240-02 ROTOR KEY 5 SIZE) 1 1 1 20-22031-02 GASKET 1 1 6 20-33409-02 SHAFT, 3 SIZE 1 - 1 20-33410-02 SHAFT, THRU (3 SIZE) 1 - 1 20-33411-02 SHAFT, 5 SIZE 1 - 1 20-33412-02 SHAFT, THRU (5 SIZE) .. 1 - 1 20-33413-02 SHAFT, 8 SIZE ...... 1 - 1 20-33414-02 SHAFT, THRU (8 SIZE) 1 - 1 20-33415-02 SHAFT, 12 SIZE ..... . 1 - 1 20-33416-02 SHAFT, THRU (12 SIZE) 1 - 1 20-33419-02 SHAFT, 3 SIZE -- 1 1 20-33420-02 SHAFT, 5 SIZE - 1 1 20-33421-02 SHAFT, 8 SIZE . - 1 I 20-33422-02 SHAFT, 12 SIZE - I I 20-35016-02 ECCENTRIC PIN (3 SIZE) 2 2 1 20-35017-02 ECCENTRIC PIN (5 SIZE) 2 2 I 20-35018-02 • ECCENTRIC PIN (8 SIZE) 2 2 1 20-35019-02 ECCENTRIC PIN (12 S1ZE) . 2 2 1 • 20-35261-02 1.0 SIZE ROTOR KEY - 1 1 20-35274-02 1.5 SIZE ROTOR KEY - 1 1 20-35275-02 SHAFT ' - 1 1 20-44605-02 1.0 SIZE HEAD, R.H. C ROTATION . . . .. - 1 - 20-44622-02 1.5 SIZE HEAD, R.H. C ROTATION 1 - 20-44643-02 1.0 SIZE HEAD, L.K. CC ROTATION - 1 - 20-44644-02 1.5 SIZE HEAD, L.H. CC ROTATION ... . . . . - 1 - 20-44645-02 BODY ..... . . . ... . - 1 BASE DESCRIPTION KIT P 4 20-45010-02 BASE (6) 83-15082-05 HEX SCREWS IMPORTANT: FURNISH COMPLETE * For every five pumps in operation NUMBER WITH PARTS ORDER. PART NUMBER NAME Olt PEN UNIT SPARES' RECOM'ND H H-D 20-45203-02 ECCENTRIC RING (3 SIZE) , 1 1 - 20-45204-02 CCENTRIC RING (5 SIZE). 1 1 - 20-45205-02 ECCENTRIC RING (8 SIZE) . 1 1 - 20-45206-02 ECCENTRIC RING (12 SIZE) 1 1 20-45223-02 BODY 1 1 20-45232-02 HEAD 1 1 20-45233-02 HEAD(FOR EXTERNAL DRAIN) 1 1 - 20-45234-02 20-45235-02 CAP, THRU SHAFT CAP 1 1 - - - ... - 20-60903-02 BEARING 2 2 10 20-62802-02 1.0 GPM ROTOR SET - 1 5 20-62803-02 1.5 GPM ROTOR SET - 1 5 20-67200-02 NAME PLATE.. 1 I 1 20-67202-02 FLOW DECAL - 1 1 20-67206-02 NAME PLATE - 1 1 20-69050-02 ROTOR SET (3 SIZE) 1 1 - 20-69425-02 ROTOR SET (5 SIZE) .... 1 1 - 20-69426-02 ROTOR SET (8 SIZE) • • •3'• • 1 1 - 20-69428-02 ROTOR SET (12 SIZE) 1 1 - 80-53007-01 THRUST BEARING 1 1 '5 82-01000-21 SEAL - 2 12 82-01011-21 SEAL 2 2 12 82-01013-21 SEAL, THRU SHAFT 2 - 12 83-11502-02 STUD - 4 1 83-13030-03 SCREW - 6 1 83-15032-05 SCREW ..... 4 - I B3-15085-05 SCREW (5 SIZE) 8 8 1 83-15084-05 SCREW (3 SIZE) 8 8 1 83-15087-05 SCREW (8 SIZE) 8 8 1 83-15089-05 SCREW (12 SIZE) 8 8 1 83-18020-03 DRAIN PLUG SCREW 1 1 . 1 83-21300-01 NUT - 4 .1 83-32404-02 DRIVE SCREW . 4 4 1 83-42059-02 WASHER - 4 1 83-51081-01 LOCATING PIN - 1 1 83-52056-02 ROLL PIN .. . . ... 1 1 83-63028-01 SNAP RING ... . . .... . 1 I 3 83-63427-01 SNAP RING 1 1 5 FLANGE KIT DESCRIPTION P-553 20-45009-02 FLANGE • (6) 83-13080-03 SOCKET HEAD SCREWS 6/69 FRANCE Brown and Sharpe S.A.R.L. .15 Rue.G.odillot 93 Saint-Ouen Paris, France WEST GERMANY Brown and Sharpe, G.m.b.h. 7141 Schwieberdingen by Stuttgart Postfach 07150-6477 DISTRIBUTORS ABROAD FINLAND Atoy-Oy Helsinki 10 INDIA Echbee Corporation Bombay 1 ISRAEL Sempress Israel Limited Haifa ITALY Fenwick, S.p.A. Milano JAPAN lzumi Denki Company, Ltd. Osaka 532 Japan Controls Company, Ltd. -Tokyo Japan Machinery Company, Ltd. Tokyo MALAYSIA Swann Winches & Engineering Pte. Singapore 10 MEXICO Instrumentacion Industrial, S.A. Mexico 17, D.F. -11 NETHERLANDS Hydraudyne, N.V. Boxtel PERU Equipos HidraulicosS.A. Callao PUERTO RICO P. 1. Industrial Supplies, S.A. Carolina 00630 SOUTH AFRICA Edward L. Bateman Limited Johannesburg SPAIN Fenwick S.a:M. Barcelona SWEDEN Gustan Nordgrens Pumper A.B. Stockholm VENEZUELA Power Systems, Inc. C.A. Caracas service abroad An established world-wide organization of distribu- tors provides the large OEM with the same quality of products and services that is obtainable from the Double A organization in the States. He can be assur- ed that his products receive the same prompt servic- ing and consistent attention they do here. That is be- cause overseas distributors are manned by local per- manent businessmen just as they are in the United States. Double A Division, illustrated here, is in operation in High Wycombe, Bucks, England. UNITED KINGDOM Double A Div. Brown & Sharpe Ltd. Gomm Rd. High Wycombe, Bucks 25885 ARGENTINA Munck do Brasil Sao Paulo, Brasil AUSTRALIA All Power Consultants Pty. Ltd. Camberwell, Victoria BELGIUM De Pecker Hydrotec Gent BRAZIL Munck do Brasil Sao Paulo CANADA Cowper Company Ltd. Lachine 640, Quebec John Spotton Co., Ltd. Mississauga, Ontario Progressive Hydraulics & Air Ltd. Vancouver 9, B.C. J. N. Fauver Company Inc.. Windsor, Ontario CHILE Imp. Tec. Vignola S.A.I.C. Valparaiso 1', U.S. sales and service facilities facilities ADahl. Aoutdo Nhatred tee leclNMud metres ol I Imam al mimed Sewn thot road -cal Koala prod uc1 rd dean N on INtc. Dodds A prondn En leartnyCarllMlom, Fidel Scraka, Tedmktl Lkaglo,, Nine w on wldatay hr titan distributors W,come tonal to o. Wad MI dtroatA ()Isotropic, The* burinerrro hat moo; Comollornl to their hdmrll antmunllla Pee me penman, Tank pious le bead mtk,H on trod oak/, 6p thole carom dry it wal to nakJ, ie WOO I lYFe of Nxait. Fa Ono mien 111E Iht policy of Nitric Atom em only fhruph OlrIbuI shipments *veva vaxploalmlamod,31043,11.00:4411, pull Ord a Doubly A DMrbuta atlas to ova vat To Wm up WO I Mari ha* amid Poe Dwhb A 9loduct old moot Ito Ms coati -ally alwdM ax heMtlrt I d rr warehouSing A a.oham ct Ile Dow NW mdnow Pahl of W M ppwtr Ardaaa for Mmdl1N May, All naiad pump rd uli II Stock tptddi WWIttndlod ductal %MO trim, Ths i aAFarua will m it apron o allhln 46 law b twtomm Wm, rr airman m u agar thry caw b stilled draft the moral Way mar, Sesmem ddipdbutafor matron van. ALABAMA 140MEW000 Illrtnl j r 0 91209 Activism, Inc P.0.51097 ARIZONA PHOENIX NOR SasdordCo. 3033No. Coed Aw, ARKANSAS SHREVEPORT IU,I 71104 Thu Wafon Co., Inc 1755 F0r5Ild MEMPHIS IT,nn.l 38117 TM Welton Co, loc.613E Mimi: AI 12051071439 110212651256 01614124112 11011652951p CALIFORNIA LOSA5GFLES0X223twdatdco. 1574E.MOWN* 114 F213161154203 SAN LEM 0915771a eend Co.070 Weida Cony Sox 241E 14I516360610 COLORADO OENVEA10223 Warm brawl 24NNisi Second Aa, (303)i202s CONNECTICVT CONNECTICUT RE AkoyA Co. FLORIDA ORLANDO 32630 HydrWN Stray Co. 600 MoAI9a fy It MIAMI SPRINGS 3311b NFdwlk Sum Co.660 Karam Or, GEORGIA ATLANTA 33010 AeleMbn, Mc.129 Murphy Aw„ SW ALGUSTA X905 Wilma 1 Hoen, Inc. P.D. 5056 HAWAII 7gNOLULU 18820 ROAM MN Ind Nyd, Ow, 9) LMIq sow 160l1$47.2641 2115 WWI' 1 ba 9120 O05125154511 130A 0N22411 iCNAUIPIURG ICIirpl10172 J. N. Foy Co.7ac,811W. ROCKFORD 61108 Fled C9mtdl Prot219 Seib. INDIANA CULVER 45511 Tallmant 1 , Inc 324yboth Shots Dr, INDIANAPOLH46202TIoHsbtt Foy, In P.O.22215 MUNCIE473D3 TtpH0M11 Eny„ Inc. 703N.TYIIy FORT WAYNE 46101 Tco4alsl icy., Inc. 648 Growth Art, SOUTH BEND 46611 Tm.Nakttt Ergr„ Inc. P.O, Ede 2146 LOGANSPORT 4947 T1441edrn Fop., Inc 11.0 Sot 4 A0U 7550691 40417914261 01215711111 NISI903711 I211542,2761 131711236531 131712604012 12191 7424201 12191 2344511 0191 7523305 IOWA CEDAR RAPIDS 52402 FIv(5Ciao! hal. IN Rd, NE, 13191317' 092 KANSAS KANSAS CITY 65103 Twin Poo, loc. 1205 Saudaao Bhd WICHITA 57211 Trdn Pair, Ira SIO E4 Gam 11312354797 01N21S4229 U.S.A. DISTRIBUTORS KENTUCKY LOULIVILLE 10E11 Scar TwroffiAt Co. U3 PMma Law LOUISIANA NEW ORLIAN6 70150 Tho Warn Co., lao. lot 53152 SHREVEPORT 71101 TM Welton Co, Inc 1755 Fadrtd MARYLAND OALTIMOAE 212160tw Hydrtulat Co.4991 E, Naounwnt MASSACHUSETTS NOLDEN 01520 Plod Kara, Inc, 1093 Mon Sc MICHIGAN MADISON HEIGHTS (Dural 49p11 J. N, P.gf Ok, 1503 E. Aro Oro GRAND RAPI0549507J, N. Fanw Co, Ire,310 Mat SI,S Y FLINT 4507 J, N, Fawn Co, la: G3140 E. H nto401 Rd, 'SAUNA ZOO 19021 J. N, hoof Co, Inc. MO Whma 0f, UPPERPENINSULA REGION De Pre, PM 'Gruel Orel S4I15 Pro Eep nw,ny 631 Valk, MINNESOTA EDINA E613S Norden Fhrd Pam 5677 Ydaniton MINNEAPOLIS 561M to Rapine Eduardo! Ca.1419 $,11th MISSISSIPPI MENPHIS limning? TM Nato Co. 610 Meu4 Rd NEW ORLEANS IUJ 70150 TM Noon Dv, PO, 0a 63252 15021 351.2611 15041 4114453 121114214212 12311276,5600 1617)1214307 1313) 5653252 a 5045741 (6161 4524011 1313) 7423300 16161 3814640 14141 3314211 16121 111,6660 15121 3325505 19011 611,7490 (5041416E653 MISSOURI ST. LOUIS 631M Neff Woof, Inc 731 Nonlry Indwhnl Cory 13111.447409 IUINSA5CITY IKan3 66103 Tam Pair, Inc. 10266aoteom bed, 11131 2341707 NEBRASKA OMAHA 081471ad, Era erom Conrty 2710 Mop'. 1421 731'0%0 NEW JERSEY MAPLEWOOD INwak107010 Ara0Y Co.41 NNwk yhy (201) 7114160 S01111IERN NEW JERSEY REGION AMBLER IPIEndxtphrl 10002 Rai Paler Ire, MI Pawl end R. R. Rot (7151 5431050 NEW YORK FAIRPORT 11460 !Hockey.,I Gllehn And,102 Node Col Rd, NEN YORK CITY REGION Aroyel ComptnyNoa 00090 , NEW YORK CITY REGION Auroral Commny Lone Iflad WILLIAMSVILLE 11121 Hutf4ll CellohlnMd,EE66Ivan De, CENTRAL SQUARE 13336ISyrmrul CoA,M IIyd,1,0. km 96 NORTH CAROLINA CHARLOTTE 2920E Ltatquon 614nn, Inc. P.O, 5561 CLEMNNN127012 Lamyaoe B Rom In Rraynrde Asa RA1E10127E55 Walton 1 Nov 114a Wet Rd Boo 10712 WILAKNGTON 26101 Lawton & Ham, lnk P.O.326 1101 223019 12121 2574511 15161 T114995 17161 0340750 0161456W11 17041 3774551 161515416314 1191 7174491 03191 7914666 0HI0 TOLEDO 43112 J. N. Fana Co., Inc, 3927 LaGrenp 00LUM0US 1321E Seoll Equipmrm CO, 4147 N. Ni jt St. DAYTON 45401 taut Equlpmnt Co, P;0..8a 1317 CIE VELAND14115SImlrf IA, Proctor Co, 1510Eud(Am, , CINCINNATI45231 Soli E4uvimmlCo,1172 GIIIInIIN Rd, OKLAHOMA 'RASA 74151 lice dt Nutria Supply Co.16101.1MM* OKLAHOMA CRY 7310111arrck Realm Wooly Co, 20011W, H1914752411 161412174499 (5131 223,1141 12161771'4350 15131 522,1390 11111363552 14061 631.1609 OREGON . PORTLAND97231 Sandal l Co,1212 NE.63i0 Aw. (5031 2517801 PENNSYLVANIA AMBLER 1900211hdrdtlphlrl FIa d Power, Inc Mt. Nonni i R,R, 121516434250 PITTSBURGH15202Fluidroullet 10Ben. Awn Road 1412E 7662066 SOUTH CAROLINA CHARLESTON 29405 L dn9ton 6 Hrvm, Inc P,O, 4417 GREENVILLE 29108 LMlnyrm 1 NamP.0, 10131512 TENNESSEE NASHVILLE 37211 Actiwtbn, Inc 2121 Ilropio Aro, KNOXVILLE 37921 Llerqum 6 liven, Inc. 310E Wham Am MEMPHLS 31117 TM Moon 00 6430 Merick Rd ATLANTA IGIJ 3D110 Aetiwtbn Inc 1294101V Ave, 8W 1031 5644711 I10312320090 Ors) 244.5326 HIM WW1 19011 0124090 1401r 755,0691 TEXAS DALLAS 75735 Wamdt MothIr Supply Co. 201051a Rd 121413574471 FORT WORTH 76104 Namr* MOW Sealy Co, 72201, *Is 11111336670E LU190CK 79103 Nowak Moan 01,1302 Enke' 1941 7527001 HOUSTON 77404 W4nai *dim Wady Ca. id Hltfuat 4006 Dr I1IS 3404400 l lrunoml (7131 7224467 MN ANTONIO71216 Womlck Maids 5igply Co. 410 Nicola HI21 7324251 TYLER 75701 Wamrdt MrcNeSupply Co, 2724E Eewa P.0,133111415934761 UTAH SALT LAKE CITY 04110 Hydraulic Sppb Co. Owof Nov0rtolla 1011 4114751 251E Sotrh 2rdStrut VIRGINIA RICHMOND73221 Vkp(nle *kooks Q0.31411LIt1 dry Si, I7031 355.2931 WASHINGTON !EATTLE 51111E SauUrd 0a, 722 Earth Ludo Si, 0011763451E WISCONSIN DE FERE 5015 kid Eghorinl CA,,1d 631 Valbr 14I41 3311211 MILWAUKEE5329Pea Enplralap{,o,let 323NttMSt. 14141 463.3150 Domcd. Many of the Double A design firsts illustrated on this page are industry accepted standards. They result from design and development which emphasizes solving the consumer's problem rather than attempting to surpass what a competitor has already offered. Innovation is a way of life at Double A. Look to Double A for sound solutions to your own needs and problems. CIRCUITSTAK VALVES CircuitStak features a building block concept using special design relief valves, flow control valves or pres- sure reducing valves sandwiched be- • tween other 0 ring -sealed direction- al valves and subplates. This ad- vanced design reduces piping costs, downtime, conserves panel space, improves efficiency of circuit by elimination of piping. VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT VANE PUMPS Simple circuits featuring high effi- ency result from application of these pumps. A built in compen- sator adjusts delivery to system requirements. VISI-LOGIC New "See -Through" logic module is very tolerant of contaminants. Gate operation is readily visible, for easy trouble -shooting. Each mod- ule measures 2% inches square and contains 8 three -input NOR logic Lgates. Combine several modules on Double A integrated circuitry. PRESSURE CONTROLS Double A's new unique series of pilot operated pressure control valves provide a degree of stability, response and repeatibility that is unattainable with conventional "cone" type pilot control. STAFFA MOTORS Low speed, high torque hydrauli- cally balanced motors deliver 88% starting torque, 95% running torque and full torque in 1/5 revolution. Six models perform in the toughest . environments; salt water, pollution, explosive or dusty conditions. GEROTOR PUMPS These dependable positive displace- ment hydraulic pumps are simple (only two moving parts), long lived end provide high .volumetric and mechanical efficiency. Available in constructions to suit various fluids. Fire-resistant fluid models give ex- traordinary service life. 411=247317 11/71 Printed In U.S.A. SECTION. #9 AIR SYSTEM Ref. Dwe. SCC-4351 The Air system on your Se.rdee Depalletizer is designed to operate with from 50 - 100 F.S.I.U. air. The system includes a filter, regulator, and lubricator iLstalled ready to operate. There is only one hook-up required (into the filter) to operate the entire system. The operating pressure should be adjusted at the regulator at 50 P.S.I.G. The following is a summary Of tne air valves in. the system and their function. DFC-A1 Solenoid operated ialve to control the Hoist Side Shroud " cylinders. DFC-A2 Solenoid operated vaive to con*:r-cl Lte Chipboard Grippers. DFC-A3 • Solenoid operated vve toco:itroi the Stop. DFC-A4 Solenoid operate wilve to :(:)::.trol the vacuum yiiiiders. The vacuum system on yo:rr machine is supWed by a Gast #1040-V11./C-T36 vacuum ulmp with rerlThtor, filter .mcuum gauge. - The systems only fctio:, Ls to orer;:te the bexter.#5F18277 Nacuum cylinders in the chil.i.:Qrird re:r!ovrA system. N_Dte: THESE CYLINDERS SHOULD NEVER hE The. vacuum is started and :;orped to the cylinders by a Nama:tis #D4JSALI- air valve (DFC-:!). SECTION #1 RECOMMENDED Sz'AhE PARTS LIST DEPALLMIZER 1. One Double A #QFP-01-TT.:Ti,2 solenoi1 valve. 2. Two Double k#9-70 •01.1.3 or Doib1 A solenoid valves. 3. O. Republic #96'-A 3/8 so:er,oi7: coil. 4. One nlen-Brad]ey #802T-A limjt sw;tch. 5. One Allen-BraJley #8C2T-W1 rolle'r lever. 6. One Allen-Bradley 11-02T-W2 roller 3ever. One Allen-BraJley #802-'/P3 switch ar!,:. 8: One seal kitfor HyPower ," i5meter x iiameter shaft. One seal kit, for eac!: ynn Orbit Motor. 0 • 1 10. Three tt12 lamps for 11. One Dexter #5171:77 12. Four Fullerton #6,- vm 3. Two Filter elemen;s rGasi, TI%ree Fusetrop #FES-?0 15. Fusetron #FNM-56 16. One seal kit for Millr dif-kr.etEr air zvlinder. 17. Ore solenotd coil CO:. N.4:11:::;.5 '-" valve. 18. One solenoid coi fir valve. KAYAT MODEL 601-T SHRINK WRAPPER OPERATION MANUAL CODE CC::.;" LANCE APPROVED APR 2 5 2019 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION r RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA APR 12 2019 PERMIT CENTER 0 u Elm 0 0 ma 111 AI 161 Co-19 Page 1 of 39 4/12/19 C:\Users\nheaton\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\Temporary Internet Files\Conte TABLE OF CONTENTS Section 2 Safety Precautions Section 3 Description of Machine Section 4 Sequence of Operation Section 5 Machine Operator Station Section 6 Startup/Shutdown Procedure Section 7 Machine Faults Section 8 Registered Film Setups Appendix A - Initial Start-up Requirements Appendix B - Initial Installation Appendix C - Operator Message Display Operations Appendix D - Pacific Science Servo Driver Fault Codes Appendix E - Giddings & Lewis Pic900 Error Codes Appendix F - Allen-Bradley Bulletin 160 SSC Controller Display Parameters & Fault Codes Page 2 of 39 4/12/19 CAUsers \nheatenkAppData\LocaMicrosoft \Windows \Temporary Internet Files \Conte Section 2 Safety Precautions 1. NEVER ASSUME that the machine is off, or safe, before working on or making adjustments to the machine. Be ABSOLUTELY SURE that everyone is away from all moving parts before operating the machine. 2. Things to watch for: a) Service Personnel - DO NOT work on energized parts, unless absolutely necessary. b) Maintain all systems to manufacturer's specifications. c) Consult manufacturer before adding electrical devices to the machine. d) Avoid placing containers, wipers, or any other tools on the machine that may be left behind, or that can fall into the machine while running. e) DO NOT run the machine with missing or damaged, permanent type mechanical guarding. f) DO NOT attempt to bypass electrical safeties that are designed to protect people, and/or machinery. 3. The operator machine guarding system is interlocked with the machine master control relay and will allow normal operation of the machine only when all guarding is closed. This guarding system is vital to operator and maintenance personnel safety - DO NOT ATTEMPT TO BYPASS THIS SYSTEM. NOTE: If at any time the tunnel stops, for any reason, all products must be removed from the inside of the tunnel. Page 3 of 39 4/12/19 CAUsers \nheaton \AppData\Local \Microsoft \Windows \Temporary Internet Files \Content.Outlook` M F SHRINK NNNEL REMpuABEE RANEE ASSEAgUES IS P SKOORK RUNNER BLC1jER DRIVES IS ASIM Rd.SR COATO ERASING COME ID. NERCO CONVEYOR AAu Section 3 Description Of Machine 1. Film Mandrels Rolls of film are loaded onto the film mandrels. These mandrels contain expandable air chucks which lock the inner diameter of the roll to the film mandrel. These air chucks are turned off and on with pneumatic toggle switches that are located in the side of the frame. When loading a roll of film onto the mandrel the air chuck must be off. Once the roll is loaded and pushed completely to the back stop of the film mandrel, the air chuck is turned on. The operator selects if the machine is running off of the left or the right film mandrel. If, for example, the right mandrel is selected, but the air chucks are not expanded there will be a message on the operator interface stating this. On the back of each film mandrel is an AC motor used to unwind the film. The motor has a brake which is used to hold the mandrel in place when the film dancer system does not need any more film. Mandrel shaft diameter 2-15/16 inches. Film core inside diameter must be 3 inches, plus 1/16 inch, minus 0 inches, (Caution: The mandrel shaft can be damaged by applying excessive force when loading film. Never use a forklift to load film.) Film roll diameter can not exceed 20 inches. 0 FILM SPLICINC PROCEDURE 1. CYCLE STOP THE MACHINE. 2. TURN OFF AIR SWITCH (NEW A -A) FOR THE EMPTY ROLL, ALLOW THE ROLL TO UNWIND UNTIL THE DANCER ARM IS DOWN (DETAIL'Cj AND TENSION IS OFF. 3. INSERT THE STRAIGHT CUT PIECE OF FILM FROM THE FULL ROLL THROUGH THE WELD BARS (OETNL 13) AS SHOWN, ABOUT 2 INCHES ALIGNED WITH THE EMPTY FILM ROLL. 4. ACTUATE THE WELD BAR SNITCH MEW A -A) LEAVE THE WELD BAR SWITCH ON FOR AT LEASED 8 SECONDS. TURN OFF WELD BM SWITCH AND CHECK THE WELD. 5. CUT THE EIIPIY FILM ROLL OFF ABOUT 1 INCH ABOVE THE WELD. 6. TURN ON THE AIR SWITCH ON THE FULL ROLL OF FILM. (NEW A -A). 2. CHANGE THE FILM MANDREL SELECTION ON THE OPERATOR SIATION FROM THE EMPTY ROLL TO THE FULL ROLL 8. RESET, CYCLE START THE MACHINE, INFEED START, WATCH THE WELD AS IT RUNS THROUGH THE DANCER SYSTEM. VERIFY THAT THE DANCER MM RISES WHEN THE FILM STARTS MOVING. TRY TO FOLLOW THE FILM SPLICE THROUGH THE MACHINE UNTIL THE PIECE WITH THE SPLICE IS ON A PACKAGE, CHECK THE PACK. 9. REMOVE EMPTY R011 FROM MANDREL. PUT A FULL ROLL ON THE MANDREL THAT IS CUT STRAIGHT AND HAS All TAPE AND LABELS REMOVED. DETAIL "C" VIEW A -A DhtTAIL "B" OLD ROLL CUT FILM APPROX. --+ HERE AFTER WELDING. NEW ROLL 31, DETAIL "B" Page 5 of 39 4/12/19 C:\Users\nheaton\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\Temporary Internet Files\Content.Outlook\QM5 WYLY9\601-T-Manual.DOC 12 II (SHEET V6) _(+) 401 IIII (SHEET psi 40211 Section 3 Description Of Machine MPS-09 4.0-6.3 AMP (SET AT 6) stopFrf') ®L7 ECUENCY 13 P�J cR-m II NVERTER A/B 160 OT NZ c4: +1ov o2i off,00 r 3711 37I2 r I , I —171 1 -- CON-11L 1 CON-11R 791 7T2 7T3 911 912 9T3 L _ MrR LEFT FlLM MOTOR 0 'PI F1IM OT '� 09 MOTORO 1.0 11P - 1.0 HP 1.95 AMPS 1.95 AMPS ONO TAB 37LT 2. Weld Bar The weld bar is used to splice the end of the old film roll to the start of the new one. This unit consists of a pneumatic clamped seal bar with computer controlled impulse welding. To perform a splice the operator will follow the supplied film splicing procedure. 3. Film Tension System/Dancer Bar The film dancer rollers are used for accumulated storage, allowing film to be unwound from the film mandrels at a constant speed to be used by the film feed. There are two proximity sensors associated with the film dancer bar. These proximity sensors detect the upper and lower position of the dancer arm. If the dancer up (proximity sensor) activates the machine will cycle stop and display the message that the up proximity was activated. If the dancer down (proximity sensor) activates, the film mandrel motor will stop until the dancer system requires more film. The film is fed into the dancer system by the film unwind motor. There are two unwind motors, one on each film mandrel. There is also an encoder located on one of the dancer rollers. The encoder is used to control the speed of the film unwind motor. When the machine receives a steady flow of cases the dancer bar should stabilize horizontal to the grourd and move up and down, plus or minus 5 inches. The unwind motors are driven by a variable frequency drive and have built-in fail-safe brakes. These brakes are used to stop film rotation in the event of a guard door opening, an emergency stop, or non back-to-back cases. Page 6 of 39 4/12/19 C:\Users\nheaton\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\Temporary Internet Files \Content.Outlook\QM5 WYLY9\601-T-Manual.DOC Section 3 Description Of Machine 4. Static Control Bar (option) Certain types of shrink film can create large amounts of static electricity when unwound and fed through tension rollers. If film builds a large static charge it can cling to whatever it touches causing improper case wrapping. The static control bar option removes static electricity from the film by emitting both positive and negative ions near the film. It is located after the top roller in the film dancer. The low amperage unit is of a shockless design, requires no maintenance and runs continuously whenever machine power is on. To check the bar take an electrician approved screw driver and put it toward the unit a blue arc of electricity should appear. 5. Film Feed/Rotary Film Shear The "Film Feed" consists of two sets of pinch rollers and a vacuum belt drive roller, all driven by one servo motor. The film is pulled from the dancer system by the first set of pinch rollers, and then passes under the rotary knife onto the vacuum belt and through the second set of pinch rolls. The vacuum belt and second set of rolls run faster than the first setof rolls causing the film to be stretched tight for cutting. The "Rotary Knife" cuts the film. It follows the film feed servo with an electronic cam profile. When the film feed axis moves the programmed length for the film, the rotary film knife servo will cycle the motion profile. The knife profile completes in approximately 4 inches of motion on the film axis. Page 7 of 39 4/12/19 C:\Users\nheaton\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\Temporary Internet Files \Content.Outlook\QM5 W YLY9\601-T-Manual.DOC Section 3 Description Of Machine / I II M '.I I1 Alen IAI I II JII AI: III AIII IIAN I IIN '�I II Ali III AIII ELI MAKE SURE ELECTICAL POWER IS OF PRIOR TO WORKING ON FILM -EED & SHEAR SECTION. •. ._!! DE VERY CAREFUL, FILM SHEAR BLADE IS VERY SHARP. 'NGI! WHEN ACI UATING UPPER ROLLER CYLINDERS, KEEP HANDS CLEAR OF ROILERS. (PINCH POINT) ;AM BENI:EN ROILENS AS SHOWN. (IAMP UPPER ROLLERS \ S'oE1Cil FILM 110II1. (TURNING RIF FILM FEED DRIVE PULLF'S A.. ' Cr, TEN 111EIILM.) c:IE 1.1E FINGER: ON 1NE. FIUA 51RIPF'ER PI.ATI: ARE NOl Ru11EIINC GROOVED NIIOPRI:NE ROI.IDR. SIDE 1/1 SIOE ADJUSTMENT. '_R ADJIISIING FILM 51RIPPER PI A11, 110IA1E IIIM SHEAR /LADE •.\.. C-IFCN TO MA,:I SURF DIM[ CIF ARS SIMMER PLATE. ('OSIRON OF I 511EM All, JI II, ADJUST 10 APPRON. 5!10401. CHI: CK AIR .01 RFGIII ARM SC111NGS. SIC .•„ C, DNAWIMG, RI GUI ATOR SI1IINGS FOR AII. PRESSOR Film sear trouble shooting information. Check all bearings on the dancer they should move freely and are not bound. There should be no crud under vacuum belts. Vacuum plugs (too much vacuum stalls incline belts) dimples in film grooves in film. Vacuum plugs (too little vacuum doesn't pull film tight for cutting) Dancer jumping as knife cuts film? Master offset while cutting. Pinch roller pressure should be set to around 30 psi. Air jets set properly between upper and lower pinch rollers. Lower jet set parallel to film flow, upper jet slightly angled 5deg towards film Parallelism of upper pinch rollers (loosen Allen toggle up and down a couple times and then retighten. Upper air jet air pressure, Static bar working (put screwdriver to get blue arc) Is film wrinkled going thru dancer itself? Shouldn't be. Vacuum incline -check plastic bearings on idle roller and tension roller make sure they spin freely. To level the bottom pinch roller. Lower the film section to the bottom. Loosen the two 5/32 Allen screws that holds the roller square, and then toggle the bottom pinch roller with the toggle switch. 6. Vacuum Conveyor The "Vacuum Conveyor" transports film from the film feed pinch rollers up to the wrap conveyor. The conveyor is made up of 12 matched belts running over a vacuum chamber. Holes in the vacuum belts line up with the slots in the vacuum chamber allowing vacuum through the belts holding the film tight to the conveyor. Vacuum is achieved through the use of a 1/2 HP rotary blower. Air knives are used on the top of the film to keep the edges from curling off vacuum belts during transport. The film feed assembly has removable slot plates for adjusting vacuum on the belts and film. Slot plates on both sides of the film should be removed to relieve excess vacuum. Page 8 of 39 4/12/19 C:TUsers\nheaton\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\Temporary Internet Files\Content.Outlook\QM5 WYLY9\601-T-Manual.DOC Section 3 Description Of Machine 7. Film Feed Lift Mechanism The "Film FeedNacuum Conveyor Assembly" is mounted on four pivot arms and held against upper and lower positive stops by a linear actuator. This entire assembly can be lowered, allowing easy access for maintenance purposes. The mechanism is controlled by pressing the "Extend or Retract" button on the film feed lift control box, located just inside the frame on the machine. In order for this lift mechanism to work, all doors must be closed and power must be on the machine. When lifting or lowering the assembly, run the actuator until the stops are reached and release the button. Do not continue to run the mechanism after the end of travel has been reached. 8. Infeed Conveyor Control and braking system. Trays or product are conveyed toward the machine on roller conveyor, or any other type of low back pressure conveyor. The infeed conveyor belt is the first conveyor into the machine. The infeed primed photoeye is used to load cases into the machine. It is located approximately 2 feet outside of the machine on the infeed conveyor (field mounted). When this photoeye is blocked the infeed conveyor is allowed to run until this photoeye clears again. The infeed conveyor belt is a high friction belt with a brake on the motor. (SHEET /15) �(+ (SHEET /15) --.110e17 MPS-10 4.0-6.3 AMP (SET AT 6) TO SHEET #4 27L1 2712 27L3 STOP L1 IL2 L3 FR INV RT RTER A/ 160 3 __� 8T18T8T3 -- L �'/INFEED ,8J CONVEYOR MOTOR 0.33 HP 0.7 AMPS Page 9 of 39 4/12/19 C:\Users\nheaton\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\Temporary Internet Files \Content.Outlook\QM5 W YLY9\601-T-Manual.DOC Section 3 Description Of Machine Infeed Conveyor brake is on when the power is not applied. MPS -07 24L2 29L2 o 0.1-0.16 AMP — 4J 29L1 29L2 29L3 CON-9 CON-9 891 6B3 6 INFEED CONV BRY ERANE 460V (0.11 AMPS) 9,10,11. Spacing Conveyor, Wrap Conveyor, & Discharge Conveyor (Main Drive Conveyor Frequency Drive) The main drive conveyor frequency drive moves three conveyors in the machine (spacing, wrap, and discharge rollers prior to the tunnel). The spacing conveyor pulls the initial gap from the infeed conveyor. The wrap conveyor transports product and film under the wrap bar. The discharge rollers transport wrapped product from the wrap conveyor into the tunnel. These three conveyors run faster than the infeed so that a gap is created and maintained between cases. Once the main drive conveyor motor accelerates to the programmed speed, it remains running at that constant speed until there is a cycle stop or a machine speed change is required. Other servo and frequency drives that follow the main drive conveyor are the infeed conveyor, the film feed, and the wrap bar. The infeed conveyor follows the main drive speed at a constant relationship, and the film feed and wrap bar use electronic cam profiles to follow the main conveyor. When the main conveyor drive, which is often called the "Master," changes speed these other servo drives which are called "Slaves" follow by changing their speed at the same ratio that the main drive belt changes. Page I0 of 39 4/12/19 C:\Users\nheaton\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\Temporary Internet Files \Content.Outlook\QM5 WYLY9\601-T-Manual.DOC Section 3 Description Of Machine 23L1 24L1 24L1 23L2 240 24L1 23L3 24L3 MPS-08 4.0-6.3 AMP (SET AT 6) - 25L CR-06 10 .. I 'II (SHEET /15) i(+) 301j 24L3 I ? 2512 25L3 t1—_fl—,io6 STOP FREQUENCY INVERTER A/B #1160 II (SHEET #15) _(-)-3q2 07 06 +10v ov 03 CND TAB I_�I I'Z] T37 •-- =F•=1==_ 6T16T26T3 -- MAIN DRIVE MTiR CONVEYOR MOTOR 1 •O6_ 1.0 HP 1.95 AMPS 12. Conveyor Drive Train The Conveyor Drive Train is the mechanical linkage between the spacing conveyor, wrap conveyor, and discharge roller conveyor. All conveyors are driven by one motor (main drive conveyor). 13. Wrap Bar Servo The servo driven wrap bar guides the film over and in front of the pack. It runs an electronic cam profile similar in concept to that which the film feed axis runs. When the case is completely on the Wrap Conveyor, the wrap bar will come up behind the case. As the case moves forward on the wrap conveyor, the wrap bar will bring the film over the front of the case. The wrap bar servo has an overload clutch to prevent damage to the bar. 14. Electrical Enclosure & Operator Station The main electrical enclosure and operator station are mounted on the operator side of the machine at the upstream end of the tunnel. 15. Tunnel The shrink tunnel is divided into two independent heat zones. Each zone has its own temperature controller, heating elements and 1 HP blower. Air is pulled from the inside top of the tunnel through the blower inlet cone. This air is forced through the heating elements and down the tunnel sides where it is directed through the chain at the bottom of the package. In between the first and second heat zones a third 1 HP blower pulls heated air from the center of the tunnel to charge package side blow dampers. The tunnel has built-in dampers on the tunnel sides to regulate the air flow. The majority of the air hits the bottom seal along the entire length of the tunnel. Each heater has a 550°F temperature thermostat switch. In the event of an overtemperature situation the master safety circuit will drop out the tunnel heaters, blowers, and Page 11 of 39 4/12/19 C:\Users\nheaton\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\Temporary Internet Files\Content.Outlook\QM5WYLY9\601-T-Manual.DOC Section 3 Description Of Machine conveyor. CON-3 14L1 14L1 14L2 14L2 14L3 14L3 MPS-02 MPS-03 2.5-4.0 AMP 2T1 2T2 2T3 MTR 02 MPS-04 a" 2.5-4.0 AMP 2.5-4.0 AMP CIRCULATING FAN ZONE 1 (UPSSTREAM) 3T1 3T2 3T3 MTR CIRCULATING 03 FAN ZONE 2 IDOWWNSTREAM) HP 15L1 152 15L3 CON-8 4T1 4T2 4T3 MTR CIRCULATING 04 ! FAN BOTTOM 2HP Page 12 of 39 4/12/19 C:\Users\nheaton\AppData\Loca1\Microsoft\Windows\Temporary Internet Files\Content.Outlook\QM5 W YLY9\601-T-Manual.DOC Section 3 Description Of Machine 16. Shrink Tunnel Removable Panel Assemblies The four side panels on the tunnel can be removed for easy cleaning and maintenance. These insulated panels are filled with 4 inches thick fiberglass. Each panel is held in position by two upper and two lower clamps. Use proper equipment when handling panels. Panel Specification 69" x 33" x 4" and weigh 150 Ib. Never Run Tunnel With Any Panel Removed Remove Panel With Power Applied To Machine Remove Panel When Hot 17. Shrink Tunnel Conveyor The tunnel chain is made from high temperature glass filled nylon. If film begins to stick to the chain it must not be allowed to buildup. While machine is running at temperature use a wire brush at the downstream end of tunnel, hold the brush against the chain to remove film buildup. Never allow product to back up into tunnel. Enough accumulation is needed to discharge all of the cases from the tunnel when there is a downstream problem. If the tunnel chain stops with product inside (power outage), there are provisions at the discharge end of the tunnel to remove the product. The operator can open the door on the driveshaft cover and using the supplied socket wrench, crank the tunnel chain driveshafl and get the product out of the hot tunnel. Note: It is assumed that the machine is primed and running in "automatic," as described in "The Operator Start -Up Procedure." Page 13 of 39 4/12/19 C:\Users\nheaton\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\Temporary Internet Files\Content.Outlook\QM5 WYLY9\601-T-Manual.DOC Section 4 Sequence Of Operation DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION Full trays enter the machine randomly spaced, or back-to-back, and broadside across the infeed conveyor section. Tray separation is achieved by the infeed belt running slower than the spacing belt causing a gap between trays. As each spaced tray enters the wrapping conveyor, it must cross the path of a photo electric sensor which will signal the film feed vacuum belts to start. At this point the tray is approximately halfway onto the wrapping conveyor, whereas the waiting rotary cut film is carried forward between the belt and the tray. As the rear of the tray passes onto the wrapping conveyor, the wrap bar emerges carrying the film forward, over, and down in front of the oncoming tray, and finally down between the wrap conveyor and the tunnel infeed. As the tray passes over the gap between these conveyors, the tail end of the cut film is pulled up to be lapped over the leading edge of the film now under the tray. Upon entering the tunnel, heated air is directed into the ends of the film wrapped tray, causing the film to billow up for uniform heating. Secondly, high pressure hot air is directed against the bottom overlapped film, forming the bottom seal. The shrink wrapped package is then discharged into the relatively cold air outside the tunnel, and subsequently hardened tightly around the contents of the tray. Page 14 of 39 4/12/19 C:\Users\nheaton\AppData\Local\Microsofr\Windows\Temporary Internet Files \Content.Outlook \QM5 WYLY9\601-T-Manual.DOC ZONE #2 9:L aote fE£ _}llTD Al ZONE #1 ,NEE DA Y 0�f S41P Section 5 Machine Operator Station EIGU 2 DOOR OPEN OR E-,STOP IS PRESSED PRESS " TO START PROGRAM MODE 2 Fi F2 4 5 F4 7 0 SPACE Row INFIED PEA Emergency Stop - There is one emergency stop located on the main enclosure. An emergency stop pull cord wraps around the tunnel. These emergency stops will stop all motion on the wrapper and the tunnel. It is recommended that, this buttons or pull cord not be used to stop the machine under normal circumstances. The "Machine Cycle" push-button is the preferred stopping method. An example of when the emergency stop devices should be used is when there is a safety issue due to personnel. Tunnel Start - This button turns on the tunnel conveyor and provides the power to the blowers and heaters contactors. In bypass mode, only the conveyor is turned on automatically. The blowers and heaters are turned off when the Heaters Off/Auto selector switch is placed in the Off position and are controlled by the temperature controller if the selector switch is placed in the Auto position (see Heaters Off/Auto). Heaters OFF/AUTO - This Selector switch turns off the tunnel blowers and heaters when in the Off position. When in the Auto position, the heaters and blowers are controlled by the tunnel temperature controller. Side Blowers OFF/AUTO - This Selector switch turns off the tunnel side blowers when in the off position. The operator can turn off the tunnel side blowers independently of the upstream and down stream blowers. When in the Auto position, the side blowers are controlled by the heater control system. Page 15 of 39 4/12/19 C:\Users\nhcaton\AppData\Local\Microso(t\Windows \Temporary Internet Files\Conte Section 5 Machine Operator Station Tunnel Cool Down Then Stop - This button will stop the tunnel after a cool down occurs. This button immediately turns off the heaters. The tunnel chain and blower will continue to run until the tunnel temperature is below an adjustable value. This value is usually about 200°F and is changed in the temperature controller. In the bypass mode the heaters and blowers do not operate, the tunnel conveyor will shut off after this button is pressed (provided the temperature is below 200°F). Mode Bypass/Wrap - This selector switch gives the operator the ability to run product through the machine without any wrapping (Bypass Mode) or normal wrapping (Wrap Mode). The Heaters Off/Auto selector switch should be placed in the Auto position to run in the Wrap Mode. If the heaters are not turned on the Heat will decrease below operating limits and the wrapper will not wrap product. Temperature Controller - The current temperature in the tunnel is displayed on this unit. The "Tunnel Set Point," "Up to Temp Value and Gains" is set from this unit. Wrapper Power on - This button brings power to the wrapper portion of the machine, if there are no emergency stops pressed and all guard doors are closed. The wrapper is protected by door switches on all of the doors. Any time a wrapper guard door opens, or this button is pressed, the wrapper portion of the machine is also in emergency stop, but the tunnel can continue to run. Reset - Pressing this button will reset the fault that is displayed on the operator interface. It will flash when the fault displayed on the operator interface must be acknowledged. This is done by pressing this button. If after this button is pressed the fault on the operator interface does not go away then that fault condition still exists. Machine Cycle - This button will start the machine running. The blue pilot light will be illuminated, indicating the machine is in auto (pressing this push-button again will cycle stop the machine). Power will still remain on the machine until an emergency stop is pressed, wrapper power (push/pull button) is pressed in, or a wrapper guard door is opened. This is the smoother method of ramping the machine to a stop. Infeed Cycle - This button will start the infeed belt on the machine. (provided the machine cycle push-button has been pressed). The blue pilot light will be illuminated, indicating the infeed conveyor is on (pressing the push-button again will allow the infeed conveyor to deliver the case onto the main conveyor, and then stop). Power will still remain on the machine until an emergency stop is pressed, wrapper power (push/pull button) is pressed in, or a wrapper guard door is opened. This is a smooth means of cutting off product flow. Film Mandrel Left/Right Selector Switch - This selector switch is used to select which film mandrel is being used. English/Spanish Selector Switch Option - This selector switch is an option that allows the operator to select the language that the messages are displayed in (English/Spanish). Page 16 of 39 4/12/19 CAUsers\nheaton \AppDataLocaRMicrosoft\Windows \Temporary Internet Files \Conte Section 5 Machine Operator Station Operator Interface - This device is a display with keys, and set values for machine data. It also is used as a message display to show the faults on the machine. The following are different parameters that can be changed through the display: THE "." KEY MUST BE PRESSED ON THE SMT FOR THE FOLLOWING Cut a Piece of Film - Pressing the Fl key allows a new piece of film to be cut. Initialize the Machine - Pressing the F2 key allows the machine to be initialized. Roll Functions - Pressing the F3 key allows the operator to change the roll counts for both the left and right mandrels. The roll count is the amount of packs that the machine will run after the low film photoeye clears. Change Pack - Pressing the F4 key allows the pack to be changed. Change Speed - Pressing the "Yes" key, then the "No" key within one half of a second allows the entering of the change speed menu. Now enter the speed in cases per minute and press the enter key. This can be done while the machine is running Change Count — Pressing the Back Space key 3-times will allow the operator to change the package count. Film Feed/Rotary Film Shear Lights — Pressing the Reset push button for 3 continuous seconds will illuminate the Film Feed and Film shear sections of the machine for a specified time period. The lights will automatically turn off after the time period has elapsed. Page 17 of 39 4/12/19 C: \Users \nheatonkAppData\Local \Microsoft\Windows \Temporary Internet Files \Conte Section 6 Machine Start-Up/Shutdown Procedure COLD START-UP PROCEDURE 1. Be sure no loose cans, packs, tools, or wipers are on or around the wrapper or tunnel, and all personnel are clear. 2. The main power must be turned on. Once all of the "Emergency Stop" buttons are pulled out, the tunnel is ready for the start to be pressed. 3. Check that the "Mode Selector Switch" is set to the proper position. To start the tunnel chain, and blower running, press the "Tunnel Start" button and place the Heater Selector switch in the Auto position. The tunnel will take approximately 60 minutes to reach temperature. 4. Go to "Up to Temperature Start-up Procedure." UP TO TEMPERATURE START-UP PROCEDURE 1. Once all of the wrapper guard doors are closed, the "Wrapper Power on Switch" must be pulled all the way out and released. The "Wrapper Power Off Pull Out Wrapper Power on Push -Button" message will appear in the message display prior to pulling out this push-button. 2. The machine should be initialized, if it is not then there will be a message on the operator interface "Machine needs to be initialized, clear out all products." Pressing the "Initialize Machine" button on the operator interface will start the initialization of the machine (pressing machine cycle and infeed cycle at the same time for a delay also initializes the machine). The message on the operator interface will say "Machine is Initializing" (wait until complete then get film). The wrap bar will move to its home position and the film feed and film shear will cycle out a piece of film onto the wrap conveyor while initializing. Once all of these motors on the machine have stopped moving, it is safe to open a door and remove the film from on top of the wrap belt. The machine is now initialized. 3. If the tunnel is running and up to temperature, if the discharge conveyor is running (factory jumpers input high), if the tunnel discharge backup photoeye has been field wired to allow entire contents to empty out after backup condition occurs (input high with no product in front of eye), and there are no machine faults, then the machine is ready to start. The operator interface should read "Kayat Engineering Machine Cycle Stopped." Pressing the "Machine Cycle" push-button will start the machine into motion. Once the machine is running, pressing the "Machine Cycle" push-button again will cycle stop the machine. Pressing the "Infeed Cycle" push- button will start the infeed conveyor, allowing product to flow into the machine. Once the infeed conveyor is running, pressing the "Infeed Cycle" push-button again will cycle stop the lnfeed conveyor. Page 18 of 39 4/12/19 CAUsers \nheaton\AppData\Local\Micaosoft \Windows \Temporary Internet Files \Conte Section 6 Machine Start-Up/Shutdown Procedure TEMPORARY SHUTDOWN PROCEDURE If while the machine is running the operator wants to stop the infeed metering belt this can be done by pressing the Infeed Cycle push-button. When the "Infeed Cycle" push-button is pressed again the infeed belt will start metering. 2. If the operator wants to cycle stop the machine, this can be done by pressing the Machine Cycle push-button. To restart the machine press the Machine Cycle push-button again. Once the machine is cycle stopped, the operator can open a guard door to get at the machine, if necessary. 3. Note: The tunnel will remain running once it has been started, unless an Emergency Stop is pressed, a crank cover guard is opened, or certain types of faults have occurred. If the tunnel is emergency stopped, the heat slowly deteriorates the life of the conveyor chain. An end of the night shutdown is recommended to get optimum conveyor chain life. NOTE: If at any time the tunnel stops, for any reason, all products must be removed from the inside of the tunnel. This is achieved through the use of the tunnel cranks at the discharge end of the tunnel. END OF THE NIGHT SHUTDOWN PROCEDURE 1. The wrapper section of the machine is shut down by allowing all products to exit the machine. Press the "Machine Cycle" push-button to allow the machine to cycle stop. Once the machine is cycle stopped, press the "Wrapper Power On" push- button. This completes the wrapper shutdown portion of the machine. 2. The tunnel section of the machine must now be cycled down. This can be done by pressing the "Cool Down then Stop" push-button on the tunnel after all products have been wrapped and exited. This immediately disables the heaters, but allows the blowers and conveyor to continue to run until a cool down temperature is reached. When the cool down temperature is reached the blowers and conveyor will automatically stop. The cool down process can sometimes last for up to an hour. 3. After the tunnel has come to its cool down temperature and stopped, pressing "Emergency Stop" is recommended. Page 19 of 39 4/12/19 C:\Users\nheaton \AppData\Local \Microsoft \ Windows \Temporary Internet Files \Conte Section 7 Machine Faults Machine Fault Display Line The machine faults are displayed on the operator interface. Some of the faults require that they be acknowledged by pressing the reset push-button. The following is a list of the messages which appear on the operator interface and a description of what needs to be done when these messages occur. EMERGENCY STOP PRESSED This message is displayed when an "Emergency Stop" has been pressed. The Emergency stop causes power to be removed from both the wrapper and the tunnel. The wrapper and tunnel will not cycle unless the Emergency stop is pulled out and power is reapplied to each one. WRAPPER POWER IS OFF PULL OUT "WRAPPER POWER ON" PUSH-BUTTON This message is displayed when any of the wrapper guard doors are opened or the wrapper power on push-button is pressed. This message clears when the guard doors are closed and the "Wrapper Power On" push-button is pulled all the way out to its momentary position. WRAPPER GUARD DOOR IS OPEN This message is displayed when any of the wrapper guard doors are opened. This message clears when the wrapper guard doors are closed. A SERVO DRIVE FAULT HAS OCCURED This message is displayed when one of the servo axis's has a servo hardware fault. Maintenance personnel should be called to find the cause of this fault. Check the servo drive which has faulted for the number of the fault that occurred. Look in the servo drive manual for the possible causes of this fault. The cause of the fault could be a mechanical condition that has changed, loose wiring, or a single component such as a servo drive has failed. All products must be removed from the machine, and the machine must be re -initialized to clear this type of fault. Page 20 of 39 4/12/19 C:\Users\nheaton\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\Temporary Internet Files\Conte Section 7 Machine Faults MAIN CONVEYOR FREQ. DRIVE E-STOP OR C-STOP FAULT (INITIALIZE TO RESET) WRAP SERVO DRIVE E-STOP OR C-STOP FAULT (INITIALIZE TO RESET) UNWIND FREQ. DRIVE E-STOP OR C-STOP FAULT (INITIALIZE TO RESET) INEED SERVO DRIVE E-STOP OR C-STOP FAULT (REINITIALIZE TO RESET) KNIFE SERVO DRIVE E-STOP OR C-STOP FAULT (REINITIALIZE TO RESET) FILM FEED SERVO DRIVE E-STOP OR C-STOP FAULT (REINITIALIZE TO RESET) When one of the above messages is displayed one of the servo or frequency drive axis's has a servo software fault. Maintenance personnel should be called to find the cause of this fault. Although this type of fault is called a "Software Fault," its cause is rarely from the software. The cause of the fault is usually a mechanical condition that has changed, or a single component, such as a servo drive, has failed. An example of a mechanical condition is when product spills onto the vacuum belts, the belts become sticky and the film feed servo overloads. The solution to this is to clean the sticky product off of the vacuum belts. All products must be removed from the machine, and the machine must be re -initialized to clear this type of fault. TUNNEL CRANK COVER OPENED OR TUNNEL OVEIRHEAT THERMOSTAT TRIPPED This message is displayed when a tunnel crank cover guard door is opened or a tunnel thermostat trips. Closing the tunnel crank cover guard door will allow this fault to go away. If a thermostat is tripped it could be a more serious condition. Probable causes could be a runaway heat condition exceeding 550°F. The thermostat will cut off the heaters. After the tunnel has cooled down the thermostat will reset, but the tunnel must be manually restarted. Verify the actual temperature in the Watlow controllers when this fault occurs to guide the electrician to a faulty thermostat or a true excessive heat condition. If an excessive heat condition occurs look at the control circuit to determine why the heaters stay on when the setpoint condition is met. Check Tunnel controls on machine schematic. Make sure that contact for Tunnel conveyor turns on. Page 21 of 39 4/12/19 CAUsers \nheaton \AppData\Local\Microsoft \Windows \Temporary Internet Files \Conte Section 7 Machine Faults MPS 5, 6 OR 7 TRIPPED This message is displayed when a thermal overload occurs on MPS 5-7. These overloads are as follows: Vacuum motor, unwind brake, or infeed conveyor brake. If infeed or discharge conveyors are supplied by Kayat, these thermal overloads are also placed in series with the wiring of MPS 5-7. Check for proper settings on the MPS units. Find out if there is a mechanical bind to cause the current to go up. MPS 1, 2, 3, OR 4 TRIPPED This message is displayed when a thermal overload occurs on MPS 1, 2, 3, or 4. These overloads are as follows: Shrink tunnel conveyor and tunnel circulating fan motors. Check for proper settings on the MPS units. Find out if there is a mechanical bind to cause the current to go up. FREQUENCY DRIVE FAULT FREQ. 1, 2, OR 3 This message is displayed when a frequency drive fault occurs on frequency drive 1, 2, or 3. These motors are as follows: Main drive, film unwinds, or infeed conveyor. Sometimes cycling power will clear the fault, depending on which fault is present. If the fault persists refer to the frequency drive manual to find the last fault. Use the manufacturer's recommendations to clear fault. TUNNEL NOT RUNNING This message is displayed when the tunnel is not running. The machine will not run until the tunnel is started. This message clears when the tunnel is started. Page 22 of 39 4/12/19 C:\Users\nheaton \AppData\Local Wicrosoft\Windows \Temporary Internet Files \Conte Section 7 Machine Faults TUNNEL NOT UP TO TEMPERATURE When this occurs the machine will cycle stop. This message usually occurs when the tunnel is warming up. Once the tunnel gets above the required temperature this fault will go away automatically. DOWNSTREAM CONVEYOR IS JAMMED OR BACKED UP WITH PRODUCT When this occurs the machine will stop. This message is triggered by a downstream photoeye near the exit of the tunnel. The photoeye has a time delay on it to allow cases to pass by. The photoeye must be mounted far enough downstream so the tunnel can always empty out all of its product. This input must be wired in the field (if hand packing, this input must be jumped). DANCER UP PROX MADE, MACHINE IS CYCLE STOPPED This message is displayed when the unwind motor falls behind as roll diameter gets very small. The machine comes to a cycle stop and the film unwinds runs until the dancer storage is filled back up. The message must be reset and the machine must be started. WRAP BAR CLUTCH TRIPPED This message is displayed when the wrap bar clutch trips. This almost always happens when the wrap bar comes in contact with a case. Remove all cases and film in the wrap conveyor area. Power up the machine with the doors closed and initializes the machine. ROLL SELECTOR SWITCH WAS CHANGED WHILE THE MACHINE WAS IN AUTOMATIC This message is displayed when the mandrel selector switch is changed while the machine is running. The message will go away after the restarting of the machine. INITIALIZE STOPPED UNWIND AXIS RAN FOR TOO LONG This message is displayed when the unwind motor runs for too long of a period during initialization. Check to make sure air chucks are on and the film is not broken. FILM FEED SECTION IS NOT UP This message is displayed when the film feed is not up. The mgachine can be initialized with the film feed down, but it cannot run in automatic. This message clears once the film feed section is up again. Page 23 of 39 4/12/19 CAUsers\nbeatonkAppData\Local \Microsoft\ Windows \Temporary Internet Files \Conte Section 7 Machine Faults MAIN AIR PRESSURE IS LOW This message is displayed when the air supply to the machine is low. The machine will cycle stop when this happens. The machine cannot be run until the air pressure increases. Once the air pressure raises again then press "Reset Fault" to clear this message. INITIALIZING WAIT UNTIL COMPLETE (GET FILM) This message is displayed when the machine is in the process of initializing. Once the initializing is complete remove the excess film that is on the Wrap Conveyor. This message clears automatically once the initialization of the machine is complete. MACHINE NEEDS TO BE INITIALIZED This message is displayed when the machine has not been initalized or there has been a servo fault and the machine needs to be re -initialized. Remove all products from the machine and check that the film is threaded properly. Press the "Initialize Machine" button on the operator interface. Once the initialization is started this message will clear automatically. CASES ARE TOO CLOSE OR TOO FAR APART TO COMPENSATE This message is displayed if the start wraps photoeye blocks in a position where the case cannot be wrapped. The operator should remove all cases from the machine which do not have wrap on them and restart the machine. WRAP BAR IS NOT AT HOME FAULT This message is displayed when the wrap bar proximity sensory should have been blocked and was not. The proximity sensor may have to be adjusted or has failed. The message can be cleared by initializing the machine. MISSING FILM PHOTOEYE NOT WORKING This message is displayed when the film not present photoeye is not aligned when the wrap bar is in the home position. This photoeye will need to be aligned by maintenance personnel. Press "Reset Fault" to clear this message. FILM NOT PRESENT ON PACKAGE UNDER WRAP BAR This message is displayed when the "Film Not Present" photoeye is not blocked when the wrap bar is up. Remove the case that did not get the film and remove the film also. If there is not a piece of film on the wrap conveyor look for it on the vacuum conveyor or in the shear area. This piece of film is somewhere in the machine and must be found. Press "Reset Fault" to clear this message. Page 24 of 39 4/12/19 CAUsers \nheaton \A.ppData \Local \Microsoft \ Windows \Temporary Internet Files \Conte Section 7 Machine Faults CASE MEASURE FAULT This message is displayed when the start wrap photoeye is on for not enough or too much distance of the main conveyor. The operator should remove all cases and film from the machine. RIGHT SIDE FILM ROLL SELECTED WITH CHUCK OFF When this occurs the machine will cycle stop. The pneumatic selector switch for the air chuck on the right roll needs to be turned on. LEFT SIDE FILM ROLL SELECTED WITH CHUCK OFF When this occurs the machine will cycle stop. The pneumatic selector switch for the air chuck on the left roll needs to be turned on. KAYAT ENGINEERING MACHINE IS CYCLE STOPPED PRESS MACHINE CYCLE This message is displayed when all machine faults are cleared and the machine is ready for the "Cycle Start" push-button to be pressed. KAYAT ENGINEERING SPEED = 60 CPM CASE COUNT = 12000 STATUS DISPLAY LINE When the machine is in "Automatic Mode" this is an example of the display screen that will be shown. The bottom line can be any one of the following status messages. PRODUCT LOW AT INFEED Indicates that the machine is running and the infeed is set to "On," but there are cases available for the machine to run. LEFT SIDE FILM ROLL LOW When this status fault occurs the metering on the infeed conveyor will stop. Once all of the cases are through the machine, the machine will also stop. The operator changes the roll (see film splicing procedure drawing in mechanical book) and changes the "Mandrel Select" button on the front of the enclosure to switch to "right side film roll running." RIGHT SIDE FILM ROLL LOW Page 25 of 39 4/12/19 CAUsers \nbeaton\AppDataTocalNicrosoft\VVindows \Temporary Internet Files \Conte Section 7 Machine Faults When this status fault occurs the metering on the infeed conveyor will stop. Once all of the cases are through the machine the machine will also stop. The operator changes the roll (see film splicing procedure drawing in mechanical book) and changes the "Mandrel Select" button on the front of the enclosure to switch to "Left Side Film Roll Running. " DISCHARGE NOT RUNNING This message is displayed when the discharge conveyor is not running. The infeed conveyor will stop and the main conveyor will keep running. Once the downstream condition clears the infeed conveyor will start again. This input needs to be wired in by the customer before main drive on the machine will run. Page 26 of 39 4/12/19 C:\Usersknheaton\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\Tempor &Conte Appendix A INITIAL START-UP REQUIREMENTS 1. Please provide two weeks' notice to the factory prior to start-up, so that we may properly schedule service and start-up. 2. Have the air, and electrical service connected. 3. Have the infeed and discharge conveyors operational. 4. Have tunnel discharge backup photoeye wires pulled. The location of this eye is critical; the tunnel must always be able to empty out its contents, 5. Have product on hand for testing under production conditions. 6. Have the interface wiring connected (typical interface wiring is as shown below): A. The 601-T requires two input signals from the customer. 1) Customer to provide a dry contact indicating the discharge conveyor is running. The 601-T needs to have this input on before the infeed belt will cycle (see electrical schematic for wire and input #). 2) Customer needs to mount and wire a discharge backup photoeye (this input is on if there is no product blocking the reflector). The customer must mount this eye at a location which will guarantee that the tunnel contents always have enough room to empty onto the discharge conveyor. The mounting position must be based on density of discharge conveyors and speeds (see electrical schematic for wire and input #). B. The 601-T provides a dry contact for customer's use indicating that the infeed conveyor can run (contact closure indicates okay to run infeed conveyor) and most importantly, have personnel on hand for training. Page 27 of 39 4/12/19 C: \Users \nheaton \AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows \Temporary Internet Files \Conte Appendix B INITIAL INSTALLATION 1. Bring the skidded machine assemblies to the installation area. 2. Determine the center line on which the machine will rest once installed. Using a chalk line, mark the machine's center line on the floor. 3. The machine should be put in before the infeed and discharge conveyors are installed. 4. Place machine (still on the skid) as close to this final installation position as possible. 5. Have qualified personnel take the machine off the skid and place it on the line (setting up for the proper infeed and discharge elevations). 6. Connect all electrical wiring at the infeed and discharge conveyors, if they are Kayat supplied. If not, the 601-T has no break points where interconnections are required. 7. Connect the air and electrical to the machine in accordance with the piping and wiring diagrams supplied with the machine. 8. Be sure that all wires and air lines have been properly re -connected and tightened. All air regulators have been factory adjusted and all motors have been phased with respect to each other. NOTE! Due to the nature of a servo drive, and a frequency inverter, the motor attached will run in the correct direction regardless of phasing. Do not check for proper rotation on a servo driven or frequency driven motor. 9. Connect the proper 3 phase voltage supply, at the proper amperage to the primary side of the main disconnect. The drop coming into the machine should be properly protected by either fusing or a circuit breaker. The machine phasing should be done at the primary side of the main disconnect. The amperage information for this drop is located on the electrical prints for the machine. 10.The machine is equipped with a I/2 inch N.P.T. main filter regulator assembly, which is located at the upstream end of the machine opposite the operator side of the machine. Minimum air requirements are 10 SCFM @ 80PSI. 11. Before attempting to power up the machine, a visual inspection should be made of all sensors and valves to be sure that no damage has occurred to the wiring or air lines during shipping. A visual inspection of all electrical panels and junction boxes must also be performed by a qualified electrician. Very close attention should be paid to the wiring of the servo motor drives and servo drive supply transformer since this hardware is very expensive. 12. Ensure all interface wiring has been properly connected. Page 28 of 39 4/12/19 CAUsers\nheaton\AppData\L-ocal1Microsoft \Windows \Temporary Internet Files \Conte Appendix C OPERATOR MESSAGE DISPLAY OPERATIONS DOOR OPEN OR E—STOP IS PRESSED PRESS "." TO START PROGRAM MODE 1 2 3 F1 F2 4 5 6 F3 F4 7 8 9 YES NO Q SPACE BKSP ENTER Description The operator interface/message-display module (SMT) is located on the door ofthe electrical control panel enclosure. The message display contains a four line by 20-character display module that displays machine status, fault conditions, operator instructions, and operation screens. The interface/display module allows the operator to interact with the Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) for selecting desired modes of operation. The module contains function keys and a numeric keypad that the operator uses to enter or select desired values and/or functions for machine operation. For example: the operator may change the running case per minute (cpm) speed of the machine by performing the proper function selection and entering the desire running speed in cpm (within machine allowances) while running production. The control program and the SMT are in continuous communication with each other; the display messages are sent to the SMT while the operator entered instruction is sent to the control program. The PLC has been programmed for the product pack selections and automatically adjusts for the newly selected pack. The operator selects the machine mode of operation by accessing the display screen and selecting the proper function key as indicated within each screen. Each screen has been given dedicated function keys, which are applicable only within the selected screen. For example: the Fl function key may be used in two or more screens or sub screens and will perform different functions in each of the different screens. Page 29 of 39 4/12/19 CAUsers \nheaton \AppData\Local Microsoft\Windows \Temporary Internet Files\Content.Outlook \QM5WYLY9 \ 601 -T-Manual.DOC Appendix C OPERATOR MESSAGE DISPLAY OPERATIONS Change Running Speed: The "YES + No" keys allow the operator to adjust the machine running speed in cases per minute (CPM). Press the "Yes" key followed by the "NO" key to access the speed change screen. Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired machine running speed (CPM) within designed limits, then press the ENTER key. NOTE: When a change in pack selection is made, the running speed of the machine will change to the selected Pack default speed. The "YES + NO" entered running speed will remain for the current selected pack and will change to the default speed for any given pack when a new pack is selected. Zero Product Count The 601T PLC records the number of cases that pass through the machine. If a new product is passed through the machine, the operator may wish to reset the product count to "0". To "zero" the product count, press the backspace (BKS) key three (3) times. When the count gets to 1,000,000 or when power is lost, the count resets to O. Access to the Function Screens "." To access the function screens, press the "." Button located on the lower left of the keypad. This will bring up the first screen. Note: To escape back to the message display mode screen at any time, just press the "." Key from any of the screens. Menu Screen The menu screen will display four possible selections for the operator to choose: Fl CUT PIECE FILM F2 INITIALIZE MACH. F3 ROLL FUNCTIONS F4 CHANGE PACK F1) CUT PIECE FILM - This function is used to cut a piece of film from the film feed. This function only works when there are no cases in the machine. F2) INITIALIZE MACH. - This function is used to initialize the Machine. The machine requires reinitialization after a pack change or under certain fault conditions. The PLC program will send a message to the message display screen to notify the operator if initialization is required. F3) ROLL FUNCTIONS — This screen allows the operator to change the pack count that the machine will wrap after the Low Film Photo Eye detects that the film roll has reached the low-level state. This operation can be changed before the photo eye detecting the low film state. Since the machine is Page 30 of 39 4/12/19 CAUsers\nbeaton \AppData\LocalNicrosoftWindows \Temporary Internet Files \Content.Outlook \QM5WYLY9 \ 601 -T-Manual.DOC Appendix C OPERATOR MESSAGE DISPLAY OPERATIONS equipped with two film roll mandrels, the F3 function goes to a sub screen to select which film mandrel count the operator wishes to adjust. The top line will indicate which roll is currently selected for operation. XXXXX ROLL SELECTED F2 LEFT COUNT CHANGE F3 RGT COUNT CHANGE Each of the functions F2 or F3 will go to screen that will state: XXXXX SIDE FILM ROLL WILL RUN XX PACKS AFTER EYE CLEARS ENTER NEW VALUE: NOTE: Use the numeric keys to change the count and then press the ENTER key. F4) CHANGE PACK — This function is used to change the machine pack. This will go to a sub screen that will allow the operator to scroll through the programmed pack selections and choose the desired pack. to run. The top line will show the current pack until the operator begins to scroll up or down to the desired pack selection. PACK XX F1 SCROLL UP F2 SCROLL DOWN Page 31 of 39 4/12/19 C:\Users\nheaten\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\Temporary Internet Files \Content.Outlook\QM5 WYLY9\601-T-Manual.DOC Appendix C OPERATOR MESSAGE DISPLAY OPERATIONS 601T VARIABLE NOTES WARNING THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION IS FOR QUALIFIED PERSONNEL ONLY. UNPREDICTABLE MACHINE OPERATION AND MACHINE DAMAGE COULD BE CAUSED BY IMPROPER USAGE. ANY CHANGE TO ANY VARIABLE MUST BE RECORDED. WITHOUT EXACT INFORMATION ON ALL MACHINE SETTINGS. KAYAT ENGINEERING WILL BE UNABLE TO ASSIST IN TROUBLESHOOTING. FILMLKDST: (FILM LOCK DISTANCE) 2476 = 1" DISTANCE IN ENCODER PULSES THAT THE MAIN DRIVE TRAVELS BEFORE THE FILM STARTS. INCREASE THIS VALUE: IF THE FILM IS TOO FAR TOWARDS THE LEADING EDGE OF TRAY. WRPLKDST (WRAP LOCK DISTANCE) 2476 = 1" DISTANCE IN ENCODER PULSES THAT THE MAIN DRIVE TRAVELS BEFORE THE WRAP BAR STARTS. INCREASE THIS VALUE IF THE WRAP BAR IS COMING UP TO SOON. INFLCONST (INFEED CONSTANT) SET TO 24" BETWEEN CASES ONCE THE CASES ARE COMPLETELY ON THE MAIN DRIVE. NOTE: DON'T CHECK BETWEEN CASE #1 AND CASE #2. A RANGE BETWEEN 23.5 AND 25.5 IS GOOD. PORTANT: ON MACHINES WITH ONLY 3 VARIABLES: FILMLKDST, WRPLKDST AND INFLCONST. AFTER ENTERING A NEW VARIABLE YOU MUST HOLD DOWN THE YES KEY FOR 5 SECONDS TO STORE THE NEW VALUE. FILMLEN FLMSLOP 0,1,2 WRAPPRF RELEASE CASELWIN (FILM LENGTH) RANGE 26 TO 52 LENGTH IN ONE (1) INCH INCREMENTS. (FILM SLOPE) RATIO OF FILM FEED AFTER INSERTION 0= SLOWEST, 2 = FASTEST. (WRAP PROFILE) CHANGES THE WRAP PROFILE FROM STRAIGHT 1:1 GEAR TYPE PROFILE TO MULTIPLE VARIATIONS WTTHIN A SINGLE PROFILE IN INCREMENTS FROM 0 TO 3. 0,1,2,3 0 = STRAIGHT GEARING, 3 = CHANGE RATIO OFTEN. MAIN DRIVE POSITION WHEN INFEED STARTS. (CASE LENGTH WIDTH IN INCHES) 2476 = 1" CASE MEASURE FAULT. MIN MAX CASE WIDTH. Page 32 of 39 4/12/19 C:\Users\nheaton\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\Temporary Internet Files\Content.Outlook\QM5 WYLY9\601-T-Manual.DOC Appendix C OPERATOR MESSAGE DISPLAY OPERATIONS CASEHWIN CASE MEASURE FAULT MAXIMUM CASE WIDTH IN INCHES 2476 = 1". SPEED (SPEED OF MACHINE IN CASES PER MINUTE (CPM)) SPEED OF MACHINE AFTER PACK CHANGE. KNFRFPOS (KNIFE PROFILE POSITION) 0 TO 3999 = (0 TO 360 DEG.) DISTANCE THE KNIFE MOVES AFTER SENSING THE HOME PROX WHILE INITIALIZING. STGLEN (STAGE LENGTH) 1200 = 1" WHERE THE FILM LEADING EDGE STOPS AFTER INITIALIZATION. INFDGAP (INFEED GAP) MAXIMUM MAIN DRIVE DISTANCE WHILE INFEED BELT STOP PHOTOEYE IS CLEAR, SMT DISPLAY ESCAPES OUT OF ANY SCREEN, TOGGLES BETWEEN MESSAGES & PROGRAM VARIABLES. "YES + "NO": ADJTJST TEMPORARY SPEED CHANGES. THESE WILL NOT RETAIN AFTER CHANGING PACKS OR LOSS OF POWER. CAN DO 'WHILE THE MACHINE IS RUNNING. "Fl + F4" BRINGS UP ENTER PASSWORD SCREEN. ONCE THE ENTER PASSWORD IS DISPLAYED, PRESS THE NUMERIC PASSWORD AND THEN ENTER. IF THE PASSWORD IS ENTERED CORRECTLY THE PROGRAM MACHINE SCREEN WILL COME UP. PASSWORD: 601 F3 & F4: MOVES UP & DOWN THE VARIABLE SETTINGS. Fl ALLOWS YOU TO CHANGE THE "PACK" Fl &F2 MOVES ACROSS THE PACK VARIABLES SETTINGS. ZERO CASE COUNT: PRESS BACK SPACE BKS THREE (3) TIMES. MANDREL LIGHTS: HOLD THE RESET BUTTON FOR TWO (2) SECONDS. INITIALIZE WITH PUSH BUTTONS: HOLD THE MACHINE CYCLE & INFEED CYCLE PUSH BUTTONS FOR THREE (3) SECONDS. Page 33 of 39 4/12/19 CAUsers \nheaton\AppData\Local \Microsoft \ Windows \Temporary Internet Files \ Content.Outlook \QM5WYLY9\601-T-Manual.DOC Appendix D PACIFIC SCIENCE ERROR CODES FAULT CODES Purpose: FAULT CODE indicates a fault has occurred. When the display is not zero or an eight, a fault has occurred. Reset the drive by asserting the fault reset signal cycling drive AC power. This can be accomplished by reinitializing the 601T Wrapper. Guidelines Under HELP menu in the Pacific Science Manual see index topic FAULT CODES for remainder of fault codes. LED READ OUT VALUE NO FAULT MEANING 0 (Solid) 0 Not Faulted/Not Enabled 8 (Solid) 0 Not Faulted/Enabled 8 (Alternating) 0 Not Faulted/Enabled/Cwlnh active 8 (Alternating) 0 Not Faulted/Enabled/CCwInh active 8 (Alternating) 0 Not Faulted/Enabled/CwInh ad ive& CCwlnh active Fault codes LED READ OUT VALUE FAULT MEANING (Blinking) 1 1 Velocity feedback (Ve1FB) over speed (Blinking) 2 2 Motor Over -Temp (Blinking) 3 3 Drive Over -Temp (Blinking) 4 4 Drive I*T (Blinking) 5 5 1-n Fault (9x3) (Blinking) 6 6 Control +/- 12V supply under voltage (Blinking) 7 2 Output over current or bus over voltage (Blinking) 9 2 Shunt Regulator (Regen Resistor) Overload (Blinking) A 1Q Not assigned (Blinking) B 1! Auxiliary +5V Low (Blinking) C 12 Not assigned (Blinking) D 13 Not assigned (Solid) E 14 Processor throughput fault (Blinking) E 14 Power Up Self Test Failure (Alternating) El 225 Bus UV, Bus Voltage VBUSTHRESH (Alternating) E2 226 Ambient Temp Too Low (Alternating) E3 227 Encoder commutation align failed (Only CommSrc=1) (Alternating) E4 228 Ambient Temp Too Low (Alternating) F 1 241 Position Following Error Overflow (Alternating) F3 243 Parameter Checksum Error (Memory Error) See EXTFAULT for further information on Blinking E and Alternating F Scientific manual MA930 cults in the Pacific Page 34 of 39 4/12/19 C:\Users \nheaton\AppData\Local\Mierosoft\Windows \Temporary Internet Files \Conte Appendix E GIDDINGS & LEWIS PIC900 ERROR CODES While the Pic900 is running, the DIAG LED on the CPU module will flash a three digit code signal if there is an error. For example, if there is a long pause -flash -pause -flash -flash -pause- flash -flash -flash -long pause, the code is 123. The errors are described below: CODE ERROR DESCRIPTION 122 No math coprocessor Attempted to perfolin floating point operation with no math coprocessor installed on the CPU. l 23 Scan too long A ladder scan loss has occurred because the CPU takes more than 200 ms to scan the application program. 124 Excessive over head The system overhead up\date time is excessive. 125 Insufficient memory There is insufficient memory on the CPU to run the current program. 126 No hardware bit memory There is no bit memory installed on the CPU and the program requires it. 127 No software bit memory There is no bit memory capability via software and the program requires it. 222 Drive error No driver support on the CPU for the I/O module. Update your system EPROMS. 22_ Master rack error The 1/0 modules in the master rack do no match what was declared in the hardware master declaration table. The number of flashes in the third digit ( ) identifies the slot number that is in error. 231* No daughter board _ There is no communications daughter board installed on the CPU when attempting to do expansion I/O communications. 232* Communications error A failure has occurred in remote I/O communications. 233* Number of racks error The number of expansion racks in the system does not match the number of expansion racks declared in the expansion hardware declaration table. Expansion rack error The I/O module in the expansion rack(s) or the I/O modules do not match what was declared in the expansion hardware declaration table. For rack expansion: The number of flashes in the second digit indicates the remote rack (1 through 8). The number of flashes in the third digit indicates the slot number. For block I/O modules: The number of flashes in the second and third digits indicates the block I/O module (01 through 77). The second digit will flash a 1 — 7, 10 for 0... The third digit will flash a 1 — 9, 10 for O. For example, if the second digit flashes 3 times and the third digit flashes 10 times, the module is 30. * Errors connected with 1/0 expansion. Refer to the I/O Driver Module write-up in the Giddings & Lewis Hardware Manual for more information. C:\Users\nheaton\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\Temporary Internet Files\ContentOutlook\QM5WYLY91601-T- Manual.DOC Appendix F ALLEN-BRADLEY 160 SSC CONTROLLER PARAMETERS & FAULT CODES Allen-Bradley Bulletin 160 SSC Controller Display Parameters This group of parameters consists of commonly viewed controller operating conditions such as controller output frequency, output voltage, output current and frequency command. All parameters in this group are read only. P# Parameter Description Min/Max Range Units 01 Output Frequency 0 to 240 Hz E 0.1Hz 02 Output Voltage 0 to (Max Voltage) 1 Volt 03 Output Current 0 to 2 times Controller Rated Output Current 1 0.01 Amps 04 Output Power 0 to 2 times Controller Rated Output Power j 0.01KW 05 Bus Voltage 0 to 410-(230V) 0 to 815-(460V) 1 Volt 06 Frequency Command 0 to 240 0.1Hz 07 Last Fault 0 to 48 Numeric Value 08 Heat Sink Temperature 0 to 150 1 Degree C 09 Controller Status 0000 to 1011 Binary Number 10 Controller Type Numeric Value Numeric Value 11 Control Version Fixed Value Numeric Value 12 Input Status 0000 to 0111 Binary Number 1.3 Power Factor Angle 0.00 to 90.00 0.01 Degrees 14 Memory Probe Address Numeric Value Numeric Value 15 Preset Status ** This parameter applies only to the Preset Speed model. 0000 to 0111 Binary number 16 Analog Input Displays the analog input as a percent of full scale. Used in setting P60 —(Zero Offset), P75-(Analog Input Minimum) and P76- Analog Input Maximum) Important: On the initial set up of the controller, apply a OV or 4mA analog command t the controller. Once applied, if the value of this parameter displays something other than zero, program that value into P60- (Zero Offset). Important: The value of the (Zero Offset) will be subtracted from the value of this paramater. -150to + 150.0 0.1% C:\Users\nheaton\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\Temporary Internet Files \Content.Outlook\QM5 WYLY9\601-T- Manual.DOC Appendix l� z� ��� D� ��� � � �7�� ��� ���� CONTROLLER ���� V � �|� '"���^.-�^��"���� ��� m�� ~~��,�u�����u� PARAMETERS �� ���0U7� ^�A�lN��� ^^���^.u�"�^�� .� ���^�^�� �vv"��� ALLEN-BFLADLEY 160 SSC VARIABLE SPEED CONTROLLER (SERIES B) FAULT INFORMATION _Fault Fault Fault Description Corrective Action Number Indication _ 03 Power Loss DC Bus Voltage remains MVnitiorincoming ACline for low voltage orline power Fault below G5Y6nominal onpower interruption upfor longer than 5seconds 04 Under DCBus voltage fell below the Monitor incoming ACline for low voltage orline power Voltage minimum. For controllers rated interruption. Fault otinput voltage 2OO-240VAC, undervo|togetrip occurs ot 21OVDCbus voltage (equiv- a|enttn15OVAC incoming line voltage). For controllers ���� natadatinputvo|iage38D-48O � VAC, undarvo|tagatrip occurs at3Q0VDCbus voltage (equiv- a|antto275VAC incoming line voltage). 05 Over Voltage DCBus maximum voltage Bus overvo|bsQecaused bymotor regeneration. Monitor Fault exceeded. For cnnLn]||�rSn3t�d inuominQAC|in�f�r�xo�saiv�vo|t��e. Extend the - at inputvo|taQe2U0-24O\6AC, — -- dece|time orinstall dynamic brake m�du|�or�xt�rn�| nve|[age��0ccurs at41O -- -- capacitor module. VDCbus voltage (equivalent to 2QOVAC incoming line vo|taga). For controllers rated at input voltage 380-46OVAC, ovan/o|tagatrip occurs at815 VDCbus voltage (equivalent hu 575VAC incoming line vu|tage). 06 Motor Stall Motor has sta||ed� Motor load is Longer acceleration Um�or� reduced load required. Fault excessive. � 07 Motor Internal electronic overload trip. Reduce motor load until controller output current does Overload Excessive motor load exists. not exceed the current set bvP42-[Motor Overload Fault Current]. Reduce P38-[Boost Vo|to]. 08 Over Excessive heat detected. Clear blocked ordirty heat sink fins. Check ambient Temperature Fault tempenature�{�heokfor blocked ornon-operating fan. _ C Intemo l�� Appendix l� = ��� D� =�� � x ���� ��� �4�4n CONTROLLER '����^,-���u����u u�� �m� �vv^����~x����� ����M���P�X�� '� ��KT�.1r �������� �^�x�/��,�"�"x�^��� w� xz�m^�" x~~x^°^�u, 11 Operator Keypad has been removed while Clear fault. Donot remove keypad under power. Fault controller is powered. 12 Overcunent Ovarcuxentdetected inhardware Check short circuit atthe controller output orexcessive Fault trip circuit, load conditions atthe motor. 32 EEPRO[W EEPR(]PWhas invalid data. Reset EEPROyWusing PS6-[Reset Funotions]. Fault Set to1 Cycle power. 33 Max Retries Controller failed to reset Repair system fault. Fault _ within the number ofretries set - inP5O-[Restart Tries] 38 Phase Phase tpground fault detected Check the wiring between the controller and motor. Fault between controller and motor in Check motor for grounded phase. phaaeU 38 Phase Phase toground fault detected Check the wiring between the controller and motor. Fault between controller and motor in Check motor for grounded phase. phaee\( _ 40 Phase Phase toground fault detected Check the wiring between the controller and motor. Fault bebmeanoontro||arondmotorin {�heckmotor for grounded phase. _ phosaVV. 41 UV Short Excessive current has been Check the motor and external wiring tothe controller Fault detected between these two output terminals for ashorted condition, uontno||eroutputtermina|a� _ 42 UVVShort Excessive current has been Check the motor and external wiring tothe controller Fault detected between these two output terminals for oshorted condition. controller output terminals. ' 43 VW Short Excessive current has been Check the motor and external wiring tothe controller Fault detected between these two Output terminals for ashorted condition. | tb controller output 48 Reprogram [)oouna when controller pana- Clear fault. Fault meters are reset to defaults. 49 Zero Overload Occurs when load requires Reduce motor load at zero hertz. Reduce motor dwell Fault excessive ourrentat�ero hertz, time at hertz. Reduce P�O'[Bo�st"�o|�]. or P38-[Boost Volts] Set too high. C Intemu VYLY9\601�- Appendix F ALLEN-BRADLEY 160 SSC CONTROLLER PARAMETERS & FAULT CODES CAUsers\nheaton\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\Temporary Internet Files\Content.Outlook\QM5WYLY9\601 -T- Manual.DOC Installation, Maintenance & Operating Manual for - * RYSON SPIRAL CONVEYORS RYSON '',.-• ' t 7,- .., - 11 I I t $ 40, :0.1,14, I 'r 517" Y 1,!-dOD E C, ..,. 1444rue--- 44.1,Teottg_lr",'' APP r . C-1 ukwila DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKVVII-P1 APR 12 2019 PERMIT CENTER VERTDCAL CONVEYONG LUTIONS M lei • 0049 INSTALLATION, MAINTENANCE AND OPERATING MANUAL FOR RYSON SPIRAL CONVEYORS 1 INTRODUCTION 3 2 GENERAL INFORMATION **10•01.**11***0**•******1.001”.•****•** ******* **•**********"*0******************03 3 SAFETY 1141,•* ****** *3115 3.1 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS 5 3.2 GENERAL PRECAUTIONARY PROCEDURES. ..... ..... . ........ ...................... ..... ....„........ ...... 6 3.3 PERSONAL WORK HABITS 7 3.4 HOUSEKEEPING 7 3.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE 7 4 INTEGRATION AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 4.1 INTEGRATION... ...... ................ .................. ....... ..... . ........ ......... .......... ...... ........... .......... . ....... 8 4.1.1 Conveyor Interface 8 4.1.2 Conveyor Speed 9 4.1.3 Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) 9 4.1.4 Gap between Loads 10 4.1.5 Conveyor Transitions 10 4.2 INSTALLATION 10 4.2.1 Unloading 10 4.2.2 Setting up 10 4.2.3 In/Out Elevations ............. 4.2.4 Electrical Wiring 13 4.2.5 Proximity Sensors 14 4.3 MOTOR BRAICE 17 4.3.1 Recommended Guide Lines 17 4.4 AIR OPERATED CHAIN TENSIONER 20 4.5 INITIAL START UP 23 5 SPIRAL CONVEYOR PRE START-UP CHECKLIST ........24 6-SPIRAL CONVEYOR MAINTENANCE atel."••••.f. Rai Es.•11111.10*.1.**0 ...... * ..... **•00•6****•*425 6.1 SUGGESTED MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEVIPEDOWN INSTRUCTIONS ............... ........ ....... ........ 25 6.2 AUTOMATIC CHAIN TENSIONING 28 6.3 REPLACING SLATS 29 6.4 SHORTENING OF CHAIN 29 6.5 DRIVE OVERLOAD PROTECTION DEVICE 32 6.6 DIUVE 33 6.7 RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS 33 6.7.1 Ambient Operation 33 6.7.2 Food Grade Lubricant 33 6.7.3 Freezer Operations 33 6.7.4 Gear Oil .............. ......... ......... ....... ........ _ ...................... ..... . ........... 33 7 SPARE .............. .............. ....... . .......... ........... ..... 34 8 DRAWINGS 36 January 18th, 2019 194877 1 7 9 SUPPLEMENTAL MANUALS 37 9.1 MOTORS AND BRAKEMOTORS TYPE BM(G)BRAKES 37 9.2 GEARMOTORS AND GEAR REDUCERS 37 9.3 CHAJN LUBRICANT 37 January 181h, 2019 194877 2 RYSON INTERNATIONAL, INC 1 Introduction This manual is intended for personnel who will install, maintain, repair, clean, dust, clear and otherwise operate the spiral conveyor. All such personnel must receive instructions on how to safely perform their tasks and this manual must be readily available to such personnel. Please read this manual carefully. Failure to follow the instruction contained herein may cause serious personal injuries and premature equipment wear and possibly void the warranty. For customer service call: Ryson International, Inc. 300 Newsome Drive Yorktown, VA 23692 Phone: (757) 898-1530 Fax: (757) 898-1580 E-mail: service@ryson.com Visit our web site at www.ryson.com 2 General Information Ryson Reference: 194877 Purchaser: Sentry Equipment & Sales, Inc. 13150 East Lynchburg -Salem Turnpike Forest, VA 24551 Reference: P.O. No. 25656 End User: Shasta Beverages 1227 Andover Park East Tukwila, WA 98188 Model(s): One (1) spiral conveyor 1500-400-A1-4 Drawings: 194877 Rev. A January 18th, 2019 194877 RYSON INTERNATIONAL, INC The Ryson Spiral Conveyor is a new concept in vertical conveying designed to conserve valuable floor space. The conveying surface is comprised of chain and slats supported by a lovv friction guide system. The spiral can convey loads up or down in a continuous operation. The Ryson Spiral conveyor is constructed of rugged components in a modular design. Typically the conveyor is delivered preassembled allowing for fast and easy installation. The Spiral conveyor can be supplied in several standard configurations to accommodate a broad range of loads and applications. The spiral may be supplied with either fixed or variable speed. Type A-1 Elevate Clockwise Type A-2 Descend Clockwise Type A-3 Type A-4 Elevate Counter- Clockwise ,, •, ! f ; Descend , / Counter - „ •,' Clockwise • -....., ... Type 8-1 Elevate Clockwise , ,.,...).--„ %, ,, i i Type 8-2 Descend Clockwise ,..-.4_,. , • • •••• ,- # I Type 8-3 Elevate Counter- Clockwise Y, i i i \ , ,,..,....,...,. ••, Type B-4 , Descend I Counter - -. Clockwise .... .,., ' Type C-1 Elevate Clockwise Type C-2 Descend Clockwise ....... Type C-3 Elevate Counter- Type C-4 IA Descend Counter - Clockwise Clockwise Note: All conveyors can also run in both or opposite January 18th, 2019 194877 4 3 Safety RYSON INTERNATIONAL, INC Safety should never be compromised and it should always play a major role in planning, participation and execution of all system operations. All safety programs must make use of common sense and good judgment and must be based on proper safety attitudes and awareness. Operating and maintenance personnel should never compromise safety and should always be careful to follow established procedures for safe practices. 3.1 Warnings and cautions Throughout this, manual a system of warnings and cautions are used to alert the reader to items that are especially important to a maintenance person or operator. Read these messages carefully before performing the task that follows. The meaning of the different signal words as defined by the ANSI Z535.6 and ANSI Z535.4 standards may be explained in collateral materials. ACAUTION SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. NOTICE is used to address practices not related to physical injury. Safety instructions (or equivalent) signs indicate specific safety -related instructions or procedures. January 18th, 2019 194877 5 RY S 0 N INTERNATIONAL, INC 3.2 General precautionary procedures The following precautions are presented to increase awareness of operating and maintenance personnel to potential safety hazards or problems: a Access to the spiral conveyor shall be restricted or guarded so as to prevent personnel from inadvertently coming in contact with the conveyor while in operation. PINCH POINT Moving equipment can cause severe injury KEEP AWAY Pinch points exist while the conveyor is running and can cause serious injuries. Extreme caution should be exercised at the spiral entry and exit points. o All personnel must be trained in the function and operation of the spiral and its safety requirements before entering the work area. o Know the location of all emergency stops. o Read and understand all warning plates and decals before operating or performing maintenance on the spiral. Worn -- labels must be replaced. AWARNING ▪ Always Lock and Tag out (LOTO) power at the main power panel before performing any maintenance or housekeeping on the spiral, to prevent against an unexpected restart. o Only authorized personnel shall maintain, repair, clean, dust, clear and otherwise operate the spiral conveyor. All such personnel must have received instructions in how to safely perform such tasks and also have easy access to this manual. • Follow all scheduled maintenance, lubrication, and inspection procedures. Make sure that all replacement parts are interchangeable and of the same quality as original parts. • Make sure that all covers, clamps and guards are installed correctly. January 18th, 2019 194877 6 RYSON INTERNATIONAL, INC • Do not operate the spiral if any part is damaged or improperly installed. 3.3 Personal work habits The following personal work habits must be observed: • Never reach into, over or under a running conveyor for any reason, Never lean or sit on a conveyor or rest hands near moving parts or even on equipment that is idle. • Always lift properly using the legs, not the back, for support. • Do not wear loose clothing when operating or working near a conveyor. Ties, scarves, long sleeves and anything with drawstrings should be avoided. • Never attempt to service or operate a conveyor while overtired or under the influence of drugs or alcohol. 3.4 Housekeeping Good housekeeping habits are important and contribute to a safe and healthy working area. Housekeeping is more than just sweeping the floor. It is the orderly arrangement of tools and equipment, the careful storage of work goods and disposal of waste materials. u Dust, debris and oil should be cleaned off the conveyor regularly to prevent equipment damage and fire hazards. a Areas around the conveyor should be kept clear and - free from tripping hazards. Be sure work area is properly illuminated. a Do not hang articles of clothing or the like on switches, levers, panel doors, etc. 3.5 Operation and maintenance The following operation and maintenance cautions must be observed: u Only qualified personnel should operate and maintain the spiral conveyor. o Place barriers appropriately when servicing overhead equipment. January 18th, 2019 194877 7 RY S 0 N INTERNATIONAL, INC • Never clean or perform maintenance on a running conveyor. • When work is to be done on a machine, turn off power to the device and lock out/tag out (LOTO) the power switch accordingly. Use the proper tools when performing maintenance. • Guards placed on machinery should never be removed except for maintenance purposes. They must be reinstalled immediately upon completion of maintenance. AWAFNING • Never remove objects from a spiral that is caught or jammed without first turning off the conveyor. • Immediately report any malfunction or abnormal operations of a conveyor or system. 4 Integration and Installation Instructions 4.1 integration 4.1. The Ryson Spiral Conveyor has been pre -tested in our factory, but is dependent on proper integration with the overall conveyor system for optimal performance. The following outlines the framework for a successful installation. Failure to follow these instructions will adversely affect spiral performance and may also void the warranty. Conveyor Interface The spiral is not made for accumulation and the controls must be designed to prevent unintended accumulation. The spiral conveyor must stop when the conveyor taking products away from the spiral is full or stopped. We recommend installing a photocell which will detect backed up loads on the conveyor immediately following the spiral, thereby preventing loads from backing up into the spiral. The conveyor feeding the spiral must stop when the spiral conveyor is not running and should not restart before the spiral has gained full speed. This will prevent loads from being "pushed" onto the slats during ramp -up of the spiral. Likewise, the take -away January 18th, 2019 194877 8 RYSON INTERNATIONAL, INC conveyor should start before the spiral to avoid a speed differential during ramp -up. 4.1.2 Conveyor Speed The speed of the spiral conveyor must be synchronized with the conveyors feeding in and out of the spiral. The infeed conveyor speed should be equal to the spiral speed and the outfeed conveyor speed should be equal to the spiral speed. A speed differential will cause premature wear of the friction inserts. The spiral cannot be used to pull a gap between loads. 4.1.3 Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) A Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) is required for proper operation of the spiral. This provides infinite speed control, programmable acceleration and deceleration, smooth operation and assures long spiral life. The controlled acceleration and deceleration also assure proper functioning of the safety devices. The following are considerations for selecting a VFD: • In every VFD application, ensure that the VFD will deliver at least the rated motor current. It is not reliable to just match HP values because each manufacturer does not rate their drives in the same way. • The VFD must have a programmable acceleration and deceleration, as well as, a speed set point. It is beneficial to use the digital output signal from the drive to indicate that the spiral is up to speed. This feature is called many things, depending on the drive manufacturer, but this provides a signal that the system controller can use to verify that the spiral is ready to be fed from the infeed conveyor. • These features are typical of even an inexpensive VFD. The spiral does not need the features of a more complicated VFD that are required for motion control applications. January 18th, 2019 194877 9 RYSON 4.1.4 Gap between Loads INTERNATIONAL, INC There must also be a gap between the loads when they enter the spiral. Failing to do so will create a "log" effect in the spiral resulting in jams and equipment damage. The gap must be large enough to prevent the loads from touching when they go into the turns. The minimum gap should be % of a load length. A gap equal to a full load length is normal but a larger gap may be required for tall spirals and heavy loads to prevent overloading. Consult with factory for specific recommendations. 4.1.5 Conveyor Transitions Proper transitions between the in and outfeed conveyors and the spiral are required for smooth operation. This is particularly true when handling small or long loads. The conveyor directly feeding the spiral should always be powered. Gravity conveyors do not assure a proper qap between loads and are not recommended. 4.2 Installation Most spirals are shipped in one piece, pre -assembled and pre- tested. Some site assembly is required for spirals with extended infeed or outfeed including all 1800 model spirals, which are slightly disassembled to facilitate shipping. 4.2.1 Unloading Most spirals are shipped in one piece lying down with a steel "A" frame equipped with casters to facilitate easy unloading. Remove all fasteners and temporary shipping fixtures. Use a forklift for unloading and place forks in the slots provided in the center tube. Lift spiral just enough to clear floor and pull out slowly. 4.2.2 Setting up The end of the center tube is reinforced to facilitate lifting. The conveyor legs have been disassembled prior to shipping. Stand up the conveyor prior to attaching the legs. The spiral can be lifted by a crane or a forklift from the top of the center tube and/or from the bottom by placing the forks under the base frame. See enclosed drawing. January 18th, 2019 194877 10 Spirals shorter than I . Unloading Spiral Only use the two reinforced fork pockets provided in the bottom end of the center tube when unloading and transporting the spiral. 2.Transporting Spiral Lift the pocket end of the spiral and move carefully while the transport frame (with casters) is supporting the opposite end. 3. Standing Up Spiral The top end of the center tube is used for rigging when standing up the spiral. Use only properly rated wire rope or chain slings. Use a forklift or boom truck. Use a second forklift to assist and to make sure the spiral dears the floor when lifting. Use only properly rated poly slings or straps. Caution: Check io-maka sure aft slings and straps are properly secured before lifting. 4. Install Legs Remove transport legs and install the spiral support legs while the spiral is hanging. Remove transport frame when spiral Is standing. Transport Legs Transport Fi RYSON INTERNATIONAL, INC 6 feet Clearance /7777/77/77777777. 77777////, 77 Spiral Support Legs January 18th, 2019 194877 11 Spirals taller than 16 feet I. Unloading Spiral Only use the two reinforced fork pockets provided in the bottom end of the center tube when unloading and transporting the spiral. 2Transporting Spiral Lift the pocket end of the spiral and move carefully. A second forklift is required to maneuver and turn the spiral in right areas. 3. Standing Up Spiral The top end of the center tube is used for rigging when standing up the spiral. Use only properly rated wire rope or chain slings. Use a boom truck or crane.A crane is necessary for spirals above 24 feet Use a second forklift to assist and to make sure the spiral clears the floor when lifting. Use only properly rated poly slings or straps. Caution: Check to make sure all slings and straps are properly secured before lifting. 4. Install Legs Remove transport legs and install the spiral support legs while the spiral is hanging. Remove transport frame when spiral is standing. Transport Legs Transport Frame C RYSON INTERNATIONAL, INC Fork Pocket vi/'_�1 ///////////7//////// /////////r//////////////, • 3 3mn, on mkwm+nu.rtunfmum b h Clearance Spiral Support Legs D January 18i1', 2019 194877 12 RYSON INTERNATIONAL, INC 4.2.3 In/Out Elevations The conveying surface of the conveyor feeding into the spiral should be installed approximately 1/8" to %" higher than the spiral conveying surface, and the conveying surface of the conveyor taking the load way from the spiral should be installed approximately 1/8" to % " lower than the spiral conveying surface in order to facilitate smooth transition. 4.2.4 Electrical Wiring Verify that the spiral conveyor is integrated into the overall conveyor system in accordance with the National Electrical Code and any state and local codes. Make sure that the emergency stops and other safety devices are in compliance with the current safety requirements. The spiral conveyor is furnished with an Inverter Duty Gearmotor (SEW Eurodrive standard). The drive motor is capable of operating on 3-phase, 230/460 VAC electrical power, ± 10 %. The drive motor should be incorporated into the electrical circuit that controls the conveyors directly before and after the spiral conveyor. A VFD is required to prevent the starting motor torque from activating the chain overload device during normal operation. The drive motor must be protected by a properly sized circuit breaker or fuse arrangement. Actual wiring of the drive motor is based on the overall system requirements, considering all other conveyor motors and sequences used for operating the conveyor system and how the spiral is used in the system. Most spirals do not need an electrical brake except for very tall spirals with heavy loads. See section 4.3 for more information for spirals with brakes. January 18th, 2019 194877 13 R.YS ON INTERNATIONAL, INC 4.2.5 Proximity Sensors The spiral comes with two proximity sensors. One for the Automatic Chain Tensioning device and the other for the Drive Overload Protection device. The standard Ryson sensors have the following specifications: • Operating voltage: 20-250 VAC or 10-30 VDC Line frequency: 40-60 Hz o Output function: normally open 2-wire AC/DC or normally open 3-wire DC r. Rated operating distance: approx. 10 mm — 3/8" WIRING DIAGRAMS LOCKNUT LN-Ple SPECIFICATIONS OUTPUT, AP602 4.063 SHORT-CIRCUIT AND OVERLOAD PROTECTED 4 0 3,3 00 OFERATINo viatAsr. 10-.30 VDC RIPPLE DIFFERENTIAL TRAVEL OFYSTERZSIS: 3-1= TrICAL.) • 040' ACR3SS EF_AMX716G DENSER 612 v at 200 nA • OUTPUT FUNCTION NERHALLA EWEN DAVIRO CC SCLP.CENTADLCD Tit COMPATIBLE NO SKIRT -CIRCUIT PROTECTED YES ;RCM ELHRENT FOR 0VD4 LEAD EFOTECTIEn >220 nA CONTINUOUS LOAD CURRENT Sao) AA FAKACE (EFF-STATF) CURRENT (404343 N14-4040 •EIIHHUi I rA TNT DECAY 264(044 AvAilisn 41Y SA nq ' OVER -IN EF O. I PRO I IX I inawuRnrE; REVERSE P1LARETY PROTECTION INCERPORATED WIRE-BREAA PROTECTION InCERPORATE 3 .HOIEOFICN AGAINST TRANSIEN-S kV. I ns. t OPERATING TEMPERATURE -25*C to • 7O' C -ITT to 153.7) ETCLOSURE ,4ECTS tE,AL 4. a, F. 6, ID ANS !EC ire, Sa0Cc 30 g, II ns VIBRA (ICU 53 Ht. I PA 041411404 ALI 3 PIA3E03 LED FUNCT ION MEN, ADVSK t44 • RED. Min, ElvEROIZTO 0602142 RANCE 10 my .394' (NOMINAp SVITCMING FREOUENCF 1202 HR REPEATABILITY .52.0 of NOMINAL SENSING RANGO SHIELDED 34 PA 12-GF30 PLASTIC BARREL 442 64ELE FRO/EIM 413405 11111111110411131Mt 11111111142, DODD C15204 0R134 91 02441 flACHL, 43403 553.1424 0021 GMB CA'E 10/3/29 cma 766 A Sf.0 REVISION 044042CN1 HPIOSIL SVC 7,2093 4342 DESDRIATIO, NET DAIL 1:41AD QtviStEsiS MAEASICNS AtrE INCHES PARI 10 Ni10-P18SK-FiP6X2 January 184h, 2019 194877 14 RYSON INTERNATIONAL, INC WI FONG ABRAM WARNING: KO SHORT-ORCUIT PROTELMON ALWP5 WIFE A UM IN WO WITH 1NE 1025011. - PA.12-5F20 PlA1111C mum - PAU-OF-JO PLASTIC TERNINAL CHANCIER - PA12-0XI PONE CO4ER - PG FLAME SCREWS - STAIKEI13 rsou MAND - PO. HosrArcar (Pam): DER DM 3PECISCATONS DPER4111C AMIE 20-250 WE. ID-3D2 VDC UT( EFEECILFACT 40-110 111 STItAoult MERL IMITMLIE3 3-1521 (510 TVON.) swam o0P JCR= =KWIC MOM ATM V ot FULL WM CLIME OUTPV7 FLAC04 NOWL.LT CAM 2-11122 AC/CC CHCEE-CRIETT MITI= 0211741.04 LW > moor ND 5402 rnk DI.331 rnA orr-srAre okyulaq 0LARENT sAk ' NININN LOAO WANDA 450 rnA MOH CORM THE MEV InECEEE AtEGAEILSET OW A LtIO nc 56 CUP( MO s25 PWAR-ON EFFECT Par IEC $47-5-2 TRANSEZIT PIEGEGTE91 Per EP 5*47-6-2 OPEPATIPC TENFIRLIURE -25C to +717C (-13V to +1331 4033 NAN 1. 3. 4 0. is oto II IFET MOCK 33 9. 11 nu 115 mcnal MEN FOWEA DC 015 IMTFUT DEIMULD Butz EfERATUM DerraI1*rea9 la MI 304" CMSVOIAL) 20 Hs AEFEETAELEIT ASK EF MED 12P$PATIAC DDITANCE F1*514741*.E COCE1.3033 3-AN 415455 sslsor COMMIX11011 LCCIONA PIN MA roil AF, 27.2 orn IC. 60 ore AA IIDUFICR MUM -FOR wreierce�IX 444411 =MOM 0. 1. 4. MUM. SEE Nara =WI UMWjI. IMEC, SEW MitWiT • teempotn IK 04/115/01 T452.4 COI RIM a to, Gin Int $0/211/61 SALL1'2D INT reF101111151011- ICH /LUCIEN 1 00 NEC Ma ER NAITO ESCRITOI 0-P1551(-42.3K2. 55 mm MATficams 51 T43515{10 TA35154b Ausse,,AVA,vowirpA.AAigr4103,51 The Turck Ni 1 0-P18SK-AZ3X2 sensor is a two wire sensor which needs no neutral or ground. Application of a neutral or ground will damage sensor. 4.2.5.1 Sensor Wiring The proximity sensors (120 VAC or 24VDC) are used as safety detection devices for the spiral conveyor. These sensors should be wired into the PLC controlling the spiral and programmed as fail-safe; loss of the signal is a fault. The fault should have no time delays, and must be latched in the PLC program, requiring a manual reset before the spiral is re- started. January 1e, 2019 194877 15 RYSON INTERNATIONAL, INC 4.2.5.2 Chain Tensioning Device Proximity Sensor The proximity sensor is incorporated with the automatic chain tensioning device to detect an excessively loose chain during operation of the spiral conveyor. When the chain has stretched beyond the ability of the chain tensioner's capacity to compensate for chain stretch, the proximity sensor will de - energize, causing the spiral to stop. 4.2.5.3 Proximity Sensor Adjustments The proximity sensor must be adjusted vertically and horizontally prior to any operation and needs to be re- adjusted each time the chain is shortened. The vertical adjustment must be made to allow the chain tensioning device to drop at least 2" without activating the sensor. The horizontal adjustment is made by ensuring that the sensing face of the proximity sensor is within 10mm (3/8") of the sensoring surface. Any adjustment outside the 10 mm (3/8") zone may result in the sensors inability to detect, thereby causing an incorrect error condition. 4.2.5.4 Drive Overload Proximity Sensor The proximity sensor is incorporated with drive motor torque arm to detect excessive resistance against the drive motor during operation of the spiral conveyor. If a drive overload condition, such as a jammed conveyor chain occurs, the drive motor, which is mechanically attached to the torque arm, will begin to rotate in a clockwise direction, causing the torque arm to move downward, away from the sensing face of the proximity sensor. When the proximity sensor no longer detects the torque arm plate, the electrical circuit for the proximity sensor is de -energized causing the spiral to stop. 4.2.5.5 Proximity Sensor Adjustments The horizontal adjustment is made by ensuring that the sensing face of the proximity sensor is within 10mm (3/8") of the torque arm mounting bracket flag. Any adjustment outside the 10mm (3/8") zone may result in the sensor's inability to detect, thereby causing an incorrect error condition. Vertical adjustment can be made by moving the bracket up or down. For more information see section 6.5. January 18th, 2019 194877 16 RYSON INTERNATIONAL, INC 4.3 Motor Brake Most spirals do not need a brake. However, an electrically operated brake is required for some applications. The brake is then used as a holding brake to prevent a fully loaded spiral from drifting when stopped. The manufacturer's standard brake coil is 460/230VAC, but a 110VAC or 24VDC brake coil can be supplied as an option. 4.3.1 Recommended Guide Lines We recommend the following for spirals where the motor includes an electrically operated brake. • The brake must always be powered by a separate, dedicated power contactor. Unlike a motor that receives across -the -line power, the voltage delivered by a variable frequency drive (VFD) is not sufficient during acceleration and deceleration to release the brake. Therefore the contactor must deliver power to the brake whenever the motor is to rotate. o It is recommended to utilize a contactor instead of a control relay for brake control. The surge released by the brake coil upon de-energization will quickly erode the contact surfaces of a relay. o We recommend using a brake which is of the same voltage as the line voltage. The brake voltage comes through dedicated wires from the control enclosure anyway and it seems a waste to provide extra control transformer capacity just to power the brake. o It is good practice to let the variable frequency drive control the brake directly through the Run control signal. The majority of VFDs have a programmable output which provides notification that the drive is turning the motor above a certain low speed. The main benefit to this practice is that the VFD will keep the brake released while it is decelerating the motor to a stop; once the speed is low enough (about 3 Hz) the Run signal will open and the brake will set. It is important that the brake not set when the motor is turning at a working speed. • When using the VFD for direct brake control, ensure that the control output has sufficient current capacity to control the brake contactor. If there is insufficient capacity then let the VFD control the contactor via a small relay. JanuaryJanuary18th,2019 194877 17 RYSON INTERNATIONAL, INC In the absence of direct brake control by the VFD, a PLC or timer relay shall control the brake contactor. When the run command is issued to the VFD the brake will release (the brake contactor will energize) immediately. When the run command to the VFD goes away, the brake will set (the brake contactor will de -energize) after a short time delay; this time delay will be equal to the deceleration time preset in the VFD. An example of the preferred method of brake control is shown on the following page. January 18th, 2019 194877 18 • RYSON INTERNATIONAL, INC 1 14 h hg Oa ; t. _ c •- , i c . EP • . - , _ . , _ 1 ia o P,I. x rg74 °Q •.1222 1 i I N !It ° 1 la Vi 111 a i X al . xED ! - • ri, CA 5 ! NNO4MARRAnagazIMRPRNNN614MONiSameifiAndEIN63g ; January 18th, 2019 194877 19 RYSON INTERNATIONAL, INC 4.4 Air Operated Chain Tensioner Some tall spirals need an air operated cylinder instead of the standard spring operated chain tensioned device. The operating air pressure is 8-20 PSI and the air volume is negligible. The spiral should never be operated without air pressure supplied to the chain tensioner. The low pressure switch is used to detect any interruptions in air supply to the air cylinder. The switch is hooked up either AC or DC on the normally open (N.O.) contacts, and is wired into the PLC as a discrete input. If the air flow is interrupted, the PLC logic will generate a fault which will shut down the machine. See data sheet on the next page for wiring diagram and specifications. January 18th, 2019 194877 20 0 Air In Side View MounlIng Baacket Block and Prox Synth Front View Alf CYOlder t}�19D FPM; 8-10 PSI fa-2DDFPM;f 20 PSI 20 PSI MAXIMUM RYSON • Pneumellc Chain Tenslner Schemeaca • 7114 414A .Y h1 *lot z VI i© n z RYSON INTERNATIONAL, INC Reversible Spirals All reversible spirals need an air operated chain tensioner. Spirals should reverse at 20% of normal speed. See diagram. 7! en . •i• rri 3 z January 18`b, 2019 194877 22 • • No 4.5 Initial Start-up RYSON INTERNATIONAL, INC- o Make sure the oil level in the drive gear reducer is correct prior to operation. u The gear reducer is shipped with the breather plug already mounted; however, a black rubber seal has been installed for shipping purposes and MUST BE REMOVED prior to operation. See section 9 for more information. u The spiral conveyor is pre -assembled at the factory and some preliminary reinforcements may have been mounted for shipping purposes. Make sure these devices are removed prior to putting the spirals into operation. o DO NOT OPERATE the spiral if the Red Maintenance Tool is in the position shown in the following picture. CAUTION: Shipping/Maintenance tool DO NOT OPERATE THE SPIRAL WITH THE TOOL IN THIS POSITION January 18th, 2019 194877 23 RYSON INTERNATIONAL, INC 5 Spiral Conveyor Pre Start-up Checklist Spiral Start-up Check List 0 Check to make sure that all integration instructions are implemented. 0 Check the chain-tensioner for the proper chain tension adjustments. Remove the red chain shortening tool (shipping nut) if installed. Save tool for future use. O Check that all side guides are in place and adjusted correctly. 0 Set the adjustable transition rollers andfor transition plates. Check height adjustments to assure smooth product flow over transitions. 0 Check gear motor for oil level and breather plug. Remove vent shipping grommet if installed. 0 BUMP motor and check spiral direction. Run spiral at slow speed at initial startup and check for any parts that may have come loose during shipment or installation. 0 Check proximity sensors power and function. CheckVFD ramp-up.The acceleration parameter should be 3 to 5 seconds depending on spiral height. CheckVFD ramp-down.The deceleration parameter should be a minimum of 3 seconds. 0 Run test product and set overload device as necessary with a fully loaded spiral. 0 Check speed matching.The In -feed, spiral and out -feed conveyors must run at the same speed. YS ANSINIATIMAI, VERTICAL CONVEYING SOLUTIONS January 18`b, 2019 194877 24 )C"— COJuda-19C.• 6I6,, taiAS — 111 Elevate Clockwise Close Coupled: Infeed & Outfeed No Transition Rollers Supplied LENGTH; WIDTH: HEIGHT: WEIGHT: CASE RATE: SENSOR INFORMATION A. TURCK # N110-P18SK-AP6X2 B. OUTPUT- 3 IMRE DC SENSOR C. VOLTAGE - 10 TO 30 VDC D. SENSING RANGE • 10MM E. OUTPUT- 24 VDC PNP CONVEYING PARAMETERS: PRODUCT: SEALED CASES & SHRINK- WRAPPED TRAYS. MAX: MIN: 11,2" 8,3" 16.2" 11.0" 6.5" 3.8" 18.0 Lbs 12.0 Lbs 45 PPM REVISION "A" 11109118 •OUTFEED HT CHANGED: 13'-6" TO 15-6" CUSTOMER REQUIREMENTS: • PRE -WIRED HUBBELL DISCONNECT. • PRE -WIRED SAFETIES. • CLOSE COUPLE, NO ROLLERS. 'ADJUSTABLE INFEED & OUTFEED GUARDS TO EXTEND 12" PAST FRAMES. APPROVED FOR CONSTRUCTION TRANSPORTATION OF SPIRAL: Spiral Ships Fully Assembled Spiral Ships Partially Disassembled Brake Coil Voltage: 460 VAC EIReversible Tensioner. Air Cylinder Heht REVISIONS f0 THIS DRAWING WILL BE NOTED IN RED L# Turns: 4 @ 9.73° TYPE: 150 0-Al Finish: RAL9007 Steel -It Match Speed: 150 fpm Direction: Up/CW 111 Infeed: Drive Motor. 5 Hp Motor Current 7.2 A otor Power 3/60I230I46U0 Outteed: 15'-6" Elev, Change: 111-0" RYSON - lArTERNATICW, INC - LSewww.ryson,com ntry EquipmentP�#25656 Shasta Beverages WEJ1011N116 194877 A Prox. Sensors: 24 VDC PNP munammil Nu MS 31CA LBS 4-4" PAX 4 FY IN PCP ' VAI;N (1.:X 67 10 10 67 10 10 ID 79 zo Qc LOT. (A 9) 9%49 49 %49 40 I/ 49 V 0'1X0i3 C01r0.$ 518004 (FAA 7 PATTERY k MA WA MAN oi70 , o9 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA APR I 2 2019 PERMIT. CENTER PALLETIZER SPECIFICATIONS: onve. SlYSTA MOMS IK 970811086 Kw( Rim 0I-KG45119 0761011ER P.O, I, 03 Ras S0 PL.A_Pr.40 H.5-1/2 51IP MIT SIZE: L. hat 1-1116. =au sERocr.: 13.1.991S800; J.,PH; 152*2. PR00984081 WPC CONIIVILZR: 81C-5/04 PNEWATIC ONCE: I C91 0 90 PS4. Nog coLce F87 .003Rs. REACE FOAM IMP Meal KW ftfl A MR OF PRODUCP. 5WS 84418106WOW MA A R.91. LOW OF PRODUCT: 4000 185. %OVUM ECK IX AT ANT PER 4093 1.16. 144%9111N UHT FOR %PPM WM WINE 22009 1.83. 0.17011E10S NECEMNG COOR SIZE: 9. ID N. IT SPECIAL 1.40106 RATIOS AND CF11045: WW8 11799198 IATTOP CAE 11110.14 7 WE NM SPEED RIP lomm. PAW SMOG GENERAL NOTES: 1, FM TRUCit 9U119435 ME NOT P4O,9X0 111711 107 9A04I8, PA01E7 INFO OR CICKARGE 004KTOR. 14078079079594047979011791174004469044 PROW OWL 2. PALLET STIOZ5 TO BE FtUle TO MIN I'. 3, SIPPORII A.03 WY.SERS FOR INE WED MT ARE TO Ef PROW BY 01N85, 4. THE 50E CIAIX5 ON IK INFEED BELT 14.61 Elt NATIO SO DAT DIE aRTC913 NIE COMM 941140004717006700014706843490 5, BOHN= FLAMM 8.184TION 5 7'-1MS RA FEW. O. BABE MSS MAT P3 WC< MAWS ON 5111991147 Iftl Of INTERI415. 7, RATES P:ft PRODUCT ARE 91560 04I GSM ECK 06.10203 TO 14 YANK MOOD BAM ON INE NEED 13ELT, F1P25 PRCA/CED Flf PAY, 9, IRO BEV MOTOR TO BE 009077779794990000 - 7/3' PAN cri=4 r.40 7417 F ; 871781781074 kA4 winunom k 80 1 '7 I3/10' NAPA ICT5O*9 9411 Turro.i, 0 1704510I1D/0*0 .F Yr\ c-t C--rF Section 6 Machine Installation Contents 1. Pre -Installation 3 A. Documentation 3 B. Site Preparation 3 C. Ram Pit Construction 4 D. Placing Ram Hoist Cylinder in Floor Pit 4 2. Installation & Assembly 7 A. Damage Inspection 7 B. Shortages 7 C. Unloading & Moving the Machine Into Position 8 D. Machine Alignment & Leveling 10 E. Elevating Piers (Optional Height) 11 F. Hydraulic Ram Hoist Assembly 13 G. Hydraulic Ram Hoist Boot Installation (Optional) 16 H. Leveling the Hydraulic Ram Hoist 18 1. Pallet Dispenser Lift 19 3. Infeed/Spacer Belt Case Conveyor 20 A. Description 20 B. Installation Instructions 21 4. Installing Pallet Conveyor 23 A. Infeed Pallet Conveyor 23 B. Discharge Pallet Conveyor 23 5. Installing Main Control Station 25 6. Pneumatic - Field Connections 26 7. Platform & Ladder Assembly (Optional) 28 8. Electrical - Field Connections 30 9. Machine Check -Out Procedures 32 A. Mechanical Pre -Power Check -Out 32 B. Electrical Pre -Operational Check -Out 32 C. Hydraulic System Check -Out 34 D. Machine Operation Check -Out 36 04-11 Alvey® 940R Series Palletizer 1 Section 6 Machine Installation List of Figures Figure 6-1: Ram Pit Construction 5 Figure 6-2: Placing Ram Hoist Cylinder in Floor Pit 6 Figure 6-3: Lifting the Machine 9 Figure 6-4: Moving the Machine 10 Figure 6-5: Elevating Piers (Optional Height) 12 Figure 6-6: Hydraulic Ram Hoist Assembly 13 Figure 6-7: Ram Hoist Hydraulic Line Assembly 15 Figure 6-8: Ram Hoist Boot Installation (Optional) 17 Figure 6-9: Ram Hoist Alignment & Leveling 18 Figure 6-10: Pallet Dispenser Lift 19 Figure 6-11: lnfeed/Spacer Belt Case Conveyor 20 Figure 6-12: Infeed/Spacer Belt Pulley Adjustment 21 Figure 6-13: CDLR (Chain Driven Live Roller) Optional 23 Figure 6-14: Operator's Main Control Station 25 Figure 6-15: Main Air Supply System 26 Figure 6-16: Typical Airline Drip Leg with Automatic Drain 27 Figure 6-17: Typical Airline Drip Leg with Manual Drain 27 Figure 6-18: Platform & Ladder Assembly (Optional) 28 Figure 6-19: Hydraulic Deck Components 34 2 04-11 Alvey® 940R Series Palletizer Section 6 Machine Installation I. Pre -Installation Inspect the machine installation site. The site work should be completed in advance of the arrival of the machine. We recommended that an Intelligrated representative supervise the installation. A. Documentation The following documentation is needed for installing the machine, infeed conveyors, and discharge conveyors: • Machine Plan and Elevation Drawings • Infeed and Discharge Plan and Elevation Drawings • Machine and Conveyor Shipping Bill of Materials B. Site Preparation 1. Clear the area to receive the machine. Provide enough space at the installation site for setting up the machine with adequate clearance at both ends and along the sides for servicing, as well as for product infeed conveyors and discharge conveyors. (Refer to the plan and elevation drawings for dimensions.) 2. Ensure there are adequate electrical services available to support the machine. The main power supply must be routed to the palletizer high voltage electrical cabinet. The connection is made inside the high voltage electrical cabinet at the main power terminals at the upper right side. This will supply power to the electrical cabinet for distribution to the system. Install the main circuit breaker and facility electrical supply according to the electrical specifications and plans supplied by the user. 3. Ensure there are adequate pneumatic services available for the machine. Install the equipment and plumbing needed to supply air pressure to the machine (80-psi required). The air supply line must be no less than 3/4" ID pipe and have a main shut-off valve and drip leg to help remove moisture before it connects to the machine. 4. Plan for the movement of the machine from the receiving area, along the transfer route, to the installation site. Consider the side and vertical clearances, floor conditions, changes in elevation, and amount of space needed for turns. 5. Provide the necessary equipment and personnel to unload and assemble the machine. We recommend professional industrial -machine movers and handlers to unload and move the machine. Heavy-duty rollers and a tow motor will facilitate moving the machine. 6. Mark the centerline of the machine on the installation site floor with a chalk line. Include the location of the hydraulic ram hoist, the infeed conveyor, the discharge conveyor, and empty pallet -loading area. Refer to the machine plan and elevation drawings provided for exact dimensions. 04-11 Alvey® 940R Series Palletizer Section 6 Machine Installation C. Ram Pit Construction 1. Mark the centerline of the machine on the installation site floor using a chalk line. Mark the location of the hydraulic ram hoist, the location of the infeed conveyor, the discharge conveyor, and empty pallet -loading area. Refer to the machine plan and elevation drawings provided for dimensions. 2. Dig (drill) a 15" diameter pit (or hole) below the floor surface to install the ram hoist hydraulic cylinder. Refer to the floor plan layout and elevation drawings provided, for exact pit dimensions. Check the vertical alignment of the hole with a plumb line. If optional elevating piers are being installed, subtract the pier height from the depth of the pit. 3. Install the 12" diameter hole liner (12" pipe with welded, watertight bottom cap) into the 15" diameter hole. Check the vertical alignment with a plumb line, and plumb the hole liner. (See Figure 6-1) 4. Cap the 12" diameter casing for the time being, to prevent any debris from entering, while back -filling the hole. (See Figure 6-1) 5. Backfill the hole partly for the time being to secure the hole liner. Backfill with at least three feet of dry sand, but do not finish back -filling the pit until after the machine has been running long enough to ensure that the ram hoist is holding plumb and that the ram hoist is functioning properly. D. Placing Ram Hoist Cylinder in Floor Pit 1. Before moving the machine to its final location for installation, place the hydraulic ram hoist cylinder into the floor pit construction. Use a fork-lift truck or overhead crane capable of lifting 700 lbs. to raise the hydraulic ram hoist cylinder above the floor, and then lower it into the 12" diameter hole casing pipe previously constructed in the floor pit. (See Figure 6-2) 2. Let the ram hoist mounting plate rest on the floor or the pit casing and rotate the mounting flange so that it will be parallel with the machine's frame support beams. This will prevent interference when moving the machine over the top of the ram cylinder in the pit. 4 04-11 Alvey® 94OR Series Palletizer Section 6 Machine Installation 7'-9" FO MACHIN 1O'-9" F IF THEI THIS C VERIFI NOTE: THE RAM PIT CONSTRUCTION IS TO BE DONE BY OTHERS AND MUST BE DONE BEFORE THE MACHINE IS SET IN PLACE. CENTER LINE OF PIT PROVIDE TEMPORARY CAP OVER LINER 1-1/2" FINISH AROUND THE LINER EXISTING FLOOR 14. JJ JJ /- / /; %' r / DRILL (OR DIG) A HOLE LARGER AND DEEPER / ? THAN THE LINER (A 16" %\\� � DRILLIS SUGGESTED) / BACKFILL AROUND R STANDARD HEIGHT. / /\ , i LINER WITH SAND. ES WITH 84" STROKE RAMS >R EXTRA TALL MACHINES i ,/ j f ;j\ CENTERLINE OF LINER E IS ANY QUESTION ABOUT i > �� TO BE LOCATED FROM NTACT INTELLIGRATED FOR \�� ��/\ THE LAYOUT DRAWING ATION / /)4 r / //\ � J / ! \\ 12" PVC PIPE WITH C/ \ te% ' (MUST BE WATER & 0 / / TIGHT) `3" MINIMUM �� � �\ \ \\/%\/ Figure 6-1: Ram Pit Construction IL 04-11 Alve)/ 940R Series Palletizer 5 Section 6 Machine Installation RAM HOIST CYLINDER WEIGHS APPROXIMATELY 700 LBS. CONCRETE FLOOR OVERHEAD CRANE SHIPPING PLATE MOUNTING PLATE HYDRAULIC FITTING 12" DIAMETER PIPE Figure 6-2: Placing Ram Hoist Cylinder in Floor Pit 6 04-11 Alvey° 940R Series Palletizer Section 6 Machine Installation 2. Installation & Assembly This section of the manual has instructions for inspecting and installing the Alvey TM 940 series palletizer or unitizer (hereafter generally referred to as the "machine") connecting the electrical and air supplies, and the machine check-out procedures. The exact equipment furnished and the degree of dismantling may vary from these general installation instructions in certain instances. Review the plan and elevation drawings provided, for special instructions for each installation. Also, review any other installation drawings provided. If you need information or support, call our Customer Service and Support (CSS) toll -free "Hot Line" at 1-877-315-3400. This number lets you discuss issues directly with a qualified Intelligrated customer service engineer. You can contact Intelligrated at: Intelligrated 9301 Olive Blvd. St. Louis MO. 63132-3299 Telephone: 1-877-315-3400 Fax: (314) 995-2400 Web site: http://www.intelligrated.com When you call us, have your machine serial number, to expedite assistance. The serial number is located on the serial plate on the electrical panel door. A. Damage Inspection Upon receipt of the machine, remove the tarpaulins, plastic cover, all chains and cleats which hold the machine to the bed of the truck. (The tarpaulins, chains, etc. belong to the trucking company and must be returned with the trailer. The wood and plastic can be discarded.) Examine the machine for any damage sustained in transit. If damage is evident, note the extent of the damage on a copy of the delivery receipt and immediately call the carrier to request that an inspection be made. After obtaining an inspection report from the carrier's agent, notify the Traffic Department at Intelligrated, to determine who will file the claim with the carrier. B. Shortages Upon receipt of the machine, remove the boxes and miscellaneous parts shipped inside the machine and check the shipment against the shipping list. Report any discrepancies to Intelligrated within 48 hours. Additional information regarding the machine will be found in the main electrical cabinet. This information, along with the keys for the electrical cabinets, should be turned over to the project manager. 04-11 Alvey® 940R Series Palletizer Section 6 Machine Installation C. Unloading & Moving the Machine Into Position WARNING Lifting the machine with a device that is not configured or rated for the machine's load capacity is dangerous to both the equipment and to personnel and could damage the machine's structure.that the th t the crane, forklift, and tow trucks being used can lift thefull weightof the machine. The machine 3weights approximately 5,000to45,00O pounds, depending on the model and options. It is 8 feet wide and up to 38 feet 4 inches long. Intelligrated recommends professional industrial machine movers and handlers to unload the machine and move it to the installation site. NOTE: Due to the length and weight distribution within the machine's frame, two forklifts or tow trucks are needed for lifting the machine. Always lift the machine using the 6"x8" structural steel frame supports at the base of the machine that runs the length of the machine. (See Figure 6-3) The machine is also structurally capable of being lifted from above at each end of the machine from below the 6"x8" structural steel frame that runs the full length of the machine. (See Figure 6-3) Any other lifting method could result in distortion of the frame, and/or mechanical damage. When removing the machine from the trailer we suggest raising the machine from above and pulling the trailer out from under it. 1. Walk the route that the machine will travel to the installation site to ensure that nothing has changed that will interfere with the moving plan. Check the horizontal and vertical clearances. 2. Set the machine on heavy-duty swivel style dollies and move the machine to the installation site. When moving the machine, DO NOT push directly against the machine's frame. Use timber to protect the frame and push against the timber instead of the 6" x8" steel base tubes. 8 04-11 Alvey® 940R Series Palletizer Section 6 Machine Installation FORKS MUST EXTEND COMPLETELY UNDER MACHINE FRAME UNLOAD FROM OPPOSITE SIDE OF THE ELECTRICAL ENCLOSURES LOW -BOY TRUCK BED 2 FORK TRUCKS Figure 6-3: Lifting the Machine 04-11 Alvey® 940R Series Palletizer 9 Section 6 Machine Installation STEEL BASE FRAME HEAVY DUTY ROLLERS UNDER VERTICAL POSTS Figure 6-4: Moving the Machine D. Machine Alignment & Leveling 1. Move the machine as close as possible to its final installation location. 2. Align the machine with the measurements and chalk marks laid down on the floor. The main frame may be pushed or pulled by using the base frame steel tube members as the contact areas. 3. Ensure that the machine's base frame is level. Starting under the highest point, level the machine using metal shims (provided) or grout upder the base frame or piers to close any gap between the floor and the machine. NOTE: Because of the allowable tolerances of the structural steel members, there may be some discrepancies when checking the horizontal and vertical alignment at different places on the machine, but leveling the base frame will be sufficient. 4. If optional elevating piers are not required, weld metal angle iron (not provided) to the machine's base frame, and anchor the machine to the floor through the angle iron. The machine must not be able to move. 10 04-11 AlvW 940R Series Palletizer Section 6 Machine Installation E. Elevating Piers (Optional Height) 1. If required, install optional elevating piers under the machine frame: a) Lift the machine to remove the roller dollies and locate the elevating piers under the base frame at each vertical post location as show on the project layout drawings. (See Figure 6-5) b) Tack weld the piers to the bottom of the steel base frame tubing under each vertical post, and under the ram hoist cylinder support beams as close as practical to the ram hoist pit. The elevating piers can be rotated in any direction. (See Figure 6-5) 2. Use metal shims to close any gap between the floor and the piers so the load is carried directly to the floor. 3. After leveling the machine, finish -weld the elevating piers to the bottom of the machine base frame. 4. Anchor the machine to the floor with the anchor bolts provided. Ensure that the piers are not drawn down when the floor anchor bolts are tightened. Use shims if necessary to prevent piers from being drawn down. 04-11 Alvey° 940R Series Palletizer 11 Section 6 Machine Installation INSTALL ELEVATING PIERS (IN FIELD) SHIM AND WELD TO BOTTOM OF BASE FRAME UNDER EACH VERTICAL POST INSTALL ELEVATING PIERS UNDER THE RAM HOIST SUPPORT BEAMS MACHINE FRAME HYDRAULIC RAM CYLINDER 1 Figure 6-5: Elevating Piers (Optional Height) 12 04-11 Alvey® 940R Series Palletizer Section 6 Machine Installation F. Hydraulic Ram Hoist Assembly 1. Remove the shipping cover -plate, bolted over the top of the ram cylinder head, and set the ram hoist -mounting flange on top of the machine's ram hoist support beams. Rotate the ram hoist cylinder so that the hydraulic hose connection fitting is facing toward the hydraulic reservoir at the back of the machine. (See Figure 6-6) 2. Align the holes in the ram hoist mounting flange with the matching holes in the hoist support beams, and attach the mounting flange to the ram hoist support beams with eight (8) 3/4" x 4" hex head cap screws, lock washers, and hex nuts provided. NOTE: The mounting hardware for the ram hoist can be found in a bag tied to the ram hoist cylinder. 3. Install six (6) 3/4" x 3" square head leveling bolts and hex nuts onto the hoist -mounting flange (do not fully tighten). The leveling bolts will be tightened later when leveling the ram hoist table. Do not install the ram hoist table at this time. RAM HOIST MOUNTING FLANGE \ FACE HYDRAULIC FITTING TOWARD HYDRAULIC POWER UNIT RAM CYLINDER REMOVE SHIPPING COVER PLATE (6) %"x3" SQUARE HEAD LEVELING /BOLTS WITH HEX NUTS (8) 3/4" x4" HEX HEAD BOLTS LOCK -WASHERS HEX NUTS MACHINE SUPPORT BEAMS OPTIONAL HEIGHT SQUARE PIERS Figure 6-6: Hydraulic Ram Hoist Assembly 04-11 Alvey® 940R Series Palletizer 13 Section 6 Machine Installation 4. Attach the hydraulic fluid hose assembly between to the ram hoist cylinder fitting and the hydraulic power unit fitting. (See Figure 6-7) 5. If supplied, connect the optional gland drain line to the ram hoist cylinder fitting. (See Figure 6-7) Tie the gland drain line to the hydraulic hose. 6. Check the oil level in the hydraulic fluid reservoir. The oil level sight glass should be on the high mark when the ram is down. If hydraulic oil is needed, fill with Mobil DTE-26 or equivalent. 7. If the optional ram hoist "rubber boot" is required, install the "boot" before installing the hoist table onto the ram head. The "boot" Installation Instructions comes next. NOTE: If the "rubber boot" is not required, skip the "boot" installation instructions and bolt the ram hoist table onto the top of the ram hoist cylinder head. Fasten with four- (4) 3/4"-10NC x 2" socket head bolts using NylocTM on the bolt threads. (See Figure 6-8) Ensure that the table guide is engaged with T-rail to prevent table rotation. If an optional powered hoist table (CDLR) has been supplied, the center rollers must be removed for access to the bolt holes. 14 04-11 Alvey® 940R Series Palletizer Section 6 Machine Installation CENTER LINE ,HYDRAULIC RAM GLAND DRAIN LINE MACHINE SUPPORT BEAMS HYDRAULIC HOSE TO POWER UNIT TIE GLAND DRAIN zLINE TO THE HYDRAULIC HOSE CAP WITH 2" GROUT THEN SEAL THOMPSON WATER SEALER ONCRETE FLOOR STUFF WITH PAPER TO SUPPORT GROUT 12" DIAMETER HOLE LINER 4" DIAMETER RAM CYLINDER WITH 6-112" DIAMETER CASING BACKFILL LINER 1NITH MINIMUM 24" DRY SAND Figure 6-7: Ram Hoist Hydraulic Line Assembly 04-11 Alvey® 940R Series Palletizer 15 Section 6 Machine Installation G. Hydraulic Ram Hoist Boot Installation (Optional) The optional ram hoist "boot" prevents contamination (such as sugar or glass) from getting into the hydraulic system through the seals at the ram cylinder. If the optional ram hoist boot is not required, skip this section and go to the hydraulic ram hoist leveling instructions that come next. 1. Turn the ram hoist table upside-down so the bottom is accessible. (If the hoist table is installed, it will have to be removed.) 2. Fit the 1/8"-3/16"x24" "U" edging material around the inner edge of the square shaped top mounting plate. (The edging is to protect the rubber boot from the raw edge of the metal). Cut the edging length so that the gap is less than 3/16". (See Figure 6-8, Detail "A") 3. Pull the square top flange of the boot through the edged hole. (See Figure 6-8, Detail "B") 4. Set the assembled boot on the bottom of the hoist table and bolt it in place through the boot spacers and top mounting plate with (4) %"-20x1- 1/4 zinc plated hex head bolts, nuts and washers. 5. Raise the ram hoist cylinder about 36". 6. Set the hoist table on the top of the ram cylinder head. 7. Feed the boot down around the ram. Ensure that the boot is not pinched between the end of the ram and the table. 8. Bolt the ram hoist table to the top of the ram hoist head, with the four (4) 3/4"-lONC x 2" socket head bolts using NylocTM on the bolt threads (See Figure 6-8) Ensure that the table guide is engaged with T-rail to prevent table rotation. NOTE: If an optional powered hoist table (CDLR) has been supplied, the center rollers must be removed for access to the bolt holes. 9. Slide the 6" square cuff over the square end on the ram bearing plate. Cut the cuff to clear the gland drain line (if provided). Clamp the cuff in place with the lower attachment brackets. The drain line should pass through the slot in the bracket. (See Figure 6-8, Detail "C") 10. Make necessary adjustments and tighten all loose bolts. 16 04-11 Alvey° 940R Series Palletizer Section 6 Machine Installation GUIDE RIDES IN TEE RAIL TO PREVENT ROTATION OPTIONAL HOIST BOOT SQUARE CUFF DOWN ATTACHES TO SQUARE ON RAM FACE HYDRAULIC FITTING (TOWARD HYDRAULIC UNIT) ,..0....-PALLET STOP LIP BOLT HOIST TABLE WITH (4) 3/4" -10NC x 2" SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREWS (USE NYLOC ON BOLT THREADS) LOWER ATTACHMENT BRACKETS SQUARE HEAD LEVELING BOLTS NOTE: THE MOUNTING HARDWARE COMES WITH THE BOOT HOIST BOOT TOP MOUNTING PLATE SPACER HOIST TABLE LOWER ATTACHMENT BRACKETS 3/16" MAX. DETAIL "A" KSSEMSSZ, JOINT IN EDGING EDGING DETAIL "B" BOOT GLAND -0.- DETAIL "C" - LOWER ATTACHMENT BRACKETS Figure 6-8: Ram Hoist Boot Installation (Optional) 04-11 Alvey® 940R Series Palletizer 17 Section 6 Machine Installation H. Leveling the Hydraulic Ram Hoist 1. After installing the ram hoist table, move the ram up and down several times to test it. 2. If leveling is required, level the ram hoist table using the square head leveling bolts previously installed. Use self-locking hex nuts to secure the leveling bolts in place. (See Figure 6-9) 3. After the machine has been running long enough to ensure that the ram hoist is holding plumb, and that the hoist is functioning properly, backfill the ram hoist pit and hoist casing with at least two feet of dry sand. Seal around the opening with approximately 2" of grout. (See Figure 6-7) TEE -RAIL PALLET STOP LIP HOIST TABLE PLASTIC GUIDE ROLLERS SIDE VIEW Y.-1 ONCx2" SOCKET HEAD BOLTS 3A" x 3" SQUARE HEAD LEVELING BOLTS WITH HEX NUTS SUPPORT BEAMS RAM CYLINDER ENDVIEW Figure 6-9: Ram Hoist Alignment & Leveling 18 04-11 Alvey® 940R Series Palletizer Section 6 Machine Installation Pallet Dispenser Lift 1. Remove the pallet dispenser shipping support, and bolt the pallet dispenser lift cylinder mounting bracket in place on the pallet dispenser frame. (See Figure 6-10) 2. Install the pallet dispenser lift top plate using the bolts provided if not already installed. AFTER THE SHIPPING SUPPORT HAS BEEN REMOVED AND THE LIFT FRAME HAS BEEN BOLTED INTO ITS WORKING POSITION, INSTALL THE DISPENSER LIFT TOP PLATE. USE THE FOUR W-10 SOCKET HEAD BOLTS PROVIDED. REMOVE PALLET DISPENSER SHIPPING SUPPORT AND BOLT LIFT FRAME TO DISPENSER FRAME. PLASTIC GUIDE tWHEELS TO FIT OVER THE TEE RAIL BOTTOM OF THE LIFT FRAME SHOWN IN THE SHIPPING POSITION. BOTTOM OF THE LIFT FRAME SHOWN IN THE WORKING POSITION. Figure 6-10: Pallet Dispenser Lift 04-11 Alvey® 940R Series Palletizer 19 Section 6 Machine Installation 3. Infeed/Spacer Belt Case Conveyor A. Description The exact arrangement of the infeed case conveyor system can vary from one machine to another. While belt length and type will vary with each machine and factory layout, the infeed/spacer belt performs the same basic functions; to regulate the flow of cases into the machine, and to create a space between cases as they move onto the case forming area. The plan and elevation drawings for your machine will show your particular system and the required components. The attaching parts for the infeed case conveyor are listed on the conveyor bill of materials. The case conveyor hangers and supports are not furnished with the machine. METERING BELT PRODUCT FLOW PHOTO EYE PE1 BELT TENSION ADJUSTMENT SPACER BELT Figure 6-11: infeed/Sparer Belt Case Conveyor 20 04-11 Alvey® 940R Series Palletizer () ROLLER Section 6 Machine Installation B. Installation Instructions 1. Position the Infeed Case Conveyor sections on the floor according with the plan and elevation drawings provided. 2. It is possible for conveyor sections to become out of square during shipment. Therefore, check each conveyor drive, intermediate and tail end section to determine if it is perfectly square before the sections are bolted together. Check the alignment of the conveyor sections by placing a framing square along one of the side frames and checking the opposing roller shaft slots to see if they are directly opposite. If the slots are in line with each other, the rollers will be perpendicular to the side frames and parallel to each other. (Pulleys and rollers should turn freely.) 3. Hang the infeed conveyor system in place (the hangers are not supplied with the machine). Attach the infeed case conveyor end plates to the support plate at the end of the machine frame. Use (4) 3/8"x1-1/4" Carriage Bolts, (4) 3/8" NyIocTM Self -Locking Hex Nuts, with (4) 3/8" Flat Washers. Assemble with (1) flat washer under the nut of each bolt assembly ("hand tighten only"). Do not wrench tighten these bolts until the infeed belt is aligned. NOTE: When the Infeed/Spacer Belt Case Conveyor Assembly is being installed at an angle, release the belt tension on the take-up pulley before installation. If the belt tension is not released ahead of time, it will cause excess wear on the pulley bearings. (See Figure 6-12) FLOW SPACER BELT INFEED BELT ADJUSTABLE \ ADJUSTABLE TAKE-UP PULLEY TAKE-UP PULLEY DRIVE PULLEY DRIVE PULLEY INFEED BELT SPACER BELT NOTE: RELEASE BELT TENSION ON TAKE-UP PULLEY Figure 6-12: Infeed/Spacer Belt Pulley Adjustment 04-11 Alvey® 940R Series Palletizer 21 Section 6 Machine Installation 4. Align the top of the infeed/spacer belt 1/8" above the top of the platens on the machine's case divider. The centerline of the infeed/spacer belt case conveyor should be exactly in line with the centerline of machine. Tighten each 3/8"x1-1/4" Carriage Bolt. 5. Install the remaining conveyor sections in the same manner as described above. 6. After all the infeed conveyor sections have been bolted together, they must be aligned from end -to -end in a straight line. (If this is not done, it will be virtually impossible to correctly track the belt. 7. Adjust the case guides on the infeed/spacer belt section so that the cases will travel down the center of the infeed conveyor. 8. Mount photoelectric sensor PE1 on the Infeed Spacer Belt section. (See Figure 6-11) 9. After the infeed conveyor is installed, run the belt for a few minutes to determine if the belt is tracking correctly and re -adjust the tension if necessary. 22 04-11 Alvey® 940R Series Palletizer Section 6 Machine Installation 4. Installing Pallet Conveyor A. Infeed Pallet Conveyor The number and arrangement of the infeed pallet conveyor sections can vary from one machine to another. Refer to the plan and elevation drawings and the bills of material for a listing of the required components. B. Discharge Pallet Conveyor The number and arrangement of the discharge pallet conveyor sections may vary from machine to machine. Therefore, refer to the system layout plans, elevation drawings, and the bills of materials for a listing of the required components. The attaching parts for the discharge conveyors will also be listed on the conveyor bill of materials and should be bagged and wired to each unit. Figure 6-13: CDLR (Chain Driven Live Roller) Optional 1. Move the discharge conveyor sections to their permanent locations and position them in accordance with the plan and elevation drawings provided. Normally the centerline of the discharge conveyor will match the centerline of the machine internal conveyor, but this may not always be true. The top of the discharge conveyor should be aligned so it is level and 1/8" below the top of the two -strand chain conveyor in the machine. 04-11 Alvey°94OR Series Palletizer 23 Section 6 Machine Installation 2. Check the alignment of each conveyor section by placing a framing square along one of the side frames and checking the opposing roller shaft slots to see if they are directly opposite. If the slots are in line with each other, the rollers will be perpendicular to the side frames, and parallel to each other. NOTE: If the rollers are not square in the side frames, the load will not travel down the conveyor centerline. 3. Fit the conveyor sections together in accordance with the layout drawings and secure them with the attaching parts that are provided. 4. Level the conveyor sections with a machinist or carpenter level across the roller intermediates. Tighten all bolts on legs and feet when finished. NOTE: Do not draw the feet down to the floor when tightening the bolts. To ensure that the conveyor feet are not drawn down to the floor when tightening the anchor bolts, metal shims must be used to close any gap between the floor and the feet. 5. Use the holes in the conveyor frame feet as a template to drill holes into the floor, and install concrete anchor bolts at each foot to hold the conveyors in place. NOTE: Do not weld "threaded -rod" type fee securely. u ighten the lock nut 6. After the elevation is set, tack weld the adjustable support feet to the conveyor legs so they will not slip after leveling. NOTE: Before welding the feet solidly to the legs, fully loaded pallets should be run over the conveyor. After running full pallets on the conveyors, verify that the elevation and alignment is still correct. Level again if necessary. The feet can then be welded permanently if required. 7. Install Forklift Truck Bumpers and Chain Guards on the drive units where required. Forklift Bumpers are optional and not supplied with the machine. 24 04-11 Alveyo 940R Series Palletizer Section 6 Machine Installation 5. Installing Main Control Station Mount the Main Control Station and Mounting Bracket Assembly to the outside surface of the layer pusher frame as shown below. Figure 6-14: Operator's Main Control Station 04-11 Alvey® 940R Series Palletizer 25 Section 6 Machine Installation 6. Pneumatic - Field Connections 1. Connect the main air supply to the system's Air Pressure Regulator/Filter. The air supply pipe must be at least 3/4" ID pipe, and have a main shut-off valve installed. (See Figure 6-15). Route the pipe so that it does not prevent access to the top of the machine. 2. Install a moisture drip leg to help remove moisture before the air line connects to the machine. (See Figure 6-16 and Figure 6-17) 3. The system Air Pressure Regulator/Filter should be set at the factory to 80-psi and adjusted to suite the machine requirements. 4. The air devices used on this machine require little or no lubrication. Ensure the Air Lubricator is filled with oil to 1/4" of the top. Use high quality SAE #10 oil. AIR -PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT BLOW -DOWN MANUAL OR AUTOMATIC (SOLENOID CONTROL) AIR FLOW DIRECTION HAND ACTIVATED MACHINE AIR PRESSURE SHUT-OFF / DUMP VALVE (LOCKAB LE) AIR -PRESSURE GAUGE PNEUMATIC OILER FLOW ADJUSTMENT OIL Figure 6-15: Main Air Supply System 26 04-11 Alvey° 940R Series Palletizer Section 6 Machine Installation MAIN SHUT OFF VALVE AIR SUPPLY 3/4° ID PIPE MOISTURE TO THE AIR FILTER REGULATOR ON THE MACHINE CONDENSATION CAN BE REMOVED AUTOMATICALLY WITH DEVICES SIMILAR TO A NICHOLSON DRAIN -AIR. A DRAIN HOSE IS NOT REQUIRED WITH THIS DEVICE. Figure 6-16: Typical Airline Drip Leg with Automatic Drain MAIN SHUT OFF VALVE AIR SUPPLY 3/4" ID PIPE BELL REDUCERS 1-1/2" PIPE x 16° LONG MANUAL VALVE MOISTURE TO THE AIR FILTER REGULATOR ON MACHINE IF A MANUAL RESERVOIR IS PROVIDED IT SHOULD BE AS LARGE AS PRACTICAL WITH A PETCOCK AND DRAIN HOSE. Figure 6-17: Typical Airline Drip Leg with Manual Drain 04-11 Alvey1)94OR Series Palletizer 27 Section 6 Machine Installation 7. Platform & Ladder Assembly (Optional) Install the Platform and Ladder Assemblies. Refer to the blueprint drawings provided with your machine for more details. (Also See Figure 6-18) 1. Mount the left and right hand Platform Support Brackets to the machine frame. Mount each bracket with 1/2"-12x1-1/4" Hex Head Cap Screws, Washers, and Nuts provided. PLATFORM SIDE RAILS & PLATFORM ASSEMBLY LEFT HAND PLATFORM SUPPORT BRACKET RIGHT HAND PLATFORM SUPPORT BRACKET LADDER SUPPORT BRACKET LADDER & HAND RAIL ASSEMBLY LADDER ASSEMBLY SAFETY CHAIN & SNAP ASSEMBLY Figure 6-18; Platform & Ladder Assembly (Optional) 28 04-11 Alvey'940R Series Palletizer Section 6 Machine Installation 2. Install the Platform Floor and Side Rails assembly on top of the Platform Support Brackets. Fasten with 3/8"-16x1" Carriage Bolts, Washers, and Nuts provided. 3. Install the Ladder and Handrail assembly onto the platform assembly. Attach to Ladder Support Bracket with 3/8"-16x1" Carriage Bolts, Washers, and Nuts provided. Attach the Handrails to the side rails with 3/8"-16x3-1/4" Hex head Cap Screws, Washers, and Nuts provided. 4. Install the Safety Chain and Snap assembly. 04-11 Alvey® 940R Series Palletizer 29 Section 6 Machine Installation 8. Electrical - Field Connections AWARNING Risk of electrical shock. Use extreme caution when working on or around electrical components. Hazardous voltage will cause sever injury or death. 1. Infeed Belt 24vdc wiring: Route and cut to length cables for (1) photoelectric sensor and (2) solenoid valves in JBIR junction box. Then terminate wires to associated terminals. Refer to connection diagram (CD001) drawings for proper wiring. If machine is equipped with stack Tight, remount stack light assembly and terminate wires in JBIR to associated terminals. 460vac wiring: Install conduit for (2) motors on infeed belt assembly. Wire both motors back to JBIL and terminate to associated terminals. 2. Light Curtains Remount light curtain brackets to machine at associated locations on top of the machine and reconnect cables to associated light curtain. The typical machine will include 1 to 5 light curtains located on the top of the machine. 3. CSM (Main Control Station) Remount CSM consolet and bracket onto machine in associated mounting holes located on the top of the machine. Reconnect all wiring inside of CSM consolet to associated terminals. 4. Discharge Conveyor 24vdc wiring: If 1st discharge conveyor is supplied by Intelligrated, reconnect quick disconnect cable to PE11A on end of discharge conveyor #1. This cable is coiled up in a plastic bag and attached to the discharge end of the machine upon shipment. 30 04-11 Alvey® 940R Series Palletizer Section 6 Machine Installation If machine is equipped with multiple discharge conveyors, loose parts will be shipped with the project and used to wire all associated photoelectric sensors back to the machine. Check schematics for wiring termination location, these photoelectric sensors will terminate in the processor panel (PCP) or in the discharge control station (CSD). 460vac wiring: If 1St discharge is supplied by Intelligrated the conduit will be mounted and will need to be reconnected with the supplied piece of flexible conduit. Then the wires that are coiled up inside of a clear plastic bag and attached to the discharge end of the machine will have to be terminated at the motor. If the machine is equipped with multiple discharge conveyors, the conduit will have to be ran to the additional sections of conveyor and wired accordingly. These additional conveyors will then be wired back to the main control panel (MCP) to the proper motor starter or VFD if so equipped. 5. Pallet Infeed 24vdc wiring: Using cables that are coiled up in plastic bags and attached to the pallet infeed end of the machine, reconnect quick disconnect cables to their associated photoelectric sensors. 460vac wiring: Utilizing the provided flex conduit, reconnect all conduit sections together. Wire all associated motors with wires that are coiled up in the plastic bags attached to the pallet infeed end of the machine. Terminations will be made at the motors. 6. Discharge Control Stations If CSD & CSDA were removed for shipment they will have to be remounted and wired accordingly in the control station with the wires coiled up at the control station mounting locations. Refer to the control station (CS) drawings for termination details. 7. Interlocks All interlock wiring will have to be pulled to the machine and terminated accordingly, refer to schematic sheet 13 (SC/013) for wiring detail. Typical interlocks include infeed belt running, load ready to discharge, and discharge conveyor is running, these are the outputs from the palletizer. There is also 1 input which is a remote conveyor ready for pallet signal. 04-11 Alvey° 940R Series Palletizer 31 Section 6 Machine Installation 9. Machine Check -Out Procedures A. Mechanical Pre -Power Check -Out 1. Remove all tape, paper, shipping blocks and other protective material. 2. Clean excess oil from the rollers of the row forming section and the apron. 3. Inspect all moving parts to ensure that no foreign matter will interfere with their motion. Check the case infeed conveyor framework and all dams to see that they are free of weld splatter, paint or other foreign material that would hinder the movement of the product. 4. Check the alignment and tightness of all sprockets and sheaves. 5. Check all chain connections at the hoist for tightness. 6. Check all other nuts and bolts for tightness. 7. Check all threaded rods that connect air cylinders to mechanical devices for tightness. 8. Check the oil level of the gear reducers, and fill if necessary. NOTE: Some reducers are permanently lubricated and sealed at the factory and do not require additional lubrication. Refer to the "Vendor Data" section in Volume II of this set of manuals for additional information on lubrication and maintenance of gear motors and speed reducers. 9. Fill the air line lubricator with high quality SAE #10 oil to within 1/4" of the top. 10. Brush a light coating of SAE #20 type oil onto all chains. 11. Replace all screens, covers, and guards removed before shipping. B. Electrical Pre -Operational Check -Out AWARNING Exercise extreme caution when working on or around electrical components. Hazardous voltage will cause sever injury or death. 1. Locate the main power disconnect switch on the high voltage electrical cabinet, and switch it to the OFF position. Then lockout the machine for safe working conditions before beginning this work. 2. Remove all the I/O (input-output) modules from the I/O rack(s), and check the electrical connections to be sure that none of the terminals is grounded. 3. Remove the fuse from the secondary side of the control transformer. 4. Close the main disconnects switch, and manually operate each motor starter to check the rotation of the motors. 32 04-11 Alveyc' 940R Series Palletizer Section 6 Machine Installation 5. Measure the control system voltage on the secondary side of the transformer at 115-VAC, nominal. 6. Open the main disconnects switch, and replace the control transformer fuse removed in Step 3. 7. Install the input modules in the I/O rack. 8. Switch the main disconnect power switch to the ON position. 9. Check all inputs as follows: a) Actuate each control panel switch, and observe the LED input module indicator illumination. b) Align each photoelectric sensor beam with its respective reflector, and then flag each photoelectric sensor to see if the input module is receiving a signal. c) Check all proximity sensors to ensure that they are secure. Actuate each switch to see if the input module is receiving a signal. Check the positioning of each proximity sensor to see that its proper actuating device actuates it. The distance between the top of a proximity sensor and the bottom of its actuating device should be 1/8". 10. Check each output by applying power to each output terminal and observing the correct mechanical output function. 11. Install the output modules in the I/O rack. 12. Using a programming device, verify that the programmable controller has retained the program. If it has not, reload the program. (The vendor manual for the programmable controller is shipped inside the electrical panel on the side of the machine.) 04-11 Alvey® 940R Series Palletizer 33 Section 6 Machine Installation C. Hydraulic System Check -Out 1. Check the oil level in the hydraulic reservoir and fill with clean, filtered hydraulic oil as required. Use a 10-micron filter element. Exercise care when filling to keep dirt from entering the system. The reservoir Oil Level Sight Gauge should indicate full. (See Figure 6-19) The level will have to be checked again after machine has been running and the ram has been filled. RESERVOIR BREATHER RESERVOIR PUMP MOTOR LOW- MOUNTING SPEED (M-LS) BRACKET FILTER PUMP LOW SPEED MOTOR HIGH SPEED (M-HS) N VALVE OIL LEVEL SIGHT GAUGE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT BALL VALVE IN PIPING RUN MAIN BALL VALVE FILLER CAP MAIN SYSTEM PRESSURE GAUGE HOIST SLOW SPEED VALVE MANUAL OPERATION HIGH-SPEED PUMP 'ROPER' Figure 6-19: Hydraulic Deck Components 2. Open the manual shut-off valves on the pump suction lines. (Handle is parallel with pipe in open position.) 3. Ensure that all the ball valves are open. 4. Turn the PUMPS OFF/ON switch to the ON position, and jog the main hydraulic pump motor to check the rotation of main pump motor. It must turn in the same direction as the arrow on the casting indicates. If rotation is wrong, turn off power, perform lockout, and reverse the supply leads. (Pressure on gauges should rise immediately.) NOTE: Running the pump motors in reverse can damage the pump. 5. Allow the motor to run until the oil warms up to 80° to 110°F. 6. Manually offset the directional valve to purge the air from the lines. 34 04-11 Alvey® 940R Series Palletizer Section 6 Machine Installation 7. Check the entire hydraulic system for leaks. Any leak, no matter how small, must be stopped. 8. Manually offset the hoist (low speed) directional valve until the hoist piston is extended. Normally for a standard ram hoist application, the pressure on the low speed hoist pump should be set at 350-psi. When a powered conveyor is mounted on the hoist, the pressure should be set at a minimum of 450-psi. This setting may have to be increased depending upon the maximum load weight on the hoist. NOTE: The pressure setting should never exceed 600-psi. 9. Manually offset the hoist slow speed directional valve until the hoist is fully lowered. 10. Repeat the checkout procedure with the high-speed pump. The high- speed pump is supplied with an internal relief mounted in the pump housing. A gauge is not supplied for this pump. 11. Check the hoist cylinder for plumb, using a carpenter's or machinist's level. Correct any misalignment with the square head adjustment screws on the hoist -mounting flange. 12. Open the air bleed screw located 180° from the inlet port on the hoist tube and allow any trapped air to escape from the lines as the hoist piston descends. Tighten the air bleed screw when hydraulic oil begins to spurt from the air bleed port. 13. After the initial start-up, when the machine has been running for a few hours, any foreign material in the system will be flushed into the filters. It is recommended that these filters are replaced and the reservoir and suction strainers are thoroughly cleaned. 04-11 Alvey® 940R Series Palletizer 35 Section 6 Machine Installation D. Machine Operation Check -Out 1. Review all safety precautions in section 1, "Safety" of this manual. 2. Turn the main power disconnect switch (located on the outside of the high voltage panel) to the ON position. 3. Pullout on all EMERGENCY STOP buttons at all machine control stations. NOTE: All EMERGENCY STOP control switches must be pulled out before the machine will operate. ►N __ THE PALLETIZER OR UNITIZER CAN CAUSE DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY IN A VARIETY OF WAYS, BE CERTAIN EVERYONE IS OUTSIDE THE SAFETY GUARDS BEFORE YOU START THE MACHINE. 4. Press and hold -in the green CONTROL POWER (PUSH -TO -START) button for approximately 5-seconds, until the master control relay engages. The warning horn will pulsate on and off during the five -second period before the machine starts. When the machine is operable, the touch -screen MACHINE MODE display will read MANUAL MODE, and the green start button light stays lit. 5. At the main control station touch screen, press the DIAGNOSTIC RESET or RESET FAULT push button to clear any messages from the display screen. 6. Toggle the INFEED switch to ON. The case infeed conveyor belt should run forward, if the belt runs backward, turn off all power, lockout the machine for safe working conditions, and reverse the power leads at the motor starter. 7. Run the belt for a few minutes to determine if the belt is tracking correctly and re -adjust the tension if necessary. 36 04-11 Alvey° 940R Series Palletizer WULFTEC mononall MAI LLIS FI F;ECEtVE� ILA CIO OF SUO PR122019 PERMIT CENIEE` CODE CC..: LANCE APPROVED APR 2 5 2019 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION 11161 06'49 SO #150246-1 I Shasta Beverages User Reference Guide to Wulftec Equipment WCRT-200 A technical publication of Wulftec / MJ Maillis Group 0 2013 Wulftec / M.J. Maillis All rights reserved Published by: Wulftec / M.J. Maillis 209 Wulftec Ayer's Cliff (Quebec) Canada JOB 1C0 Author: Wulftec / M.J. Maillis / GP Copyrights © Wulftec / M.J. Maillis 2013 M. J. MAI LLI S WULFTEC.com �i?l;�i=3►t�= �I Wulftec History 5 Warranty 6 Introduction7 Safety Instructions 8 Inspection 9 SafetyLabels...............................................................................................................................................................13 Installation 15 Glossary 18 Main Components — WCRT-200 19 Machine Assemblies 20 Modes of Operation 22 Controls 23 Component Adjustments 42 Mode of Operation - Standard 50 Changing and Threading Stretch Film 51 Pre -stretch Ratios — Chain Driven 53 Pre -stretch Ratios — Belt Driven 54 Pre -stretch Ratios — Belt Driven / Premium Efficiency Motor 55 Changing the pre -stretch 56 Maintenance Instructions 57 Lock-Out/Tag-Out Procedure 57 Fence Entry/Exit Procedure 58 General Maintenance 59 Preventive Maintenance Calendar 68 MaintenanceLog69 Troubleshooting Alarms 70 Parts Reference 73 Page 14 M. J. MAILLIS WULFTEC.con Since 1990, Wulftec International has been synonymous with unbeatable strength and durability in the stretch wrapping industry. We are renowned for developing, manufacturing and distributing the industry's best -built stretch wrappers. Our unwavering focus on quality, service and innovation means Wulftec machines are designed to work flawlessly in any environment and under any condition, Toad after load. Reasons for Success Why are Wulftec stretch wrappers considered to be the best? In addition to boasting unique patented features and European -influenced designs, every Wulftec stretch wrapper comes with the Wulftec Advantage, which includes all -steel structural designs, AC variable frequency drives and the best warranties available. Behind every meticulously handcrafted Wulftec machine are 180 highly skilled employees who work in a state-of-the-art, 136,000 square -foot facility located just minutes from the Canadian-U.S. border and 75 miles from Montreal. We take pride in knowing that our commitment to excellence just can't be beat. We are highly focused. The 136,000 square -foot plant is solely dedicated to the design, development and manufacturing of quality stretch wrapping and strapping equipment. One room is dedicated to training, and a showroom is used to present our latest innovations. We take pride in providing tours to our distributors and customers, to show them the quality processes used to build and customize our quality machines and introduce them to our efficient team of dedicated welders, painters, assemblers and technicians. A Commitment to Customer Satisfaction In early 2002, Wulftec was acquired by M.J. Maillis Group, a leading Europe -based Group that designs, manufactures and distributes complete "end of line" packaging solutions, including strapping, stretch wrapping and shrink wrapping materials and equipment. Present in more than 52 countries worldwide, through a network of 28 owned Affiliate companies and more than 350 independent distributors, the Group's global resources have strengthened Wulftec's competitive advantage and ability to provide superior solutions to meet the individual needs of clients, Our strong entrepreneurial spirit dictates that if we haven't built it yet, we'll work with clients to build it now. This commitment to customer satisfaction goes well beyond equipment design. We also give equal attention to installation and operations training, after -sales service and maintenance. Page 15 : M. J. MAI LLI S WULFTEC.com All parts on stretchwrappers manufactured by Wulftec International Inc. (hereinafter called "Wulftec") are warranted to be free of manufacturing defects for a period of three (3) years from the date of shipment, if installed, maintained and used in accordance with factory specifications except for the two (2) blue polyurethane coated rollers whose coating carry a lifetime warranty and the 25" ring gear bearing which carries a ten (10) year warranty. Wulftec will, at its discretion, repair or replace any defective stretchwrapping parts returned freight prepaid. All returned parts are subject to factory inspection and Wulftec reserves the right to determine the cause of failure. Damages caused by inadequate air or voltage supply, normal wear, misuse or neglect are not covered by this warranty. Damage caused during transport is the responsibility of the carrier and is not covered under this warranty. All damages detected upon receipt of equipment should be reported immediately to the carrier and Wulftec should be notified. This warranty only applies if the modifications or repairs are made by an authorized Wulftec technician. Wulftec shall under no circumstances be liable for any direct, indirect, special, incidental, consequential damages, losses or expenses arising in connection with the use of, or inability to use, our product(s) for any purpose whatsoever. Except as stated herein, Wulftec makes no other warranty, expressed or implied, nor does it assume or authorize anyone else to assume for it, any other obligation relating to our products or any other products. This warranty does not apply to machinery or equipment deemed by Wulftec to have been subjected to misuse, neglect, or that has been repaired or altered by unauthorized personnel. Defective parts must be returned to Wulftec within thirty (30) days of shipment of a replacement and must be returned prepaid and in their original state. Failure to do so will void this warranty. Defective parts that have been disassembled, damaged during removal or otherwise tampered with will not be covered under this warranty, unless otherwise stated in writing by Wulftec. Wulftec makes no guarantee as to the appropriateness of equipment for particular purposes. Products serviced and/or parts replaced during the warranty period will carry the remaining portion of the original warranty only. The sole obligation of Wulftec under this warranty will be to provide repairs to stretchwrapping components or replacement parts, ex -works Wulftec. Disclaimer Wulftec has taken every precaution in the preparation of this manual to ensure its accuracy. However, this information is subject to change without notice and is provided "as is" with no guarantee. Wulftec shall not be held liable for any direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages in connection with the use of the information contained in this manual. Copyright © 2013 by Wulftec International Inc. All rights reserved. The information disclosed herein is proprietary information owned by Wulftec International. No part of this manual may be reproduced, stored, processed or disseminated, in any form, whether in whole or in part without express consent of Wulftec. No trademark license is granted in connection with the material contained in this manual. Distribution of these operating instructions to third parties is prohibited and shall be subject to damage claims. Revision History Date Revision Description of Revision Author Initials April 2918 7 Prestretch (chains) GP Page I6 ` M.J. MAILLIS WULFTEC,comm The purpose of your Wulftec equipment is to wrap palletized loads with stretch film ornetting using various modifiable wrap parameters, Importance ofthe Manual This user reference guide, included with the machine, contains mechanical drawings, electrical schematics as well as a CD containing the machine programs and drive parameter settings. Make sure that this document remains in proximity ufthe machine atall times. This manual is an esoanUo| part of your YVulfteu equipment. K contains important information (on unpacking, transport, stomgo, use, aafety, mointonanoa, repairs and diagnostics) intended to help machine users maintain the machine inproper and safe working order. The manual must be kept in a dry and clean environment. It is important that no part of the manual be removed, torn or rewritten, for any reason. K you wish to obtain replacement or additional copies of this document, please contact your VVu|ftec distributor, quoting the machine serial number and model. | | POSITION OFTHE IDENTIFICATION PLATE The Identification Plate is located on the tower/enclosure of the stretch wrapping machine. It contains all the information you need when calling Wulfteccustomer service and/or sales department regarding your machine. �� 0 ���� �� � ��m"� �°~"�°~�~�~����m�wr��� � MODELE/MODEL� #SME/SER|AL#: vou.. " eEo, � pxASs. COURANT NOMINAL MOTEUR MAX. I LARGEST moron FLA: A COU RANT DE CCXJRTCmOJI" SHORT nnmromvop. � ^= '"^� '----_� "�� �VOLTAGE: PwwoExoocrvre//swcLusuncTYPE / rAmwE»ooaoowrnoLsPOUR mxzx/wcms/mouSTmsuc INDUSTRIAL CONTROL PANEL FOR INDUSTRIAL MACHINERY M. J. MAILLIS 09-S Read Carefully Before Operating Any Wulftec Machinery VVulften stretch wrap machinery should be handled with the same caution and oana as with any other industrial equipment. Many automatic functions may he potentially hazardous. For this maoon, except for the authorized operator(s) and maintenance nrew, other personnel should keep clear atall times. It is especially important Vobe aware that mechanical or electrical components may suddenly become active when the electrical panel is turned on. These operating instructions serve as information for operating personnel uawell as mechanics, electricians and the maintenance department. These operating instructions shall help to operate the wrapping machine in a safe and appropriate way and toavoid injuries topersonnel and damages 0othe machine. Unless specifically stated, preceding all instructions inthis manms|, itmust bowell understood that all inspeution, maintenance, and repair should be performed only when the electrical power is disconnected from the machine. Huwovor, dangers may ohU ahno from this machine if it is inappropriately used by untrained personnel orifhio used for purposes it is not intended for. In order to avoid operating errors and to assure quick rectification of faults, the operating instructions must always be accessible to the operating personnel at all times. Unstable loads being wrapped at high speeds are liable to fly apart and cause machine damage urpersonal injury. For this reason, it is suggested that whenever attempting to wrap an unusual or new load configuration, all personnel should be well clear of the wrapping area. The load should not be wrapped at a higher speed than the machine was designed to handle. Always assume the machine is in an active mode. Disconnect control power prior 0o servicing, adjusting urperforming routine maintenance procedures. Please use extreme caution ifbshould become necessary to inspect, Uiagnoae, or adjust the machine while it is in operation. Only qualified individuals thoroughly familiar with the particular machine should perform mgv|or maintenance orinspections. Unless specifically stated, preceding all instructions in this manua|, hmust bowell understood that all inspections, maintenance *w,k, and repairs should be performed only when the electrical power is disconnected from the machine. Refer to the Lock out / Tag out procedure on page 57. ' `��=�N . . � �.m mm—mm°������NNN�� WUKFl[EC,csmm 1001p- | TRANSPORT INSPECTION | Immediately upon aniva, visually inspect machine for damages caused in transport. If damage to the machine has occunred, it must be reported to the freight carrier immediately and VVu|ftec should be notified. An stated in the warranty, Wulftec is not responsible for damage caused in transit. If no damage is apparent, carefully remove all wrapping material, strapping, blocks, etc. The liability of the insurer may become inapplicable in events of damage, if the following instructions are not complied with. in case of suspected damago, reception of the goods should only be acknowledged under proviso, (e.g. on the freight document) with information concerning the suspected damages. In case of goods in containers make sure that container as well as locks or seals are checked by responsible persons of the shipping company or the carrier. If containers are damaged or locks and seals have been broken, are missing or deviate from the freight documents, acknowledge the receipt only under proviso with information concerning the suspected damage and keep damaged orwrong locks and seals inasafe place. Secure compensation claims against third parties. Shipping companies, other forwarders, haulage companies, storage companies, customs and harbor authorities should be requested for mutual rectification ofthe damage, asked for certification ufthe damage, made liable and describe the damage indetail, in the event of externally visible damage before acceptance of the goodu, damage not visible from outside immediately after discovery. Find out deadlines for complaints and comply with them! p"o"n M.J.MAILLIS WULFl[EC,comm GENERAL SAFETY The wrapper has been built in compliance with the presently valid technical rules and is reliable in operation. It has been submitted to a final test on the functionality of components, pmtechone, controls and emergencies. Hovwavor, dangers may still arise from this machine ifdio inappropriately used by untrained personnel orifhia used for purposes itianot intended for. Each person instructed to operate or service the wrapper must have read the complete operating instructions before starting to perform the respective work. This applies also if the person has already worked with a wrapping machine of the same or a similar typo, or if the person has been trained by o qualified VVu|fteo representative. For the customer it is recommended to obtain a written confirmation from the personnel that the contents of these operating instructions have been read. Knowledge about the contents of these operating instructions is a prerequisite to protect persons against dangers as well as avoidance of errors and safe and trouble free operation of the machine. The operating instructions must beavailable and accessible outhe operating and service personnel at any time! All information in these operating instructions must be strictly observedl In the end, the customer orthe personnel authorized by him who must operate the stretch wrapping machine in compliance with his duties infully responsible for accident -free operation. Apart from the notes onindustrial safety in these operating instructions, the generally valid safety regulations and the instructions for the prevention of accidents must also becomplied with. '--��=N ' � ��°MAI°���°=,NNN�� PERSONAL SAFETY hiumandatory \orespect the following personal safety guidelines 10prevent all types ofinjuries (minor to fatal). 1� Use the E-Stop button if stopping machine movement (wrap per/conveyor) rapidly is necessary. 2. Never try to stop or hold a pallet while it is in movement on the conveyor line or on a turntable. 1 Never use or service the machine without proper safety protections (deactivated or absent). 4. Never remove ordisable safety devices. 5. Never try to stop the rotary arm, carriage or other moving parts when in movement. 8. When threading the film, donot put hands between carriage rollers. 7. Never modify the machine or parts of it. The manufacturer will not be responsible for any modifications or changes done tothe machine. 8. If modifications or changes to the machine are needed, it is recommended that you call your qualified distributor orVu|ftec'ocustomer service department. The machine must he cleaned using o dry cloth or light detergents only. The use of solvents or other type of strong cleaners is to be avoided. 10. Only authorized personnel is allowed to carry out mdjuamnemo, repairs or maintenance operations requiring working on the machine with educed safety protections. During these types of operations. mooeoo to the machine must bo restricted. Safety protections must boreactivated immediately after such operations. 11. The cleaning and maintenance operations must be performed after the electric power has been disconnected. INDUSTRIAL SAFETY Compliance with the notes on safety helps to avoid dangers for persons, environment and/or the stretch wrapping Negligence ufthese notes may result in the following: 1 Danger for persons caused hymechanical orelectrical effects 2 Danger for the environment caused hycleansing agents, oils and grease 3 Failure of the stretch wrapping machine and/or other equipment Non-compliance with the safety regulations may lead to the extinction of all damage claims. 'MN MAILLIS WULFTEC,comm | PER8ONNEL � The wrapper must only be operated and serviced by authorized, trained and instructed personnel. Instructed personnel consists of persons who have been informed about their work and the dangers that may possibly arise in case of inappropriate behavior and who have been trained, as far uathis was necessary, and instructed about all necessary safety installations and safety measures. Expert personnel are all those who are able hoassess the work they are instructed toperform and recognize possible dangers, because cf their professional training, knowledge and experience as well as the knowledge of all applicable regulations, The responsibilities for operation and repair work must be clearly specified, to rule out unclear oompetenoeo under the aspect of safety. Persons under the influence ofdrugs, alcohol mmedication, which may influence the reactivity, are not permitted to perform any work on the machine. The owner must make sure that no unauthorized persons work on the machine. In order to avoid personal injury, the working clothes of the operating and maintenance personnel must comply with the regulations for the prevention of accidents and the recommended machine use. Depending on the *mdk to be performed you must wear personal protections (eye and ear protection, protective clothing, etc.). WHAT TPDo|NCASE OFDANGER AND ACCIDENTS In case /f danger or accidents the machine must be immediately stopped by activating the EMERGENCY -STOP The EMERGENCY -STOP function causes a safe STOP of the machine - regardless of the momentary position of the machine parts. Safety installations with EMERGENCY -STOP functions must only boactuated inevents ofemergency. They must never be used to stop the machine under normal conditions. Always beprepared for accidents and fire! Keep First -Aid kits and fire extinguisher inthe surrounding area. The personnel must be familiar with the handling and the location of all equipment concerning nofety, reporting of accidents, first aid and rescue. This ensures the best possible help in uaoo of accidents and for the avoidance of dangers. p"oe|n M. J. MA1LLIS WULFTEC,com In an effort to reduce the risk of injury to personnel working with or around Wulftec equipments, safety labels are placed at various important points to alert workers of potential hazards. Please check equipment and note all safety labels. Make sure the personnel are vigilant and obey these warnings. Shown below are typical labels that could be placed on the equipment. AWARNING • ,& 4 Read and understand operator's manual before using this machine. Failure to follow operating instructione could result In death or Serious injury. Clarion elarlootaloN.Com Nrxxx Roordot No. H612646WNPIC PLACED ON ALL CONTROL PANELS A DANGER Arc flash and shock hazard. Follow ALL requirements In NFPA 7DE for safe work practices and for Personal Protective Equipment. oCiarlon clarions.Noty.com Pooroor No.14.030.2.2f011. PLACED ON ALL CONTROL PANELS Hazardous voltage will cause severe Injury or death. Turn off power and lock out before service. cwoo, oon Paw Ne..10.111011.14.1.1.1 PLACED ON AUTOMATIC MACHINE CONTROL PANELS LS,WARNING CRUSH HAZARD. Keep hands and fingers clear of moving parts. Do NOT operate with guard removed. Lockout/tegout before servicing. PLACED ON ALL POWERED CONVEYORS, NEAR DRIVE Climbing, sitting, walking or riding on conveyor at any time will cause severe Injury or death. KEEP OFF. PLACED ON ALL CONVEYORS A DANGER Crush hazard. You must support the Z-Axis beam before removing the Z.Axis motor or gearhead. --e-,-1, PLACED ON ALL MOVING PLATEN, NEAR DRIVE A DANGER STAY CLEAR This machine starts automatically. Follow lockout procedure before servicing. PLACED ON ALL MACHINE LEGS & TOWER Page 113 ' `M.J MAILLIS MOVING MACHINERY For the transport of the packed or partly packed machine to the place of installation within your facility, an overhead crane, a forklift truck or any other suitable lifting gear may be used. Only use lifting gear ofsufficient load bearing capacity! ° Ropes,belts mother lifting tackle must befitted with safety hooks. ° Torn orscuffed ropes must not beused. ° Ropes and belts must not have any knots. ° Ropes and belts must not berouted over sharp edges. ° Ropes and belts must not boplaced over wires and conduits. ° Dunot lift machine using equipment's wires and conduits. ~ Use only ropes and belts ofsufficient load bearing capacity. ° Only use lifting gear ofsufficient load bearing capacity. ° Moving the machine must beperformed with greatest care and caution. ° Donot lift loads over persons STORAGE There are some precautions to take when storing the uninstalled machine (packed or unpacked). The machine must be placed in a clean and dry place. If the machine is unpacked, protect it from dust and avoid placing objects on it. INTENDED USE The safe operation of the machine can only be assured when using the machine for the purpose it is intended for and as specified in these operating instructions. The customer is solely liable for any damage resulting from this. The intended use also includes the strict compliance with all conditions concerning start-up.operation and maintenance, as well as spare parts approved by Wulftec. INITIAL INSPECTION Your machinery must be installed by a qualified Wulftec distributor. The installation of the machine is tobeperformed by qualified personnel to prevent injuries. The installation takes place in accordance with the specifications in the layout drawing, The machine is delivered with complete electrical wiring and has been tested in the factory before delivery. Note that because of machine configuratinn, in various circumstancos, some of the elements of the machine may need to be disconnected. Fqoaae follow instructions/indications on elements and/or relevant drawings orschematics Vxreconnect. : M. j. MAILLIS WULFTEC.com [mA E L i j.j To install the machine is to unwrap, erect and position structures, align, level and position all conveyors according to the machine's layout drawing specifications and install any options the equipment could have. Install all junction boxes and liquid tight wire runs under the conveyors. Make sure all sensors and quick plugs are properly connected. Hook-up necessary communication signals, required electrical power (always done by an electrician) and air supply. At this point electrical power and air flow are not applied. Then, during start-up, verify voltage compatibility, air pressure, and overall functionality. For the installation of the machine, you will need: + Two (2) forklift trucks available, each with a capacity of at least 2,500 lbs. (5,000 lbs. capacity might be required depending on machine options). • One mechanic with tools (Impact tool and hammer drill) • One electrician with tools • Straps to lift conveyors, structure, legs etc. Anchor bolts for a WCRT-200 (not provided by manufacturer): • Machine legs: 16 bolts of % in x 6 in long — 4 inches deep in concrete minimum o Mechanical anchors: KB %" 0 from Hilti — 4in minimum engagement into concrete. o Chemical anchors: threaded rod %" 0, Gr: 2, Epcon system 3 %" minimum engagement into concrete. • Enclosure: 4 bolts of 0 3/8 in • Process conveyor: 8 bolts of 0 5/8 in • Std 60in conveyor: 4 bolts of 0 5/8 in • 90-120in conveyors: 6 bolts of 0 5/8 in • Pedestals: 4 bolts of 0 3/8 in • Floor mounted PE guard: 4 bolts of 0 %4 in with a large radius'/4 in flat washer "Anchor bolts for WCRT-200 standard options (not provided by manufacturer): • Top sheet (in -line) : 12 bolts of % in x 6 in long — 4 inches deep in concrete minimum • Floor -mounted heat seal : 4 bolts of 05/8 in • Top sheet dispenser (in -cycle) : 4 bolts of 0 5/8 in • Index table : 4 bolts of 0 5/8 in • Chain transfer conveyor : 4 bolts of 0 5/8 in Fence sections: Anchor bolts (not provided by manufacturer) Per fence post: 4 bolts of 0 3/8 in All electrical and pneumatic requirements should be ready for set-up. Standard Voltage: 230Vac/3ph/60Hz (Consult electrical schematics for your specific machine requirements) Standard pneumatic requirements: 3 CFM @ 80 PSI Please schedule manpower for installation, maintenance and operator training. Make sure film, including top sheet plastic, top caps, cardboard, tab folders, etc. if required, are in sufficient availability. Page 115 N MAILLIS WULFTEC.cmm | ||N8TALLAT|[>N(C:ONT'O) Important! Refer to mechanical laVout to make sure you have the proper measurements or information regarding the machine since machine height, conveyor positioning and control panel location have already been pre -determined by Wulftec according to the specifications received, Make sure machine is placed on a level surface before and after unpackinq and that machine structure is level as well once placed in position. 1. Unwrap machine (*ifpresent, donot unstrap in -cycle top sheet structure) and move uninata|ledparts (machine legs, cut & wipe assembly) away from main structure. 2. Move machine and uninsta|ledparts close tnfinal location. 3. Remove the straps that hold the boom tnthe rotary arm (A).Leave the plate under the boom toslide onthe floor while erecting the frame aothe paint does not get scratched (8). 4. Before you lift the frame, put one(1)bolt on the top corner of each leg (place according to mechanical top view) so while raising the frame, the legs will come up at the same time (C). 5. Install the bumper photooyearm onthe side ofthe rotary arm and connect the 6 Use one (1)forklift a\each end ofthe machine below the cross member (E).Lift the structure slowly tuallow the boom tolower under its own weight. Stop atmid- position 0onymovetheohippingfnotwo|dment<F>. 7. Finish lifting the machine, then bolt the legs and boom in place. 8. *With in -cycle top sheet, once wrapper is up, slowly "unfold" the top sheet structure starting from wrapper frame, cutting straps as it is unfolding. 9. Install the cut & wipe uyetem�plug inhoses byfollowing labels and connect the cut wire on the cut arm (if applicable). 10i Move the machine and the conveyors inposition according tothe center line (center the process conveyor with the center ofthe commutator, which is located in the middle of the machine). Refer to the rotary arm center, not the top frame center. 11. Install all the conveyor electrical conduits under the conveyor using the mounting dompo<G>. 12 Connect and secure all electrical wires (phntomyoo. motors, |unya,d, e-stop. otc.)according Vuelectrical 13. Bolt entire machine and components Vothe floor using the anchor holes (control pama|, conveyor legs, machine legs, etc.). Before bolting, make sure the machine is properly placed (location, conveyor height, machine leveled, etc.). M. J. MAILLIS WULFTEC.corn INSTALLATION (CONT'D) 14. Once the machine has been placed or bolted in its location, verify the following: • Vulnerable items such as motors, transmission housing, photoeyes, limit switches, control panel, etc. • Examine the carriage chains for proper tension. Verify that the carriage guides or rollers are okay and lubricated. • Make sure all shipping brackets have been removed. 15. Install rotary arm bumper reflector at the bottom of the boom. (H) 16. Assemble the fence kit according to the layouts found in the machine's user guide Refer to Installation of Fence Handle procedure below for proper fence handle installation. Anchor fence to the floor. (If applicable). 17. Route the liquid tight wire runs along the fence and connect the quick plugs on the back side of the electrical enclosure. If desired, attach extra length to the fencing using multi- purpose ties (ty-wraps). (I) 18. Install the photoeye brackets and connect the photoeyes. 19. Have a certified electrician to connect the control enclosure. Make sure the voltage is correct (refer to electrical schematics). 20. Plug in pneumatic components to air supply. Make sure CFM and PSI are appropriate (refer to mechanical drawings). 21. At this point, if the necessary wires for the communication signals have been pulled, plug them in the proper terminals according to the electrical schematics, prior to moving on with the start-up procedure. Communication terminals are located in the bottom left side on the enclosure. 22. Power up machine. 23. Verify PLC inputs one by one, using the electrical schematics, to make sure wiring is done properly to avoid damages to the machine. 24. Follow the steps indicated on the HMI screen (clear faults, etc.) 25. Test machine functionalities in manual mode before running the machine in automatic mode. Once everything has been inspected and appears to be in good order and operator training is done, the machine is now ready to work. The wrapper must only be operated and serviced by authorized, trained and instructed personnel. INSTALLATION OF FENCE HANDLE Refer to the mechanical drawings in order to facilitate the installation of the handle on the safety fencing. P a g c 117 ' M. J. MAILLIS Q0s's�.- Analog sensor: Supplies a proportional signal corresponding to the distance from the target to the sensor face. Autoheiqht: A feature characterized byuphotoeye constantly monitoring the height of the carriage inrelation with the height of the load being wrapped. The optical sensor detects when the carriage has reached proper height and gives the signal tuthe PLC hostop the carriage. Dancer Bar: Aroller onthe outfeed of the carriage that controls the tension of the film as it's wrapped around the load. FAST The Force Anticipation Stretch Technology is a film feeding system which accurately delivers film hothe pallet without reacting to a demand. It allows closer reach of film tensile strength without the film breaks. It is more forgiving to defects in the film and/or puncture hazards on the product. Film Ratio (FAST)-. It is just like film tension, except that the calculation to achieve the film ratio is different. The film ratio calculates the load dimension multiplied bythe selected film ratio. Film Tension: histhe film feed reluctance that creates this tension. Also called post-stretcU.weachieve this by reducing the film speed for aconstant rotation motion speed. Heat Wire: A thin strand (20ga) of nickel -chrome alloy used to cut the film when the wrapping process is complete. HIVII: A Human Machine Interface is often called a touch screen and it is used to interact with an automated system. Infeed: Indicates that the component in question is situated at the entrance of the machine. Outfeed: Indicates that the component in question is situated at the exit of the machine. Overlap: Amount of film covering the preceding layer while wrapping upward or downward. Ovamvrav:Amount offilm applied passed the top nfaproduct stack. Photoeve:Anoptical sensor used todetect the presence ofanobject. PLC: A Programmable Logic Controller is a component used to control an entire system. Pre -stretch: Act of stretching the film before it leaves the film carriage. Pre -stretch is given as a ratio expressed in a (what comes un/(i�o�0—(w�o/ �oox Equation: ��o�6;= ` — — `'—'' `''—'— --'`--`'x}0O Pmximhvsensor: Asensor able 0odetect the presence ofnearby objects without any physical contact. Roping: Bunching ofthe stretch fi|m'sfull width tocreate arope. VFD: A Variable Frequency Drive is a component used to control the speed of an AC triple phase motor. Wrap Patterns: A eohea of programmable settings that can be memorized by the PLC. These settings can be programmed via the MIVIiThey determine how aload will bewrapped. Wrap Zone: The area occupied by the rotation when it is in motion. M. J. IlAJLLIS WULFTEC.com 1A-VAIM ©it GJhrTYA1:01f-.- Lube station 0 Enclosure / control panel Cut wire and wipe system Film Clamp Ring gear support / drive system Main frame Rotary arm (arm and boom) Carriage (film delivery system) and bumper Conveyor line Page 119 M. J. MAILLIS WULFTEC.com EiVA.N@I;11}1.1,44,@@itaijOy;5 Enclosure/Control Panel This enclosure/control panel is the "heart" of the machine. All machine controls are located inside the enclosure: HMI, PLC, drives, relays, contactors, etc. Cut and Wipe Arm: Installed between the machine's legs, this assembly is used to cut the film after the wrapping is done. It also wipes the film tail on the load's surface. The cut and wipe arm always works in tandem with the film clamp. Film Clamp: The film clamp is installed at the center of the process conveyor, inside the wrap zone. It holds the film before the cut and wipe arm comes and sections it. Rotary Arm: This is the part that revolves around the load and on which the film carriage travels up and down. The rotation motion is achieved by the pinion -ring gear group to which it is installed, Machine Frame: Constitutes most of the machine, harnesses the motor -brake -gearbox -pinion -ring gear group at its center. It is very important that this structure be level and stable once installed. Frame Motor -Brake -Gearbox -Pinion -Ring Gear Group: This group is the one that requires the most maintenance. The pinion and ring gear teeth need to be greased manually (except with nylon pinion — no greasing necessary) whereas the bearing inside the ring gear is lubed by an automatic greasing system. Boom Assembly: The rotary arm boom is the structure that carries the carriage trolley and determines how high and how low the carriage travels on its tubes. Carriage: Situated on the boom, the trolley travels up and down carrying the film carriage in its motion. The limit switches are used to stop the trolley at the wanted upper and lower levels; they are tripped by the adjustable stop blocks installed on the unistrut. Boom Motor -Brake -Gearbox Group: This group is responsible for making the carriage trolley go up and down. Motion is assured by sprockets and chains situated on each side of the gearbox. The chains are attached to the carriage trolley. Page 120 ` M.J.MAILLIS WULFTEC,com | |K8ACH|NEASSEK8BL|E8(CONT'O) FiUnConiaqa: This machine component is responsible for delivering the film while wrapping. A motor drives two sets of gears, which make two pairs of rollers rotate. It is these rollers and their different rotation speed that pre -stretch the film. A mandrel is present to accept different film roll sizes. The film carriage can offer a constant film tension during the wrap process thanks to the dancer bar assembly that regulates motor speed in relation with film demand. Pre -Stretch Ratio Geahng: Film pre -stretching has advantages, for instance; operation costs are reduced due to film savings and the wrap tends to pull back after being pre -stretched, thus offering a wrap that tightens over a certain period of time. This "pre - stretching" is possible thanks to the pulleys located on top of the film cmniaya. The ratio (difference in diameter) of pulleys #1 and #2 determines the pre -stretch mhu. The analog senmor, cam and torsion spring are the three components from the dancer bar assembly that are responsible for motor speed regulation. The safety sensor checks if the gate is fully closed, if it is not fully closed, the machine will not start. The carriage gate opens by pressing on the ���.N . � ��°m mn~mm°�°��~�NNN^� ^v"OODcow 7�~r=��`""��� | STARTIAUTOKAAT|CMODE � The system can be put in start (run) mode by pressing and releasing the "START/STOP" push button when the button is blinking. Whenever the light is lit solid (green light) means the system is in running mode. STOP MODE The system can be put in stop mode by pressing and releasing the "START/STOP" push button. Whenever the light is not lit solid (green light) means the system is in stop mode (closed or blinking). ALARM MODE | When the system is in alarm mode, the red beacon on top of the control panel will be ON to warn the operator that something is wrong. Looking at the HIVII will help determine the problem. RESET MODE | Each time a manual screen is accessed you will be prompted to initialize the system before start mode is possible. The reset mode is active only when the "START/STOP" button is pushed for two (2) seconds then released. If the machine is out cdhome position during the inida|izadon, each moving part will reach its home position i.e. trigger block under the "home proximity uansor", carriage at the down position and nut and wipe arm completely retracted and all other options will also return 0otheir home position. | MANUAL MODE | This mode is active only when the manual screens are accessed on the HIVI|. When accessing these manual mode pages, the machine goes in STOP mode by itself. Each time the machine has been operated manually, the system will ask for re -initialization before putting it in start mode. ' M.J. MAILLIS WULFl[EC,comm | A����!` Controls and Functions Main Power Switch Turns the power On/Off tothe machine. Power Light Illuminates to indicate power On/Off. Rearm / Acknowledge Alarm Used to nmnn the master control relays (fence doors and o'stops). clear drive faults and acknowledge alarms. §tuirt ' Mod V�hV Start/Stop (push button) The start mode light islit solid when machine is in start mode (automatic). When NinkinQ, press togo in start mode. When off, machine is in alarm or inmanual mode. Press Start/Stop push button \ostart orstop ocycle nrhold two (2)seconds to reinitiate. Emergency Stop Used to quickly stop the machine in uaa* of emergency by removing all power to the motors Multi -Function — Used to move vehnua machine components vertically -or horizontally, It is also used anospecial function in automatic mode. *Optional TOUCH SCREEN CONTROLS NOTE: Uthe touch screen isdamaged ordestroyed orifthe touch screen doesn't respond, you can still access the following functions: Acknowledge alarm and return to automatic mode. To acknowledge an alarm, simply turn the multi -function switch to the minus (-) sign and press the rearm button. To return to automatic mode, simply turn the multi -function switch to the plus (+) sign and press the rearm button. ' N�� N N N N�� . . � °���� =�=w������~ WULFTEC.comm [AUTOMATIC � This page is the most frequently used during machine operation. A "local message display" informs on what steps to take inorder tuput the system back in operation. It also displays the action or state of all machine zones. The small screen section just above is the alarm banner, which will pop up whenever the machine encounters a problem. It is important not to press on the "CLOSE" button because it does not eliminate the alarm, it just closes the banner. The steps to take are indicated in the "Local Message Display". 10,07:30 AM Monday, N—a"b.r 12,2016 SO1m246,w118 Local Mess.g� Display ##MAINTENANCE(mmDO/\ ""m=NTEIVA"="EEN=/ � / mm LOADING AUTO MANUAL Controls Local Message Display ''mrTEn�� NEXTmn�wm� NAME: 9 SETTINGS MAINTENANCE PEnmnMmc mxaoIN; (Cm, (CLOSE) pmSE) (CLOSE) p � Functions ALARM BANNER Displays the status and alarm mndo(s)ofthe machine. Maintenance to Do Displays the maintenance operations to carry out. When maintenance is complete, gotothe Maintenance active page to acknowledge completion. Follow the warning sign (yellow triangle) (oreach this page, Alarm Banner — Working Pattern # - — Next Pattern # Film Loading Press to display the alarm banner. Indicates the current wrap pattern selection. Press to bring the operator to the current value page. Used toselect the next wrap pattern selection. When selecting m pattern during machine operation, the new pattern will be applied to the next incoming |oad(o)only and not hothe load currently inthe wrapping zone. Moves the rotation in reverse inorder to facilitate film roll loading. When pressing unthis button the rotation will reach amore accessible position to enable the operator hoload the carriage with afilm roll. Once film loading io comp|a0ad, press this button again to return rotation to home position. Pop Up Screen Answer the question by pressing the Yes orNo button (to reset the film monitoring calculation). i M. J. MAI LLIS WULFTEC.com WRAP PATTERN PAGE Password Level 1 WRAPPING MODE EDIT P PA RN =1111M111111=11111 OPEN THE CLAMP RAISE CARRIAGE *NT " WHEN LOW AT BEGINNING LOAD IS DETECTED LOAD LOAD LENGTH WIDTH TOP WRAPS NOTTOMWRAPS #4..# ROTATION SPEED 4111 R.P.M. AUTO MANUA WRAPPING UPWARD CARRIAGSr SPEED OVERWRAP WRAPPING UPWARD OVERLAP :AU" WRAPPING DOWNWARD OVERLAP : ttNiT" 0% = LOOSE 100% = TIGHT START WRAP FILM TENSION : 014% 1NRAP UPWARD FILM TENSION TOP WRAPS FILM TENSION : % WRAP DOWNWARD FILM TENSION : MT/ % BOTTOM WFtAP5 FILM TENSION : WV% ETENGS MAINTENANCE PERFORMANCE 10 READING (CLOSE) (CLOSE) ; (CLOSE) (CLOSET Controls Functions ALARM BANNER CONTACT US Pattern Number & Description Used to select a pattern number and allows the modification of its description and settings. Wrapping Mode/Bypass Mode Open Clamp at Beginning/at the End When selector is set to bypass mode, the load will pass through the wrapping zone without being wrapped. The conveyor's sequence is active and the wrap sequence is inactive, In wrapping mode, all loads will be wrapped, Press this button to select the clamp opening at the end or at the beginning of a wrap cycle. If opening at the beginning, the rotation will move one (1) full turn on the clamp before carriage can move up. When set to opening at end of cycle, the carriage will move up right away and the clamp will open just before the rotation deceleration. Raise Carriage ##" When Low Used to set the distance the carriage will travel up to accommodate low Load Is Detected loads. Load Length Used to enter the length of the selected load. The length of he load is taken from the side parallel to the conveyor side rails. load Width Used to enter the width of the selected load. The width of the load is taken from the side perpendicular to the conveyor side rails. Wrapping Upward Carriage Max Speed On/Off Press this button to activate full speed upward to reach the top of theload quickly. Page 125 ' ��=�N . � �+M°—mI°�°����NNN�� | |VVRAPPATTERNPAGE(C{}NT'D) Password Level 1 Controls Functions ---- Top Wraps - Thisselectorthe amount -mstretch wrap applied to thetopcf the load, adjustable upto1Olayers. BottVV omr pm —_ — This selector ���� o�o�kwrap pappUedtothobottnm ofthe load, adjustable upto1Olayers. The bottom wraps will beapplied ot the end ofthe wrap cycle, before the deceleration, Ovemvrop This selector determines the size of the ovenwnap (the carriage autoheight photueye position could affect the ovenwrap). In inches. If value is not accurate, please refer tuthe Film roll settings page Rotation Speed This allows the rotation to be set a1the speed best suited Vothe |nad, up to e maximum allowed bythe wrapper. If used 0oslow down machine speed during operation, reduce slowly. VVroppingWpward/Dmwnwurd Overlap This selector -determines the quantity of film (in inches) overlapping each layer when wrapping upward ordownward (separate va|uou).|fvalue ionot aucurato, please refer to the Film roll settings page. Start Wrap Film Tension Used 0uset the film tension toboapplied et the beginning ofthe cycle. Top/Bottom Wrap Film Tension Used to set the tension of the film to be applied to the top and bottom of the load (separate values). The ratio is measured after the pre'o1natoh. Independent from pre -stretch ratio. Wrap Upward/Downward Film Tension Used toset the tension ofthe film tobeapplied tothe load while wrapping upward nrdownward. The tension iomeasured after the pre'ntretoh, Independent from pre -stretch rahn. —Save/Sove As Press the Save button to savenawaettingsto-an existing wrap pattern, Press the Save Aabutton 0usave a new wrap pattern under specific name. r ' M. J. MAILLIS WULFTEC.com CURRENT VALUE PAGE Password Level 1 to access Save button PATTERN WORKING WRAP PA itRN SSSEMSGE136585365558S PPMG OPEN THE CLAMP RAISE CA WAGE WHEN LOW MODE AT BEGINNING LOAD LENGTH TOP WRAPS 447 BOTTOM WRAPS tRA LOAD IS DETECTED NG ARP CARRIAGE MAX SPEED OFF OVERWRAP 471" WRAPPING UPWARD OVERLAP :=11" ROTATION SPEED tkr,- FLP.M, AUTO Controls MANUAL Pattern Number & Description Wrapping Mode/Bypass Mode Open Clamp at Beginning/at the End WRAPPING DOWNWARD OVERLAP :IMF LOGIN MAINTENANCE' (CLOSE) PERFQRMANCE (CLOSE) , 0% = LOOSE 100% = TIGHT START WRAP FILM TENSION :EP= % WRAP UPWARD FILM TENSION :14:1I % TOP WRAPS FILM TENSION WRAP DOWNWARD FILM TENSION % 601 TONI WRAPS FILM 'TENSION : ftRP % Functions Used to select a pattern number and allows the modification of description and settings. When selector is set to bypass mode, the load will pass through the wrapping zone without being wrapped. The conveyor's sequence is active and the wrap sequence is inactive. In wrapping mode, all loads will be wrapped. Press this button to select the clamp opening at the end or at the beginning of a wrap cycle. If opening at the beginning, the rotation will move one (1) full turn on the clamp before carriage can move up. When set to opening at end of cycle, the carriage will move up right away and the clamp will open just before the rotation deceleration. Raise Carriage ##" When Low Load Is Detected Used to set the distance the carriage will travel up to accommodate low loads. Load Length Used to enter the length of the selected load. The length of the Ioad is taken from the side parallel to the conveyor side rails. Load Width Used to enter the width of the selected load. The width of the load is taken from the side perpendicular to the conveyor side rails. Wrapping Upward Carriage Max Speed On/Off Press this button to activate full speed upward to reach the top of the load quickly. Page 1 27 0w� 0 N N N�� . ° ���°m mm-mw°������ | CURRENT VALUE PAGE (CONT'D) Password Level 1 to access Save button Controls top Wraps Functions ------ -- applied o�the to p of issalectordetann-ineutho-a mount ��stretch the load, adjustable upto0layers. Bottom Wraps - ----this pe'ilectordetemninos the amount ofstretch wrap applied mthe bottom ofthe load, adjustable upto1Olayers. The bottom wraps will boapplied at the end ofthe wrap cycle, before the deceleration. Ovanwrap This selector doVannineo the size of the ovonvrap (the carriage autohoigh4 photooyo position could affect the nvemvrap). In inches. If value is not accurate, please refer tnthe Film roll settings page Rotation Speed This allows the rotation to be set at the speed best suited tnthe |oad, up to o maximum allowed bythe wrapper. If used to slow down machine speed during operation, reduce slowly. (WFappingQpwvard/Qmmnward Overlap _fNia no|ontur determines the quantity of film (in inches) overlapping each layer when wrapping upward ordownward (separate vo|ueo).|fvalue ionot accurate, please refer tothe Film roll settings page. Start Wrap Film Tension Used huset the film tension &oboapplied at the beginning o/the cycle. Top/Bottom Wrap Fi|mTenoion Used to set the tension of the film to be applied to the top and bottom of the load (separate values). The ratio is measured after the pre -stretch. Independent from pre -stretch ratio. Wrap Upward/Downward Film Tension -Save --- — ----�PrasotheS~ve Used Vnset the tension ofthe film tobeapplied tothe load while wrapping upward or downward. The tension in measured after the pna'otnatuh. Independent from pre -stretch ratio. - button tosave 'new settings 0zan existing wrap pattern. Login The operator- m-ust login the page in order for the Save button to appear. Note: Changes made Vovalues onthis page will heapplied to the load currently present in the wrapping zone only. Press the Save button if you want the changes to be applied to all future loads. M.J.MAILLIS | | FILM ROLL SETTINGS PAGE Password Level 2 EDIT NAME ff WRAPPING UPWARD FILM WIDTH WRAPPING DOWNWARD - EDIT FILM ROLL 2 . . SETTINGS_- ---_-_�REAF)ING ^"'" ' MANUAL -'-'CLOSE' ' -~~` ` -~~ ��� ' ' ���� �^�� � '/ CONTACT us Controls Functions Edit Film Roll 1/2 Film Width Wrapping Upward Measured On Load Press this button toedit film roll information. This selector specifies the width nfthe film output from the carriage. It allows the machine 0ore-adjust the calculations used for overlap and nvonwrapupward. Higher film tension = Lower film width, Distance Between PE And Top OfThe Film Film Width Wrapping Downward Measured On Load Adjust in inches the distance between the nuVoheight photoeye and the top of the film (measured onthe |oaU). - -carriage. This selector specifies the width ofthe film output from the |tallows the machine tore -adjust the calculations used for overlap and uvonwrapdownward. Higher film tension = Lower film width, Film Gauge Enter the film gauge (current ro||). Film Roll Length Enter the film roll length (new.unused m|V. Film Roll Weight Enter the film roll weight (new, unused roll). ' M. J. MAILLIS WULFTEC.com OTHER SETTINGS PAGE 1 Password Level 1 Controls AUTO MANUAL LOW LOAD PM -FERN :#(7 1 0 - OFF ) SETTING (CLOSE) ROTATION REVERSE FOR FILM LOADING #kittl SEC. MAINTENANCE, (CLOSE) 1 Functions PERFORMANCE (CLOSE) RAISE CARRIAGE FOR FILM LOADING 0.ttl SEC. 10 READING (CLOSE) ALARM I BANNER US CONTACT1 Low Load Pattern Rotation Reverse for Film Loading Used to set the default pattern to be used with low loads. Used to set the time during which the rotation will move in reverse to reach film loading position to enable the operator to make the film roll replacement as easy as possible. Raise Carriage for Film Loading Used to set the time during which the carriage will move up to reach film loading position to enable the operator to make the film roll replacement as easy as possible. Page 130 ' `N��N NNN�� ' . � ���°w m�—=mw�°��~� WUKFlFEC,com | | OTHER SETTINGS PAGE 2 Password Level 2 AUTO MANUAL Controls OTHER SETTINGS LEVEL 2 SETTINGS MAINTENANCE PERFORMANCE mxmmNG Functions / ALARM BANKER CONTACT us Au0nheiQht Run Ad###RPM When No Load Waiting To Be Wrapped Allows the autoheight sensing for pallet load height variations. (There are two limit switches on the carriage with adjustable stops on the vertical boom aysafety ovexide).When the switch iaatOFF, the system will look at the top limit switch instead. Even if the switch is ON and the carriage reaches the top limit switch first, the carriage will still stop. This selector determines the speed for the wrapper to use when in Energy Saving Mode. Applies to the rotation speed an well as the carriage up/down speeds. Forklift Cleared Timer Used tochange the delay onthe forklift cleared timer. This delay is the time before a conveyor can move after photoeye has been cleared. Forklift Load Picked Up Timer Used tochange the delay on the forklift load picked uptimer. This delay is the time before a new load can be received for pick-up on a conveyor. M. J. MAILLIS WULFTEC,com WRAPPER MANUAL PAGE Controls 10:07:37 AM Monday, November 12, 2018 SO150246-1-1118 Local Message Display i a ROTATION SELECT SPEED ROTATION MANUAL 20 RPM .. 4 1ST I 1ST 2ND IN PROCESS OUT OUT OFF OFF OFF OFF PRESS TO ACTIVATE MANUAL MODE OF CONVEYOR ZONE SETTINGS (CLOSE) 3 17 OUT OFF CARRIAGE SELECT SPEED CARRIAGE MANUAL cox nz MULTI -FUNCTION SWITCH mot( -)=REV (.)-FWD» MAINTENANCE (CLOSE) Functions 1 PERFORMANCE (CLOSE) PRESS TO ACTIVATE MANUAL MODE OF WRAPPER ZONE 10 READING (CLOSE) ALARM BANNER CONTACT US Local Message Display Displays the status of the machine component selected. This display will appear if an interlock is present. Carriage Manual Speed Used to set the speed of the carriage, in Hz, in manual mode. Carriage Up/Down Used for the carriage vertical movement. Use the multi -function switch on the control panel to move the carriage. Rotation Rev/Fwd Rotation Speed Used for the rotation horizontal movement. Use the multi -function switch on the control panel to move the rotation. Used to set the speed of the rotation, in rpm, in manual mode. All alarms will be active when operating at 2 rpm or faster. Outfeed Conveyor(s) Used for the conveyor movement. Use the multi -function switch on the control panel to move the desired conveyors. Process Conveyor Used for the conveyor movement. Use the multi -function switch on the control panel to move the conveyor. Infeed Conveyor Used for the conveyor movement. Use the multi -function switch on the control panel to move the desired conveyors. Page 132 T ; M. J. MAILLIS WULFTEC.corn DATE AND TIME SETTINGS PAGE MANUAL SETTINGS (CLOSE) Controls Functions Set Date and Time SRIF. dS=GHED1116 MAINTENANCE (CLOSE) ERFORMANCE (CLOSE) 10 READING (CLOSE) ALARM BANNER CONTACT US Used to set the date and time displayed on the HMI. Shift Schedule This page represents the start and end time of the plant's three shifts (day, evening and night). Just enter the time far the three shifts' schedule. Page 133 M. J. MAILLIS WULFTEC.com SAVE AND RESTORE SETTINGS PAGE Password Level 2 AUTO Controls MANUAL RESTORE NULFTEC SETTINGS SETTINGS (CLOSE) RESTORE INULFEEC PATTERNS MAINTENANCE (CLOSE) Functions PERFORMANCE (CLOSE) IO READING (CLOSE) ALARM BANNER Restore Buttons (Wulftec) Restore Buttons (Customer) Press the desired button in order to restore the default settings. Press the desired button in order to restore the settings that were last saved using the Save buttons displayed here. Save Buttons Press the desired button in order to save the modified settings. Page 134 M.J. MAILLIS | | PASSWORD PAGE Password Level 1 Controls NEW CONFIRM PASSWORD PASSWORD PASSWORD DISABLE SETTINGSMAINTENANCE~ ~~� AUTO u^^ �PERFORMANCE �~- ��" p�"p p�"(Cm, - Functions ALARM BANNER comACr| oa / ( Local Message Display Displays the steps inorder mchange the password ufthe machine. Password�Change |norder tochange the password, you must follow these steps: 1' Typo your password (1111)this will allow you to have access to your settings. 2' Type innew password —ifdesired, type new password 3' Confirm new password — retype your password to validate the change 4' Accept new password. NOTE: Once the password is ohanged, the new password will he valid everywhere a password is needed, The old password will become inactive, P000wondCxnahledBEnobked Press this button to enable or disable the password protection on this p°o"|� M.J. MAJLLIS SHIFT STATISTICS PAGE _ STATISTICS` STATISTICS STATISTICS TODAY YESTERDAY TWO DAYS AGO AUTO MANUAL Controls -~.-~— . �~ _ .MONITORING ' ` �^ .. ANDOTHERS ooTIma !uw*TUIAxCEPERFORMANCE m^EAmNG (CLOSE) i (CLOSE) (CLOSE) i (CLOSE) Functions ALARM RANNER � rp°mx us This screen shows the performance information for the current day' shifts, and uptotwo days before (in different oumuno). Load Wrapped For each shift, indicates the number ofloads wrapped. Load Passthrough For each shift, indicates the number of loads that have passed through Machine in Start For each shift, indicates the number of minutes the machine spent in "Run' Machine Stopped by Alarm Machine Stopped by Operator For each shift, indicates the number ofminutes that the machine was in stop mode because of an alarm and an active alarm. For each ahift, indicates the number nfminutes that the machine was in stop mode by an operator (no active alarm). Average Film Ounces per Pallet Indicates the average quantity (in ounces) of film used per pallet. " M. J. MAILLIS WULFTEC.com I PERFORMANCE PAGE Controls Cycle Counter Pallet Counter Hour Counter COUNTERS AND OTHER PERFORMANCES LOAD(S) PER HOURS BASED ON LAST CYCLE tf#4 CONVEYOR TIME FOR LOADS PER HOUR VW SEC. NUMBER OF TURNS IN LAST CYCLE CYCLE COUNTER NNNNNN HOUR COUNTER NNNNNN ACTUAL R.P.M. ACTUAL ROTATION POSITION tEdal RESEUTABLE CYCLE COUNTER NNNNNN RESEITABLE PALLET COUNTER NNNNNN RESETTAULE HOUR COUNTER NNNNNN SETTINGS MAINTENANCE PERFORMANCE 10 READING MANUAL (CLOSE) (CLOSE) (CLOSE) (CLOSE) Functions CONTACT US Counts the amount of wrapping cycles since the machine was first started. Counts the amount of pallets wrapped and unwrapped since the machine was first started. Counts the amount of hours of operation since the machine was first started. (Resettable) Cycle Counter Counts the amount of wrapping cycles since the last reset. (Resettable) Pallet Counter Counts the amount of pallets wrapped and unwrapped since the last reset. (Resettable) Hour Counter Counts the amount of hours of operation since the last reset. Loads Per Hour Based on Counts the amount of pallets wrapped per hour — average is done according Last Cycle to the last pallet wrapped. Conveyor Time For Loads Press this button to set the time needed for the load to go through the Per Hour wrapping conveyor (this time will be added to the wrap cycle time to calculate the amount of loads per hour). Number of Turns in Last Indicates the number of turns (wrap layers) done during the last cycle Cycle completed. Actual R.P.M. Indicates the machine R.P.M. from the last cycle completed. Actual Rotation Position Displays the actual rotation position by indicating the current tooth (1-104) Page 1 17 J. MAILLIS WULFTEC.com ALARM PAGE Controls ALARM HISTORY Alarm time — • .M 03 FL4 4.0:10317 ABCCE FatilJK LE(NOPC., RSTUV WXYZ ABCDE LIANDFC*. RSTUV WXYZ AUTO MANUAL SETTINGS MAINTENANCE PERFORMANCE O REAUING (CLOSE) (CLOSE) • (CLOSE) (CLOSE) 248:48PM ABCDE FGHUK LIANOPQ RSTUY WXYZ ABEAM FGHUK LIANOPQ RSTUV W)CYZ - - - Functions A ER CONTACT • US Alarm Log Lists the alarms of the machine, including the date and time the error occurred. Alarm Banner *Silence Alarm Page Selector Displays the alarm of the machine. To acknowledge the alarm, press ACK Alarm. Used to stop the alarm buzzer. This does not stop the alarm; it only silences it until the alarm is acknowledged. Brings the operator to the selected page. Page 138 M. J. MAILLIS WULFTEC.com I MAINTENANCE PAGE Password Level 2 to access ACK Maint. button AUTO MANUAL SETTINGS MAINTENANCEPERFORMANCE. ID READING (CLOSE) (CLOSE) (CLOSE) tCLOSE Controls Functions Maintenance Log Active I History Alarm Banner * ACK Maint. Log in ALARM BANNER CONTACT US The maintenance log active lists the current maintenance that remains to be carried out. The maintenance history lists the completed and acknowledged maintenances of the machine. Displays the alarm of the machine. To acknowledge the alarm, press ACK Alarm. When the machine is in maintenance warning, press this button to acknowledge completion of maintenance. The operator must login the page in order for the ACK Maint. button to appear. Page 139 M. J. MAILLIS WULFTEC,com REAL TIME FILM MONITORING PAGE Controls PEAL TIME FILM USE Mg.P. Oz 44,N, PALLETS WRAPPED DURING CURRENT SHIFT AVERAGE FILM OUNCES PER PALLET #:(17. Oz (DURING CURRENT SHIFT) PALLETS REMAINING; TO BE WRAPPED WITH CURRENT ROLL REAL TIME FILM MONITORING REAL TIME PRESTRETCH $144 % #04, PALLETS WRAPPED ON CURRENT ROLL AVERAGE FILM OUNCES PER PALLET JT Oz (ON CURRENT ROLL) SETTINGS MANUAL (CLOSE) Real Time Film Use Functions MAINTENANCE (CLOSE) THE LAST 30 PALLETS WRAPPED CYCLE ## / 30 - (Pattern # WEIGHT : 171#1.# Ounces REVOLUTIONS FM Turns FILM GAUGE :## Ga. FILM ROLL: s...s PERFORMANCE, 10 READING (CLOSE) (CLOSE) Displays the fil use (in ounces) in real time. ### Pallets Wrapped During Displays the number of pallets wrapped during the current shift. Current Shift Average Film Ounces per Displays the average film quantity (in ounces) used per pallet during the Pallet (During Current Shift) current shift. ### Pallets Remaining to be Displays the number of pallets that can be wrapped with the film left in the Wrapped With Current Roll current roll. Real Time Prestretch Displays the real time prestretch. ### Pallets Wrapped on Displays the number of pallets wrapped using the current film roll. Current Roll Average Film Ounces per Displays the average film quantity (in ounces) used per pallet on the current Pallet (On Current Roll) film roll. rage 140 M.J.MAILLIS WULFTEC,corn REAL TIME FILM MONITORING PAGE (CONT'D) Controls Functions - Forthe last 30pdlet wrapped, this display indicates: Pallet Monitoring ' Using the annwo, the operator can navigate through the last 30 pallets I Revolutions wrapped in order to obtain the following information: Indicates the selected oydo and the wrap pattern that was used for this pallet. Indicates the weight, inounces, offilm used unthe selected pallet. Indicates the number ofwrap turns that were done onthe selected pallet. �Indicates _ _ Film -�auQe_|ndio�es�egaugeofme0m�sedonthe selected pallet. Film Roll Indicates \�_hich film roll is used on the select - ed pallet. M.J.MAILLIS WULFTEC.com The physical components of the machine must be adjusted for optimal machine operation. CARRIAGE DOOR PROXIMITY SENSOR ADJUSTMENT First, ensure the proximity sensor lights up when the door is fully locked in position. When the door is fully closed the latch will be parallel with the carriage top plate. Second, when the gate is unlocked half way, the flag should not trigger the prox. To obtain the results shown in steps 1 and 2, loosen the two (2) screws, then slide the flag and tighten the screws. Try steps 1-3 until it is adjusted correctly. For all other proximity sensors (home, ring gear count, index position, 180-degree position, etc.), the prox has to be approx. 1/8 in. away from its target. Ensure it is not too close to be damaged by any parts but make sure it is still close enough to get the signal each time. Page 142 M.J.N N N�� . � ��m mm—mm=�°��~� ANALOG SENSOR ADJUSTMENT The following steps accomplish replacement u,adjustment of analog sensor and cam: 1. Activate the emergency stop. 1 Remove the film roll. I Remove the carriage cover. 4. Make sure that the dancer bar iscompletely retracted and othome position, 5. Using a ruler, align the right side of the cam with the edge of the analog sensor bracket (A). Tighten the bolt to secure the cam inplace, 8. Loosen the detector, lean it against cam. Then move back gradually until the light on the detector(B) stops flashing and becomes constant, and then tighten the detector inposition 7. Verify the spring tension. The spring should not be too tight, aim for looser feel. Factory setting: the spring bracket ioaligned with the left side ofthe cam (C). D. Rearm the emergency stop circuit (Caudon�the pre -stretch motorcou|dmotart). For PowerFlex 523: make sure that parameter T095 is set to 10. S. Make sure that when the dancer bar is completely retracted with its initial position, the motor does not turn, and when the dancer bar is moved gently, the motor starts gradually. If the motor turns in initial position (too ter from the cam), or it starts too far (too dose from the cam), loosen the nuts and readjust the analog sensor slightly. If you need to readjust the analog sensor, make sure to activate the emergency stop to prevent injuries to technicians ordamage Vomachine. 10, When all adjustments are completed and satisfactory, reinstall the carriage cover. 11. Install film roll Note: When the light onsensor isconstant, the sensor isreading correctly. However, when bisflashing, hmeans his out ofrange for detection. M. J. MAU LUS WULFTEC.com PHOTOEYE ADJUSTMENT (DIFFUSE) 1. Standard direction of the material being scanned 2. Optical axis sender 3. Optical axis receiver 4. Mounting hole 0 5.2mm 5. LED indicator green: power on 6. LED indicator yellow: status of received light beam 7. Adjustment of scanning distance: double teach button a e 1. LED signal strength indicator 2. Sensing range adjustment Diffuse Photoeye (standard and conveyor) LED Indicators: Each sensor features two LED indicators to help you program and use the sensor. Green: The green LED indicates "power". When this indicator is lit, power is on. Amber (Yellow): The amber or yellow LED indicates "status." This indicator will light up when an output signal is activated. Sensitivity adjustment on std diffuse PE: To adjust sensitivity, place a load at the middle of the turn table or at the center of the axis of rotation then press & hold both buttons (+) & until the led flashes. If you want to fine tune the sensitivity you can press (+) OR (-) until you read the load at the desired distance. Adjustments on conveyor diffuse PE: To adjust, place a cardboard box about % of the conveyor (on the side farthest from the PE. Adjust sensitivity from there. Page 144 M. J. MAILLIS WULFTEC.com PHOTOEYE ADJUSTMENT (RETROFLECTIVE) 1. Optical axis sender 2. Optical axis receiver 3. Mounting hole 0 5.2mm 4. LED indicator green: power on 5. LED indicator yellow: status of received light beam Retroflective Photoeye LED Indicators - Each sensor features two LED indicators to help you program and use the sensor. Green - The green LED indicates 'power". When this indicator is lit, power is on. Amber (Yellow) - The amber or yellow LED indicates "output.' This indicator will light up when an output is present. In AC versions, this indicator shows that the relay is closed. In DC versions, this indicator shows that the transistor is switched according to the light/dark switching that has been set. Page 145 : M. J. MAILLIS WULFTEC.com PHOTOEYE ADJUSTMENT (DARK LOAD / LASER) 1. Potentiometer Dark Load Photoeye Potentiometer — This is used to adjust the photoeye sensitivity. Page 146 — '��.�N � . � �.m~mAm�~"��w,NNN�� CARRIAGE LIMIT SWITCH ACTIVATOR BLOCK ADJUSTMENT A: This limit switch activator block can slide upand down 0ostop the carriage. Typically the bottom one is resting against the bottom bolt (8)sothat the machine can wrap anlow aspossible; ifyou donot want Vowrap the bottom part of the load, adjust the block higher. The top one is typically pushed against the top bolt 1nallow the carriage tu reach the maximum wrap height of the machine-, the autoheight photoeye will stop the carriage at the top of the load inanormal cycle. If your loads all have the same height you can turn the photoeye off and lower the top block to stop the carriage at the top of your load. To slide the block, loosen the bolt at the center of the block, slide it and then secure hback into position. B: There is a bolt at the bottom and top of the activator block sliding rail, this should never be moved or removed. These bolts were factory adjusted to meet the minimum and maximum wrapping height of the machine. C:The carriage mechanical dead bolt is factory installed and should never bealtered. M. J. MAILLIS WULFTEC,con CUT & WIPE ARM REED SWITCH ADJUSTMENT 1-Adjust the (RETRACTED) proximity sensor so that the signal is ON when the cut & wipe arm is fully retracted. 2-Adjust the (EXTENDED) reed switch so that the signal is ON approximately when the arm is in line with the corner of the load (centered with the clamp) as shown in the drawing below. IF It Iv Ir Tor it rr it Trfrir Ir M1 To adjust the reed switch (A), you will have to use an Allen key on the 2 set screws, slide the bracket and reed switch, and then secure it into position. To adjust the proximity sensor (B) in retracted position, make sure the bracket angle is parallel to the push arm and that retracted push arm does not squeeze the rubber bumper or hit the prox. Use a 15/16 key to loosen the proximity sensor and move the proximity sensor to correct position. Once this is done, tighten the proximity sensor in position. Page 148 M.J. MAILLIS WULFTEC.cmmm SPRING LOADED GATE ADJUSTMENT 1. Verify if the gab'smiddle roller isparallel with the two C8pre-stretch rollers. 2. |fhianot parallel, adjust using the springs located ontop and bottom ofthe carriage gate, a. The tighter the springs, the force applied on the pre -stretch rollers will be reduced. b. If the force on the spring -loaded roller needs to be augmented, just loosen the springs using the bottom and top screws onthe carriage gate. o. Spring -loaded rollers adjusted too close to the pre -stretch rollers could cause premature wear of the blue compound. 3. If the middle roller is crooked, you can play with the screws holding the springs in order to straighten it. 4. If the bottom springs of the gate's rollers are too tight, the gate could be misaligned. Make sure the middle roller and the two (2)pre-stretch rollers are parallel. ` Middle roller and twm(2) blue pre -stretch mUem Note: Carriage model may vary but spring waded gate adjustment remains the same M. J. MAILLIS WULFTEC.com ig9:161A CI Q't NOTE: You can temporarily stop the wrapping sequence at any time. This can be done by pressing the Start/Stop button and following steps on HMI (or press E-Stop button in case of emergency - to re -start the wrap cycle after an emergency stop, simply release the E-Stop button and follow steps on HMI). It is to be noted that by resetting the machine, a new cycle is initiated. NOTE: To activate Manual mode, go to the manual page on the HMI. By doing so, automatic sequence and reset are immediately interrupted. 1. Put power on. If needed, load film roll according to instructions (Changing and Threading Stretch Film section). 2. Adjust desired wrap patterns and settings on HMI. 3. On HMI, go to the automatic page. 4. Follow instructions on HMI: • If alarm is present, press "Ack Alarm" button on HMI to acknowledge it. • Press Start/Stop push button. • Once initiation is completed, the machine will initiate. • Machine starts in auto mode. • Select desired next wrap pattern. 5. Machine waits for a load. 6. Load enters wrap zone and is centered automatically. 7. If Wrapping mode is deactivated, operation will move to step 22. 8. If Wrapping mode is active, the rotation begins. If "Open Clamp at Beginning" is selected: 9. After 1 1/, turns, the clamp releases film tail while carriage moves up. If "Open Clamp at the End" is selected: 10. After 3 seconds in rotation max. speed, the carriage will move up. 11. The carriage stops at its top position when the top of the load is detected by autoheight photoeye or limit switch. 12. The machine completes the top wraps. 13. The carriage moves down. 14. The carriage stops at bottom limit switch. 15. The machine completes the bottom wraps. 16. The rotation slows to minimum speed (decel). 17. The rotation stops at home position. 18. The film push arm goes out. 19. The clamp closes while the cutter wire rotates into film and cuts it on contact. 20. The film tail is wiped on the load. 21. The film push & wipe arm goes back to home position. 22. The pallet moves towards the end of the wrap zone. 23. The load reaches end of wrapping conveyor and is discharged onto the outfeed conveyor section (if applicable) when ready. 24. Go back to 5. Page 150 ' ` M. J. N N N�� L_ | ° =�°m�ma�w��~°�w�� WK8LFl[EC,com The film roll should be loaded so that the tacky surface will face inward on the pallet load. 1, Make sure the machine isinstop mode before opening the fencing door. Z Open safety fencing door. 3. Push the lock nnthe carriage gate latch 0ounlock carriage door. 4. Remove empty film roll. 5. Ensure that the inner core ufthe new fi|mroll inundamaged. |fthe lower (bottom)ofthe inner core indamaged or somewhat unwound, trim urshave itwith asharp knife. 0. Lift the film roll and make it slide along the film support roll. Then move the bottom of the film roll over the bottom cone film roll holder toensure that the roll iosecurely inplace. 7. Pull the film from the roll until agood film web iureached, cut the film and discard the damaged portion. & Pull out the film manually; ensure enough length to reach the clamp when it's closed. 9. Place @m loosely between door and pva'stm\rh mUem. then dose the door and ensure that the carriage locks are correctly locked (this is a 2-position lock; make Sure to reach the 2 nd position when closing the door). 10. Pull out the film manually in order to verify proper loading and operation of the film carriage and )oovo a film tail long enough Vobeable toclose the door and reach the clamp jaws. 11. Place the film tail in the clamp by wedging it in between the spring loaded clamp jaws. It ispossible toopen the clamp manually oyhelp the film slide inbetween the jaws, 12. Cut off excess film ifmore than Oin.past the clamp jaws. 13� Step out of the wrapping area, close back fence door and press the Rearm button on the panel in order to rearm the door circuit and restart the mouhina. 14. If film breaks during owrap cycle, repeat steps 7ho13orattach film Vuthe product. NOTE: With the category 3 safety circuit, the pre -stretch motor will not be powered during e-stopnrwrap zone entrance (fence key switch and/or light curtains) situations. Film can still beeasily pulled out ofthe carriage by opening the carriage gate. Air supply toclamp will not beavailable during e-stnpsituations; but its spring loaded design allows the clamp Vobaeasily opened and closed manually, NOTE: }fthe equipment is not equipped with ecategory 3safety circuit, there will teaclamp button located next to the E-stop button box under the machine's wipe an-n. The steps will remain the same from 1 through 10. At Step 11, the film will be loaded in the clamp jaws using the Clamp Open/Close button. It will be impossible to open the jaws manually oothey will beclosed pneumatically and not using springs. J. MAILUS WU0LFTEC,com | |CHANG|NGANDTHREAD|NGSTRETCHF|LK8(CONT'D) WARNING! Always ensure that the machine is in stop mode before attempting to thread the film carriage, Inadvertent movement of the dancer bar will cause the nd|em to turn abruptly, creating the possibility of serious injury. The operator must respect the film loading and threading instructions AT ALL TIMES! If the film web breaks during the cycle, reattach the fi|m, or if necmoaary, nethread the film following the instructions. It is not necessary to reinitiate the machine. |fE-stmp is anhvated, the pre -stretch and the clamp will not work. If the E-Stop is pressed, pull it and press rearm to rearm the M.C.R., then, press ACK Alarm Voclear the alarm. The machines equipped with o standard carriage are programmed to atop when a lack of film occurs. In e wrap cycle during which the rotation is active and the pre -stretch motor stops working for more than three (3)secnndo. the machine will return to home position then goin stop state. The cause inustop, ulack oy film or a film break. Follow the film threading procedure (previous pages) to rethread the film tostart/restart acyce. The machines are equipped with oproximity sensor used �determine �the � carriage gate is closed properly. This sensor can be seen through the hole in the carriage cover. When the light is UL hindicates that the carriage door is closed properly. If the gate is open, the pre -stretch motor will stop working or if the machine is running a wrapping cycle, hwill stop by itself rapidly. Kthe light is not lit make sure the gate is properly closed. The machine is ready for ostart cycle. Please note that the use of the override leads to a temporary loss of safety- Make sure no one accesses the wrapping zone when the override is in function. M. J. MAILLIS WULFTEC.com RATIO % "A" WULFTEC "B" WULFTEC 0 16 OMSPK00015 12 OMSPK00022 50(52.5) 14 OMSPK00008 16 OMSPK00015 75(71.4) 14 OMSPK00008 18 OMSPK00076 100 (90.5) 14 OMSPK00008 20 OMSPK00078 125(122.2) 18 OMSPK00076 30 OMSPK00011 150 16 OMSPK00015 30 OMSPK00011 175 (166.8) 16 OMSPK00015 32 OMSPK00014 185 14 OMSPK00008 30 OMSPK00011 200 14 OMSPK00008 32 OMSPK00014 225 13 OMSPK00016 32 OMSPK00014 250 12 OMSPK00022 32 OMSPK00014 275 14 OMSPK00008 40 OMSPK00140 300 12 OMSPK00022 36 OMSPK00070 RPM "C" WULFTEC 12 35B12 OMSPK00171 15 35B12 OMSPKO0171 17 35B12 OMSPKOO171 21 35B15 OMSPK00108 24 35B15 OMSPK00108 30 35B18 OMSPK00182 *AII "C" pulleys are 5/8" bore Offset link #OMCHN00018 Master link #OMCHN00019 Page 153 M. J. MAILLIS WULFTEC.com 10 lr I VAS RATIO % "A" WULFTEC "B" WULFTEC BELT "1" WULFTEC 0 16 T OMSPK00131 12 T OMSPK00168 150L050 OMCHN00044 30 14 T OMSPK00130 14 T OMSPK00130 150L050 OMCHN00044 40 13 T OMSPK00132 14 T OMSPK00130 150L050 OMCHN00044 50 13 T OMSPK00132 15 T OMSPK00124 150L050 OMCHN00044 75 12 T OMSPKOO168 16 T OMSPK00131 150L050 OMCHN00044 100 14 T OMSPK00130 21 T OMSPKOO134 165L050 OMCHN00045 125 17 T OMSPK00125 28 T OMSPK00175 187L050 OMCHN00046 150 16 T OMSPK00131 30 T OMSPK00128 187L050 OMCHN00046 175 21 T OMSPK00134 44 T OMSPK00138 225L050 OMCHN00047 185 15 T OMSPK00124 32 T OMSPK00129 187L050 OMCHN00046 200 14 T OMSPK00130 32 T OMSPK00129 187L050 OMCHN00046 225 13 T OMSPKOO132 32 T OMSPKOO129 187L050 OMCHN00046 250 12 T OMSPKOO168 32 T OMSPKOO129 187L050 OMCHN00046 275 14 T OMSPK00130 40 T OMSPK00170 210L050 OMCHN00057 300 13 T OMSPK00132 40 T OMSPK00170 202L050 OMCHN00065 RPM "C" WULFTEC BELT "2" WULFTEC "D" WULFTEC 12 12 T OMSPK00133 210L050 OMCHN00057 40 T OMSPK00170 15 12 T OMSPK00133 210L050 OMCHN00057 40 T OMSPK00170 17 12 T OMSPK00133 210L050 OMCHN00057 40 T OMSPKOO170 21 14 T OMSPKOO169 210L050 OMCHN00057 40 T OMSPK00170 24 14 T OMSPK00169 210L050 OMCHN00057 40 T OMSPK00170 30 16 T OMSPK00192 225L050 OMCHN00047 40 T OMSPK00170 35 18 T 5MSPK00162 225L050 OMCHN00047 40 T OMSPK00170 *AII "C" pulleys are 5/8" bore Page 154 M. J. MAILLIS WULFTEC,com 0 0 RATIO % "A" WULFTEC "B" WULFTEC BELT "1" WULFTEC 0 16 OMSPK00131 12 OMSPK00168 150L050 OMCHN00044 30 14 OMSPK00130 14 OMSPK00130 150L050 OMCHN00044 40 13 OMSPK00132 14 OMSPK00130 150L050 OMCHN00044 50 13 OMSPK00132 15 OMSPK00124 150L050 OMCHN00044 75 12 OMSPK00168 16 OMSPKOO131 150L050 OMCHN00044 100 14 OMSPKO013O 21 OMSPKO0134 165L050 OMCHN00045 125 17 OMSPK00125 28 OMSPK00175 187L050 OMCHN00046 150 16 OMSPK00131 30 OMSPK00128 187L050 OMCHN00046 175 21 OMSPK00134 44 OMSPK00138 225L050 OMCHN00047 185 14 OMSPK00130 30 OMSPK00128 187L050 OMCHN00046 200 14 OMSPK00130 32 OMSPK00129 187L050 OMCHN00046 225 13 OMSPK00132 32 OMSPKOO129 187L050 OMCHN00046 250 12 OMSPKO0168 32 OMSPK00129 187L050 OMCHN00046 275 14 OMSPKO0130 40 OMSPK00170 210L050 OMCHN00057 300 13 OMSPK00132 40 OMSPK00170 202L050 OMCHN00065 RPM "C" WULFTEC BELT "2" WULFTEC "D" WULFTEC 12 12FL050 OMSPK00133 225L050 OMCHN00047 40L050 OMSPK00170 15 12FL050 OMSPKOO133 225L050 OMCHN00047 40L050 OMSPKOO17O 17 12FL050 OMSPK00133 225L050 OMCHN00047 40L050 OMSPKOOI7O 21 14FL050 OMSPKO0169 225L050 OMCHN00047 40L050 OMSPK0017O 24 14FL050 OMSPK00169 225L050 OMCHN00047 40L050 OMSPK00170 30 16FL050 OMSPK00192 240L050 OMCHN00283 40L050 OMSPK00170 35 18FL050 5MSPK00162 240L050 OMCHN00283 40L050 OMSPK00170 "All "C" pulleys are 5/8" bore Page 155 M. J. MAILLIS WULFTEC.com [P;,la-oiowt 35B40 314" BORE - IDLER SPROCKET 1. Disconnect power to machine. Carry out lock out tag out procedure. 2. Remove carriage cover. 3. Loosen idler sprocket using appropriate wrench. 4. Remove the chain or the belt (located between A and B sprockets) 5. Remove A and B sprockets by loosening the set screws. If necessary, use a puller. 6. Using the pre -stretch chart in the manual, select desired pre -stretch and find appropriate pulley kit (pulley, belt/chain) for the selected pre -stretch. 7. Install A and B sprockets according to drawing (use a rubber hammer to set in place) 8. Tighten set screws. 9. Reinstall belt/chain between pulleys. 10. Adjust idler sprocket then tighten it. 11. Put carriage cover back in place and fasten it. 12. Return power to machine and test pre -stretch. P age 156 ' M. J. MAJLLIS WKULFl[EC,com Important! ' Before undertaking maintenance or repair oporabono, it is mandatory to carry out the proper safety verifications to prevent injuries to'pemonne|ordamages to the equipment. The proper safety verifications include selecting the Off button on the main switch and carrying out the tag-out/lock-out procedure. Only the person responsible for the safety verifications should work on the machine. At the end of the maintenance or repair operation, make sure not to leave anyone bohind, and verify that no tools or objects remain on the machine or its surroundings as they could be violently ejected once the machine resumes its operation. Than, check the safety devices for proper function before resuming machine operation. OG kJ This is the procedure recommended by Wulftec for the lock -out & tag out beforecarrying out machine maintenance. Note that you should refer to your country/state/city safety regulations for proper LO-TO if different from the following: 1.Turn off the power and use apadlock (including personal identification tag) mlock out the main switch mremove electricity from machine. 2. Turn off the air using a padlock and lock out the air switch on the FIR to remove air from machine. 3.Verify that power iooff bylooking at the power light ortouch screen onpanel. 4.Verify that air iaoff bylooking the pressure gauge. 5.Enter the machine area. 6. You can now perform the maintenance. When maintenance is completed: 1. Exit machine area, making sure nothing 0oo.object, otc.)is left behind. Close fence gate (if app|inable>. 2. Unlock the air switch, remove the padlock (and personal |Dtag) and turn hon. 3. Remove the padlock from the main switch and turn the power on. 4. To restart the machine on Automatic mode, press rearm to rearm the master control relay. 5. Press ACKAlarm. 0. Pnsoo Stad/Stopto reinitiate the machine. 7. When the machine has been initiated, itwill automatically goinstart mode. | 88FETY � Never operate the machine without the safety fences and light curtain (if applicable). Never bypass the safety circuits and devices. Only authorized personnel are allowed to carry out adjustments, repairs or maintenance operations. Never modify the machine orparts ofit. Never transport the machine ifunpacked and assembled. Periodically control the effectiveness ofsafety devices. paoo|57 . ' N�� N N . . � °°�0�m mm~mm°��. N�� =. S, � Please use this procedure when entering and exiting the safety fencing. 1. Make sure the wrapper zone is instop mode. 2. If not, press Start/Stop push button 0oput machine instop mode. 1 Make sure the key -switch green|igh!iuoff (which indicates that the door ioun|ocked). 4. Open the fence door. 5. Carry out the lock out/tag out (L0TO)procedure, ifapplicable. S. Carry out the work 0ubedone inside the safety fencing zone. 7. Exit the safety fencing zone making sure noperson orobject ialeft behind, 8. Remove LOTOprotection, ifapplicable. B. Close the fence door. 10. Follow the instructions moindicated wnthe HMI. 11. When the wrapper zone instart mode, all doors are locked (green light iu|iV. — M 0 MAILLIS These are the specifications for a standard machine, Please refer to the mechanical layout and electrical schematics for your exact machine specifications. 'Electhca|:Z3OVed3pheno/6UHz-13Amps -Pneumatic:3CFM @8OPS|'clean dry air 'Lubestation grease (Ring gear beohng):UninaxEP2.E»aoorequivalent 'Pinion and ring gear teeth grease: UninaxEP2. E0000requivalent -Reducer oil: Mobil G|ygoy|o4OO -Carriage slider track grease: Multi -purpose grease -Chain gnaase�UnimxEP2.Eoaoorequivalent Warning! Any suspended mass part ofthewrapping/strapping equipmen must basecured (using chains orbelts, resting on an easel, etc.) at all times during maintenance or repair works, even when machine power is out, in order to avoid unexpected or involuntary movements of the equipment. Failure to comply with this warning may cause severe injuries ordeath tonearby workers ordamages Vothe machine. | ACT|VEKAA|NTENAN{�EC)PT|[)N � If the machine is equipped with the active maintenance option, maintenance warnings will be displayed on the HMI. Follow the instructions onthe HMI 0oachieve proper maintenance. If the machine ionot equipped with this option, refer to the maintenance instructions or the preventive maintenance calendar in the following pages. - M.J. MAILLIS WU0LFTEC.com REDUCERS The reducers onyour equipment are filled with Mobil GlyQoyle4UOoil. Donot mix different lubricants inthe reducer, Lubricant incompatibility may result in premature failure. Do not use Mobil Glygoyle 460 oil if your operating environment requires a different type of oil (ex. cold temperature environment) or if you have requested a different type of oil in your system. During the initial start-up operation, a break-in period is necessary before the reducer reaches maximum operating efficiency. It is recommended to take an oil sample after 1.000 hours of operation to see if metal shavings or fragments may have accumulated during break-in, If so, change the oil, Winsmith recommends a gradual application nfload during the first several hours after oiart-up.The reducer may run hot during this initial break-in period. This ia normal. A few drops of oil may weep from the lip seals during the break-in stage. After a short period of operation, clean off any excess oil around the shaft seals and recheck the oil level-, adjust if necessary. Subsequent oil changes should be made ofter25.00U hours or as m part of regular maintenance program (this frequency is highly application dependent). Note: When changing oi|, carefully inspect used oil tobesure there are no metal shavings, fragments and other signs of excessive wear. Under severe conditions (rapid temperature changes, mnio1, diny, orcorrosive environments) itmay be necessary Vochange the oil atintervals of1'3months. Periodic examination of oil samples taken from the reducer will help establish the appropriate interval.VWnumithconsiders that in many indoor environments that are m|odvo|y contaminate free and under normally loaded application conditions, changing the lubricant may never be necessary within the desired life of the speed reducer. The oil change procedure for all SE Encore speed reducers is similar. The appropriate oil fill, drain, and level plugs are identified in chart on following page (Reducer Chart). Please note that these locations are unique for each operating position shown. After draining the old lubricant, new lubricant should be added to the appropriate level plug shown. M. J. MAILLIS WULFTEC.com REDUCER CHART PROOVIN FAVILY STANDARD TIONAL MOUNTING IT 0 MOUNTING INvEP.TO INPUT SHAFT HORIZONTAL INPUT SHAFT VERTICAL XDNS xpTs XDUS :!: v , r....) iman wow— 11 , XDEIS XD S V , a V , CV MIN* L VI 1.6 L U • « L rt , '!.. IILD r; ! 0 II D XDVS 4239 , VI= _ .' b . . IR i:;.1- F Vr XDLS l'..r- fJJ . i '-'0 D) A.9 0 1, XDSS XSTS XSUS XSHS F - 4 , ..E.) 1.11111_ " 1 • ; ' 4 .. IF -71-1.—) ' • 0.1.,, i i 2, xsBs r i v i 0 ' • '' ' )'• 1 - -- 1 _ 'Q-,.. Ma - CI M Mel , 11 I X S PIP ' , . m i i ififfm- ,' !-- SFS L —11111=111 MN I —1110Mil I 0 leiliftii I . Legend: F = Refill Plug V = Vent Plug L = Level Plug D = Drain Plug Page 1 61 ' - M.J.N N N�� ° ��m mm~mm�����~~ WULF][EC,com PHOTOEYES Cleaning: Periodicity will be determined in relation with the type of environment in which the machine is installed. It is important to clean the face of each photooyo and reflector every 2000 hours of operation to get rid of any material that could induce bad readings. PNEUMATICS Air leaks: During routine checks, verify for air leaks in any pneumatic device. Having no major effects on machine operation, air leaks often cost more in energy due to repetitive compressor starts. CHAIN MAINTENANCE Inspect chains every six (6) months or as a part of your regular maintenance program. If necessary, apply grease to chains. The chain tension should be checked on a regular basis. The proper tension for the chain is approx. 0.015" of slack for every one (1) foot of chain. FILTER REGULATOR The FIR possesses a Filter, which traps the water contained in the air line. A drain plug is located at the bottom of the filter section. (This function should be done automatically and should not have to be touched). The second section of the FR contains o Regulator that shows how much air pressure is going into the machine. The pnooaune may beregulated bythe knob located atthe top of the center section ofthe FR. This pressure should beset ut8Opsi for all Wulftec automatic machines. - 'MN MAILLIS CARRIAGE MAINTENANCE | | PRE -STRETCH BELT / CHAIN ADJUSTMENT The pre -stretch belts should be checked for proper tension every2OOO hours of operation. Recommended tension is 1/64 deflection per inch of belt span with a force of approximately 25 |bn. The motor drive belt is adjusted by loosening the four (4) motor mounting bolts and sliding the motor in the mounting slots. The pre -stretch belt tension is adjusted with the tension acVuxbnont ann. This arm can be rotated and moved within the mounting slot to obtain correct tension. Also, make sure the pulleys are at the same level-, verify setscrews. The pre -stretch chains should be checked to ensure the proper tension (approx. every 2000 hours of operation). If the chains are found to have improper tension they may be adjusted (0.015^ of play per foot of chain in recommended). The motor chain may be adjusted by loosening the four (4) bolts from under the hop plate of the carriage and moving the motor using the slots provided. The pre -stretch chain tension may be adjusted by using the cam &sprocket. This cam has aneccentric hole and may boturned for chain adjustment. | | CARRIAGE IDLER ROLLERS The surface of the rollers must be smooth. Use #320 grain sandpaper to get rid of any irregularities that could poke through the film. CARRIAGE PRE -STRETCH In order to have a good pre -stretch you need to make sure the idler rollers are pressed up against the pm -stretch rollers. If there is a gap between the pair, the film will slip through instead of being pinched. To adjust the gap, tighten the top and bottom springs equally until the aluminum mUom touch the pm -stretch mUa/. You may want to dean the aluminum m||ens with lacquer thinner (or any degreaser) to increase their grip ability. In order to verify if the gap is mmoved, aim a flashlight behind the mUem to see if they are touching properly, When you manually turn the pre - stretch rollers, the aluminum rollers may turn by themselves. Nogap between these pairs of rollers ' 0�� N N N N�� . � �=�°m mm-�m°�°��~� | CARRIAGE BEARINGS | Verify for radial, anaxial movement ofthe inner race. When movement ismore than 1/32in.replace all four bearings. p,o*tretch,mUer bearings | | CARRIAGE TROLLEY Chain tensimners(4) ` Slider track Green slider blocks (4) ' `MN MAILLIS | SLIDER TRACKS / CARRIAGE RAILS | Inspect carriage chains and slider blocks monthly or as a part of your regular maintenance program. If necessary, grease with EP2 grease (or whatever grease your operating environment requires) using a paintbrush. CARRIAGE TROLLEY CHAINS | Use grease. Grease when chains are dry. Tension needstoboat8.025in/fee@25lbs.Position the carriage to the center of the travel limits. Hold the |ocknutwhi|e tightening the tension -adjusting nut on the "upper" section. (The lower section is for aligning the v-groove/carriage mounting plates), Do not over tighten and assure that both chains are equal in tension. Once set, hold the adjustment nut and tighten the locknut. | | SPRING LOADED GATE If the machine is to be left unused for an extended period of time, make sure to leave the carriage gate open to release tension on the springs and prevent damages caused by spring loaded rollers. M. J. MAILLIS WULFTEC.com RING GEAR O;nrnno was struts Slip ring PINION -RING GEAR Remove the ring gear cover and wipe the accumulated grease. Measure the backlash between the pinion and ring gear, it should not exceed 0.010in and nominally, the backlash should be at 0.005 in. Beware that a ring gear is not perfectly round. There are some markings on the outer race indicating furthest point from the center. Always verify the backlash when these markings are aligned with the pinion. Backlash verification should be done every 2,800 hours. A retightening of the screws is required after 100 hours of operation and should be subsequently checked every 3 months. Teeth Visually inspect the teeth once a month after inspecting the run systems (correct lateral tooth play). Remove buildup if present. With steel pinion, if teeth are dry, apply grease with a brush all around ring gear. Use high quality open gear grease (Mobile Unirex EP2 GCLB or equivalent). With nylon pinion, no greasing is necessary. Slip ring Conductive powder accumulates in the canister and it is strongly recommended to blow the assembly with compressed air every 2,800 hours of machine operation. BEARING Lubrication of the bearing component is provided through the auto-lube system. The automatic lubrication station only greases the ring gear bearing. For any other component that needs greasing, do a visual inspection every month and add grease as needed. Operation of the auto-lube is detailed under. Make sure the auto-lube does not go out of lubricant. For machines without the auto-lube system, apply EP2 grease with a grease pump every 100 hours of operation, or as part of your regular maintenance program (in more humid conditions, strong temperature variations and constant rotation, regreasing should be repeated in shorter time intervals). Move bearing several times to ensure complete fill. You may use appropriate grease if you have requested a different type of grease in your system (ex. FDA -approved) or if your operating environment requires a different type of grease (ex. cold temperature environment). Inspect the seals to ensure they are properly inserted into their grooves and that they are intact and preventing contaminants from entering the bearing Page l66 M. J. MAILLIS WULFTEC.com LUBE STATION The greaser is controlled by a PLC output and should be greasing for 60 seconds after a specific number of hours. The number of hours between lubrications is factory set according to multiple factors. Inspect the grease container of the lube station once a month and refill with EP2 grease as recommended by Wulftec unless you have requested a different type of grease in your system (ex. FDA -approved) or if your operating environment requires a different type of grease (ex. cold temperature environment). The lube station needs to be refilled before it is empty. To fill the container, use the fitting located on the front side until you reach the max, line. CONVEYOR When required to stand on the conveyor for any reason, power to the machine must be cut, then, put a proper thickness board, large as the conveyor, on the top of the conveyor for as long as the work requires. Do not let the board's edges overhang over the conveyor sides to avoid turning over. FILM CLAMP When the machine starts doing film tails, remove the film build-up that has accumulated on the clamp jaw. To do this, clean using a lubricant (ex: WD-4OTM or any type of silicon spray) and an abrasive pad (ex: Scotch-BriteTM) until build- up is removed. HEAT WIRE When replacing the heat wire, only replace with resistive wire as any other type of wire may damage the circuit. Specially formulated 20GA Nickel/Chrome wire is recommended. Spring on wire holder should be fully compressed when wire is installed. Page 167 ' ��K N N N N�� . � ���°w mm—mm=~���~� | ' � Preventive maintenance periodicity will be determined in relation with the type of environmentin which the machine is installed and used. Daily preventive maintenance requires the operator to verify that no obstacles and nodanger hazards are present around the machine. | WEEKLY MAINTENANCE � Operation r- Clean heat wire and clamp (remove plastic bui|d'up) o Clean phoboeyelenses and adjust ifnecessary Clean reflectors (retroflective photoeyes) Frequency MONTHLY MAINTENANCE � Operation n Check chain cxbelt tension on pre -stretch n Check tension oncarriage trolley chain Grease carriage rails c Visually inspect ring gear teeth. Remove build-up and grease if needed � Check for air leaks inpneumatic devices � Verify heat wire tension c Fill the auto'|ubecontainer, ifnecessary Wipe down machine if dusty or dirty Frequency SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE � Operation r Clean pre -stretch rollers and adjust gap between rollers :: Verify wear on carriage locking mechanism Frequency YEARLY MAINTENANCE | Operation * Clean commutator (every 6.O00hours ofoperation) * Change oil inreducer (highly dependable onoperation) � Grease all chains o Verify wear onslip ring brushes, change ifneeded Frequency paq'|68 M. J. MAILLIS WULFTEC.com [Ilia0367140A6,4_1, List of maintenance and/or repair operations carried out on the machine. Date Description of operation Page 169 ^ ' M.J. MAILLIS Emergency stop pressed Atsystem power upyou will have this message and bwill also appear when on E'stopbutton inpressed Solution Release all E-stop push buttons and re -arm the E-stoploop bypressing unthe rearm push button Safety fence door opened Each time the fence door isopened, you will have this alarm showing on the HMI Close the fence door, release all E-stop push buttons and re -arm the E-stop loop by pressing onthe rearm push button Fence door locking problem Light curtain fault Lack of air pressure (under 4OPSI) Variable frequency drive (VFD)fault Lack of film Afence locking request is made (machine in start mode, manual movement inside fencing) and fence does not lock An object passes through the light curtain anthe wrong moment nrnot |nthe proper sequence Verify that the lock bwell inserted in the key switch. Verify all fence doors are locked (if applicable). Make sure the key switch io functioning properly Verify the light curtain and muting phutoeyaoalignment. Make sure the hotoayaomnapoaitinnvda\anangle (especially with reflective fi|m).Make sure the muting signal reaches the light curtain The air pressure drops below 4VPSiJust abrief pressure drop issufficient to fault the system Each time that a VFD goes into fault Film roll is finished mfilm is tom 8phng/bmx ismisaduoted Drive delivers more than O.5Mzwhen dancer bar in retracted Verify if sufficient air pressure isapplied Vo the pneumatic system. Verify for proper Fi|tor-Rogu|atoroponatiun ! Open the control panel door and note which VFDis faulted and which fault code itis. Tu clear the fault, press the rearm push button Thread the carriage with new film roll (if � needed) and secure the film tail inthe clamp Verify drive, and then refer to spring/pmu adjustment procedure Low film warning Carriage gate open during rotation Ca,hoguup/down motion problem Tilting mandrel not at home position position nnthe carriage The film nN reaches acritical level (almost nofilm left onthe roll) the machine will notify the operator that mfilm roll replacement ioimminent The carriage gate isnot closed properly or the proximity sensor is misaligned. The carriage is commended togoupm down and does not reach its position within 6Useconds (depending onmachine specifications) The film mandrel is not secured into Replace film roll Make sure the carriage gate is fully closed. Look through the hole oncarriage hood, the proximity status light (yellow incolor) should be^ON^ First try the machine inmanual mode, Then, verifyproper VFDfunctioning and � also verify for proper ^Lowered^and 'Raised" limit switch operation Make sure locking mechanism is properly latched. Verify for proper pmxsensor adjustment and operation ' M.J. MAILLIS | | TROUBLESHOOTING ALARMS Rotary arm bumper hidden Rotation not mthome position Rotation Fpmvon10Rwvusu motion problem Push arm motion problem Push arm out during ru1dmn Oversized load on process conveyor Conveyor takes too long to send |nYeed wrap zone limit hidden during rotation The rotary arm hit an object or the photoeye was blocked during rotation The system isinstart mode and the rotation isout ofhome position orwhen the home position sensor iedefective The rotation isuommendod0omme forward mreverse and does not reach m stay skthe tooth counter orhome position within 60 seconds The cut and wipe arm isVoextend ur retract and does not reach the extended or retracted position within 5seconds The cut and wipe arm is taken out of its retracted position during the rotation motion The load was not centered properly mthe load is oversized The conveyor takes more than 2Oseconds Vusend aload Vothe following conveyor Anobjext/lood has blocked the infeed wrap zone limit photoeyeduring awrap cycle Ouffeed wrap zone An blocked the outfeed limit hidden during wrap zone limit photooyoduring owrap rotation cycle Solution Verify that the photoeyeiswell aligned with the bumper reflector Press the start/stop push button toinitialize the system. Verify air brake operation, home position pmx.sensor operation, Adjust pmx.sensor !ooptimal sensing range First, try the machine inmanual mode. Then, verify for proper VFDfunctioning and also verify for proper ^Homo^and ^Cnunt" proximity sensor operation Make sure proper air is applied to pneumatic system. Verify moving speed, then for proper retracted position pmx, sensor operation and adjust hnoptimal sensing range (1/16in) Make sure all bolts are tightened properly on wipe onn. Proper air pressure is applied hupneumatic system and verify for proper retracted position prux.sensor operation, Adjust pmx.sensor \ooptimal sensing range Remove make sure the load iscentered properly and verify for proper photoeyofunctioning Verify if the load iscentered. Make sure there ianodebris infront ofthe photneye. Verify for proper pho0reyefunction Remove obstructing dobho8nad.verify for - - --- - '— Removeobotructidebho0oad.verify for proper pnmneyefunction M. J. MAILLIS WULFTEC,com TROUBLESHOOTING ALARMS Alarm Problem Solution Pop up raise /lower motion problem Top platen motion problem The pop up is commended to go up or down and does not reach its position within 15 seconds Top sheet motion problem Top sheet lack of plastic Obstacle detected during top sheet motion Load too high for top sheet Top sheet holding clamps opened during pickup sequence Heat seal motion problem Heat seal too cold or too hot Heat seal out during conveyor movement The top platen movement is requested and it does not reach it final position within an acceptable delay The top sheet movement is requested and it does not reach it final position within an acceptable delay The top sheet picks up plastic and no plastic is detected The top sheet is in motion, the photoeyes detect obstacles in the top sheet path The top sheet is at utmost top position and in motion to apply plastic, and the TS autoheight photoeye is hidden The holding and pulling clamps are open and the pickup sequence is in motion The heat seal is in motion and movement cannot be completed The heat seal is too hot or too cold during the sealing request The heat seal is out during a conveyor movement First try the machine in manual mode. Then, verify that the air supply is present. Verify the «lowered pop up position» proximity sensor. Verify the pop up pressure regulator (at least 40 PSI) First try the machine in manual mode. Verify the faulty movement's limit switches. Verify the VFD parameters First try the machine in manual mode. Verify the faulty movement's limit switches, proximity sensors and reed switches. Verify the VFD parameters Thread the top sheet mandrel with new plastic roll (if needed) and secure the plastic in the clamp (with TSC). Make sure photoeye is well positioned to detect plastic. Make sure plastic is not too clear for the type of photoeye Remove possible obstacles from the top sheet path. Make sure the photoeyes are functioning properly Verify if the load is really too high before restarting system. Verify the photoeye adjustment Reload the plastic in the holding clamps. Verify that the air hoses are connected properly. Verify if the air supply is present. Verify the pressure on the heat seal regulator. Verify the heat seal movement reed switches / proximity sensor Verify the heat seal temperature on the controller — adjust if necessary (max 300°F / min 220°F). Verify the controller's parameter and the thermocouple's functionality Verify the heat seal retracted proximity sensor/reed switch Page 172 ' M. J. N N N�� ' � �°�°m mm~�m�~°���~ _ HOW ToUSE THE FOLLOWING SECTION Our systems have been designed and built to offer our customers reliable machine operation for years Vo come. VVhen the time comes to order spare parts or replacement parts, this section will help you pinpoint the information you need <norder parts through your distributor. The machine serial number is indicated at the beginning of this user manual as well as on your machine's identification plate. This information is crucial when you want to order a spare or replacement part, You will find assembly and auh~ooaemb|y drawings and parts list as well as o list of electrical components used on your machine in the following sections. There are two ways to obtain replacement parts: FIND THE PART NUMBER 1� You need to locate the correct drawing 2. Once you have found the appropriate drawing, find the part and its corresponding Wulftec part number — you may find that the part is a part of a sub -assembly. If this is the case, find the sub -assembly drawing to obtain the correct number. 3. You are ready tocontact your local distributor. On 1 Since VVu|ftec uses non-proprietary parts, use the pans description to find a similar part through a local store. To ORDER PARTS 1. Contact your local VVulftec distributor. Please have the following information readily available upon calling to avoid unnecessary delays. — Your machine serial number — The number ofthe part you wish Voorder — Description o4the part — Quantity — Ship toaddress and contact information — Bill toaddress and contact info (if different from your ship 8naddress) — Purchase order number (PD) — Shipping preference If you cannot find your local distributor, please contact VVulftoo at number below. We will gladly refer you to your regional representative who will beable to help you. EASY DISTRIBUTOR RcrsRsmus Indicate your distributor's coordinates hereunder for quick reference. Distributor name: Phone number: gVulfteoCustomer Service phone number: 1-877-VVULFTEC/1-877'985'3832 City of Tukwila Allan Ekberg, Mayor Department of Community Development - Jack Pace, Director March 27, 2019 William Hill, CBO, ACO BHC Consultants 1601 Fifth Ave, Ste 500 Seattle, WA 98101 RE: Supplemental Nonstructural Review Development Permit M19-0049 Shasta Beverage (relocate can line one) — 1227 Andover Park E Dear Mr. Hill, Please review the enclosed set of plans and documents for structural and nonstructural compliance with the 2015 International Mechanical Code. As always, once all items have been reviewed and deemed correct, please provide two approved sets of approved plans and calculations with original approval stamps back to the Permit Center, attention Building Official. If you have any questions regarding these drawings and/or the scope of work feel free to contact David Kehle (Project Design Professional in Responsible Charge) at 206-433-8997 or Jerry Hight (City of Tukwila Building Official) at 206-431- 3675. If you should have any questions, please feel free contact us in the Permit Center at (206) 431-3670. Sincerely, 1:210 Bill Rambo Permit Technician end File: M19-0049 Tukwila City Hall • 6200 Southcenter Boulevard • Tukwila, WA 98188 • 206-433-1800 • Website: TukwilaWA.gov 0 day; keh e March 27, 2019 City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 Attn: Mr. Jerry Hight RE: Shasta Beverage Inc, 1227 Andover Park E Tukwila, WA 98118 CE19-0026 Tenant Improvement Relocation Can Line One Dear Mr. Hight, 0 As the Design Professional In Responsible Charge, I have reviewed the attached permit submittal, drawings and calculations, for the Can Line One, prepared by the owner and myself, and including structural engineering for the relocation of Can Line One from previously permitted location to a new location within the same building I believe these are adequate for permit submission. Please accept for permit review. David Kehle M 161 0 0 49 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAR 2 7 2019. PEI:31'011' 1916 Bonair Drive S.W. Seattle, WA 98116 (206) 433-8997 fax (206) 246-8369 email: dkehle@dkehlearch,com j3ERlT COOFID COPY, PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP PERMIT NUMBER: M19-0049 DATE: 03/27/19 PROJECT NAME: SHASTA BEVERAGES, INC - CAN LINE 1 SITE ADDRESS: 1227 ANDOVER PARK E X Original Plan Submittal Response to Correction Letter # Revision # before Pennit Issued Revision # after Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: ,LJ7k?\NC) Building Division Public Works ,A1 1,0 M 11;1946\ Fire Prevention Structural Planning Division Permit Coordirator PRELIMINARY REVIEW: Not Applicable (no approval/review required) DATE: 03/2t4/19 Structural Review Required REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: r APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: Approved Approved with Conditions Corrections Required Denied (corrections entered in Reviews) (ie: Zoning Issues) Notation: DUE DATE: 04/25119 EVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg 0 Fire E Ping PW Li Staff Initials: 12/18/2013 KRMIT COORD COPY PLAIN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP PERMIT NUMBER: M19-0049 DATE: 03/27/19 PROJECT NAME: SHASTA BEVERAGE, INC. SITE ADDRESS: 1227 ANDOVER PARK E X Original Plan Submittal Response to Correction Letter # Revision # before Permit Issued Revision # after Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: Building Division Public Works Fire Prevention Structural P Planning Division Permit Coordinator 1111 PRELIMINARY REVIEW: Not Applicable (no approval/review required) DATE: 03/28/19 Structural Review Required REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: Approved P Corrections Required (corrections entered in Reviews) DUE DATE: 04/25/19 Approved with Conditions r Denied (ie: Zoning Issues Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Ping LJ PW 0 Staff Initials: 12/18/2013 f1 CITY OF LA Department of Community Development 630o Southcenter Boulevard, Tukwila, WA 98188 Telephone: (206) 431-367o FAX (206) 431-3665 E-mail: tukplanOci.tukwila.wa.us Permit Center/Building Division 206 431-367o Public Works Department 206 433-0179 Planning Division 206 431-367o AFFIDAVIT IN LIEU OF CONTRACTOR REGISTRATION PERMIT NO: in I 00 179 STATE OF WASHINGTON) COUNTY OF KING ) ss. Nh0- HAN �C*H4YV , states as follows: [please print name] 1. I have made application for a permit from the City of Tukwila, Washington. 2. I understand that state law requires that all building construction contractors be registered with the State of Washington. The exceptions to this requirement are stated under Section 18.27.090 of the Revised Code of Washington, a copy of which is printed on the reverse side of this Affidavit. I have read or am familiar with RCW 18.27.090. 3. I understand that prior to issuance of a permit for work which is to be done by any contractor, the City of Tukwila must verify either that the contractor is registered by the State of Washington, or that one of the exemptions stated under RCW 18.27.090 applies. 4. In order to provide verification to the City of Tukwila of my compliance with this requirement, I hereby attest that after reading the exemptions from the registration requirement of RCW 18.27.09o, I consider the work authorized under this permit to be exempt under number ►3 , and will therefore not be performed by a registered contractor. 6. I understand that the licensing provision of RCW 19.28.161 through 19.28.271 shall not apply to persons making electrical installations on their own property or to regularly employed employees working on the premises of their employer. The proposed electrical work is not for the construction of a new building for rent, sale or lease. I understand that I may be waiving certain rights that I might otherwjse ]have under state law in any decision to engage an unregistered contractor to perform constructiwork. Owner/Owner's Agent* JOE A & pT,fy!, Signed and sworn to before me this • 1i /4:`a9.2% aCa // °ti sTWASN` .�- NO, day of Residing at ,20(9 UBLIC in and for the State of Washington Name as commissioned: , County AVA fr %/lam My commission expires: 57-1'0'9- 18.27.090 Exemptions. The registration provisions of this chapter do not apply to: i. An authorized representative of the United States government, the state of Washington, or any incorporated city, town, county, township, irrigation district, reclamation district, or other municipal or political corporation or subdivision of this state; 2. Officers of a court when they are acting within the scope of their office; 3. Public utilities operating under the regulations of the utilities and transportation commission in construction, maintenance, or development work incidental to their own business; 4. Any construction, repair, or operation incidental to the discovering or producing of petroleum or gas, or the drilling, testing, abandoning, or other operation of any petroleum or gas well or any surface or underground mine or mineral deposit when performed by an owner or lessee; 5. The sale of any finished products, materials, or articles of merchandise that are not fabricated into and do not become a part of a structure under the common law of fixtures; 6. Any construction, alteration, improvement, or repair of personal property performed by the registered or legal owner, or by a mobile/manufactured home retail dealer or manufacturer licensed under chapter 46.7o RCW who shall warranty service and repairs under chapter 46.7o RCW; 7. Any construction, alteration, improvement, or repair carried on within the limits and boundaries of any site or reservation under the legal jurisdiction of the federal government; 8. Any person who only furnished materials, supplies, or equipment without fabricating them into, or consuming them in the performance of, the work of the contractor; 9. Any work or operation on one undertaking or project by one or more contracts, the aggregate contract price of which for labor and materials and all other items is less than five hundred dollars, such work or operations being considered as of a casual, minor, or inconsequential nature. The exemption prescribed in this subsection does not apply in any instance wherein the work or construction is only a part of a larger or major operation, whether undertaken by the same or a different contractor, or in which a division of the operation is made into contracts of amounts less than five hundred dollars for the purpose of evasion of this chapter or otherwise. The exemption prescribed in this subsection does not apply to a person who advertises or puts out any sign or card or other device which might indicate to the public that he or she is a contractor, or that he or she is qualified to engage in the business of contractor; to. Any construction or operation incidental to the construction and repair of irrigation and drainage ditches of regularly constituted irrigation districts or reclamation districts; or to farming, dairying, agriculture, viticulture, horticulture, or stock or poultry raising; or to clearing or other work upon land in rural districts for fire prevention purposes; except when any of the above work is performed by a registered contractor; 11. An owner* who contracts for a project with a registered contractor, except that this exemption shall not deprive the owner of the protections of this chapter against registered and unregistered contractors. The exemption prescribed in this subsection does not apply to a person who performs the activities of a contractor for the purpose of leasing or selling improved property he or she has owned for less than twelve months; 12.* Any person working on his or her own property, whether occupied by him or her or not, and any person working on his or her personal residence, whether owned by him or her or not but this exemption shall not apply to any person who performs the activities of a contractor on his or her own property for the purpose of selling, demolishing, or leasing the property; 13. An owner* who performs maintenance, repair, and alteration work in or upon his or her own properties, or who uses his or her own employees to do such work; 14. A licensed architect or civil or professional engineer acting solely in his or her professional capacity, an electrician certified under the laws of the state of Washington, or a plumber certified under the laws of the state of Washington or licensed by a political subdivision of the state of Washington while operating within the boundaries of such political subdivision. The exemption provided in this subsection is applicable only when the person certified is operating within the scope of his or her certification; 15. Any person who engages in the activities herein regulated as an employee of a registered contractor with wages as his or her sole compensation or as an employee with wages as his or her sole compensation; 16. Contractors on highway projects who have been prequalified as required by RCW 47.28.070, with the department of transportation to perform highway construction, reconstruction, or maintenance work; 17. A mobile/manufactured home dealer or manufacturer who subcontracts the installation, set-up, or repair work to actively registered contractors. This exemption only applies to the installation, set-up, or repair of the mobile/manufactured homes that were manufactured or sold by the mobile/manufactured home dealer or manufacturer; 18. An entity who holds a valid electrical contractor's license under chapter 19.28 RCW that employs a certified journeyman electrician, a certified residential specialty electrician, or an electrical trainee meeting the requirements of chapter 19.28 RCW to perform plumbing work that is incidentally, directly, and immediately appropriate to the like -in -kind replacement of a household appliance or other small household utilization equipment that requires limited electric power and limited waste and/or water connections. An electrical trainee must be supervised by a certified electrician while performing plumbing work. • Per Washington State Department of labor and Industries lessee has been interpreted to be equivalent to owner for purposes of exemptions. «8 aq ,'a At A TENANT IMPROVEMENT FOR: SHASTA BEVERAGES INC. SIRUC PLIIMi EN®INf ERIN4 IN C. D GC G U RING ELC R C L S G, C 914FPATELLA BUILDING RALLOR P (Z14I318'F (714) 385-18 34MAIN wPecaMm - _--REVISIONS - -� 1227 Andover Park E N. eaaN D mape M me-B. " plwpmwN NIE1" 1pane - T kw Ia Bmidmg Div sVon. Tukwila, WA 98188 NOTE RaYIB,pnay,illregNl,eanewplaR aubmlR3l aTq may inciutle atltliti0nal plan raview. SHASTA BEVERAGES SYMBOL LEGEND ABBREVIATIONS GENERAL NOTES PROJECT DIRECTORY SHEET INDEX Tk Andover Park E. Tukwila, WA 98188 (NOT ALL ABBREVIATIONS MAY BE USED So THIS DOCUMENT)@ EXTERIOR RET EXTERIOR ELEVATON TARGET hIFVA_G-__ -OETAiI. DESIGNATION ELEVATION DDIGNATION -----^ X X , A%.0 -----� AX.O SHEET REFERENCE NO. - SHEET REFERENCE NO, VIEW NUMBER BUILDING SECTION TARGET VIEW NAME J� �:. A D TE AIL IA Al - - SHEET REFERENCE NO. \...e t VIEW SCALE —SHEET NUMBF.I2 SECTION DESIGNATION PARTIAL tiEC:iION TARGET INTERIOR ELEVATION TARGET --DETAIL DES(^NATION � V A A & AND JAN. JANITOR AT 11. RT JNT JOINT A.B. ANCHOR BOLT JST. JOIST A.C. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE A.C.I, AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE ACP ACOUSTIC CEILING PANEL L ANGLE LB. ar# POUNDS A.D.A.A.G. AMERICANS WITH DISAM LITIES ACT ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINESFA LONG MAT. MATERIAL A.F.F. ABOVE FINISH FLOOR MAX. MAXIMUM ALUM. ALUMINUM M.B. MACHINE BOLT A.P.A. AMERICAN PLYWOOD ASSOCIATION RALPH MEZZANINE A.Q,T. ABRASIVE QUARRY TILE MIN. MINIMUM ARCH. ARCHITECTURAL M,soPH MISCELLANEOUS p,S.T.M. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOSTERLING MATERIALS MPH MILES PAR HOUR M.P.S. MODULAR PANELBOARD SYSTEM BLK'G BLOCKING R.B. MAIN SW ITCH BEARD B.N. BOUNDARY NAIL MIL. METAL BM. - BEAM B.O.J. BOTTOM OFIOIST (NI NEW BUILT UP ROOFING i BOTTOM NO. orH NUMBER BOLT. ai (B N.I.C. NOTIN CONTRACT 1. ALI. CONTRACTORS AND SUBCONTRACTORS WILLTHOROUGHLY FAMILIARIZE THEMSELVES WITH THESE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND WILLVEREYEKETINGSRE AND CONDITIONS PRIOR TO SUBMITTING A BID. ALL SUBCONTRACTORS WILL PROVIDE ALL LABOR, SUPERVISION, AND MATERIALS Of EVERY TYPE WHICH MAYBE NECESSARY FOR A SUCCESSFUL COMPLETION. ALL WDRK TO BE PERFORMED IN GOOD AND WORKMANLIKE MANNER ACCORDING TO THE TRUE iN1ENi AND MEANING OF THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIE CATIONS. - 2 PHISARCHITEC ARCHITECT RESPONSIBLE FOR, METHODS, ANDWILLNOTBERESPONSIRO FOR,CONS11AI TY MEANS, METHODS, TECHNIQUES, SEQl1F.NCES,PROCEDURES.OR SAFETY PRE CA UTIONS ANU PROGRAMS OMISSIONS IN PROJECT HMPEAONS PERFORMING OF THE CONTRACTOR, SUBCONTRACT OR, OR AAILURE RPERSONS PERFORMING ANYOF THEW IN AON CCFIIDAN NOR FOR E ENFNI or OF ANY OFTHEMTD CARRY CO tHEWORK UCTION ACY:ORDANCE WRf{THEIWiFNT OF THE CONTRACT AND OR GONSIRUCTION DOCUMENTS. 9. ASURESTRUCTURAL WILL PROVIDE ADEQUATE BRACING AND/OR SHORING TO THE WALLS, INSURE STRUCTURAL STRUCTURAL COMPONAMS IF: STRUCTURAL WALLS, IN PRIOR WALL ASSEMBLIES, FTC. DURING THE IN PRIOR WA ALLLA ASSEMBLIES, , ETC. DU CONSTRUCTION PHASE OF THIS PRO1ECi. OWNER: SHASTA BEVERAGE 122/ ANDOVER PARK E TUKWII.A WA 98188 CONTRACTOR: PROCQN DEVELOPMENT INC. 4522KAAIAMIOS, CA LOS TACT: GU CA CON iACT:GUYCASTILtO TEL (562)>56-4412 EMAIL: GCASTILLO©PROCONGC.COM ARCHNECT&ENGINEERING TEAM: PLUMP ENGINEERING INC. 914 E KATELLA AVENUE ANAHFIM, CA 92807 CONTACT: GREG PANEK FEU (714)385-I835 EMAIL GPANEKOrPEICA.COM GENERAL st-EC PR D.N p \ 'OAS XG� y -o p .P'• rsg218 � OfSPfU A STEREO �• P/pNkl yHK E q(J2fi9 GARO I COVER SHEET ARCHITECTURAL A000 SITE PLAN A100 CAN LINE (CONVEYOR PLAN CONVEYOR DRAWINGS 1-50 CONVENOR DRAWINGS � SHI_ A SEC�IONFDRSIGNAENCEI'I ON -SHEET REFERENCE NO. DETAIL DESIGNATION CL-X'-XX" SECTION/ RFCTIONDETAILTARGD ELEV LION REFERENCE TARGET IOW ELEVATION DATUM SHEET REFERENCE NO. -®-X'ASI PLAN DATUM MATCH LINE COLUMN CENiFRI.INE MATCHLINE SEX/XX --- --- CL MATCH UNESE%{XX ROOM NAME AND NUMBER TARGET PAkiNION TYPE TARGET XXXX__ XXXX~ -ROOM NAME Q1 `- -PARTITION TYPE XXXI ROOM NO. WALLA SSEMBLY DESIGNATION DOOR NUMBER TARGET KEY NOTE'iARGET —DOER NUMBER 1- NOTE NUMBER REVISION TARGET ADDENDUM TARGET NORTH ARROW � L\ ------ REVISION ND. PLAN OR ADDENDUM NO. N NORTH TRUE /// NORTH :._ / P', / iI--'"' (i. I' Y N:T.S. NOT TO SCALE C CONDUIT O.C. ON CENTER C.L. or4 CE"TER°NE CB.B CEMENTITIOUS BACKER BOARD O,F.. OWNER FURNISHED, C.B.C. CALIFORNIA BUILDING CODE CONTRACTOR INSTALLED C.C. CORE DRILL O.F.O.I. OWNER FURNISHED, C.J. CONTRRLJOINT(COLDIRIN'f) OWNER INSTALLED CLG. CEILING O.H. CA KIN ENAND CURORA CLEAR OPNG. OPENING C.M.V -.� CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT COL.. COLUMN P,C, PHRASING CONTRACTOR CONE. CONCRETE P.LAM PLASTIC LAMINATE OR CONN CONNECTION PARALIAM (BEAM) CONSTRUCTION Pl. (PLATE CONST T. CON ST IT CONSTRUCTIONJOINTP.I. PROPCRI'YLINF COST. CONTINUOUS PLYWD. PLYWOOD comp CONTRACTOR PR. PAIR COMP COMPACTED (ION) PSF. POUNDS PER SQ. FOG? C.T. CEMMIC TILE PSI. POUN DSPERSCOINCH OBE. DOUBLE. DEG. pr' DEGREE Q.T. QUARRYTILE CIA. or0'. DIAMETER BAD. (R) RADIUS p1gG. DIAGONAL REINF. REINfOFCEMENT DIM. DIMENSION OR. DOOR S.C. SAW -CUT LOOT❑�/ DWGBN DRAWINGS) SCHED. SCHEDULE SNi. SHEET (E) EXISTING DIM. SIMILAR EA. EACH SM SHEET METAL E.C. ELECTRICALCONTRACTOR SMS SHEET METAL SCREW E.F. EACH FACE SPo4s) SPECIFICATION(S EL. ELEVATION SQ. SQUA RE E.N. EDGE NAIL SQ.IN. SQUARE INCH E.O.C. EDGE OF COUNTER EDGE OF SQ, FT, SQWNRE FOOT EQUIPMENT Q S.S. STAINLESS STEEL EQUIP. EQUAL RE. STANDARD EQUIP. EQUIPMENT Sit. STEEL E.S. EACH SIDE SiORi. STORAGE ESP. EXPANSION STRUC. STRUCTURAL SL1SP. SUSPENDED FAR. FACTORY SYM. SYMMETRICAL F.D. FLOOR DRAIN F.D.C. FIRE DEFT. CONNECTION lif TDP DR. FOUNDATION i.e.A. TO BE DETERMINED F.F. FINISHED Ft00R TEMP. TEMPERED (TEMPERA LURE) F.F.L. FINISHEDFLOOR LEVEL THK. THICKNESS F.G. FLOA'rGW55 TAG TONGUE A GROOVE PLR. FLOOR iN. TOENAIL FIN. FINISH T.O.B. TOP OF BEAM Dr. FIELO NAIL I.O.C. TOP OF BEAMCURB FACE OF BEpM T,O.F. TOP OF FOOTING F.O.F. FACE. OF FINISH TQYFP TOP OF PLATE F.O.J. FACE OF W5 I.O.S. TOP OF SLAB F.O.M. FACE OF MASONRY T,O.W, TOP OF WALL F.O.P. FACE OF POST TYP, TYPICAL FAll 01 SUED FR.P. FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PANF.t U.B.C. UNIFORM BUILDING CODE FT. FEOOR SINK U.O.N. UNLESSOTHEREVAL NOTED ET D.$P. UNDER SEPARATE PERMIT FIG. FOOTING GA. GAUGE (GAGE) VERT, OR(V) VERTICAL V.W.C. VINYLWALLCOVERING G.B. GYPSUM BOARD G.C. GENEMLCONTRACTOR W/ WITH GAtV. GALVANIZED WD. WOOD G.I. GAtVANIZEDIRON W.G.B. WATER RESISTANT GYPSUM ISM GLUE -LAMINATED BEAM BOARD B. BOX N.D. HUB DRAIN W.I. WALK-IN X PER. HEADER WT. WEIGHT HOW. HARDWARE WWM. WE.DEDWIRE MESH HER: HANGER HST. or HT. HEIGHT H.M.HOLLOW METAL HOHU RIZ. orH HORIZONTAL N.S.B. HIGH STRENGTH BOLT 4. WORK WILL BE COORDINATED WITH ALL TRADES IN ORDER TO AVOID INTERFERENCE. AND AVOID GOLD IONS. 5. ALL MATERIALS USED WILL BE NEW AND BEAR U.L. LABELS WHERE REQUIRED AND MEET gppROPR1ATE N.EM.A. STANDARDS. 6. LAYOUT ALL PARTITIONS BEFORE BEGINNING CONSTRUCTION TO PREVENT ERRORS BY DISCREPANCY. ALL DRYWALL PARTITIONS WILL BE INSTALLED AS NOTED ON THE DRAWINGS. 2, EACH SUBCONTRACTOR WILL AMEND AND MAKE GOOD AT HE OWN COST, ANY DAFACTSOROTHER FAULTS INHIS WORKMANSHIP ANGORHESUPPLIED MATERIALS, I. VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS IN fHF FIELD PRIOR TOORDERING, CUTTING ANU/OR INSTALLING MATERIAL PRODUCT OR EQUIPMENT: IN THE EVENT OF ANY DISCREPANCIES, CONTACT THE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THAT WORK. 9, CONTRACTORS SHALL NOT SCALE THESE DRAWINGS' OR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES. RSHALLOF SSION NOTIFY ARCHITECT, FIGURED CA CLIATED DIN. CONTRACEVETOR DIMENSION CONSR RECEDEHALLNOS ARC HIMEASUIGURFOANDAILED DRAWINGS LAKES GER SC LEDRAWINNCE OVER6CKE PRECEDENCE OVEENTSR DETAILED DRAWINGS AND WRGER SCALE DRAWINGS TAKE PRECEDENCE OVER SMALLER SCALE DRAWINGS. ALL PLAN DETAILS AND WALL SECTIONS ARE ASSUMED TO BE TYPICAL CONDITIONS UNLESS DETAILED OR NOSED 01'HERWIEF. 10. ADDSUFFICIENT BLOCKING IN STUD WALLS TO SUPPORT ALL ITEMS OR EQUIPMENT SHOWN OR SPEC;IFIAUTO BE ATTACHED iO THE WALED. PROVIDE ADDITIONAL STRUCTURAL SUPPORT (ANGLES,CHANNELS, ETC,) WRHIN WALLS WHERE THE WEIGHT STUDS. PRVI ITEMSORNG, FO ENWNER FE REAi TO BESUPPORTFD BY METAL STUDS. PROVIDE BLOCKING FOR OWNER FIJRNLSHEDOR INSTALLED ITEMS. 11. ALL FINISHED FLOOR ELEVATIONS REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS ONLY. REFER CIVIL DRAWINGS FOR RELATIONSHIP TO PROJECT BENCHMARKUH. 12. ANY ADDITIONSOR MANAGER. NO AL RATCHERK T ILL BE ADEDIN NTHIS P1NG ROECTHE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER. NO AtrERAi.ONS WILL BE MADE ON THIS PROJECT' EXCEPT UPON WRITTEN ORDER BY THE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER 13, WEATHER CONDITIONS CONTRACTORS WILL PROTECT ALL PARTS OF TH FIR WORK FIZOMWEATHERDAMAGEDUETOFROSTRAIN HEAT'. Er( ANDWII MAKEGOOD iO, HE SATISFACTION OF TH E CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AND/ORGENF.FAL CONTRACTOR ANY PORTION OFTHF WORK WHICH MAY HAVE BECOME DAMAGED. 14, SRE SAFETY: EACH CONTRACTOR Will A010E BY LOCAL AREA STANDARDS AND RELATED OSHA STANDARDS FOR THE PROTECTION AND SAFETY FOR THEIR F'MPLOYCES ONSITETHISARCHIICTANI)HI.SPROFCSSIONALCONSU;IANTSWILLBEHEED HARMLESS BY THE OWNER, GENERAL CON TRACTOR AND RELATED AWARDED TRADES ON THIS PROJECT FOR ACCIDENTS OR INJURIES CAUSED OR ACCRUED ON THIS IN PROPERTY DURING THE.PRE/ACTUALjPOSi CONSTRUCTION PHASES OF THIS PROJECT. 15, GENERAL CONTRACTOR WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR REMOVAL OF DEBRIS ACCUMULATED BY EACH IRA GE. HOW EVER , EACH TRADE WILL KEEP TH E JOB SITE CLEAN ANDSAFEAT ALL TIMES,ALONGWRHA BROOM FINISH Ai THE ENDOF EACH WORKING DAY. 16, TRANSITION OF DIFFERENT FLOORING MATERIALS AT DOORWAYS SHALL OCCUR AT CENTERLINE OF DOORS TYPICALLY, 12- PAINT ALL WALL SURFACES, BULKHEADS AND CEILINGS IN ROOMS WHERE INDICATED ON ROOM FINIS(?SCHEDULE. PAINT BEHIND ALL MOVEABLE HEMS ADJACENT TO WALLS RECEIVING PAINT AND RELOCATE ITEMS. M ALL WEATHER- EXPOSED SURFACES SHALL HAVE A WEATHER RESISTIVE BARRIER TO PROTECT THE INTERIOR WALL COVERING AND EXTERIOR OPENINGS SHALL BE FLASHED IN SUCH A MANNER AS TO MAKE THEM WATERPROOF. 19. ALL PLAN DIMENSIONS ARE TO FINISHED FACE OF FIN5HED WALLS, FACE OF MASONRY. AND COLUMNS, UNLESS OTHERWISE. 20. VERIFY ALL ELEVATIONS AND DIMENSIONS OF STRUCIDRAL ELEMENTS WITH ARCHRECTURAi.. DRAWINGS, IN CASE OF CONFLICT, HOTIFY ARC:HI1'EC.T. THE CONTRACTORS SHALL VERHYALL DIMENSIONS AND BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THEM. ALL DIMENSIONAL DISCREPANCIES ARE TO BE BROUGHT IO THE ATTENTION OF THE ARCHITECT, 21. PLANS FOR MODIFICARCEPS i0 EXISTING FIRE PROTECTION EQUIPMENT SUCH AS SREQUIRED FORIT MBchanicel M Electrical -✓Plumbing Lld (3as Pi np PI City pf Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION F��-'EF- ?e-it RE. �L,L� ssansaAPPro Paof!.111 Gonlpocumontstloes INAaNhanze the valaNpN pl any aopPteO cptle pr opprtlmapce Recem pf apprpv Faltl Cppy antl rontlRlopil BY' sa : D Zg APP�t-v�1 ui�o rvGGv soN RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA APR 12 2019 PERMIT CENTER -.- REVIEV1EDFOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED AP�25 �/,�'�Q '!'n/ iQ)I GIRT Ukwilal ®UILDING DIVISION (� W �7 L N J Uj 'n v Z ^� t� W > W CO .. � Q � � O r- OD l W D < E 1 Q G > = Q Q Q T I\ PROJECT SUMMARY - SCOPE OF WORK: MAIN AREA CAN LINE (CONVEYOR SYSTEM APPLICABLE BUILDING CODES: BUILDING 20151NTCRNATIONAL BUILDING CODE W(WASHINGiON AMENDMENTS. FIRE 20151NTEBNATIONAI., FIRE CODE W/ WASHINGTON AMENDMENTS PLUMBING 20T 5 UNIVERSAL PLUMBING CODE W{ WASHINGTONAMENDMENTS MECHANICAL 20151NTERNATIONAI. MFCHANICAICODE W/WASHINGiON AMEµUMAN TS ELECTRICAL 20151NTERNATIONAL CLECTRCAL CODE W/ WASHINGTON AMENDMENTS ACCESSIBILITY 2015 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE W/ WASHINGTON AMENDMENTS ENERGY CODE 2015 WASHINGTON STATE ENERGY CODE BUILDING DATA CONSTRUCi'10N TYPE: VB AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM: YES NUMBER OF STORIES: 2 PROJECT DATA: —__ ZONE: TUC -WE (iUKWiLA URBAN CENTER -WORKPLACE) OCCUPANCY: F, S-1 AREA OF WORK: 1.189 S.F. REVISIONS W W Z to LLJ Q U RE RE19930T9 G FOR CITY BUSMITTAL 0,112ELL VICINITY MAP MAP T _ I ( 1 I e u„ ":. ""^^ - s- I v i ` 99 a, _ Seat ^ , -'. _ 1HE '- x� l� NOTES 1. THE CONSTRUC'ION SHALL NOT RESTRICT A FIVE-FOOT CLEAR AND UNOBSTRUCTED ACCESS TO ANY WATER OR POWER DISTRIBUTION FACILITIES (POWER POLES, PULL -BOXES, TRANSFORMERS, VAULTS, PUMPS, VALVES. METERS, APPURTENANCES, . FTC-.) OR 10 THE LOCATION OF THE HOOK-UP, THE CONSTRUCTION SHALL NOT BE WITHIN TEN FEET Of ANY POWER LINES WHETHER OR NOT T1 P LIN ES A RE LOCATED ON TFI E PROPERTY. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY CAUSE CONSTRUCTION DELAYSANO/ORADOIiIONAIEXPENSES. ro°n Man°oe, CR AN- °. ac rv�mm: SHEET NUMBER ( ' ( j _ ,TUKWILA WASHINGTC?N INTERIOR DESIGN N. INCH IN INN.V, INFORMATION INVERTED STANDPIPES, SPRINKI..F.R SYSTEMS AND FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS, SHALL BESOBMITIED TO NI THE BUILDING DIVISION AND APPROVED BY1'NA FIRE DEPARTMENT BEFORE EQUIPMENT IS ALTERED ORMODIFOV � o00 22 23 24 F15 ... .... ....... 77 1 r T FL 7J[ 11I L'1L iLIT 0 l 4-ii ML'1-i 71iL - L A F F-d- 4, 11 41 - L _17 LE) , LqUXT T_ �!�lj JI. it _12 FAm m 4, IF a w it A L J it w .... . ..... - - - - - - - - - - Lu r i < 1 ITA ,Ld fiui trill; < CL Lu WIN 0 I J J�L ]I t iz I IF, T FIETT it it —F— - — ------------ - __LL_, L! T T: T — - ---- -------- 'It RECEIVED J�- CITY OF TUKWILA APR 12 2019 T jjhi�, J1 iRl T ---------- iT�Mik: -- ---- CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED APR 2 5 2919 City of - -------- �r: _J1 42 141 40 39 38 37 32 i31 80 29 L21827 I 2E, BUILDING DIVISION ogaro PLAN NORTH SITE PLAIN 1 1-1 FiCONSUL GEN INFERS &m__ A- 714 E. KATELLA AVENUE ANAHEIM CALIFORNIA 92805 P 714)M5-1835. F(714)305 1834 w,w�pec co SHASTA BEVERAGES 1227 Andover Park E. Tukwila, WA 98188 Stamp: U A VAS fSS ov attztts z z uj uj Z `� Ury > LLJ q coo op < a > F— Z 0 V) E < < a c,4 -,..z N D REVISIONS FORCITYSUBMITTAI MIM9 < 0- uJ uJ Ri, P l4`MP fN®INFEAING INC. nc CONSULllNO ENOINEFAS _ II11 ,ECNAMCnt PII _ CaL CIVICS aVFYiNG 914 E. KATELLA AVENUE ANAIIEIM, CALIFORNIA 92TD5 P 1711) 385-1835, F SNI 311-1834 �w.NJ.Peica.m I v _ SHASTA BEVERAGES - 1227 Andover Park E. Tukwila, WA 98188 jj amp: rF " N � WaSy EGA 16 _ N so-21e 1. i 11 i p�Ssv 1HSi CRNG �� HIT c y 1 T � r N W z �II II �. _ Q U k' a i w 4I / D ,I a 0 do DO ! _ O tf I a n e. NE _aa� C4 CAN LINE DRAWINGS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE. REFER TO ADDRIONAL DRAWINGS FOR MORE REVISIONS INFORMATION NOT SHOWN HERE. FORCITYSUBMITTAL 04112119 Z J REVIEV'7;�G FOR � CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED O APR 2 5 2019 LU Cityof Tukwila Z BUILDING DIVISION 0 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA W APR 12 2019 Z = PERMIT CENTER z Q PAN a�N�„m. 19030P9 � NORTH SHEETNUMBER f 1 a CAN LINE 1 CONVEYOR PLAN 1 A 1 ®O E«ED.6-mis 12:G SA£i^Cd'1t9m : s12,TF �7 w = Y _ r _��I(,111111 i � I�I L—J_ ��ta� 1,� � � r�uun 1 Ifs "'.ilEl.Ld2.'i=f�{'L:l�""t�.[�f.,L14t1'C14�P;��T�LLO'!}ifL�I,tTJF'S ?; 'IE�TIt sa s� eau n� =s, 1 L Po/�99P9ts bll«9C�iVkR1� PIIR19m0��9�x9�l5�Hl�ts��nr a I; I I,. ,.--'-'- --- - I AL i.; II y _ 4 f I f� II i i 1 I Lea r� I ex I I 1 i the mm- i [ / x / --- --- - ---- I r. it REVILV,,-1 FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED APR 2 5 2019 ''. '.. City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA APR 12 2019 'I. PERMIT CENTER n_..... -. Mjq-ooq6lj W PPE E 1&20 W PIPE W 18.20 (PIPES PVC OR 0.1.) OVERALL SITE PLAN NORTFI SCALD I' = 20' PROJECT 5T,4Tl5TlC5: T-- BUILDING CODE; 2015IBC ZONING: TUC 111 ESFIR SPRINKLER CONSTRUCTION TYPE: 5 OCCPANCY GROUP: K51B TOTAL ELDG AREA: 101k413 SF EX. OFFICE (5) 3,311 sp EX. FACTORY (FI) 104,332 SF AREA OF NEW OFFICE: XXXXX 5F PARKING: 51 (NO CHANGES) LEr:;,4L DE5CfRlFT0N: FOR OF GRIDLINE I IN NE 1/4 OF SECTION 35-23-04- BEGIN NE CORNER OF GRIDLINE I THEN N 51-44-08 W ALING N LINE OF GRIDLINE 1 449A8 FT THEN 5 01-51-39 LU 458.51 FT THEN N 59-08-21 W 30 FT TO TFO5, THEN W 411 FT THEN N 85-05-21 W 410 FT THEN N 01-51-39 E 411 FT THEN 6 e8-08-21 E 41OFT TO TF-05 TAX FAIRGEL. NUt15ER 352304e012 PROJECT DEE)GR[FTIQ 00 RELOCATE AN EXISTING, PRODUCTION CAN LINE I FROM EXISTING LOCATION TO NEW LOCATION INCLUDING EXISTING CONVEYOR RELOCATION TO NEW LOCATION. SITE ADDRE5 m 3:4w 1221 ANDOVERPAR<WAY EAST Go I z 0 0,— OUNE SHASTA BEVERAGE NC 1221 ANDOVER PARKWAY EAST 0 z TLKWILA, WA SSW stst oa m�STRUCTURALFOR LINE ONE w . SHUTLER CONSULTING ENGINEERS w 12503 5EL-RED ROAD CL �0as BELLEVUE, WA3aOO5 NOTES I.. NO CHANCES TO EXISTING SITE 2, NO CHANGES TO EXISTING PARKING OR PAVING 3, NO CHANGES TO BOLDING ENVELOPE 4, NO CHANGES TO EXISTING LIGHTING SEPARATE PERMITS: 1. SPRINKLER MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING ESFR 2, ELECTRICAL CHANGES 3, PLUMBING CHANGES 4, INDIVIDUAL AREAS OF TENANT IMPROVEMENTS CO 00 DO m CODE COi\i.PLIANCE APPROVED E- z w APR 2 5 2019 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITYOFTUKWILA lv; CQ � MAR 2 7 2019 z E'- M ., E- PER&11T CENTER — 11.—n—.--rAM20lM� i9Gl ShWCAN LINE ONE'site Pl�SIT E Lj EX, FIRE DEPARTMENT GATE TO ADJ HYDRANT NO CHANGES EX. RAILROAD SPUR EX. PROPERTY LINE EX, FENCING NO CHANG VALUE PACK AREA -20 20A,"20B OHD sfl _ 1i' 1 Was 3 ;ate ��nnnm i.rry��• ��I�i CONVE C_ II�� WALL �ITJR�'ICIc_S:L1���01 BOTTEWNG LINE NO CHANGES - EXISTIW. FILLING LINE NO CHANGES — TANKS NO CH AND W: TANKS NO CH, #23 TILT UP Ci L PRE FAB ELECT. TED i G3� CAN STORAGE "23 � EXISTING CAN STORAGE, NO CHANGES L, , PER PC 3206.2, NO PUBLIC ACCESS, 4_ ., , CLASS I -IV, 20,000 SF-500,000 SF, SPRINKLER REQUIRED (EXISTING ESFR),,,, �' FIRE DETECTION NOT REQUIRED, BUILDING ACCESS (EXISTING), SMOKE AND HEAT REMOVAL (NOT REQUIRED IN ESFR SPRINKLER), MAX PILE SIZE 100 FEET, MAX HEIGHT 40', MAX PILE w 0 VOLUME 400,000 CUBIC FEET Q m CAN LINE ONE EXISTING RELOCATED EQUIPMENT AND CONVEYORS. PREVIOUSLY OPERATING SINCE 2002 WITH PERMITS a la to IN to co Ib �------ .�----- -�------ — _ X --Co EX OFFICES E Co i I i i w NO CHANGES #16 ( i ...SHIP O a s � 7 11#7 i i i OFFIC C~ o ' #18B � I � I � Z of #'6q #1 O AINTENAN�CE OOM WITI-� GLEAN UP R'1#7 WITH W i�#1 �O • (BOVE STORAGE ICHAIN INEi I ADA RAMP ACCESS SEE SITE PLAN ® i P, RTE ( FLINK NGIN (STOR i k '; G rCR O fs, (Sy #11 #� IIT R:=VIGti CODE COF ANr#4 rT-I e I APPROVED 41 APR 2 5 2019 > *°'*# 3 #5 & #6 Cib/ofTukwila BUILDING DIVISION O p"' Q Zi <I: � #12A NEW TWO STORY OFFICE LUNCH FIRST FLOOR WITH RESTROOMS RECEIVED r�n t AND LOCKER ROOMS, CONF SECOND FLOOR CITY OF TUKWILA 6 #6 SEE SEPARATE PERMIT MAR 27 2019 },••• �, 14B - PERMIT CENTER 1,4 T!'1 v 1 E- ._. ._._.__._._._._._._._._._._._._._._._._._._._.-._'-.-.-'-'-------•-'-------- - ------•-----•-------'--•-'-•-•-•-•-•- - - '---'- - •--'--- - -'----'-'-._._._._.. SCOPE OF THIS PERMIT OVERALL ELOOR FLAN: FOR OVERALL BUILDING EXITING AND i -2A RELOCATE EXISTING EQUIPMENT, CONVEYORS FOR EXISTING CAN LINE I TO A NEW LOCATION WITHIN THE E ING BUILDING. NORTH SCALE: 1" 20' OCCUPANT LOAD SEE EXIT PLAN EXIT NOTES: L, MAXIMUM TRAVEL DISTANCE TO POINT OF TWO WAYS TO EXIT IS 100 LF. 2. MAXIMUM TRAVEL DISTANCE TO EXIT IS 250 LF PER 1017.2 3. EXIT PATHWAYS WILL HAVE EMERGENCY LIGHTING WITH BATTERY BACK UP, SEE NOTE 4. EXIT DOORS ARE TO HAVE ILLUMINATED EXIT SIGNS WITH BATTERY BACK UP AND OUTSIDE LIGHT WITH BATTERY BACK UP 5. VERIFY LOCATION OF EXIT SIGNS WITH FIRE MARSHAL NOTE: EMERGENCY LIGHTING FACILITIES SHALL BE ARRANGED TO PROVIDE INITIAL ILLUMINATION THAT IS AT LEAST AN AVERAGE OF 1 FOOT-CANDLE AND A MINIMUM AT ANY POINT OF 0.1 FOOT-CANDLE MEASURED ALONG THE PATH OF EGRESS AT FLOOR LEVEL, ILLUMINATION LEVELS SHALL BE PERMITED TO DECLINE TO 0.6 F00T-CANDLE AVERAGE AND A MINIMUM AT ANY POINT OF 0.06 FOOT-CANDLE AT THE END OF THE EMERGANCY LIGHTING TIME DURATION. A MAXIMUM -TO -MINIMUM ILLUMINATION UNIFORMITY RATIO OF 40 TO 1 SHALL NOT BE EXCEEDED. #24 EXIT RADIUS OF 100 LF TRAVEL DISTANCE TO TWO MEANS OF EGRESS EXIT CALCULATIONS EXISTING OFFICE FIRST FLOOR: 3,377 SF ® 1/100 = 33 OCC EXISTING FACTORY FIRST FLOOR: 104,332 SF@ 1/100 = 1,044 OCC EXISTING OFFICE SECOND FLOOR: 3,317 SF ®1/100 = 33 OCC TOTAL OCCUPANT LOAD = 1,110 OCCUPANTS 4 EXITS ARE REQUIRED EX. RAILROAD SPU EX. PROPERTY LIN! EX. FENCING NO CH VALUE PACK AREA 020A,0205 F ul 7 lE DEPARTMENT GATE TO IYDRANT NO CHANGES CAN STORAGE -23 F NG CAN STORAGE, No CHANGES SFRINKLRE� REQUIRED (EXISTING EeFR), IIIL IIIIL REQUIRED, IND HEAT REMOVAL (NOT 'QUIRED IN ■■■■■ ■I■■■,■■■■ ■■I■I ■I■j■■■■ ■ ■On ■■,■■■■■■■ ■■■■,■■■■/■j■■■■ - -- - - ■■■■;■ ■■■■■■■■■■ ■■■ ■ ■;■■■■ ■ ■■■I■■■■■■ ■IN■■■■■■►I■■■■ CFILE ■1■■,■■ ■■■■ !■■ ■ ■■I■ ■ ■■■■■ ■■ ■■I■■■,■■■■ ■■ ■■■■■■I■iN■ • ■■■i ■■ ��■■■�■�■�■■ ■ ■■■I■■■��■■;■Ir■■■■■I■■■■ ■�■■■■�■■■■■i■ _ I�IIIIII Nil CAN LINE ON ml EXISTING RELOCATED EQUIPMENT AND ■h ■■■ ■■�■■■■■■'■■ ■■■ �■■■■ ■■ E■CONVEYORS. PREVIOUSLY OPERATING PERMITS MIN 4411 WIDTH utnnnni V . I '::i�I11NIIII IIN�\�L - - TE E E NEt ELECT. 4 2 R+E7t1TK sew i�`�•�„ �nnmvm inr�nn� gip. i Iu EXIT PATHWAY WITH ILLUMINATION MIN 44" WIDTH EX. OFFICES NO CHANGES FFIC Ila a #17 j g ADA RAMP ACCESS EX, SEE SITE PLAN 41�NEW OR CODE COdr,PLiANCE TWO STORY OFFICE 2919LUNCH FIRST FLOOR WITH RESTROOMS LAPROED AND LOCKER ROOMS,kwCONE SECOND FLOOR IVISION SEE SEPARATE PERMIT ._...... OVERALL FLOOR f-LAN: EXITING RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA NORTH SCALE: I" = 20' MAR 27 2019 OR oloq� PERMIT CFNTUR I/ARlr=T'f' PACK LINE NEW ELECTR'ICALZ ID EXI57JN6 FALLE71ZER. No r-HANrE EX. FILLER AREA NO CHAN,SES EX, SYRUP TANKS NO CHANCE 00 EX SU6AR 0 TANKS AND WATER0 TANKS oo o NO CHANGE 0 EX. AMONIA 7ANK5 NO CHANGE Fl EX. 0O2 TANK NO CHANCE 0 EX. COOLIN6 EX. SUGAR TOWER NO NO CHANCE CHANCE EX. ELECT 7ANSF NO CHANGE CAN LINE ONE FLOOR FLAN SCALE, 1"-:0, RELOCATED EXIeTlNe CIE PALLETIZERe RELOCATED PALLET ROOLERS FUTURE CAN LINE TWO SEPARATE PERMIT Jw-wam lma= EXI5TIN6 PALLETIZER NO CHANCE EXISTINS PALLETIZER NO CHANGE RzViwG:rf{D OR CODE =PLIANCE APPROVED APR 2 5 2019 City ofTukwila N07F.5: BUILDING DIVISION CAN LINE ONE IS EX15TIN6 EQUIPMENT AND CONVEYORS THAT ARE 5EINe RELOCATED IN THE OVERALL PLANT PER THE OVERALL 51)11-DIN6 PLAN, THESE WERE PERMITEC, IN APPROX 2002 NO CHAN6E5 To E011-MIENT OR CONVEYORS, ONLY RELOCATION, ELECTRICAL 15 A SEPARATE PERMIT AIR. PIPING DY OWNER 5OLTIN6 OF RELOCATED EQUIPMENT SEE STRUCTURAL RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAR 27 2019 PERMIT CENTER Ir- z T— IrW :4— z 0 Lj (D�oo rD G)Lki LOW OR ELEVATED CONVEYOR i I SECTION IS 1119 HILTI KWIK TYPICAL ® EACH BOLT TZ PAIR OF LEGS (EMBED 311,") (E) CONCRETE SLAB (E) WEJ-IT ANCHOR CONVEYOR ANCHORAGE SECTION A-1.0 SCALE: �"-V-0" R30'-4" , 0.. P. (THICKNESS TO a MATCH (E) FEET) yz"0 HILTI KWIK BOLT-TZ (EMBED Z4 (TYP.). REMOVE (E) PLAN d r EXP. BOLTS RELOCATED SPIRAL CONVEYOR I 5 REMOVE (E) WEJ-IT ANCHORS ON OUTSIDE SO PLATE WILL FIT _ CONVEYOR LEG FLUSH PLAN d 11x3x LENGTH REQUIRED (E) CONCRETE SLAB SPIRAL CONVEYOR SECTION D-1.0 SCALE: %a'=V-O" 2- IT (E) CATWALK LEG TY4x4XD'-7" w/ 2-}¢"0 HILTI KWIK BOLT-TZ 7" �8ENACONCRETE (EMBED 3<") 3is T' CATWALK ANCHORAGE SECTION G-1.0 SCALE: D"=V-O" 2 (E) IZER CONNECTION & CONNECTOR SUPPORTING RELOCATED BEAM R%'yx4x0'-7" w/ �DEPALLETIZER ANCHOR PLATES 20 HILTI KWIK HOLT-TZ !, PER SUPPORT l BEAM (EMBED -4")-\ - - - _ CON CRE E SLAB I SLAB DEPALLETIZER ANCHORAGE SECTION B-1.0 SCALE: Ai"=V-O" REMOVE (E) r INSTALL 2-Ye"0 WEJ-IT ANCHOR P A'N KWIK BOLT-TZ (EMBED 34") I NOTE: SIX TOTAL LOCATIONS, 1W0 '& PER LONG SIDE, RELOCATED ONE EACIi END SHRINK WRAPPER -"X,x0'-B" (E) TUBE STEEL L.L.V. w/21"0 ( STRUCTURE BY HILTI KWIK BOLT-TZ - OTHERS (EMBED 3Ya") - - CONCRETE SLAB - li /lr SHRINK WRAPPER FEET SECTION C-1.0 SCALE:-%"=1'-O" IN) 2x6 MEMBER HILTI (E) 2.6 STIFFENER DETAIL f (E) TUBE STEEL LEG FOR RELOCATED PALLETIZER (E) CONCRETE SLAB PLAN --"--"- X ii ltlr PALETIZER ANCHORAGE SECTION E-1.0 SCALE: %`=V-O" H < 2' 0" SISTER MEMBERS 4t. SISTER ADD",RAL'2x6 TOGETHER !I 10dx_ NAILS � 77"o.c. (STAGGERED) DET f I = �-.._. - 1 MEMBERN)SHORT T,p7OF (E) HANGERIJ� CABLE C NVEYOUR SUPPORTT CONNECTION CABLE CONVEYOR SECTION F-1.0 SCALE: %"=1'-0" GENERAL NOTES CODE: INTERNATIONAL EXISTJNGINTEDING CODE, 2015 EDITION BUILDING RISK CATEGORY - H LIVE LOADS: UNIFORM LOADS LOCATION LIVE, LOAD REDUCIBLE SLAB ON GRADS ROOF (SEE SLAB ON GRADE NOTES) 25 PSF(SNOW) NO WIND UESICN INFORMATION: WIND LOADS MTHE MAIN WIND -FORCE. RESISTING SYSTEM ([vtWFRB)WAS llETERMIIYFA USING TIME ENVELOPE PROCEDURE. WIND SPEED (BASED ON TABLE 16093.1 OF IBC 2015): V„,,=110 MPH V, 85 MPH EXPOSURE "W X= 1.0 K.=I.00 SEISMIC DESIGN INFORMATION: SS=143.2% Sns=.955 5,=53.4% Sn�=534 EQUPIMIiN'C VALUES: .p=2.5 Rp=3.0 .On=2.0 Is=1.0 SITES ILCLASS -E SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY= D ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE: EXISTING ANCHORS SHALL BE TIGHTENED TO THE MANUI'ACTURER SPECIFIED TORQUE. VALUES GIVEN BELOW. 3/8 DIAMECE = 25 FT. LB3 I/2"DIAMETER 55 PT.CBS 518" DIAMETER - 95 FT. LHS NEW FXPANSIONBOLTS INTO CONCRETE SJIALL BEHILTI KWMBOLT TZ AS MANUFACTUREDBYHILTI,INC, SPECIAL INSPECTION AND INSTALLATION PER ICC-ES REPORT ESR-1917. ANCHORAGE SUBSTITUTIONS MUST BE APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER. ANCITGRABE SUBSTITUTION REQUESTS REQUIRE ADDITIONAL ENOINEERINO SERVICES. NEW ANCHOR INSTALLATIONS SHALL BE INSPECTED ON A PERIODIC BASIS BY THIRD PARTY, REPORTS PER SPECIAL INSPECTION SECTION OF THE GENERAL NOTES. STRUCTURAL STEEL: SLUNG')'URAL STEEL SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A36 D'y= 36,000 psi) OR ASTM A992 GRADE 50 (Fy=50,000 psi). APPLY PRIMER COATS PER ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS. WELDS NOT SPECIFIED SHALI, BE 3/16" CONTINUOUS FILLET MINIMUM. ALL WELDS TO BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH AWS PUT AND D1.8 AND BY WARM CERURBUT WELDERS. USF. FRESH E7 AD( LOW HYDROGEN ELECTRODES. SPECIAL IN'SPECTIONS� SPECIAL INSPECTIONS PER IBC SECTION 1705, A COPY OF ALL INSPECTION REPORTS AND TEST RESULTS FOR ALL REQUIRED INSPECTIONS SHALL BE SUBERTHED,iTED'TO THE BERTHED, DEPARTMENT, SIIIITLER CONSULTING ENGINEERS, THE OWNER AND THE ARCHITECT BY THE TESTINGAGENCYFORREVIEW. THE TESTING AGENCY SHALL BE AN INDEPENDENT TESTING AGENCY APPROVED BY THE BUILDING DEPARTMENT. THE FOLLOWING INSPECTIONS SHALL BF. PROVIDED AS A MINIMUM; ADDITIONAL INSPECTIONS AS REQUIRED BY HIE BUILDING DEPARTMENT SHALL ALSO BP.PERFORMED. JOB SITE VISITS BY THE ENGINEERING NOT CONSTITUTE AN OFFICIAL INSPECTION. SPECIAL CONDITIONS: 'THE DRAWINGS INDICATE THE STRUCTURE IN ITS FINAL CONDITION. DURING CONSTRUCTION THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ADEQUATE SHORING, BRACING, ANN, GUYING IN ACCORDANCE WTNI SOUND PRACTICE AND ALL NATIONAL, STATE, AND LOCAL CODES. CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE ALL TRADES AND VERIFY DIMENSIONS IN FIELD. 013TAIN ARCIIII'ECT'SAPPROVALPRIORTOALLFMLDCHANOES. SEEARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR ALL FLOOR AND WALL OPENING DIMENSIONS AND LOCATIONS, FLOOR AND WALL FINISHES ETC. MHCAANICAL FIRE PR01'ECTION AND ELECTRICAL 6YBTEMS ffSHALL BE THE, GENERAL CONTRACTOR ANDfOR SUR-CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE ALL NECESSARY ENGINEERING AND CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FOR THEIR SCOPE OF WORK. THIS SHALL INCLUDE THE DESIGN Or, THEIR SYSTEM AND ANYRBYH W AND MODIFICATIONS OF THE BASIC STRUCTURAL SYSTEM SHOWN ON THESE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AS WELL AS ANY ADDITIONAL STRUCTURAL SUPPORT REQUIRED BY THEIR SYSTEM. R�_vl � irr-o;z CODE CO LIANCE APPROVED APR 2 5 2919 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUK W ILA MAR 2 7 2019 Do"q1PERMIT CENTER 2* OR G Of o N uSd �N2 z 'ya 8 2s En F y E K U) UJ CO Z r. W LJJ>wQF �ww z W w W = N a coQ2Is z �ZQ �-- Z Q A w U) Q N 'S z Q Z N 1 o =W ar U) fn z 0 U LI.I U) ENGINEER: AH CHECKED BY: JH DATE: 3-20-19 JOB No.: 10-23.04 SHEET No.: e 1 OF3 ,--FACE OF PANEL (E) 34� P.C. PANEL (E)21-0 I 0, CONT. FTG. FACE OF 6. 20'-0" I220'-6" 40'-6" 40--0' 40'-0" 40'-0- q PANEL,1 FTGS & COLUMNS BN BEY NI I FACE OF N I— 177 --------------------------------- PANEL DIP 2. -01. D-JAPON DLi�-I 4 -j ISOLATION JOINT (TYP RELOCATED DE-PALLETIZER 35000# WEIGHT RELOCATED "PALE" F-0 F-� CATWALK r Lp "Ll _ -1.0 1-41 P�1- G L G-1.0 I In �TEY)P LAS ER I P.) - - - - -- - - - - - - SHRINKWRAPPER 15 0 0 W I 7 ---- RELOCATED PALLETIZER or 35000# WEIGHT RELOCATED — SPIRAL NIEIOR RELOCATED 3110# W, E -tG - - - II A-E D .0 A- 1.0 C-1.0 .1 �CAN LINE I F1 LIE '1�T, 41 IINIERIORI TILT AN PELS L"EsT�NIL—L] L i II t.' TING SMILING LINE -k- - —4; FXISTING'� PAD FTG T-I 7 T - ------ - - li (E) OFFICE —7 1 -1 .JAI-U- 20'-0" 321'-0" (FIELD VERIFY) 6 6 FTC. (E) 7Y� P.C. PANEL STAIRS (T (E) OFFICE FOUNDATION PLAN SCALE: 1"=20'-O" NOTES: 1) TOP Of FINISHED FLOOR AT ELEVATION 30.0' IS REFERENCE DATUM [I=. CODE =,-..-LIANCE APPROVED APR 2 5 2019 City Of Tukwila BUILDING D RECEIVED 2) CON -TRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL DIMENSION AND CONDITIONS IN FIELD CITY OF TUKWILA AND NOTIFY ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT OF ANY DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION W 27 2019 PERMIT CENTER 0 8j u 2.21 I loll LLJ 00 00 (5 LZL, 'u-) �2 < Z- W �e 0 W > —0� �— > 0 161 Iz, z W CCIL� i; Lu < U) Z' 0> < < z 0 'z U) < <Z Z D Z) 7- W 0 LL z p ) x ENGINEER: AH CHECKED BY: JH DATE: 3-20-19 JOB No.: 10-23.04 SHEET No. S2.0 2 OF 3 1 Q Y Q t32,._G° Q 11 13 15 1 - __ a BD'I 6" ._ 20' 0" 1 220' 6" I I NO I m & 40'-6' 40'-0" 40'-0" _ ( 40•_0» 40'_0.• a0'-0" 40'-0" 40'-6' o CEP �-'i'"—"t� W FTGS & COLUMNS BEYOND {26 -6 o.D S ._ .. (E) LEDGER TYP. _DS D.S. =o FACELOf 23 0"] 23'-,G"] 23 10 -- \. 23'-10"1 23'-10 ] [23 -O" _ ..._. _....._... — _.... _ 23 t0'] L(E -EXISTNG SKYLIGHT CANOPY {26'-6 (IMD).y(E) JOIST(E) JOIST (E) JOIST (E) JOIST (E) JOIST [24'-6"] 24'-6''P24'-6] P24._6"]P24'-6"]24FACE OF jo DRAGPANEL {2.6'-6 D S 24STS (TMP) {26 61. _ STRTS d.Y.._ __ - _._ (E) BEAM (E) BEAM ' 4x6 DF�2 LEDGE �4 6 D� LEDGER-- z5 [25' 0" m m m m (--- DRAGNST- EXISTING .LEDGER o � N m BEYOND '----- _ _-_ -_ (TYR.) BETWEEN 0 _ N EXISTING SHEATHING 25'-10"] 25'-10'] 25'-10'] 25'-10'] 25'-10'] P25'-10"] P25'-10'] [25'-10" 25' 10"j— `; o o (E) JOIST `(E) JOIST .,, .,.--(E).J 1ST (E) JOIST (E) JOIST (E) J IST E_ J IST --.—_ - - - - - - - - __ ..__._ CONV () i (Ej J IST EXISTING ®j CONVEYOR CANOPY °� F FXI,7I1111 �4 (1 OPLF WEIG T) o PURLINS ® CONDUIT RACEWAY -- -- _ _ --- _ 8'-O"oc (T_YP) m m (IOPLF WEIGHT) m X m m - `�-I I FACE OF ---- -_ ®j- (E)PILASTER - - w _ - -_w w 20'-8"] 21 8']20-10"] 27 6 ]20 1(S ] 2 -6"] .... —. �20--10 ] 21'-6 ] zs'_s zo-6 J kD. -, .l`-Ez�-2-3-- bi--Eze'--6 - _- Fla-�-}-_=rr' �'E2e--s]--a-L}oFgzTECG '-z-} - �}- a1-z-7 - -...------- O .. _ it EXISTING -14 122'-6" y ( CABLE II a'-0"o.c. (IYP.) r+ CONVEYOR EXISTING (10PLF WEI HT) F 10 ( 2x4 JOISTS EXISTING Y," j w c9 m ^ w sHEAI RING w _ w J w w ^ w w w _ m WAY ( 70PLF 11EIGHT) -i L IL m J m m u= w. w w w w w I i (�� II o JI m J — — — _ ROOF FRAMING PLAN "i -- - w - - - - -- - SCALE: i "=20'-0" � m � m O- — — _ — - _ _ —v _ — _— _ v -__.. _ __._.v v v _._._ v v _ _._ -�_ _ —v ._._. _ v _ ._ v - _ — ._ _ L�I NOTES: 1) ELEVATIONS SHOWN THUS: " INDICATE TOP OF FRAMING (BOTTOM OF PLYWOOD) ABOVEREFERENCE DATUM. II 2) ELEVATIONS SHOWN THUS: I'- ") TOP OF EXISTING PARAPET ELEVATION ABOVE REFERENCE DATUM TO BE VERIFIED BY CONTRACTOR, NOTIFY ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT 1 OF ANY DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO CONSTR G1 qN. 3) MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT & DUCTS AND/OR PIPES & SPRINKLER SYSTEMS SHALL NOT BE SUSPENDED FROM OR ! SUPPORTED BY THE 2x6 STIFFENERS WITHOUT PRIOR CONSENT OF THE ENGINEER. m m m m m 4) CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS & CONDITIONS IN RFVI m THE HELD AND NOTIFY ENGINEER &ARCHITECT OFANY CGDE CQ(;{�`LiANCE w^I w^ w^ W w^ __ DISCREPANCIES. APPROVED vl APR 25 2019 City of Tukwila A BUILDING DIVISION I I I 1 T ,—�—= I RECEIVED I CITY OF TUKWILA 20 -6" 20'-0" ( 20• 0" 2G'-O" ( 20'-0" 20•_0» 20' C' 20' 0" 20'-0" 20'-C" 2C'-0" 2O'-C" I '' 2919 -- -- r— -- 20-02 MAR 2 7 - - t321'-0"� PERMIT CENTER `p C'y 4rtpR IOy-'.'. �kor W g�ry z A x n a 0 c I I W F' 0W ~ co co W Z. >0zq� Q z � = d m¢O< z Qz t" z Q -J Q z LL N LL r 0 Z U) LU ENGINEER: AH CHECKED BY. JH DATE: 3-20-19 JOB No.: 10-23.04 SHEET No.: e 3 OF3